d263143 proposal - government of new york

PROPOSAL

Book 5 of 5

D263143

Submitted in accordance with the Highway Law and the Standard Specifications officially finalized and adopted on January 1, 2016 as posted on the Department's website.

US CUSTOMARY UNITS

Proposal Description:

Long Island Expressway Welcome Center (I-495) , Eastbound between Exits 51 & 52.

Letting of 4/27/2016 @ 10:30 A.M.

50 Wolf Road, Albany, NY 12232

Section 260800 - 1 Commissioning of Electrical Systems

SECTION 260800 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. General provisions and other electrical systems are specified in other Sections of Division 26.

B. Commissioning is an ongoing process and shall be performed throughout construction. Commissioning requires the participation of Division 26 to ensure that all systems are operating in a manner consistent with the Contract Documents. Division 26 shall be familiar with the commissioning plan issued by the CA as it applies to the work of Division 26 and shall execute all commissioning responsibilities assigned to them in the Contract Documents. The contractors should also review Specifications Section 019113 for additional information.

C. Commissioning shall conclude with the completion of all required deferred testing, training and system documentation as specified and required to demonstrate the proper operation of the electrical equipment and systems provided by this Division.

D. This Section covers electrical systems commissioning, as required to demonstrate that the equipment and systems of Division 26 are ready for safe and satisfactory operation, as defined by project documents. Commissioning shall include, but shall not be limited to, identification, cleaning, documentation, preparation of maintenance and operation manuals, Owner training, preparation of record drawings, lubrication, start-up, check-out, and testing and adjusting of systems.

E. This section does not alter the commissioning requirements indicated in Division 26 of the building specifications. This section is to help define/supplement the requirements where applicable.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. The electrical contractor and the fire alarm contractor shall identify an electrical and fire alarm commissioning supervisor. The commissioning supervisors should have a minimum of ten years experience in electrical contracting. The electrical commissioning supervisors shall become familiar with the design intent, the requirements of the commissioning process as defined in this Section. Electrical systems and Fire Alarm commissioning shall be accomplished under supervision of the Commissioning Agent (CA). The electrical commissioning supervisor shall assist the CA in coordinating and executing the required commissioning activities.

1.3 ELECTRICAL COMMISSIONING RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Include and itemize the cost of commissioning in the contract price with an estimated breakdown of hours for meeting and functional testing requirements.

D263143 1123


B. The electrical commissioning supervisor shall be responsible for scheduling, supervising, and coordinating the startup, testing and commissioning activities as specified herein with the CA. Specific requirements of the electrical contractor and associated subcontractors are identified in this Section and in other Sections of this Division.

C. The CA shall conduct independent verification of installation, pre-functional, start-up and functional testing as per section 019113.

D. Electrical commissioning shall take place in three phases. Commissioning requirements for each phase are as follows:

1. Construction Phase

a. Contractor shall attend a Commissioning Scoping meeting and additional commissioning meetings as required throughout the commissioning process. These commissioning meetings will be monthly during early construction and increase in frequency to weekly during the start-up, prefunctional and functional testing phases. Contractor shall assure that all subcontractors who have commissioning responsibilities attend the Commissioning Scoping meeting and other commissioning meetings, as appropriate, during the construction process.

b. Contractor shall report in writing to the CA at least as often as commissioning meetings are scheduled concerning the status of his activities as they affect the commissioning process, the status of each discrepancy identified, the prefunctional and functional testing process, explanations of any disagreements with the identified deficiencies, and proposed resolution and schedule.

c. Contractor shall provide the CA with normal cut sheets and shop drawing submittals of equipment that is to be commissioned.

d. Contractor shall provide documentation to the CA for development of pre-functional and functional performance testing procedures, prior to normal O&M manual submittals. This documentation shall include detailed manufacturer installation, start-up, operating, troubleshooting and maintenance procedures; full details of any owner-contracted tests; fan and pump curves; full factory testing reports, if any; and full warranty information, including all responsibilities of the Owner to keep the warranty in force clearly identified. In addition, the installation, start-up and checkout materials that are actually shipped inside the equipment and the actual field checkout sheet forms to be used by the factory or field technicians shall be submitted to the Commissioning Agent. The Commissioning Agent may request further documentation necessary for the development of functional performance testing and the commissioning process. This data request may be made prior to normal submittals.

e. Contractor shall develop and submit to CA, for review prior to equipment or system startup, a complete startup and initial checkout plan using manufacturer’s start-up procedures. The commissioning agent shall conduct their own pre-functional testing check in parallel with the contractors.

D2631431124


f. Contractor shall review the commissioning agent’s pre-functional checksheets and sign-off on the appropriate areas when contractor and sub-contractors are complete. The prefunctional test sheets will be developed by the commissioning agent. Only when each portion of the pre-functional test sheet is signed off will the contractor be able to move onto the next phase of the start-up and check-out. Detailed in Specification Section 019113, 2.1 “Overview Sign-Off Sheet”

g. Contractor shall provide a copy of the O&M manuals and submittals of commissioned equipment, through normal channels, to the CA for review.

h. Contractor shall assist in clarifying the proposed operation and control of commissioned equipment in areas where the specifications, control drawings or equipment documentation is not sufficient for writing detailed testing procedures.

i. CA shall prepare the specific functional test procedures as specified herein. The contractors shall review the CA’s proposed functional performance test procedures to ensure feasibility, safety and equipment protection and provide necessary written alarm limits to be used during the tests.

j. Commissioning agent shall prepare a preliminary schedule for Division 26 commissioning activities, to include, equipment start-up, for use by the CA and shall update the schedule as appropriate. The contractor shall notify the commissioning agent who shall update the commissioning activities and notify any delays in the progress meetings. Contractor shall notify the CA during the commissioning meetings when commissioning activities not yet performed or not yet scheduled will delay construction.

k. Electrical equipment start-up shall not be initiated until the complete sign-off of the pre-functional check-sheets as developed by the commissioning agent as specified in other Sections of Division 26.

l. Contractor shall provide startup testing for all electrical equipment, including the power supply for the building automation control system and shall execute the fire alarm-related portions for all commissioned equipment during the startup and initial checkout process. The commissioning agent shall conduct an independent start-up once the contractor is complete with their requirements. The commissioning agent shall conduct an independent prefunctional check once the contractor states that they are complete with the system installation.

m. Contractor shall perform and clearly document all completed startup and system operational checkout procedures as part of their existing contract, providing a copy to the CA.

n. Contractor shall correct current A/E punch list and CA deficiency items before functional performance testing can begin. The contractor’s required testing and start-up shall be completed with discrepancies and problems remedied before functional testing of the respective systems.

D263143 1125


o. The commissioning agent shall generate the functional testing procedure and record to the electrical contractor. The electrical contractor shall review and provide support to the functional testing process. Contractor shall operate chillers, pumps, etc and systems in accordance with the CA requirements, open and closes disconnects and switch normal and emergency power requirements as directed by the commissioning agent and the functional testing procedures.

p. Contractor shall report in writing to the CA at least as often as commissioning meetings are being scheduled concerning the status of each outstanding discrepancy identified during commissioning, prefunctional and functional performance testing. Report shall include description of the identified discrepancy, explanations of any disagreements, and proposals and schedule for correction of the discrepancy.

2. Acceptance Phase. Contractor shall assist and cooperate with the CA in the commissioning process by:

a. Putting all equipment and systems into operation and continuing the operation during each working day of the test and balance and commissioning effort, as required.

b. Commissioning agent shall witness independent verification of megger and insulation testing. CA shall also test each of the receptacles and lighting controls systems in accordance with the specifications. This independent testing does not relieve the contractor from their responsibilities as set forth in the specification. The electrical contractor shall provide representative to assist the CA on conducting checks of the electrical components.

c. Providing skilled technicians to execute starting and operation of equipment.

d. The commissioning agent shall witness an independent verification of the insulation resistance testing. This does not relieve the contractor from their responsibilities in regards to the specifications. The electrical contractor shall provide skilled technicians to aid in this testing requirement.

e. The commissioning agent will conduct functional performance testing. The contractor may be required to have a skilled technician present during functional testing although it is suggested that one be available to make adjustments or assist in problem-solving.

f. The commissioning will require full and part load performance verifications as well as seasonal and simulated testing requirements. The contractor shall be prepared to operate different components of various systems (example, generator load testing) during the functional testing.

g. Correct deficiencies (differences between specified and observed performance) as interpreted by the CA and A/E.

D2631431126


h. Prepare O&M manuals according to the Contractor Documents, including clarifying and updating the original sequence of operation to as-built conditions.

i. Maintain on site redline as built drawings and produce final “As-built” drawings for all project drawings and contractor-generated coordination drawings. List and clearly identify on the as-built drawings the locations of all ATS and sensor installations that are not equipment mounted.

j. Provide specified training of the Owner’s operating personnel in accordance with the commissioning agent’s overview and outline.

k. Coordinate with equipment manufacturers to determine specific requirements to maintain the validity of the warranty.

l. The commissioning agent will verify emergency power and automatic transfer switch devices. This shall include blackout testing as well as light level verification and emergency power verification testing. This does not relieve the contractor from their required testing requirements as directed in the specification. The contractor shall provide man-power to aid in the system testing and verification requirements.

m. Provide updated wiring diagrams for all systems involved in the commissioning process.

3. Warranty Period. During the warranty period, the contractor shall:

a. Be available during seasonal or deferred functional performance testing conducted by the CA, according to the specifications.

b. Correct deficiencies and make necessary adjustments to O&M manuals and as-built drawings for applicable issues identified in any seasonal testing.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEMS TO BE COMMISSIONED

A. The following are systems to be commissioned.

1. Normal and emergency power systems

2. Automatic transfer systems

3. Digital lighting controls and luminaire high end trim.

4. Fire alarm (witness only)

5. Security systems (witness only)

6. Fire protection systems (witness only)

D263143 1127


2.2 TEST EQUIPMENT

A. All standard testing equipment required to the electrical portion startup, initial checkout shall be provided by the contractor responsible for the equipment or system being tested. This includes fire alarm and controls verification.

B. The commissioning agent shall perform their own system verification and performance check-out. The commissioning agent shall provide their own calibrated equipment as required for this testing.

C. Special equipment, tools and instruments as specified in the general specifications (only available from vendor or specific to a piece of equipment) required for the functional testing of that equipment, according to the requirements of the contract documents and the functional test procedures shall be provided to the CA by the installing contractor and shall become the property of the Owner at project completion.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SUBMITALS

A. Division 26 shall provide submittal documentation relative to commissioning to the CA as requested by the CA.

3.2 STARTUP AND PREFUNCTIONAL TESTING

A. The electrical contractor and associated subcontractors shall be responsible for the installation of complete systems and sub-systems, fully functional, meeting the design objectives of the Contract Documents. Contractor shall follow the approved start-up, checkout procedures. The commissioning procedures and functional testing do not relieve or lessen this responsibility or shift that responsibility partially to the commissioning agent or Owner.

B. Prefunctional testing shall be required for each piece of equipment to ensure that the equipment and systems are properly installed and ready for operation, so that functional performance testing to may proceed without delays. Sampling strategies shall not be used for prefunctional testing. The prefunctional testing for all equipment and subsystems of a given system shall be successfully completed and documented prior to functional performance testing of the system. The commissioning agent shall conduct an independent prefunctional verification. Only when the prefunctional checkout is approved and signed by all parties responsible, shall functional testing commence.

C. The following procedures shall apply to all equipment and systems to be commissioned.

1. Start-up and Initial Checkout Plan. The Commissioning Agent shall develop the detailed start-up and prefunctional testing plans for all equipment. The primary role of the CA in this process shall be to review the installation for construction completeness and ensure that all components have been installed as per the design documents. Only when pre-functional testing is complete and signed off by all contractors, shall the equipment be start-up by the contractor. Equipment and systems to be commissioned are identified in this Section Part 2. The prefunctional testing checkout requirements shall be provided to the contractors for their review and use.

2. The start-up and initial checkout plan shall consist of the following as a minimum:

D2631431128


a. The manufacturer’s standard written start-up and checkout procedures copied from the installation manuals and manufacturer’s normally used field checkout sheets. The plan shall include checklists and procedures with specific boxes or lines for recording and documenting the checking and inspections of each procedure and a summary statement with a signature block at the end of the plan.

b. First-run checklist for equipment, to include:

3. Equipment properly set.

4. Wiring and conduits installed as per documents

5. Initial checkout and testing of electrical settings

6. Checkout of lighting and power requirements

7. Electrical equipment installation and code requirements

8. Wiring properly connected.

9. Electrical overload relays appropriate for load.

10. Electrical accessories properly installed and adjusted.

11. Controls, safeties, and time switches properly set

12. Verification of emergency power systems and components

13. Measurements of ampere draw of electric motors and comparison with nameplate rating and with overload heater ratings.

14. Monitoring of temperature build-up in motors and bearings.

15. The Commissioning Agent shall determine which trade is responsible for executing and documenting each of the line item tasks and note that trade on the form. Each form may have more than one trade responsible for its execution.

16. The Contractor shall submit the startup reports to the CA for review.

D. The CA shall review and approve the procedures and the format for documenting them, noting any procedures that need to be added.

E. Two weeks prior to startup, the contractor shall schedule startup and checkout with the Owner and CA. The execution of the startup and checkout shall be directed and performed by the contractor, in accordance with manufacturer’s published procedures and with the approved procedures. The CA shall be present for the contractor’s required startup and checkout of all systems and equipment to be commissioned.

F. Sensor Calibration. Calibration of all sensors shall be included as part of the prefunctional testing and listed on the appropriate test checklists and reports, according to the specified procedures and accuracy for the devices and systems being tested.

G. All contractor responsible start-up, checkout forms shall be completed and submitted to the CA for review. The commissioning agent shall conduct an independent start-up and checkout plan following the prefunctional testing format.

D263143 1129


3.3 FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTS

A. Functional Performance Verification (FPV) is the dynamic testing of systems (rather than just individual components) under full, part and seasonal requirements. Systems are tested under various loads and control sequences, such as low cooling and heating loads, component failures, unoccupied modes, fire alarm, etc. The systems are run through all the control sequences of operation and components are verified to be responding as the design intent and documents. Functional performance verification shall include; testing all sequences of operations, verification of system capacity, generating simulated signals to simulate sensor values, conducting simulated conditions to tests all loads and verify system performance during all conditions of operation and verifying design intent. In addition, each system shall be tested through all modes of operation (seasonal, occupied, unoccupied, warm-up, cool-down, part and full load). Proper responses such as power failures, freeze conditions, low-oil pressures, equipment failures, etc. shall also be tested. The commissioning authority develops the functional test sheets and procedures in sequential written form, coordinates the testing, conducts the testing and documents the testing. Each contractor is required is supply personnel to assist during the functional performance testing where applicable.

B. No system, equipment or component thereof shall be tested until the contractor and the MC has certified, in writing, that the system, equipment and / or components are complete, have been tested, adjusted and balanced and are ready for validating and performance testing. Functional Performance Verification is scheduled by the commissioning agent after the pre-functional testing requirements are complete and signed-off by the MC and the CA. Functional Performance Verification will not be conducted until a written notice of completion by the MC confirming that the system is ready for FPV. The air balancing and water balancing must be complete and the controls must be debugged prior to the performance verification.

C. Functional testing shall be conducted by the commissioning agent. Functional testing may not proceed until the systems have been properly installed, started-up and all deficiencies have been corrected.

D. Functional testing is intended to begin upon completion of a system. Functional testing may proceed prior to the completion of systems or sub-systems at the discretion of the CA and OR. Beginning system testing before full completion shall not relieve the Contractor from fully completing the system, including all prefunctional checklists.

1. Functional testing of the Lighting Controls system shall include verifying correct operation per the Lighting Controls Matrix included on the drawings.

E. The contractor shall provide personnel to operate the systems while functional performance testing is commencing. This shall include but not be limited to; starting and stopping of systems, opening and closing valves to create false loads on the system and allowing the commissioning agent to manipulate the building automation systems to modulate the system requirements.

F. The contractor shall review the commissioning functional performance testing procedure supplied by the commissioning agent. After functional testing commences, the contractor and the commissioning agent shall sign the functional test record and provide the owner and the MC a copy to review. All deficiencies either corrected in the field or outstanding shall be documented on the functional test forms for review by all parties.

D2631431130


G. All Functional Testing must be completed and approved by the commissioning agent and the owner before the project will be considered substantially complete.

3.4 DEFERRED TESTING

A. Deferred Testing. The contractor shall be available to assist in seasonal testing, tests delayed until weather or other conditions building construction is completed, required building occupancy or loading, or other conditions are suitable for the demonstration of equipment or system’s performance, as specified. These deferred tests shall be conducted in the same manner as the seasonal tests as soon as possible. Deferred testing shall be executed, documented and deficiencies corrected as specified herein for functional performance testing. Any adjustments or corrections to the O&M manuals and “As built” documents required by the results of the testing shall be made before the seasonal testing process is considered complete.

3.5 TESTING DOCUMENTATION, NON-CONFORMANCE AND APPROVALS

A. The commissioning agent shall clearly list any outstanding items of the initial start-up and prefunctional procedures that were not completed successfully, at the bottom of the testing form or on an attached sheet. The testing form and any outstanding deficiencies shall be provided to the OR / Owner within two days of test completion. The CA shall review the contractor’s startup testing reports and shall submit either a non-compliance report or an approval form to the contractor. The CA shall work with the contractor and others as necessary, to correct and retest deficiencies or uncompleted items. The contractor shall correct all areas that are deficient or incomplete in the checklists and tests in a timely manner, and shall notify the CA as soon as outstanding items have been corrected and resubmit an updated start-up report with a Statement of Correction on the original non-compliance report. When all requirements are satisfactorily completed, the CA shall recommend approval of the startup and prefunctional testing of each system and schedule the functional testing of the equipment or system.

B. As functional performance testing progresses and a deficiency is identified, the CA shall discuss the issue with the executing contractor and the commissioning team.

1. When there is no dispute of the deficiency and the contractor accepts responsibility for correcting it, the CA shall document the deficiency and the contractor’s response and intentions and the testing shall proceed, if possible. Corrections of minor deficiencies identified may be made by the contractor during the functional performance testing, at the discretion of the CA. Every effort shall be made or expedite the testing process and minimize unnecessary delays, while not compromising the integrity of the commissioning effort.

2. When the identified deficiency is corrected, the contractor shall sign the statement of correction at the bottom of the non-compliance form, certifying that the equipment is ready to be retested, and return the form to the CA. The CA shall schedule the retest of the equipment or system involved.

D263143 1131


3. If there is a dispute about an identified deficiency, the CA shall document the deficiency and the contractor’s response, and provide a copy to the contractor. Every attempt shall be made to resolve the dispute at the lowest management level possible. When the dispute resolution has been decided, the appropriate party corrects the deficiency, signs the statement of correction on the non-compliance form and returns the form to the CA. The CA shall schedule the retest of the equipment or system involved. Final interpretive authority shall be the A/E. Final acceptance authority shall be the Owner.

C. During the functional performance testing of multiple units of similar equipment, the CA will test all of the installed equipment and components identified. If, under such a testing procedure, three or more, identical pieces of equipment (size along does not constitute difference) fail to perform to the requirements of the Contract Documents (mechanically or substantively) due to manufacturing defects not allowing it to meet its submitted performance spec, all identical units may be considered unacceptable by the CA. In such case, the contractor shall provide the CA with the following:

1. Within one week of notification from the CA, the contractor or manufacturer’s representative shall examine all other identical units making a record of the findings. The findings shall be provided to the CA within two weeks of the original notice.

2. Within two weeks of the original notification, the contractor shall provide the CA and the A/E a signed and dated, written explanation of the problem, cause of failures, etc. and proposed solution, including full equipment submittals for corrective or replacement equipment, if appropriate. The proposed solution shall not be for less than the specification requirements of the original installation.

3. When approved, two examples of the proposed solution shall be installed by the contractor and the CA shall schedule and conduct functional testing of the proposed solution. Upon completion of the functional testing of the proposed solution, the CA shall recommend the acceptance or disapproval of the proposed solution to the Owner.

4. Upon acceptance of the proposed solution by the Owner, the contractor shall replace or repair all identical items, at their expenses and extend the warranty accordingly, if the original equipment warranty had begun. The replacement/repair work shall proceed with reasonable speed beginning within one week of approval of the proposed solution.

D. Cost of Retesting

1. The cost for CA and/or Owner personnel to conduct the retesting of a functional performance testing requirements necessitated because a specific prefunctional or startup test item, reported to have been successfully completed, but found to be incomplete or faulty, shall be the responsibility of the contractor.

2. For a deficiency identified during the functional testing, not related to any prefunctional checklist or start-up fault, the CA and Owner shall direct the retesting of the equipment once at “no charge” for their time. However, all costs for any subsequent retesting shall be the responsibility of the contractor.

3. Items left incomplete, which later cause deficiencies or delays during functional testing may result in backcharges to the responsible party.

D2631431132


3.6 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE (O&M) MANUALS

A. The following O&M manual requirements do not replace O&M manual documentation requirements elsewhere in these specifications.

B. Division 26 shall compile and prepare documentation for all equipment and systems covered in Division 26 and deliver this documentation to the MC for inclusion in the O&M manuals, according to this section and Section 01730, prior to the training of owner personnel.

C. The CA shall receive a copy of the O&M manuals for review.

D. Operation and maintenance documentation, in hardback 3-ring loose-leaf binders except full size drawings and diskettes, shall cover all electrical systems. Documentation shall include the following: operations and maintenance documentation directory; emergency information; operating manual; emergency information; maintenance manual; test reports; and construction documents.

E. The operation and maintenance documentation package shall be submitted as one comprehensive package to the Owner and CA before systems start-up and commissioning, and shall be updated, revised and completed during, and at completion of, commissioning.

3.7 TRAINING OF OWNER PERSONNEL

A. The electrical commissioning supervisor shall be responsible for training coordination and scheduling of required training and for ensuring that all required training is completed. The CA shall oversee the content and adequacy of the training of Owner personnel.

B. Prepare and submit a syllabus describing an overview of the program, describing how the program will be conducted, when and where meetings are to be held, names and company affiliations of lecturers, description of contents and outline for each lecture, and recommended reference material and outside reading. Obtain direction from the Owner on which operating personnel shall be instructed in each system. Proposed training schedules, materials, and lesson plans shall be submitted to the CA for review of the content and adequacy of the training of Owner personnel for commissioned equipment or systems.

C. Electrical Contractor – the electrical contractor shall have the following training responsibilities:

1. Provide the CA with training plan one week before the planned training.

2. Provide designated Owner personnel with comprehensive orientation and training in the understanding of the systems and the operation and maintenance of each piece of equipment.

3. Training shall normally start with classroom sessions followed by hands-on training on each piece of equipment.

4. During any demonstration, should the system fail to perform in accordance with the requirements of the O&M manual or sequence of operations, the system will be repaired or adjusted as necessary and the demonstration repeated.

D263143 1133


5. The appropriate trade or manufacturer’s representative shall provide the instructions on each major piece of equipment. This person may be the startup technician for the piece of equipment, the installing contractor or manufacturer’s representative. Practical building operating expertise as well as in-depth knowledge of all modes of operation of the specific piece of equipment is required. More than one party may be required to execute the training.

6. The controls contractor shall attend sessions other than the controls training, for each type of equipment that interacts with the BAS, to discuss the interaction of the BAS as it relates to the equipment being discussed.

7. The training sessions shall follow the outline in the Table of Contents of the operation and maintenance manual and illustrate whenever possible the use of the O&M manuals for reference.

3.8 WRITTEN WORK PRODUCTS

A. Written work products of Contractors will consist of the startup and initial checkout plan

and the filled out startup, checkout and prefunctional and functional checklists.

END OF SECTION 260800

D2631431134

Section 260923 - 1 Lighting Control Devices

SECTION 260923 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following lighting control devices:

1. Time switches. 2. Indoor occupancy sensors. 3. Lighting contactors.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices" for wall-box dimmers, wall-switch occupancy sensors, and manual light switches.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. LED: Light-emitting diode.

B. PIR: Passive infrared.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Show installation details for occupancy and light-level sensors.

1. Interconnection diagrams showing field-installed wiring.

C. Field quality-control test reports.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

D263143 1135


1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling-mounted devices with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, smoke detectors, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TIME SWITCHES

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:

1. Intermatic, Inc. 2. Grasslin Controls Corporation; a GE Industrial Systems Company. 3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. 4. TORK.

B. 24 hour, 7-day astronomical programmable timer unit with control for three individual 120 volt lighting circuits via a lighting contactor.

2.2 INDOOR OCCUPANCY SENSORS


1. Sensor Switch, Inc. 2. TORK. 3. Watt Stopper (The).

2.3 LIGHTING CONTACTORS


1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Products. 2. Grasslin Controls Corporation; a GE Industrial Systems Company. 3. Square D; Schneider Electric. 4.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SENSOR INSTALLATION

A. Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90 percent coverage of areas indicated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions.

D2631431136


3.2 CONTACTOR INSTALLATION

A. Mount electrically held lighting contactors with elastomeric isolator pads, to eliminate structure- borne vibration, unless contactors are installed in an enclosure with factory-installed vibration isolators.

3.3 WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Wiring Method: Comply with Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." Minimum conduit size shall be ¾ inch.

B. Wiring within Enclosures: Comply with NECA 1. Separate power-limited and non-power-

limited conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in

junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify components, p o w e r , and control wiring according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Identify controlled circuits in lighting contactors. 2. Identify circuits or luminaries controlled by photoelectric and occupancy sensors at each

sensor.

B. Label time switches and contactors with a unique designation.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, adjust and test for compliance with requirements.

2. Operational Test: Verify operation of each lighting control device, and adjust time delays.

B. Lighting control devices that fail tests and inspections are defective work.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting sensors to suit occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.


D263143 1137

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

D2631431138

Section 262200 - 1 Low – Voltage Transformers

SECTION 262200 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following types of dry-type transformers rated 600 V and less, with capacities up to 1000 kVA:

1. Distribution transformers.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated nameplate data, capacities, weights, dimensions, minimum clearances, installed devices and features, and performance for each type and size of transformer indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Submittals Format: All submittals shall be in PDF format for ease in sharing electronically.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

B. Efficiency Data as follows:

1. No load and full load losses per NEMA ST20 2. Linear load Efficiency data @ 1/6 load 3. Linear load Efficiency data @ 1/4, 1/2, 3/4 & full load 4. Linear Load Efficiency @ 35% loading tested per NEMA TP-2 5. Efficiency under K7 load profile at 15%, 25%, 50%, 75%, 100% of nameplate rating.

C. Source quality-control test reports.

D. Field quality-control test reports.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For transformers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D263143 1139


1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain each transformer type through one source from a single manufacturer.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

E. Comply with IEEE C57.12.91, "Test Code for Dry-Type Distribution and Power Transformers."

F. All low voltage transformers shall be high energy efficiency meeting U.S. Department of Energy proposed Candidate Standard Level (CSL) 3 efficiency with extremely low no load losses.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat according to manufacturer's written instructions within the enclosure of each ventilated-type unit, throughout periods during which equipment is not energized and when transformer is not in a space that is continuously under normal control of temperature and humidity.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of wall-mounting and structure-hanging supports with actual transformer provided.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Square D 2. Eaton Electrical Inc. 3. General Electric

2.2 GENERAL TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS

A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, air-cooled units for 60-Hz service.

B. Cores: Grain-oriented, non-aging silicon steel.

C. Coils: Continuous windings without splices except for taps.

1. Internal Coil Connections: Brazed or pressure type. 2. Coil Material: Copper.

2.3 DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS

A. Comply with NEMA ST 20, and list and label as complying with UL 1561.

D2631431140


B. Meet U.S. Department of Energy Candidate Standard Level (CSL-3) efficiency with extremely low no load losses.

C. Low-loss transformers shall be designed to an efficiency standard higher than NEMA TP-1.

D. Cores: One leg per phase.

E. Enclosure: Totally enclosed, nonventilated, NEMA 250, Type 2.

1. Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin compound, sealing out moisture and air.

F. Transformer Enclosure Finish: Comply with NEMA 250.

1. Finish Color: ANSI 49 gray.

G. Taps for Transformers 25 kVA and Larger: Two 2.5 percent taps above and two 2.5 percent taps below normal full capacity.

H. Insulation Class: 220 deg C, UL-component-recognized insulation system with a maximum of 150 deg C rise above 40 deg C ambient temperature.

I. Energy Efficiency for Transformers Rated 15 kVA and Larger:

1. Complying with NEMA TP 1, Class 1 efficiency levels. 2. Tested according to NEMA TP 2. 3. Contribute to LEED Energy & Atmosphere Credit 1 (Optimize Energy Performance).

J. Electrostatic Shielding: Each winding shall have an independent, single, full-width copper electrostatic shield arranged to minimize interwinding capacitance.

1. Arrange coil leads and terminal strips to minimize capacitive coupling between input and output terminals.

2. Include special terminal for grounding the shield. 3. Shield Effectiveness:

a. Capacitance between Primary and Secondary Windings: Not to exceed 33 picofarads over a frequency range of 20 Hz to 1 MHz.

b. Common-Mode Noise Attenuation: Minimum of minus 120 dBA at 0.5 to 1.5 kHz; minimum of minus 65 dBA at 1.5 to 100 kHz.

c. Normal-Mode Noise Attenuation: Minimum of minus 52 dBA at 1.5 to 10 kHz.

K. Low-Sound-Level Requirements: Minimum of 3 dBA less than NEMA ST 20 standard sound levels when factory tested according to IEEE C57.12.91.

2.4 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES

A. Nameplates: Engraved, laminated-plastic or metal nameplate for each distribution transformer, mounted with corrosion-resistant screws. Nameplates and label products are specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Test and inspect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.91.

B. Factory Sound-Level Tests: Conduct sound-level tests on equipment for this Project.

D263143 1141


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions for compliance with enclosure- and ambient-temperature requirements for each transformer.

B. Verify that field measurements are as needed to maintain working clearances required by NFPA 70 and manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and concrete bases for suitable mounting conditions where transformers will be installed.

D. Verify that ground connections are in place and requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems" have been met. Maximum ground resistance shall be 5 ohms at location of transformer.

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Construct concrete bases and anchor floor-mounting transformers according to manufacturer's written instructions and requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

B. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

C. Remove and replace units that do not pass tests or inspections and retest as specified above.

D. Infrared Scanning: Two months after Substantial Completion, perform an infrared scan of transformer connections.

1. Use an infrared-scanning device designed to measure temperature or detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide documentation of device calibration.

2. Perform 2 follow-up infrared scans of transformers, one at 4 months and the other at 11 months after Substantial Completion.

3. Prepare a certified report identifying transformer checked and describing results of scanning. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and scanning observations after remedial action.

E. Test Labeling: On completion of satisfactory testing of each unit, attach a dated and signed "Satisfactory Test" label to tested component.

D2631431142


3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Record transformer secondary voltage at each unit for at least 48 hours of typical occupancy period. Adjust transformer taps to provide optimum voltage conditions at secondary terminals. Optimum is defined as not exceeding nameplate voltage plus 10 percent and not being lower than nameplate voltage minus 3 percent at maximum load conditions. Submit recording and tap settings as test results.

B. Output Settings Report: Prepare a written report recording output voltages and tap settings.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning.


D263143 1143


D2631431144

Section 262416 - 1 Panelboards

SECTION 262416 PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Distribution panelboards. 2. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. SVR: Suppressed voltage rating.

B. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.


A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent protective device, transient voltage suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings.

2. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. 4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices. 5. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices. 6. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices and auxiliary components. 7. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 8. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent

protective device included in panelboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.



A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

B. Field Quality-Control Reports:

1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements.

D263143 1145


3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with requirements.

C. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards. Submit final versions after load balancing.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices.

2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device that allows adjustments.

1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Keys: Two spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock. 2. Circuit Breakers: Two spares for each panelboard.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for panelboards including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

E. Comply with NEMA PB 1.

F. Comply with NFPA 70.


A. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards; install temporary electric heating (250 W per panelboard) to prevent condensation.

B. Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NEMA PB 1.

D2631431146


1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations:

1. Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above panelboards is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:

a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 23 deg F to plus 104 deg F. b. Altitude: Not exceeding 3000 feet.

B. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows:

1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified.

C. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Owner's written permission. 3. Comply with NFPA 70E.

1.11 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

1.12 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS

A. Enclosures: Flush- and surface-mounted cabinets.

1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.

a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.

D263143 1147


b. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4. c. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive

Liquids: NEMA 250, Type 12.

2. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box.

3. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged trim cover.

4. Skirt for Surface-Mounted Panelboards: Same gage and finish as panelboard front with flanges for attachment to panelboard, wall, and ceiling or floor.

5. Gutter Extension and Barrier: Same gage and finish as panelboard enclosure; integral with enclosure body. Arrange to isolate individual panel sections.

6. Finishes:

a. Panels and Trim: Steel and galvanized steel, factory finished immediately after cleaning and pretreating with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat.

b. Back Boxes: Galvanized steel.

7. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in metal frame with transparent protective cover.

B. Incoming Mains Location: Top and bottom.

C. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses:

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. 2. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding

conductors; bonded to box.

D. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. 2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type. 3. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Mechanical type. 4. Feed-Through Lugs: Mechanical type, copper for use with conductor material. Locate at

opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device. 5. Subfeed (Double) Lugs: Mechanical type copper for use with conductor material.

Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device. 6. Gutter-Tap Lugs: Mechanical type copper for use with conductor material. Locate at

same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device.

E. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards or load centers with one or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.

F. Future Devices: Complete length bus bars, mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices.

G. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals.

D2631431148


2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Surge Suppression: Factory installed as an integral part of indicated panelboards, complying with UL 1449 SPD Type 1 latest version.

B. SPD shall not utilize circuit breaker spaces for connection to bus.

2.3 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type.

C. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

1. For doors more than 36 inches high, provide two latches, keyed alike.

D. Mains: Circuit breaker or Main lugs.

E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller: Bolt-on circuit breakers.

F. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for circuit breaker frame 100 A to 400A shall incorporate adjustable magnetic trip.

G. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for circuit breaker frame 400 A and larger shall incorporate electronic adjustable trip units with functions as required. Units shall have cause of trip indicator targets. Trip units that utilize battery backup, shall have field replaceable batteries. Provide 20% spare batteries as well as full function secondary injection portable test set.

H. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A: Bolt-on circuit breakers; plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device requires mechanical release for removal.

2.4 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS



B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.

C. Mains: Circuit breaker or lugs only.

D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units.

D263143 1149


E. Doors: Concealed hinges door in door; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

2.5 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES



B. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with series-connected rating interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents.

1. Circuit breakers 400A and larger shall have electronic trip units per PSU Standrds. 2. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level

overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A to 400A.

3. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.

4. Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing; field-replaceable rating plug or field-replicable electronic trip; and the following field-adjustable settings:

a. Instantaneous trip. b. Long- and short-time pickup levels. c. Long- and short-time time adjustments. d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.

5. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.

2.6 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES

A. Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent protective device test, inspection, maintenance, and operation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NEMA PB 1.1.

B. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or have been subjected to water saturation.

C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1.

D2631431150


B. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from panelboards.

C. Mount top of trim 90 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated. Do not exceed NEC maximum mounting height for operating handle of branch circuit breaker.

D. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.

E. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.

1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges.

F. Provide 20 percent spare circuit breakers in each panelboard. Spares to be based on branch circuit breaker spaces used. Spare circuit breaker rating to be minimum 20 Amp.

G. Install filler plates in unused spaces.

H. Stub 1 - 1-inch empty conduit from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling space in the future for every 3 spare poles of branch circuit breaker mounting space.

I. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties after completing load balancing.

J. Comply with NECA 1.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads; incorporate Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.

C. The Electrical Contractor shall coordinate final room names and numbering with PSU OPP Engineering Services prior to submitting panelboard schedules for approval.

D. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

E. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

F. Conductor Labels: Label conductors landed at each breaker 100A/3P and above with the following:

1. Circuit breaker position identification. 2. Phase information (“A”, “B”, or “C”). 3. Labels shall be readably visible once the deadfront cover is removed. Install so it is

wrapped around the cable and adhered to itself to prevent cable heating and cooling does not cause the label to fall off.

4. Example: “CB#1 – “A”, “CB#1 – “B”, CB#1 – “C”, etc.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

D263143 1151


B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.

D. Tests and Inspections:


2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:

a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each panelboard. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each panelboard 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

c. Instruments and Equipment:

1) Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

E. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Section 260573 "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study."

C. Load Balancing: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, measure load balancing and make circuit changes.

1. Measure as directed during period of normal system loading. 2. Perform load-balancing circuit changes outside normal occupancy/working schedule of

the facility and at time directed. Avoid disrupting critical 24-hour services such as fax machines and on-line data processing, computing, transmitting, and receiving equipment.

3. After circuit changes, recheck loads during normal load period. Record all load readings before and after changes and submit test records.

D2631431152


4. Tolerance: Difference exceeding 20 percent between phase loads, within a panelboard, is not acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as necessary to meet this minimum requirement.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions.


D263143 1153


D2631431154

Section 262726 - 1 Wiring Devices

SECTION 262726 WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates. 2. Twist-locking receptacles. 3. Snap switches.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

B. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.

C. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:

1. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking wall plates.



A. Field quality-control reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing-label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles:

D263143 1155


1. Manufacturers listed below produce an extensive line of nationally distributed wiring devices.

2. Cooper Wiring Devices; Division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper). 3. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell). 4. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton). 5. Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour).

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENTS

A. Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

C. Devices that are manufactured for use with modular plug-in connectors may be substituted under the following conditions:

1. Connectors shall comply with UL 2459 and shall be made with stranding building wire. 2. Devices shall comply with the requirements in this Section.

2.3 STRAIGHT-BLADE RECEPTACLES

A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and FS W-C-596, specification grade.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Cooper; 5351 (single), CR5362 (duplex). b. Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), HBL5352 (duplex). c. Leviton; 5891 (single), 5352 (duplex). d. Pass & Seymour; 5361 (single), 5362 (duplex).

2.4 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. General Description:

1. Straight blade, feed-through type. 2. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C-596. 3. Include indicator light that shows when the GFCI has malfunctioned and no longer

provides proper GFCI protection. 4. Specification grade.

B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:


a. Cooper; VGF20. b. Hubbell; GFR5352L. c. Pass & Seymour; 2095. d. Leviton; 7590.

D2631431156


2.5 TWIST-LOCKING RECEPTACLES

A. Single Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration L5-20R, and UL 498 minimum.


a. Cooper; CWL520R. b. Hubbell; HBL2310. c. Leviton; 2310. d. Pass & Seymour; L520-R.

B. Refer to Power Outlet Schedule on drawings for specific equipment receptacle requirements.

2.6 TOGGLE SWITCHES

A. Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896. Heavy duty specification grade.

B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:


a. Single Pole:

1) Cooper; AH1221. 2) Hubbell; HBL1221. 3) Leviton; 1221-2. 4) Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC1.

b. Three Way:

1) Cooper; AH1223. 2) Hubbell; HBL1223. 3) Leviton; 1223-2. 4) Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC3.

C. Pilot-Light Switches, 20 A:


a. Cooper; AH1221PL for 120 and 277 V. b. Hubbell; HBL1201PL for 120 and 277 V. c. Leviton; 1221-LH1. d. Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1RPL for 120 V, PS20AC1RPL7 for 277 V.

2. Description: Single pole, with neon-lighted handle, illuminated when switch is "off."

D. Key-Operated Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:


a. Cooper; AH1221L.

D263143 1157


b. Hubbell; HBL1221L. c. Leviton; 1221-2L. d. Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1-L.

2. Description: Single pole, with factory-supplied key in lieu of switch handle.

2.7 WALL PLATES

A. Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices.

1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Finished Spaces: Satin-finished, Type 302 stainless steel. 3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel. 4. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed

and labeled for use in wet and damp locations.

B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with Type 3R, weather-resistant, die-cast aluminum with lockable cover.

2.8 FINISHES

A. Device Color:

1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: Ivory unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing.

2. Cover Plates - match normal power device color, unless otherwise approved. Stainless steel for labs and similar spaces.

3. Normal Power Device - white, almond, or ivory; as selected by the consultant. 4. Emergency Power Device - Red 5. Standby Power Device - Blue 6. UPS/Clean Power Device - Gray. Require engraved nameplate in BLACK or BLUE

background depending whether fed by Normal or Standby source. 7. SPD Receptacle - Standard device with Blue cover, label "SURGE PROTECTED". 8. Isolated-Ground Receptacle - Orange, label cover "ISOLATED GROUND". 9. Other Type - as approved.

B. Wall Plate Color: For plastic covers, match device color.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Coordination with Other Trades:

1. Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of boxes.

2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables.

D2631431158


3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.

4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.

C. Conductors:

1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or terminated on devices.

2. Provide 12” of conductor at device boxes. 3. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid

scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire. 4. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70,

Article 300, without pigtails. 5. Existing Conductors:

a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors. b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter. c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted, provided the outlet box is large enough.

D. Device Installation:

1. Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were installed before building finishing operations were complete.

2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors.

3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment.

4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 12 inches in length.

5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductor tightly clockwise, two-thirds to three-fourths of the way around terminal screw.

6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer. 7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice

No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. 8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. 9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold

device-mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.

E. Receptacle Orientation:

1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles up, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the left.

F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.

G. Label switches at to controlled lighting when 3 or more are ganged together.

H. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates.

D263143 1159


I. Class 1 Critical Research – provide dedicated twist-lock receptacle on “Standby” (NEC 702 optional standby systems) system power. Provide equipment with a twist-lock cord and cap assembly including an engraved brass tag (consult with Engineering Services for labeling). Engrave outlet cover to read “Class 1 Emergency Power” and the panel/circuit feeding the load. Any load with this designation must be reviewed and approved by Engineering Services.

J. Flat screen TV - Use a 2-gang recessed combination receptacle and CATV outlet similar to the Arlington Industries indoor “in-box”, Leviton “recessed entertainment box”, or approved equal.

3.2 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. Install non-feed-through-type GFCI receptacles where protection of downstream receptacles is not required.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Identify each receptacle with panelboard identification and circuit number. Use an indelible marker to inscribe panel and circuit number on the back of each coverplate and provide a durable tag inside the outlet box. Lab receptacles – utilize stainless steel cover plate and require engraved nameplate with panel and circuit number feeding outlet. Color code per below.


A. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436. 2. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital

readout or illuminated digital-display indicators of measurement.

B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:

1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V. 2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 3 percent or higher is unacceptable. 3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. 4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. 5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. 6. Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit

breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above.

C. Test straight-blade for the retention force of the grounding blade according to NFPA 99. Retention force shall be not less than 4 oz..

D. Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.


D2631431160

Section 262813 - 1 Fuses

SECTION 262813 FUSES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Cartridge fuses rated 600-V ac and less for use in control circuits, enclosed switches, and enclosed controllers.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material, dimensions, descriptions of individual components. Include the following for each fuse type indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature Adjustment Information: If ratings of fuses have been adjusted to accommodate ambient temperatures, provide list of fuses with adjusted ratings.

a. For each fuse having adjusted ratings, include location of fuse, original fuse rating, local ambient temperature, and adjusted fuse rating.

b. Provide manufacturer's technical data on which ambient temperature adjustment calculations are based.

2. Dimensions and manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, and ratings.

3. Current-limitation curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics. 4. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) and current-limitation curves

(instantaneous peak let-through current) for each type and rating of fuse. 5. Coordination charts and tables and related data.

B. Submittals Format: All submittals shall be in PDF format for ease in sharing electronically.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fuses to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Ambient temperature adjustment information. 2. Current-limitation curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics. 3. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) and current-limitation curves

(instantaneous peak let-through current) for each type and rating of fuse. 4. Coordination charts and tables and related data.

1.5 MATERIALS MAINTENANCE SUBMITTALS

D263143 1161



1. Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than two of each size and type.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain fuses, for use within a specific product or circuit, from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Comply with NEMA FU 1 for cartridge fuses.

D. Comply with NFPA 70.


A. Where ambient temperature to which fuses are directly exposed is less than 40 deg F or more than 100 deg F, apply manufacturer's ambient temperature adjustment factors to fuse ratings.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate fuse ratings with utilization equipment nameplate limitations of maximum fuse size and with system short-circuit current levels.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Cooper Bussmann, Inc. 2. Edison Fuse, Inc. 3. Ferraz Shawmut, Inc. 4. Littelfuse, Inc.

2.2 CARTRIDGE FUSES

A. Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, nonrenewable cartridge fuses with voltage ratings consistent with circuit voltages.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine fuses before installation. Reject fuses that are moisture damaged or physically damaged.

B. Examine holders to receive fuses for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance, such as rejection features.

C. Examine utilization equipment nameplates and installation instructions. Install fuses of sizes and with characteristics appropriate for each piece of equipment.

D2631431162


D. Evaluate ambient temperatures to determine if fuse rating adjustment factors must be applied to fuse ratings.


3.2 FUSE APPLICATIONS

A. Cartridge Fuses:

1. Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK1, time delay. 2. Control Circuits: Class CC, fast acting.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without removing fuse.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labels complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems" and indicating fuse replacement information on inside door of each fused switch and adjacent to each fuse block, socket, and holder.


D263143 1163


D2631431164

Section 262816 - 1 Enclosed Switches And Circuit Breakers

SECTION 262816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following individually mounted, enclosed switches and circuit breakers:

1. Fusible switches. 2. Nonfusible switches. 3. Molded-case circuit breakers. 4. Enclosures.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. GD: General duty.

B. HD: Heavy duty.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. All submittals shall be submitted in electronic (PDF) format with the exception of material and color samples.

B. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.

1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Current and voltage ratings. 3. Short-circuit current rating. 4. UL listing for series rating of installed devices. 5. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective

devices and auxiliary components.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

D263143 1165


C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.


A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F. 2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with other construction, including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Spares: For the following:

a. Fuses for Fusible Switches: 3

2. Spare Indicating Lights: 3 of each type installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.

2.2 FUSIBLE AND NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES

A. Manufacturers: 1. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products. 2. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 3. Square D/Group Schneider. 4. General Electric

B. Fusible Switch, 600 A and Smaller: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate specified fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

C. Nonfusible Switch, 600 A and Smaller: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

D. Accessories:

D2631431166


1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors.

2. Auxiliary Contact Kit: Auxiliary set of contacts arranged to open before switch blades open.

2.3 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND SWITCHES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products. 2. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 3. Square D/Group Schneider. 4. General Electric

B. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB 1, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents.

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 100 A and larger.

C. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker Features and Accessories:

1. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. 2. Lugs: Mechanical style suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and copper conductor

material. All field lugs shall be copper. 3. Application Listing: Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HACR

for heating, air-conditioning, and refrigerating equipment.

D. Molded Case Circuit Breaker Characteristics - General

1. Circuit breakers shall be constructed using glass reinforced insulating material. Current carrying components shall be completely isolated from the handle and the accessory mounting area.

2. Circuit breakers shall have an over center, trip free, toggle operating mechanism which will provide quick-make, quick-break contact action. The circuit breaker shall have common tripping of all poles.

3. The circuit breaker handle shall reside in a tripped position between ON and OFF to provide local trip indication. Circuit breaker escutcheon shall be clearly marked ON and OFF in addition to providing International I/O markings.

4. The maximum ampere rating and UL, IEC, or other certification standards with applicable voltage systems and corresponding interrupting ratings shall be clearly marked on face of circuit breaker.

5. Each circuit breaker shall be equipped with a push-to-trip button, located on the face of the circuit breaker to mechanically operate the circuit breaker tripping mechanism for maintenance and testing purposes (except unit mounted type Q2, Q2H and Q2-H).

6. Circuit breakers shall be factory sealed with a hologram quality mark and shall have date code on face of circuit breaker.

7. Manufacturer shall provide electronic and hard copy time/current characteristic trip curves (and Ip & I²t let through curves for current limiting circuit breakers) for each type of circuit breaker.

8. Circuit breakers shall be equipped with UL Listed electrical accessories as noted on the drawing. Circuit breaker handle accessories shall provide provisions for locking handle in the ON and OFF position.

D263143 1167


9. All circuit breakers shall be UL Listed for reverse connection without restrictive line and load markings and be suitable for mounting in any position.

10. Circuit breakers shall be fixed construction with factory installed mechanical lugs. All circuit breakers 100A and larger shall be UL Listed to accept field replaceable/installable/removable mechanical type. Lug body shall be bolted in place; snap in design not acceptable. All lugs shall be UL Listed to accept solid (not larger than #8 AWG) and/or stranded copper conductors. Lugs shall be suitable for 75° C rated wire according to the 75° C temperature rating in the National Electrical Code.

11. All circuit breakers shall be capable of accepting bus connections.

E. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers

1. Circuit breakers shall have a permanent trip unit containing individual thermal and magnetic trip elements in each pole.

2. Thermal trip elements shall be factory preset and sealed. Circuit breakers shall be true rms sensing and thermally responsive to protect circuit conductor(s) in a 40° C ambient temperature.

3. Circuit breaker frame sizes above 100 amperes and larger shall have a single magnetic trip adjustment located on the front of the circuit breaker.

4. Standard two- and three-pole circuit breakers up to 250 amperes at 600 VAC shall be UL Listed as HACR type.

2.4 ENCLOSURES

A. NEMA AB 1 and NEMA KS 1 to meet environmental conditions of installed location.

1. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with applicable portions of NECA 1, NEMA PB 1.1, and NEMA PB 2.1 for installation of enclosed switches and circuit breakers.

B. Mount individual wall-mounting switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height, unless otherwise indicated. Anchor floor-mounting switches to concrete base.

C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs as specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."

D2631431168


B. Enclosure Nameplates: Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate as specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."





2. Inspect mechanical and electrical connections. 3. Verify switch and relay type and labeling verification. 4. Verify rating of installed fuses. 5. Testing results shall be submitted in Megger Power Db format.

C. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in NETA ATS, Section 7.5 for switches and Section 7.6 for all circuit breakers rated 100A or larger. Certify compliance with test parameters.


3. Infrared Scanning:

a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker. Open or remove doors or panels so connections are accessible to portable scanner.

b. Follow-Up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each unit 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

c. Instruments, Equipment and Reports:

1) Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

2) Prepare a certified report that identifies enclosed switches and circuit breakers included and describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.

D263143 1169


3.6 CLEANING

A. On completion of installation, vacuum dirt and debris from interiors; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning.

B. Inspect exposed surfaces and repair damaged finishes.

END OF SECTION

D2631431170

Section 262913 - 1 Enclosed Controllers

SECTION 262913 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes the following enclosed controllers rated 600 V and less:

1. Full-voltage manual. 2. Full-voltage magnetic.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CPT: Control power transformer.

B. MCCB: Molded-case circuit breaker.

C. MCP: Motor circuit protector.

D. N.C.: Normally closed.

E. N.O.: Normally open.

F. OCPD: Overcurrent protective device.

G. SCR: Silicon-controlled rectifier.


A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed controller. Include manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and enclosure types and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each enclosed controller. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, details, and required clearances and service spaces around controller enclosures.

1. Show tabulations of the following:

a. Each installed unit's type and details. b. Factory-installed devices. c. Nameplate legends. d. Short-circuit current rating of integrated unit. e. Listed and labeled for integrated short-circuit current (withstand) rating of OCPDs

in combination controllers by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

f. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual OCPDs in combination controllers.

2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.


D263143 1171



A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

B. Field quality-control reports.

C. Load-Current and Overload-Relay Heater List: Compile after motors have been installed, and arrange to demonstrate that selection of heaters suits actual motor nameplate full-load currents.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed controllers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Routine maintenance requirements for enclosed controllers and installed components. 2. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting circuit breaker and MCP trip

settings. 3. Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field-adjustable overload relays.





C. Comply with NFPA 70.


A. Store enclosed controllers indoors in clean, dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation. Protect enclosed controllers from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances, and physical damage.

B. If stored in areas subject to weather, cover enclosed controllers to protect them from weather, dirt, dust, corrosive substances, and physical damage. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside controllers; install temporary electric heating, with at least 250 W per controller.


A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F. 2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.

B. Interruption of Existing Electrical Systems: Do not interrupt electrical systems in facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of electrical systems.

2. Indicate method of providing temporary utilities. 3. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical systems without Owner's written

permission.

D2631431172


4. Comply with NFPA 70E.

1.10 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of enclosed controllers with other construction including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FULL-VOLTAGE CONTROLLERS

A. General Requirements for Full-Voltage Controllers: Comply with NEMA ICS 2, general purpose, Class A.

B. Fractional Horsepower Manual Controllers: "Quick-make, quick-break" toggle or push-button action; marked to show whether unit is off, on, or tripped.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. b. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. c. Rockwell Automation, Inc.; Allen-Bradley brand. d. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. e. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

2. Configuration: Nonreversing. 3. Overload Relays: Inverse-time-current characteristics; NEMA ICS 2, Class 10 tripping

characteristics; heaters matched to nameplate full-load current of actual protected motor; external reset push button; bimetallic type.

4. Surface mounting. 5. Red pilot light.

C. Integral Horsepower Manual Controllers: "Quick-make, quick-break" toggle or push-button action; marked to show whether unit is off, on, or tripped.



2. Configuration: Nonreversing.

D263143 1173


3. Overload Relays: Inverse-time-current characteristics; NEMA ICS 2, Class 10 tripping characteristics; heaters and sensors in each phase, matched to nameplate full-load current of actual protected motor and having appropriate adjustment for duty cycle; external reset push button; bimetallic type.

4. Surface mounting. 5. Red pilot light. 6. N.O. and N.C. auxiliary contacts.

D. Combination Magnetic Controller: Factory-assembled combination of magnetic controller, OCPD, and disconnecting means.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: or comparable product by one of the following:


2. Fusible Disconnecting Means:

a. NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, horsepower-rated, fusible switch with clips or bolt pads to accommodate Class J fuses.

b. Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed position.

3. Auxiliary Contacts: N.O./N.C., arranged to activate before switch blades open. 4. Nonfusible Disconnecting Means:

a. NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, horsepower-rated, nonfusible switch. b. Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed

position. c. Auxiliary Contacts: N.O./N.C., arranged to activate before switch blades open.

2.2 ENCLOSURES

A. Enclosed Controllers: NEMA ICS 6, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.

1. Dry and Clean Indoor Locations: Type 1. 2. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: Type 4. 3. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids:

Type 12.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. General Requirements for Control Circuit and Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 5; factory installed in controller enclosure cover unless otherwise indicated.

1. Push Buttons, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: Heavy-duty, oil-tight type.

a. Push Buttons: Shrouded types; maintained as indicated. b. Pilot Lights: LED types; colors as indicated; push to test. c. Selector Switches: Rotary type.

D2631431174


B. Reversible N.C./N.O. auxiliary contact(s).

C. Cover gaskets for Type 1 enclosures.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and surfaces to receive enclosed controllers, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine enclosed controllers before installation. Reject enclosed controllers that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Wall-Mounted Controllers: Install enclosed controllers on walls with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated, and by bolting units to wall or mounting on lightweight structural-steel channels bolted to wall. For controllers not at walls, provide freestanding racks complying with Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

B. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

C. Install fuses in each fusible-switch enclosed controller.

D. Install fuses in control circuits if not factory installed. Comply with requirements in Section 262813 "Fuses."

E. Install, connect, and fuse thermal-protector monitoring relays furnished with motor-driven equipment.

F. Comply with NECA 1.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify enclosed controllers, components, and control wiring. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs.

2. Label each enclosure with engraved nameplate. 3. Label each enclosure-mounted control and pilot device.

3.4 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Install wiring between enclosed controllers and remote devices. Comply with requirements in Section 260523 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables."

B. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.

C. Connect selector switches and other automatic-control selection devices where applicable.

1. Connect selector switches to bypass only those manual- and automatic-control devices that have no safety functions when switch is in manual-control position.

2. Connect selector switches with enclosed-controller circuit in both manual and automatic positions for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high-temperature cutouts, and motor overload protectors.

D263143 1175




B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed controller, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.


C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Inspect controllers, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation. 2. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed-controller element, component, connecting

motor supply, feeder, and control circuits. 3. Test continuity of each circuit. 4. Verify that voltages at controller locations are within plus or minus 10 percent of motor

nameplate rated voltages. If outside this range for any motor, notify Owner before starting the motor(s).

5. Test each motor for proper phase rotation. 6. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in

NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 7. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate

compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. 8. Perform the following infrared (thermographic) scan tests and inspections and prepare

reports:

a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each multi-pole enclosed controller. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each multi-pole enclosed controller 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

c. Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

9. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Enclosed controllers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports including a certified report that identifies enclosed controllers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable switches, auxiliary relays, time-delay relays, timers, and overload-relay pickup and trip ranges.

B. Adjust overload-relay heaters or settings if power factor correction capacitors are connected to the load side of the overload relays.

D2631431176


C. Adjust the trip settings of MCPs and thermal-magnetic circuit breakers with adjustable instantaneous trip elements. Initially adjust to six times the motor nameplate full-load ampere ratings and attempt to start motors several times, allowing for motor cooldown between starts. If tripping occurs on motor inrush, adjust settings in increments until motors start without tripping. Do not exceed eight times the motor full-load amperes (or 11 times for NEMA Premium Efficient motors if required). Where these maximum settings do not allow starting of a motor, notify Owner before increasing settings.

D. Set the taps on reduced-voltage autotransformer controllers at 50 percent.

E. Set field-adjustable switches and program microprocessors for required start and stop sequences in reduced-voltage solid-state controllers.

F. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Section 260573.16 "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study."

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions until enclosed controllers are ready to be energized and placed into service.

B. Replace controllers whose interiors have been exposed to water or other liquids prior to Substantial Completion.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain enclosed controllers.


D263143 1177


D2631431178

Section 262923 - 1 Variable Frequency Drives

SECTION 262923 VARIABLE-FREQUENCY DRIVES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes separately enclosed, preassembled, combination Variable Frequency Drives (VFD’s), rated 600 V and less, for speed control of three-phase, squirrel-cage induction motors.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. BAS: Building automation system.

B. CPT: Control power transformer.

C. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

D. LED: Light-emitting diode.

E. NC: Normally closed.

F. NO: Normally open.

G. OCPD: Overcurrent protective device.

H. PID: Control action, proportional plus integral plus derivative.

I. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.

J. VFD: Variable-frequency drive.


A. Product Data: For each type and rating of VFD indicated.

1. Include dimensions and finishes for VFDs. 2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished

specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For each VFD indicated.

1. Include mounting and attachment details. 2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

B. Harmonic Analysis Report: Provide Project-specific calculations and manufacturer's statement of compliance with IEEE 519.

C. Source quality-control reports.

262923-1

D263143 1179


D. Field quality-control reports.

E. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For VFDs to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

a. Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field-adjustable overload relays. b. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing, adjusting, and reprogramming

microprocessor control modules. c. Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field-adjustable timers, controls, and

status and alarm points. d. Load-Current and Overload-Relay Heater List: Compile after motors have been

installed, and arrange to demonstrate that selection of heaters suits actual motor nameplate, full-load currents.

e. Load-Current and List of Settings of Adjustable Overload Relays: Compile after motors have been installed, and arrange to demonstrate that switch settings for motor-running overload protection suit actual motors to be protected.

1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS


1. Power Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.

2. Control Power Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than two of each size and type.

3. Indicating Lights: Two of each type and color installed. 4. Auxiliary Contacts: Furnish one spare(s) for each size and type of magnetic controller

installed. 5. Power Contacts: Furnish three spares for each size and type of magnetic contactor

installed. 6. .





A. If stored in space that is not permanently enclosed and air conditioned, remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside controllers and.

B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for VFDs, including clearances between VFDs, and adjacent surfaces and other items.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace VFDs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

262923-1

D2631431180


1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Allen Bradley or comparable product by one of the following:

1. General Electric - Fuji. 2. Yaskawa Electric America, Inc. 3. ABB.

2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. General Requirements for VFDs:

1. VFDs and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2. Comply with NEMA ICS 7, NEMA ICS 61800-2, and UL 508C.

B. Application: variable torque.

C. VFD Description: Variable-frequency drives, consisting of power converter that employs pulse-width-modulated inverter, factory built and tested in an enclosure, with integral disconnecting means and overcurrent and overload protection; listed and labeled by an NRTL as a complete unit; arranged to provide self-protection, protection, and variable-speed control of one or more three-phase induction motors by adjusting output voltage and frequency.

1. Units suitable for operation of inverter-duty motors as defined by NEMA MG 1, Section IV, Part 31, "Definite-Purpose Inverter-Fed Polyphase Motors."

2. Listed and labeled for integrated short-circuit current (withstand) rating by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Design and Rating: Match load type, such as fans, blowers, and pumps; and type of connection used between motor and load such as direct or through a power-transmission connection.

E. Output Rating: Three phase; 10 to 60 Hz, with voltage proportional to frequency throughout voltage range; maximum voltage equals input voltage.

F. Unit Operating Requirements:

1. Input AC Voltage Tolerance: Plus 10 and minus 10 percent of VFD input voltage rating. 2. Input AC Voltage Unbalance: Not exceeding 5 percent. 3. Input Frequency Tolerance: Plus or minus 3 percent of VFD frequency rating. 4. Minimum Efficiency: 96 percent at 60 Hz, full load. 5. Minimum Displacement Primary-Side Power Factor: 96 percent under any load or speed

condition. 6. Minimum Short-Circuit Current (Withstand) Rating: 65 kA. 7. Ambient Temperature Rating: Not less than 32 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F. 8. Humidity Rating: Less than 95 percent (noncondensing). 9. Altitude Rating: Not exceeding 3300 feet. 10. Vibration Withstand: Comply with NEMA ICS 61800-2. 11. Overload Capability: 1.5 times the base load current for 60 seconds; minimum of 1.8

times the base load current for three seconds. 12. Starting Torque: Minimum 100 percent of rated torque from 3 to 60 Hz. 13. Speed Regulation: Plus or minus 5 percent. 14. Output Carrier Frequency: Selectable; 0.5 to 15 kHz.

262923-1

D263143 1181


15. Stop Modes: Programmable; includes fast, free-wheel, and dc injection braking.

G. Inverter Logic: Microprocessor based, 32 bit, isolated from all power circuits.

H. Isolated Control Interface: Allows VFDs to follow remote-control signal over a minimum 40:1 speed range.

1. Signal: Electrical.

I. Internal Adjustability Capabilities:

1. Minimum Speed: 5 to 25 percent of maximum rpm. 2. Maximum Speed: 80 to 100 percent of maximum rpm. 3. Acceleration: 0.1 to 999.9 seconds. 4. Deceleration: 0.1 to 999.9 seconds. 5. Current Limit: 30 to minimum of 150 percent of maximum rating. 6. .

J. Self-Protection and Reliability Features:

1. Surge Suppression: Factory installed as an integral part of the VFD, complying with UL 1449 SPD, Type 1 or Type 2.

2. Surge Suppression: Field-mounted surge suppressors complying with Section 264313 "Surge Protection for Low-Voltage Electrical Power Circuits," UL 1449 SPD, Type 2.

3. Loss of Input Signal Protection: Selectable response strategy, including speed default to a percent of the most recent speed, a preset speed, or stop; with alarm.

4. Under- and overvoltage trips. 5. Inverter overcurrent trips. 6. VFD and Motor-Overload/Overtemperature Protection: Microprocessor-based thermal

protection system for monitoring VFDs and motor thermal characteristics, and for providing VFD overtemperature and motor-overload alarm and trip; settings selectable via the keypad.

7. Critical frequency rejection, with three selectable, adjustable deadbands. 8. Instantaneous line-to-line and line-to-ground overcurrent trips. 9. Loss-of-phase protection. 10. Reverse-phase protection. 11. Short-circuit protection. 12. Motor-overtemperature fault.

K. Automatic Reset/Restart: Attempt three restarts after drive fault or on return of power after an interruption and before shutting down for manual reset or fault correction; adjustable delay time between restart attempts.

L. Power-Interruption Protection: To prevent motor from re-energizing after a power interruption until motor has stopped, unless "Bidirectional Autospeed Search" feature is available and engaged.

M. Bidirectional Autospeed Search: Capable of starting VFD into rotating loads spinning in either direction and returning motor to set speed in proper direction, without causing damage to drive, motor, or load.

N. Torque Boost: Automatically varies starting and continuous torque to at least 1.5 times the minimum torque to ensure high-starting torque and increased torque at slow speeds.

O. Motor Temperature Compensation at Slow Speeds: Adjustable current fall-back based on output frequency for temperature protection of self-cooled, fan-ventilated motors at slow speeds.

262923-1

D2631431182


P. Integral Input Disconnecting Means and OCPD: NEMA KS 1, nonfusible switch, with power

fuse block and current-limiting fuses with pad-lockable, door-mounted handle mechanism.

1. Disconnect Rating: Not less than 115 percent of VFD input current rating. 2. Disconnect Rating: Not less than 115 percent of NFPA 70 motor full-load current rating

or VFD input current rating, whichever is larger. 3. Auxiliary Contacts: NO or NC, arranged to activate before switch blades open. 4. Auxiliary contacts "a" and "b" arranged to activate with circuit-breaker handle. 5. NC alarm contact that operates only when circuit breaker has tripped.

2.3 CONTROLS AND INDICATION

A. Status Lights: Door-mounted LED indicators displaying the following conditions:

1. Power on. 2. Run. 3. Overvoltage. 4. Line fault. 5. Overcurrent. 6. External fault.

B. Panel-Mounted Operator Station: Manufacturer's standard front-accessible, sealed keypad and plain-English-language digital display; allows complete programming, program copying, operating, monitoring, and diagnostic capability.

1. Keypad: In addition to required programming and control keys, include keys for HAND, OFF, and AUTO modes.

2. Security Access: Provide electronic security access to controls through identification and password with at least three levels of access: View only; view and operate; and view, operate, and service.

a. Control Authority: Supports at least four conditions: Off, local manual control at VFD, local automatic control at VFD, and automatic control through a remote source.

C. Historical Logging Information and Displays:

1. Real-time clock with current time and date. 2. Running log of total power versus time. 3. Total run time. 4. Fault log, maintaining last four faults with time and date stamp for each.

D. Indicating Devices: Digital display mounted flush in VFD door and connected to display VFD parameters including, but not limited to:

1. Output frequency (Hz). 2. Motor speed (rpm). 3. Motor status (running, stop, fault). 4. Motor current (amperes). 5. Motor torque (percent). 6. Fault or alarming status (code). 7. PID feedback signal (percent). 8. DC-link voltage (V dc). 9. Set point frequency (Hz). 10. Motor output voltage (V ac).

E. Control Signal Interfaces:

262923-1

D263143 1183


1. Electric Input Signal Interface:

a. A minimum of two programmable analog inputs: 0- to 10-V dc 4- to 20-mA dc. b. A minimum of six multifunction programmable digital inputs.

2. Remote Signal Inputs: Capability to accept any of the following speed-setting input signals from the BAS or other control systems:

a. 0- to 10-V dc. b. 4- to 20-mA dc. c. Potentiometer using up/down digital inputs. d. Fixed frequencies using digital inputs.

3. Output Signal Interface: A minimum of one programmable analog output signal(s) (0- to 10-V dc 4- to 20-mA dc), which can be configured for any of the following:

a. Output frequency (Hz). b. Output current (load). c. DC-link voltage (V dc). d. Motor torque (percent). e. Motor speed (rpm). f. Set point frequency (Hz).

4. Remote Indication Interface: A minimum of two programmable dry-circuit relay outputs (120-V ac, 1 A) for remote indication of the following:

a. Motor running. b. Set point speed reached. c. Fault and warning indication (overtemperature or overcurrent). d. PID high- or low-speed limits reached.

F. PID Control Interface: Provides closed-loop set point, differential feedback control in response to dual feedback signals. Allows for closed-loop control of fans and pumps for pressure, flow, or temperature regulation.

1. Number of Loops: One.

G. BAS Interface: Factory-installed hardware and software shall interface with BAS to monitor, control, display, and record data for use in processing reports. VFD settings shall be retained within VFD's nonvolatile memory.

1. Hardwired Points:

a. Monitoring: On-off status,. b. Control: On-off operation,.

2. Communication Interface: Comply with ASHRAE 135. Communication shall interface with BAS to remotely control and monitor lighting from a BAS operator workstation. Control features and monitoring points displayed locally at the VFD shall be available through the BAS.

2.4 LINE CONDITIONING AND FILTERING

A. Input Line Conditioning: Based on the manufacturer's harmonic analysis study and report, provide input filtering, as required, to limit total demand (harmonic current) distortion and total harmonic voltage demand at the defined point of common coupling to meet IEEE 519 recommendations.

262923-1

D2631431184


B. Output Filtering: Motors inverter duty rated, no filtering is required, motors not inverter duty

rated and located more than 50 feet from the drive a (dv/dt) filter will be required..

C. EMI/RFI Filtering: CE marked; certify compliance with IEC 61800-3 for Category C2. FCC regulations part 15, subpart J, Class A devices about 7MHz.

2.5 BYPASS SYSTEMS

A. Bypass Operation: Safely transfers motor between power converter output and bypass circuit, manually, automatically, or both. Selector switches set modes and indicator lights indicate mode selected. Unit is capable of stable operation (starting, stopping, and running) with motor completely disconnected from power converter.

B. Bypass Mode: Manual operation only; requires local operator selection at VFD. Transfer between power converter and bypass contactor, and retransfer shall only be allowed with the motor at zero speed.

C. Bypass Mode: Field-selectable automatic or manual, allows local and remote transfer between power converter and bypass contactor and retransfer, either via manual operator interface or automatic-control system feedback.

D. Bypass Controller: Two-contactor-style bypass allows motor operation via the power converter or the bypass controller; with input isolating switch and barrier arranged to isolate the power converter and permit safe troubleshooting and testing, both energized and de-energized, while motor is operating in bypass mode.

1. Bypass Contactor: Load-break, NEMA-rated contactor. 2. Output Isolating Contactor: Non-load-break, NEMA-rated contactor. 3. Isolating Switch: Non-load-break switch arranged to isolate power converter and permit

safe troubleshooting and testing of the power converter, both energized and de-energized, while motor is operating in bypass mode; pad-lockable, door-mounted handle mechanism.

E. Bypass Contactor Configuration: Full-voltage (across-the-line) type.

1. NORMAL/BYPASS selector switch. 2. HAND/OFF/AUTO selector switch. 3. NORMAL/TEST Selector Switch: Allows testing and adjusting of VFD while the motor

is running in the bypass mode. 4. Contactor Coils: Pressure-encapsulated type with coil transient suppressors.

a. Operating Voltage: Depending on contactor NEMA size and line-voltage rating, manufacturer's standard matching control power or line voltage.

b. Power Contacts: Totally enclosed, double break, and silver-cadmium oxide; assembled to allow inspection and replacement without disturbing line or load wiring.

5. Control Circuits: 24-V ac; obtained from integral CPT, with primary and secondary fuses, with CPT of sufficient capacity to operate all integral devices and remotely located pilot, indicating, and control devices.

a. CPT Spare Capacity: 100 VA.

6. Overload Relays: NEMA ICS 2.

a. Melting-Alloy Overload Relays:

1) Inverse-time-current characteristic.

262923-1

D263143 1185


2) Class 20 tripping characteristic. 3) Heaters in each phase matched to nameplate full-load current of actual

protected motor and with appropriate adjustment for duty cycle.

b. Bimetallic Overload Relays:

1) Inverse-time-current characteristic. 2) Class 20 tripping characteristic. 3) Heaters in each phase matched to nameplate full-load current of actual

protected motor and with appropriate adjustment for duty cycle. 4) Ambient compensated. 5) Automatic resetting.

c. Solid-State Overload Relays:

1) Switch or dial selectable for motor-running overload protection. 2) Sensors in each phase. 3) Class 20 tripping characteristic selected to protect motor against voltage

and current unbalance and single phasing. 4) Class II ground-fault protection, with start and run delays to prevent

nuisance trip on starting. 5) Analog communication module.

d. NC isolated overload alarm contact. e. External overload, reset push button.

2.6 OPTIONAL FEATURES

A. Damper control circuit with end-of-travel feedback capability.

B. Sleep Function: Senses a minimal deviation of a feedback signal and stops the motor. On an increase in speed-command signal deviation, VFD resumes normal operation.

C. Motor Preheat Function: Preheats motor when idle to prevent moisture accumulation in the motor.

D. Remote Indicating Circuit Terminals: Mode selection, controller status, and controller fault.

E. Remote digital operator kit.

F. Communication Port: RS-232 port, USB 2.0 port, or equivalent connection capable of connecting a and a notebook computer.

2.7 ENCLOSURES

A. VFD Enclosures: NEMA 250, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.

1. Dry and Clean Indoor Locations: Type 1. 2. Dry and Dirty Indoor Locations: Type 12. 3. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R.

B. Plenum Rating: UL 1995; NRTL certification label on enclosure, clearly identifying VFD as "Plenum Rated."

2.8 ACCESSORIES

A. General Requirements for Control-Circuit and Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 5; factory installed in VFD enclosure cover unless otherwise indicated.

1. Push Buttons: Shielded.

262923-1

D2631431186


2. Pilot Lights: Push to test. 3. Selector Switches: Rotary type. 4. Stop and Lockout Push-Button Station: Momentary-break, push-button station with a

factory-applied hasp arranged so padlock can be used to lock push button in depressed position with control circuit open.

B. Reversible NC/NO bypass contactor auxiliary contact(s).

C. Control Relays: Auxiliary and adjustable solid-state time-delay relays.

D. Phase-Failure, Phase-Reversal, and Undervoltage and Overvoltage Relays: Solid-state sensing circuit with isolated output contacts for hard-wired connections. Provide adjustable undervoltage, overvoltage, and time-delay settings.

1. Current Transformers: Continuous current rating, basic impulse insulating level (BIL) rating, burden, and accuracy class suitable for connected circuitry. Comply with IEEE C57.13.

E. Supplemental Digital Meters:

1. Elapsed-time meter. 2. Kilowatt meter. 3. Kilowatt-hour meter.

F. Spare control-wiring terminal blocks; unwired.


A. Testing: Test and inspect VFDs according to requirements in NEMA ICS 61800-2.

1. Test each VFD while connected to its specified motor. 2. Verification of Performance: Rate VFDs according to operation of functions and features

specified.

B. VFDs will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, surfaces, and substrates to receive VFDs, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine VFD before installation. Reject VFDs that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

C. Examine roughing-in for conduit systems to verify actual locations of conduit connections before VFD installation.

D. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Wall-Mounting Controllers: Install with tops at uniform height and with disconnect operating handles not higher than 79 inches above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated, and by bolting units to wall or mounting on lightweight structural-steel channels bolted to wall. For controllers

262923-1

D263143 1187


not on walls, provide freestanding racks complying with Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

B. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

C. Install fuses in each fusible-switch VFD.

D. Install fuses in control circuits if not factory installed. Comply with requirements in Section 262813 "Fuses."

E. Install heaters in thermal-overload relays. Select heaters based on actual nameplate full-load amperes after motors are installed.

F. Install, connect, and fuse thermal-protector monitoring relays furnished with motor-driven equipment.

G. Comply with NECA 1.

3.3 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Install wiring between VFDs and remote devices. Comply with requirements in Section 260523 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables."

B. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.

C. Connect selector switches and other automatic-control devices where applicable.

1. Connect selector switches to bypass only those manual- and automatic-control devices that have no safety functions when switches are in manual-control position.

2. Connect selector switches with control circuit in both manual and automatic positions for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high-temperature cutouts, and motor-overload protectors.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify VFDs, components, and control wiring. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs.

2. Label each VFD with engraved nameplate. 3. Label each enclosure-mounted control and pilot device.

B. Operating Instructions: Frame printed operating instructions for VFDs, including control sequences and emergency procedures. Fabricate frame of finished metal, and cover instructions with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on front of VFD units.



B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative.

D. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each VFD element, bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.


262923-1

D2631431188


E. Tests and Inspections:

1. Inspect VFD, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation. Test and adjust controllers, components, and equipment.

2. Test insulation resistance for each VFD element, component, connecting motor supply, feeder, and control circuits.

3. Test continuity of each circuit. 4. Verify that voltages at VFD locations are within 10 percent of motor nameplate rated

voltages. If outside this range for any motor, notify Construction Manager before starting the motor(s).

5. Test each motor for proper phase rotation. 6. Perform tests according to the Inspection and Test Procedures for Adjustable Speed

Drives stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.


8. Perform the following infrared (thermographic) scan tests and inspections, and prepare reports:

a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each VFD. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each VFD 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

c. Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

9. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

F. VFDs will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

G. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies the VFD and describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations made after remedial action.

3.6 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.7 ADJUSTING

A. Program microprocessors for required operational sequences, status indications, alarms, event recording, and display features. Clear events memory after final acceptance testing and prior to Substantial Completion.

B. Set field-adjustable switches, auxiliary relays, time-delay relays, timers, and overload-relay pickup and trip ranges.

C. Adjust the trip settings of instantaneous-only circuit breakers and thermal-magnetic circuit breakers with adjustable, instantaneous trip elements. Initially adjust to 6 times the motor nameplate full-load amperes and attempt to start motors several times, allowing for motor cool-down between starts. If tripping occurs on motor inrush, adjust settings in increments until motors start without tripping. Do not exceed 8 times the motor full-load amperes (or 11 times for

262923-1

D263143 1189


NEMA Premium Efficient motors if required). Where these maximum settings do not allow starting of a motor, notify Construction Manager before increasing settings.

D. Set the taps on reduced-voltage autotransformer controllers.

E. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Section 260573 "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study."

F. Set field-adjustable pressure switches.

3.8 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions until controllers are ready to be energized and placed into service.

B. Replace VFDs whose interiors have been exposed to water or other liquids prior to Substantial Completion.

3.9 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, reprogram, and maintain VFDs.


262923-1

D2631431190

Section 263100 - 1 Photovoltaic Energy Equipment

SECTION 263100 PHOTOVOLTAIC ENERGY EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This document supplies the technical specifications for a photovoltaic (“PV”) system to be installed on the roof of the building in Long Island, New York. The energy produced via a photovoltaic array shall be connected to the building’s main electrical distribution switchgear (USS-SERF) through grid tied DC to AC inverters

B. The Contractor shall supply all components necessary to configure the specified PV system including, but not limited to, the PV modules and associated PV panel mounts, combiner boxes, interconnection wiring and cabling, AC to DC inverter, panel, circuit breakers and disconnect switches. In addition, the Contractor shall provide design, operation, and maintenance documentation, and shall package all equipment for domestic overland shipment in a manner suitable to ensure the adequate protection of the equipment during transport.

C. The inverter towers, inverters and combi-switches shall be the models specified by the manufacturer “SMA America”; no substitute manufacturer will be acceptable.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. STC Watts: Standard test conditions. DC wattage produced by laboratory testing for modules based on 100 W/M² @ 25˚C Cell temperature.

B. PTC Watts: PV USA Test Conditions. DC wattage produced by laboratory testing for modules based on 100 W/M² @ 20˚C Cell temperature.

C. VOC: Open circuit voltage at STC.

D. VMP: Voltage at maximum power point at STC.

E. MPP: Maximum power point

F. NOCT: Normal operating cell temperature. The estimated temperature of a PV module when operating under 800 w/m2 irradiance, 20°C ambient temperature and wind speed of 1 meter per second. NOCT is used to estimate the nominal operating temperature of a module in its working environment.


A. Section 260800-Commissioning of Electrical Systems.

B. Section 260500-Common Work Results for Electrical.

C. Section 260519-Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.

D. Section 260526-Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.

E. Section 260529-Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.

F. Section 260533-Raceways and boxes for Electrical Systems.

G. Section 260533-Identification for Electrical Systems.

H. Section 262416-Panelboards

D263143 1191


I. Section 262816-Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with the contract drawings and the front end specifications division 1.

B. Equipment submittals for all PV system components including but not limited to:

1. SMA America’s Sunny Towers and 8KW Inverters.

2. SMA America’s combi-switch.

3. 340W PV panels.

4. PV panel support racks and ballast.

5. SMA America’s PV data monitoring equipment and software.

6. Submit utility disconnect and enclosed breaker under specification section 262816.

C. Roofing materials including slip sheets beneath PV racks, electrical penetration components and all other required materials for modifications to the existing EDPM roof membrane.

D. Equipment submittals shall include detailed electrical schematics of all components within.

E. Provide a single line diagram of the proposed system with all, equipment, conductors and electrical components indicated. System components shall include but not be limited to:

1. All PV strings and interconnecting cables. Include cutsheets of proposed cable and connectors, plus details on connection at PV panel.

2. All Combiner boxes including connections from each PV string, connection to inverter and all fusing.

3. Inverter connections including AC & DC connections, data connections and 120V power connections.

4. Utility disconnect, enclosed circuit breaker and main panel connections.

5. RS485 Network communication equipment including but not limited to, sensor box and all associated equipment, webbox and all associated equipment, interconnecting cable type and connections to all.

6. All grounding connections for the entire system.

F. All equipment provided must be in compliance with NYSERDA certification requirements.

G. The Contractor shall provide all necessary documentation in accordance with Section 1.1 B. above, as well as the following:

1. System sizing analysis that meets the following parameters:

a. Nominal power of PV system: 36.38kW (+/- 1/2%)

b. DC Power Output: 35.47kW (+/-1/2%)

c. AC Power Output: 34 kW (+/-1/2%)

d. Yearly energy yield: 42 kW-hours

D2631431192


2. Detailed description of test procedures and site commissioning test.

3. Electrical schematic diagram indicating proposed PV arrays and interconnection of all components.

4. System Operation & Maintenance Manual.

1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS

A. All equipment and material to be supplied shall be designed so as to withstand the environmental conditions at the project site.

1. Outdoor components, such as PV modules, combiner boxes, module mounts, and cabling must be designed to the following conditions:

a. High/low record temperatures: -40˚F/185˚F

b. Average High temperature: 55˚F

c. Relative Humidity: 100% condensing

d. Wind Speed: 90 MPH

e. Exposure Category: B

f. Seismic Building Category: A

g. NEMA Rating: 3R or 4

1.6 STRUCTURAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Maximum PV array ballasted load: 7 lbs/ft²

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PV ARRAY

A. Provide a PV array consisting of (107) one hundred and seven, 340W mono-crystalline PV panels arranged in strings as indicated on the drawings. The overall output shall be; ‘340W x 107 modules = 36,380 STC watts’ =/- ½%.

B. Provide (20) spare 340 Watt modules to be turned over to the owner in addition to the required modules necessary for the array.

C. Photovoltaic array shall be installed on the roof of the building where indicated on the drawings. Maintain 10 foot clearance from the parapet wall at all locations. All support structures, and necessary appurtenances for mounting the array shall be provided.

D. Connections between the modules and combiner box shall consist of series strings interconnected with pre-manufactured cables. Cables shall be USE-2 RHH/RHW-2 #10 AWG copper, rated 90˚C and approved for use with PV systems. Connectors shall be UL-listed and rated for 90ºC wet conditions, outdoor use.

2.2 PV MODULE

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the basis of design products listed below or an approved equal and confirm that each has a manufacturing facility within the USA.

1. Solarworld: Sunmodule SW340 Mono.

2. Suniva: Optimus 345 Mono.

D263143 1193


B. Each solar module shall be rated at 340 Watts and have the following characteristics;

1. Cell type: Monocrystalline Silicon

2. Length: 78.46” (Max), Width 39.4” (max).

3. Rated power at STC: 340W DC

4. Rated power at NOCT: 259.3W DC

5. Front glass: solar glass, transparent, anti-reflective and specifically designed for photovoltaic operation.

6. Back: Multilayer sheet.

7. NOCT: 46˚C

8. Maximum system voltage: 1000V

9. Maximum reverse current: 25A

10. Open circuit voltage: 41.5 Vdc

11. Power tolerance +/- 3%

12. Cable junction box: IP65, with bypass diodes.

13. Connectors: PV wire per UL4703 with H4 connectors.

14. Module loose interconnection cables: USE-2, RHH/RHW-2 AWG #10 Copper.

15. Solar modules shall be UL listed and meet UL1703, IEC 61215 and IEC 61730 requirements.

16. Module efficiency: 17.04% (Min)

17. Dimensions: 78.46” High x 39.4” wide x 1.30” thick.

2.3 PV COMBINER BOX

A. Each PV string, shall be terminated in a combiner box mounted where indicated on the drawings.

1. Enclosure: Nema 3R, Steel.

2. Maximum input fuse: 10A.

3. UL1741 Listed.

4. Voltage rating: 600V DC.

5. Maximum continuous output current: 40A DC

6. Manufacturer/Model: SMA America, LLC/Combi Switch

2.4 INVERTERS AND TOWER

A. Inverter Tower: Pre-wired mounting frame to install and combine the output of six AC to DC inverters

1. Maximum PV power at STC: 60 KW

2. Tracking voltage: 250-480V DC

3. Maximum DC input current: 180A

4. DC Voltage Ripple: < 5%.

D2631431194


5. Maximum AC power; 48 KW

6. AC Voltage Output: 480V, 3 ph, wye

7. RS-485 communication network

8. Power factor > .99

9. Manufacturer/Model: SMA America, LLC/ST 48

B. Inverter: 8 KW DC to AC.

1. Maximum PV power at STC: 10 KW

2. Nominal AC Power: 8 KW

3. Efficiency: 96.4%

4. Maximum DC input voltage: 600V

5. MDD DC voltage range: 175-500V

6. AC Output Voltage: 480V, 1PH

7. AC Operating Voltage: 2404-480 VAC

8. AC Frequency Range: 59.3-60.5 Hz

9. Maximum AC Output current: 32A

10. Less than 4% Harmonic distortion.

11. Power factor: >.99

12. Nema 3R

13. Certifications: UL1741, UL1998, IEEE1547

14. 10 year warranty.

15. Manufacturer/Model: SMA America, LLC/SB 8000-US.

2.5 PV PANEL SUPPORT RACKS

A. Commercial pitched rooftop support system with pre-assembled strut channel, fittings and supports;

1. Fully ballasted system with no tie downs.

2. Total allowable system load with safety factors: 7 lbs/ft²

3. Landscape or Portrait panel orientation.

a. Drawings show a system with a portrait layout, however, a landscape layout is acceptable. Provide equivalent quantity of panels and overall array size within the footprint shown on the drawings. Maintain the 15 original arrays in their general locations. Spacing between rows may be decreased accordingly, submit design to the engineer for approval.

4. 10 degree angle.

5. Rubber, non-penetrating roof supports.

6. 6063-T6 Aluminum strut profile extrusion struts or cold rolled steel.

a. Mounting clamps for PV panel support to struts.

D263143 1195


B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by

one of the following or an approved equal and confirm that each has a manufacturing facility within the USA.

1. Unirac: ISYS Roof Mount.

2. Cooper B-Line: Arista Mounting System

C. Do not provide products from a manufacturer that is not based in and manufactured in the USA.

2.6 SUNNY SENSOR BOX

A. Enclosure: NEMA 4

B. Irradiation sensor

C. RS485 anemometer

D. Module temperature sensor.

E. Ambient temperature sensor.

F. Power Supply: RS485 Power injector.

G. Manufacturer/Model: SMA America, LLC/Sensorbox-IUS084413

2.7 SUNNY WEBBOX

A. Remote monitoring, diagnosis and data logging with integrated web server.

B. Inverter communication protocol: RS485, 10/100 Mbit Ethernet

C. Mounting: DIN Rail

D. Manufacture/Model: SMA America LLC/Sunny Webbox

2.8 MONITORING SOFTWARE

A. Description: Presentation software program, provided integral with the PV system, that is downloadable onto a user PC and capable of reading and interpreting the PV systems yield data and readings.

B. Operating system compatibility; Windows 8, Windows 10, Apple Macintosh with latest operating system.

C. Operating system minimum size: 1 GHz.

D. Presentation Views:

1. Total PV system yield.

2. Current power output for PV system.

3. Ecology and Reimbursement.

4. Ambient data including solar radiation, module temperature and wind speed.

5. Individual customer page with picture or logo of customer’s choice.

6. RSS feed to display current news in the presentation.

7. Picture view which allows user to download digital images into the presentation.

E. Manufacturer/Model: SMA America/Flashview 2.3 or an approved equal.

D2631431196


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SYSTEM COMMISSIONING

A. The Contractor shall supply and execute a written test and commissioning procedure for the purpose of commissioning the system covering all critical system and operating parameters. All testing will be performed in coordination with, under the direction of, and witnessed by the Owner’s Commissioning Agent. The test and commissioning results shall be recorded onto a Contractor-supplied checklist. The Contractor shall perform the following tests as a minimum:

B. Documentation of Site Condition

1. Array facing due South.

2. All components securely fastened.

3. Deviations of site conditions from those assumed during design.

C. Documentation of Integrity of Assembly and Installation

1. All components, spares, tools and documentation delivered.

2. Packing materials and shipping restraints removed.

3. Shipping damage documented and repaired.

4. All mechanical connections made as designed.

5. Power and control wiring installed per design.

6. Equipment ground(s) verified with ohm-meter.

7. Wiring connections secure.

8. Record as-built modifications of design or additions to the design.

D. Provide commissioning of complete system per specification section 269950. All commissioning work shall be coordinated with the Owner’s Commissioning Agent.

3.2 SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Follow the applicable provisions contained within article 690 of the National Electrical Code for Solar Photovoltaic systems.

B. Label all components accordingly and ensure that each junction box and each piece of equipment has the required warning signs including that required by NEC article 690.35 F

C. Do not mix circuits of the photovoltaic system with circuits of any other system within the building.

D. Provide Grounding of the PV system per the drawings and in accordance with NEC article.

E. Provide lightning arrestors at each combi-switch installed to protect interior electrical equipment and as recommended by the manufacturer of the PV system.

F. Clearly identify the integral inverter output AC breaker as the ‘Photovoltaic System Disconnect’

G. Provide disconnects rated for AC or DC respectively integral with the inverter. Mark the AC disconnect as the “Photovoltaic System Disconnect”.

D263143 1197


3.3 SYSTEM MONITORING

A. Sunny Webbox shall broadcast inverter and array data to the Binghamton University LAN. The Flashview software will be downloaded to an owner provided PC. The software shall be personalized to provide the following data;

1. AC volts output; Phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral.

2. AC current output; Phase-to-phase and phase-to neutral.

3. DC volts input from each string at each combiner box.

4. DC current input from each string at each combiner box.

5. KW input from each string at each combiner box.

6. Overall DC input.

7. KW output; line and total.

8. Line frequency.

9. DC KW.

10. PV input voltage.

11. Inverter operating status.

12. Main fault.

13. Drive fault.

14. Voltage fault.

15. Grid fault.

16. Temperature fault.

17. System fault.

18. System warnings.

19. PVM status codes.

20. Data shall be available from a standard internet connection with Adobe Flash Player and either Windows Internet Explorer V6, Opera v9 or Firefox v 1.5 operating systems.

21. PV system faults shall prompt e-mail alerts to Binghamton University personnel immediately upon detection.

22. Report downloading shall also be available from the owner provided PC or through regular e-mail schedule.

B. Provide testing of connection and web-based service.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform the following:

1. Inspect PV system installation, including wiring, components, connections, and equipment. Test and adjust components and equipment.

D2631431198


2. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written

instructions.

3. Assist in field testing of equipment, including pretesting and adjusting of equipment and components.

B. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

C. Provide commissioning of complete system per specification section 269950.

D. Provide NYSERDA Certification for an Approved Installation.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION AND WARRANTY SERVICE

A. Engage an authorized service representative to train owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and monitor equipment.

B. Provide 2 years of basic annual maintenance and warranty service from a factory authorized technician for the entire PV system. For this time period the owner’s maintenance personnel shall provide “hands-off” monitoring only and report all issues to the factory technician for adjustment or repair. Only actions considered emergency measures, as approved by the factory technician, shall be performed on the PV system by maintenance personnel.

C. Include an option to extend maintenance and warranty service beyond the 2 year period if desired by the owner at the end of this period.

D. All PV equipment to have the manufacturer’s standard warranty.


D263143 1199


D2631431200

Section 263213 - 1 Engine Generators

SECTION 263213 ENGINE GENERATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes packaged engine-generator sets for emergency standby power supply with the following features:

1. Gas engine. 2. Unit-mounted cooling system. 3. Remote-mounting control and monitoring. 4. Performance requirements for sensitive loads. 5. Outdoor enclosure.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Section 263600 "Transfer Switches" for transfer switches including sensors and relays to initiate automatic-starting and -stopping signals for engine-generator sets.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Operational Bandwidth: The total variation from the lowest to highest value of a parameter over the range of conditions indicated, expressed as a percentage of the nominal value of the parameter.

B. NG: Natural Gas.


A. Product Data: For each type of packaged engine generator indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. In addition, include the following:

1. Thermal damage curve for generator. 2. Time-current characteristic curves for generator protective device.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

D263143 1201


1. Dimensioned outline plan and elevation drawings of engine-generator set and other components specified.

2. Design Calculations: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases.

3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Detail fabrication, including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include base weights.

4. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Source quality-control test reports.

1. Certified summary of prototype-unit test report. 2. Certified Test Reports: For components and accessories that are equivalent, but not

identical, to those tested on prototype unit. 3. Certified Summary of Performance Tests: Certify compliance with specified requirement

to meet performance criteria for sensitive loads. 4. Report of factory test on units to be shipped for this Project, showing evidence of

compliance with specified requirements. 5. Report of sound generation. 6. Report of exhaust emissions showing compliance with applicable regulations. 7. Certified Torsional Vibration Compatibility: Comply with NFPA 110.

B. Field quality-control test reports.

C. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For packaged engine generators to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. List of tools and replacement items recommended to be stored at Project for ready access. Include part and drawing numbers, current unit prices, and source of supply.

1.7 MATERIALS MAINTENANCE SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Fuses: One for every 10 of each type and rating, but no fewer than one of each. 2. Indicator Lamps: Two for every six of each type used, but no fewer than two of each. 3. Filters: One set each of lubricating oil, fuel, and combustion-air filters.

D2631431202



A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.

1. Maintenance Proximity: Not more than four hours' normal travel time from Installer's place of business to Project site.

2. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for vibration isolators and seismic restraints of engine skid mounts, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer. Maintain, within 200 miles of Project site, a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance repairs.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain packaged generator sets and auxiliary components through one source from a single manufacturer.


E. Comply with ASME B15.1.


G. Comply with NFPA 70.

H. Comply with NFPA 99.

I. Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1 emergency power supply system.

J. Comply with UL 2200.

K. Engine Exhaust Emissions: Comply with applicable state and local government requirements.

L. Noise Emission: Comply with applicable state and local government requirements for maximum noise level at adjacent property boundaries due to sound emitted by generator set including engine, engine exhaust, engine cooling-air intake and discharge, and other components of installation.


A. Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of electrical service.

D263143 1203


2. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Owner's written permission.

B. Environmental Conditions: Engine-generator system shall withstand the following environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of performance capability:

1. Ambient Temperature: Minus 15 to plus 95 deg F. 2. Relative Humidity: 0 to 95 percent. 3. Altitude: Sea level to 3,000ft.

C. Unusual Service Conditions: Engine-generator equipment and installation are required to operate under the following conditions:

1.10 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases for package engine generators. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with concrete.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of packaged engine generators and associated auxiliary components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


2.2 ENGINE-GENERATOR SET

A. Factory-assembled and -tested, engine-generator set.

B. Mounting Frame: Maintain alignment of mounted components without depending on concrete foundation; and have lifting attachments.

1. Rigging Diagram: Inscribed on metal plate permanently attached to mounting frame to indicate location and lifting capacity of each lifting attachment and generator-set center of gravity.

C. Capacities and Characteristics:

1. Power Output Ratings: Nominal ratings as indicated, with capacity as required to operate as a unit as evidenced by records of prototype testing.

D2631431204


2. Output Connections: Three-phase, four wire. 3. Nameplates: For each major system component to identify manufacturer's name and

address, and model and serial number of component.

D. Generator-Set Performance for Sensitive Loads:

1. Oversizing generator compared with the rated power output of the engine is permissible to meet specified performance.

a. Nameplate Data for Oversized Generator: Show ratings required by the Contract Documents rather than ratings that would normally be applied to generator size installed.

2. Steady-State Voltage Operational Bandwidth: 1 percent of rated output voltage from no load to full load.

3. Transient Voltage Performance: Not more than 10 percent variation for 50 percent step-load increase or decrease. Voltage shall recover and remain within the steady-state operating band within 0.5 second.

4. Steady-State Frequency Operational Bandwidth: Plus or minus 0.25 percent of rated frequency from no load to full load.

5. Steady-State Frequency Stability: When system is operating at any constant load within the rated load, there shall be no random speed variations outside the steady-state operational band and no hunting or surging of speed.

6. Transient Frequency Performance: Less than 2-Hz variation for 50 percent step-load increase or decrease. Frequency shall recover and remain within the steady-state operating band within three seconds.

7. Output Waveform: At no load, harmonic content measured line to neutral shall not exceed 2 percent total with no slot ripple. Telephone influence factor, determined according to NEMA MG 1, shall not exceed 50 percent.

8. Sustained Short-Circuit Current: For a 3-phase, bolted short circuit at system output terminals, system shall supply a minimum of 300 percent of rated full-load current for not less than 10 seconds and then clear the fault automatically, without damage to winding insulation or other generator system components.

9. Excitation System: Performance shall be unaffected by voltage distortion caused by nonlinear load.

a. Provide permanent magnet excitation for power source to voltage regulator.

10. Start Time: Comply with NFPA 110, Type 10, system requirements.

2.3 ENGINE

A. Fuel: Natural gas.

B. Rated Engine Speed: 1800 rpm.

C. Maximum Piston Speed for Four-Cycle Engines: 2250 fpm.

D. Lubrication System: The following items are mounted on engine or skid:

D263143 1205


1. Filter and Strainer: Rated to remove 90 percent of particles 5 micrometers and smaller while passing full flow.

2. Thermostatic Control Valve: Control flow in system to maintain optimum oil temperature. Unit shall be capable of full flow and is designed to be fail-safe.

3. Crankcase Drain: Arranged for complete gravity drainage to an easily removable container with no disassembly and without use of pumps, siphons, special tools, or appliances.

E. Engine Fuel System:

1. Dual Natural Gas with LP-Gas Backup (Vapor-Withdrawal) System:

a. Carburetor. b. Secondary Gas Regulators: One for each fuel type. c. Fuel-Shutoff Solenoid Valves: One for each fuel source. d. Flexible Fuel Connectors: One for each fuel source.

F. Coolant Jacket Heater: Electric-immersion type, factory installed in coolant jacket system. Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1 equipment for heater capacity.

G. Governor: Adjustable isochronous, with speed sensing.

H. Cooling System: Closed loop, liquid cooled, with radiator factory mounted on engine-generator-set mounting frame and integral engine-driven coolant pump.

1. Coolant: Solution of 50 percent ethylene-glycol-based antifreeze and 50 percent water, with anticorrosion additives as recommended by engine manufacturer.

2. Size of Radiator: Adequate to contain expansion of total system coolant from cold start to 110 percent load condition.

3. Expansion Tank: Constructed of welded steel plate and rated to withstand maximum closed-loop coolant system pressure for engine used. Equip with gage glass and petcock.

4. Temperature Control: Self-contained, thermostatic-control valve modulates coolant flow automatically to maintain optimum constant coolant temperature as recommended by engine manufacturer.

5. Coolant Hose: Flexible assembly with inside surface of nonporous rubber and outer covering of aging-, ultraviolet-, and abrasion-resistant fabric.

a. Rating: 50-psigmaximum working pressure with coolant at 180 deg F, and noncollapsible under vacuum.

b. End Fittings: Flanges or steel pipe nipples with clamps to suit piping and equipment connections.

I. Muffler/Silencer: Residential type, sized as recommended by engine manufacturer and selected with exhaust piping system to not exceed engine manufacturer's engine backpressure requirements.

1. Minimum sound attenuation of 18 dB at 500 Hz. 2. Sound level measured at a distance of 10 feet from exhaust discharge after installation is

complete shall be 95 dBA or less.

D2631431206


J. Air-Intake Filter: Standard-duty, engine-mounted air cleaner with replaceable dry-filter element and "blocked filter” indicator.

K. Starting System: 12-V electric, with negative ground.

1. Components: Sized so they will not be damaged during a full engine-cranking cycle with ambient temperature at maximum specified in Part 1 "Project Conditions” Article.

2. Cranking Motor: Heavy-duty unit that automatically engages and releases from engine flywheel without binding.

3. Cranking Cycle: As required by NFPA 110 for system level specified. 4. Battery: Adequate capacity within ambient temperature range specified in Part 1 "Project

Conditions” Article to provide specified cranking cycle at least three times without recharging.

5. Battery Cable: Size as recommended by engine manufacturer for cable length indicated. Include required interconnecting conductors and connection accessories.

6. Battery-Charging Alternator: Factory mounted on engine with solid-state voltage regulation and 35-A minimum continuous rating.

7. Battery Charger: Current-limiting, automatic-equalizing and float-charging type. Unit shall comply with UL 1236 and include the following features:

a. Operation: Equalizing-charging rate of 10 A shall be initiated automatically after battery has lost charge until an adjustable equalizing voltage is achieved at battery terminals. Unit shall then be automatically switched to a lower float-charging mode and shall continue to operate in that mode until battery is discharged again.

b. Automatic Temperature Compensation: Adjust float and equalize voltages for variations in ambient temperature from minus 40 deg C to plus 60 deg C to prevent overcharging at high temperatures and undercharging at low temperatures.

c. Automatic Voltage Regulation: Maintain constant output voltage regardless of input voltage variations up to plus or minus 10 percent.

d. Ammeter and Voltmeter: Flush mounted in door. Meters shall indicate charging rates.

e. Safety Functions: Sense abnormally low battery voltage and close contacts providing low battery voltage indication on control and monitoring panel. Sense high battery voltage and loss of ac input or dc output of battery charger. Either condition shall close contacts that provide a battery-charger malfunction indication at system control and monitoring panel.

f. Enclosure and Mounting: NEMA 250, Type 1, wall-mounted cabinet.

2.4 CONTROL AND MONITORING

A. Automatic Starting System Sequence of Operation: When mode-selector switch on the control and monitoring panel is in the automatic position, remote-control contacts in one or more separate automatic transfer switches initiate starting and stopping of generator set. When mode-selector switch is switched to the on position, generator set starts. The off position of same switch initiates generator-set shutdown. When generator set is running, specified system or equipment failures or derangements automatically shut down generator set and initiate alarms. Operation of a remote emergency-stop switch also shuts down generator set.

D263143 1207


B. Configuration: Operating and safety indications, protective devices, basic system controls, and engine gages shall be grouped in a common wall-mounted control and monitoring panel.

C. Configuration: Operating and safety indications, protective devices, basic system controls, engine gages, instrument transformers, generator disconnect switch or circuit breaker, and other indicated components shall be grouped in a combination control and power panel. Control and monitoring section of panel shall be isolated from power sections by steel barriers. Panel features shall include the following:

1. Wall-Mounting Cabinet Construction: Rigid, self-supporting steel unit complying with NEMA ICS 6. Power bus shall be copper. Bus, bus supports, control wiring, and temperature rise shall comply with UL 891.

2. Current and Potential Transformers: Instrument accuracy class.

D. Indicating and Protective Devices and Controls: As required by NFPA 110 for Level 1 system, and the following:

1. AC voltmeter. 2. AC ammeter. 3. AC frequency meter. 4. DC voltmeter (alternator battery charging). 5. Engine-coolant temperature gage. 6. Engine lubricating-oil pressure gage. 7. Running-time meter. 8. Ammeter-voltmeter, phase-selector switch (es). 9. Generator-voltage adjusting rheostat.

E. Supporting Items: Include sensors, transducers, terminals, relays, and other devices and include wiring required to support specified items. Locate sensors and other supporting items on engine or generator, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Common Remote Audible Alarm: Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1 systems. Include necessary contacts and terminals in control and monitoring panel.

1. Overcrank shutdown. 2. Coolant low-temperature alarm. 3. Control switch not in auto position. 4. Battery-charger malfunction alarm. 5. Battery low-voltage alarm.

G. Remote Alarm Annunciator: Comply with NFPA 99. An LED labeled with proper alarm conditions shall identify each alarm event and a common audible signal shall sound for each alarm condition. Silencing switch in face of panel shall silence signal without altering visual indication. Connect so that after an alarm is silenced, clearing of initiating condition will reactivate alarm until silencing switch is reset. Cabinet and faceplate are surface- or flush-mounting type to suit mounting conditions indicated.

H. Remote Emergency-Stop Switch: Flush; wall mounted, unless otherwise indicated; and labeled. Push button shall be protected from accidental operation.

D2631431208


2.5 GENERATOR OVERCURRENT AND FAULT PROTECTION

A. Generator Circuit Breaker: Molded-case, thermal-magnetic type; 100 percent rated; complying with NEMA AB 1 and UL 489.

1. Tripping Characteristic: Designed specifically for generator protection. 2. Trip Rating: Matched to generator rating. 3. Shunt Trip: Connected to trip breaker when generator set is shut down by other protective

devices. 4. Mounting: Adjacent to or integrated with control and monitoring panel.

B. Ground-Fault Indication: Comply with NFPA 70, "Emergency System” signals for ground-fault. Integrate ground-fault alarm indication with other generator-set alarm indications.

2.6 GENERATOR, EXCITER, AND VOLTAGE REGULATOR

A. Comply with NEMA MG 1.

B. Drive: Generator shaft shall be directly connected to engine shaft. Exciter shall be rotated integrally with generator rotor.

C. Electrical Insulation: Class H or Class F.

D. Stator-Winding Leads: Brought out to terminal box to permit future reconnection for other voltages if required.

E. Construction shall prevent mechanical, electrical, and thermal damage due to vibration, over speed up to 125 percent of rating, and heat during operation at 110 percent of rated capacity.

F. Enclosure: Drip proof.

G. Voltage Regulator: Solid-state type, separate from exciter, providing performance as specified.

1. Adjusting rheostat on control and monitoring panel shall provide plus or minus 5 percent adjustment of output-voltage operating band.

H. Windings: Two-thirds pitch stator winding and fully linked amortisseur winding.

I. Subtransient Reactance: 12 percent, maximum.

2.7 OUTDOOR GENERATOR-SET ENCLOSURE

A. Description: Vandal-resistant, weatherproof steel or aluminum housing, wind resistant up to 180 mph. Multiple panels shall be lockable and provide adequate access to components requiring maintenance. Panels shall be removable by one person without tools. Instruments and control shall be mounted within enclosure.

B. Description: Prefabricated or pre-engineered walk-in enclosure with the following features:

D263143 1209


1. Construction: Galvanized-steel, metal-clad, integral structural-steel-framed building erected on concrete foundation.

2. Structural Design and Anchorage: Comply with ASCE 7 for wind loads. 3. Space Heater: Thermostatically controlled and sized to prevent condensation. 4. Louvers: Equipped with bird screen and filter arranged to permit air circulation when

engine is not running while excluding exterior dust, birds, and rodents. 5. Hinged Doors: With padlocking provisions. 6. Ventilation: Louvers equipped with bird screen and filter arranged to permit air

circulation while excluding exterior dust, birds, and rodents. 7. Thermal Insulation: Manufacturer's standard materials and thickness selected in

coordination with space heater to maintain winter interior temperature within operating limits required by engine-generator-set components.

8. Muffler Location: Within enclosure.

C. Engine Cooling Airflow through Enclosure: Maintain temperature rise of system components within required limits when unit operates at 110 percent of rated load for 2 hours with ambient temperature at top of range specified in system service conditions.

1. Louvers: Fixed-engine, cooling-air inlet and discharge. Storm-proof and drainable louvers prevent entry of rain and snow.

2. Automatic Dampers: At engine cooling-air inlet and discharge. Dampers shall be closed to reduce enclosure heat loss in cold weather when unit is not operating.

D. Interior Lights with Switch: Factory-wired, vapor proof-type fixtures within housing; arranged to illuminate controls and accessible interior. Arrange for external electrical connection.

1. AC lighting system and connection point for operation when remote source is available. 2. DC lighting system for operation when remote source and generator are both unavailable.

E. Convenience Outlets: Factory wired, GFCI. Arrange for external electrical connection.

2.8 VIBRATION ISOLATION DEVICES

A. Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with seismic restraint.

1. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due to wind loads or if weight is removed; factory-drilled baseplate bonded to 1/4-inch-thick, elastomeric isolator pad attached to baseplate underside; and adjustable equipment mounting and leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation.

2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of compressed height of the spring at rated load.

3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of required deflection at rated load. 4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without

deformation or failure.

D2631431210


2.9 FINISHES

A. Indoor and Outdoor Enclosures and Components: Manufacturer's standard finish over corrosion-resistant pretreatment and compatible primer.


A. Prototype Testing: Factory test engine-generator set using same engine model, constructed of identical or equivalent components and equipped with identical or equivalent accessories.

1. Tests: Comply with NFPA 110, Level 1 Energy Converters and with IEEE 115.

B. Project-Specific Equipment Tests: Before shipment, factory test engine-generator set and other system components and accessories manufactured specifically for this Project. Perform tests at rated load and power factor. Include the following tests:

1. Test components and accessories furnished with installed unit that are not identical to those on tested prototype to demonstrate compatibility and reliability.

2. Full load run. 3. Maximum power. 4. Voltage regulation. 5. Transient and steady-state governing. 6. Single-step load pickup. 7. Safety shutdown. 8. Provide 14 days' advance notice of tests and opportunity for observation of tests by

Owner's representative. 9. Report factory test results within 10 days of completion of test.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, equipment bases, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting packaged engine-generator performance.

B. Examine roughing-in of piping systems and electrical connections. Verify actual locations of connections before packaged engine-generator installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with packaged engine-generator manufacturers' written installation and alignment instructions and with NFPA 110.

D263143 1211


B. Install packaged engine generator to provide access, without removing connections or accessories, for periodic maintenance.

C. Install packaged engine generator with restrained spring isolators having a minimum deflection of 1 inch on 4-inch-high concrete base. Secure sets to anchor bolts installed in concrete bases. Concrete base construction is specified in Section 260548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

D. Install Schedule 40, black steel piping with welded joints for cooling water piping between engine-generator set and heat exchanger. Piping materials and installation requirements are specified in Section 232113 "Hydronic Piping."

E. Install Schedule 40, black steel piping with welded joints and connect to engine muffler. Install thimble at wall. Piping shall be same diameter as muffler outlet. Flexible connectors and steel piping materials and installation requirements are specified in Section 232116 Hydronic Piping Specialties."

1. Install condensate drain piping to muffler drain outlet full size of drain connection with a shutoff valve, stainless-steel flexible connector, and Schedule 40, black steel pipe with welded joints. Flexible connectors and piping materials and installation requirements are specified in Section 232116 Hydronic Piping Specialties."

F. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by equipment manufacturers but not specified to be factory mounted.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties.

B. Connect fuel, cooling-system, and exhaust-system piping adjacent to packaged engine generator to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect cooling-system water piping to engine-generator set and heat exchanger with flexible connectors.

D. Connect engine exhaust pipe to engine with flexible connector.

E. Connect fuel piping to engines with a gate valve and union and flexible connector.

1. Natural-gas piping, valves, and specialties for gas distribution are specified in Section 231123 "Facility Natural-Gas Piping."

F. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

G. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

D2631431212


3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components according to Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" and Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. Report results in writing.


1. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection for "AC Generators and for Emergency Systems" specified in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. NFPA 110 Acceptance Tests: Perform tests required by NFPA 110 that are additional to those specified here including, but not limited to, single-step full-load pickup test.

3. Battery Tests: Equalize charging of battery cells according to manufacturer's written instructions. Record individual cell voltages.

a. Measure charging voltage and voltages between available battery terminals for full-charging and float-charging conditions. Check electrolyte level and specific gravity under both conditions.

b. Test for contact integrity of all connectors. Perform an integrity load test and a capacity load test for the battery.

c. Verify acceptance of charge for each element of the battery after discharge. d. Verify that measurements are within manufacturer's specifications.

4. Battery-Charger Tests: Verify specified rates of charge for both equalizing and float-charging conditions.

5. System Integrity Tests: Methodically verify proper installation, connection, and integrity of each element of engine-generator system before and during system operation. Check for air, exhaust, and fluid leaks.

6. Exhaust-System Back-Pressure Test: Use a manometer with a scale exceeding 40-inch wg. Connect to exhaust line close to engine exhaust manifold. Verify that back pressure at full-rated load is within manufacturer's written allowable limits for the engine.

7. Exhaust Emissions Test: Comply with applicable government test criteria. 8. Voltage and Frequency Transient Stability Tests: Use recording oscilloscope to measure

voltage and frequency transients for 50 and 100 percent step-load increases and decreases, and verify that performance is as specified.

9. Harmonic-Content Tests: Measure harmonic content of output voltage under 25 percent and at 100 percent of rated linear load. Verify that harmonic content is within specified limits.

10. Noise Level Tests: Measure A-weighted level of noise emanating from generator-set installation, including engine exhaust and cooling-air intake and discharge, at four locations on the property line, and compare measured levels with required values.

C. Coordinate tests with tests for transfer switches and run them concurrently.

D263143 1213


D. Test instruments shall have been calibrated within the last 12 months, traceable to standards of NIST, and adequate for making positive observation of test results. Make calibration records available for examination on request.

E. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

F. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.

G. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

H. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest re-inspect as specified above.

I. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until specified requirements are met.

J. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and measured insulation resistances, time delays, and other values and observations. Attach a label or tag to each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests.

K. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each power wiring termination and each bus connection. Remove all access panels so terminations and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

1. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

2. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

3. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies terminations and connections checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken and observations after remedial action.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain packaged engine generators.


D2631431214

Section 263600 - 1 Transfer Switches

SECTION 263600 TRANSFER SWITCHES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes transfer switches rated 600 V and less, including the following:

1. Automatic transfer switches. 2. Remote annunciation systems.

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals Format: All submittals shall be in PDF format for ease in sharing electronically.

B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, weights, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

C. Shop Drawings: Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details showing minimum clearances, conductor entry provisions, gutter space, installed features and devices, and material lists for each switch specified.

1. Single-Line Diagram: Show connections between transfer switch, bypass/isolation switch, power sources, and load; and show interlocking provisions for each combined transfer switch and bypass/isolation switch.

D. Field quality-control test reports.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Features and operating sequences, both automatic and manual. 2. List of all factory settings of relays; provide relay-setting and calibration instructions,

including software, where applicable.

D263143 1215



A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Maintain a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance repairs within a response period of less than eight hours from time of notification.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain automatic transfer switches through one source from a single manufacturer.


E. Comply with NEMA ICS 1.


G. Comply with NFPA 99.

H. Comply with NFPA 110.

I. Comply with UL 1008 unless requirements of these Specifications are stricter.


A. Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service:

1. Notify Construction Manager no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of electrical service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Construction Manager's written permission.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

D2631431216


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Contactor Transfer Switches:

a. Emerson; ASCO Power Technologies, LP. b. GE Zenith Controls. c. Russelectric, Inc.

2.2 GENERAL TRANSFER-SWITCH PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

A. Indicated Current Ratings: Apply as defined in UL 1008 for continuous loading and total system transfer, including tungsten filament lamp loads not exceeding 30 percent of switch ampere rating, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Tested Fault-Current Closing and Withstand Ratings: Adequate for duty imposed by protective devices at installation locations in Project under the fault conditions indicated, based on testing according to UL 1008.

1. Where transfer switch includes internal fault-current protection, rating of switch and trip unit combination shall exceed indicated fault-current value at installation location.

C. Solid-State Controls: Repetitive accuracy of all settings shall be plus or minus 2 percent or better over an operating temperature range of minus 20 to plus 70 deg C.

D. Resistance to Damage by Voltage Transients: Components shall meet or exceed voltage-surge withstand capability requirements when tested according to IEEE C62.41. Components shall meet or exceed voltage-impulse withstand test of NEMA ICS 1.

E. Electrical Operation: Accomplish by a nonfused, momentarily energized solenoid or electric-motor-operated mechanism, mechanically and electrically interlocked in both directions.

F. Switch Characteristics: Designed for continuous-duty repetitive transfer of full-rated current between active power sources.

1. Limitation: Switches using molded-case switches or circuit breakers or insulated-case circuit-breaker components are not acceptable.

2. Switch Action: Double throw; mechanically held in both directions. 3. Contacts: Silver composition or silver alloy for load-current switching. Conventional

automatic transfer-switch units, rated 225 A and higher, shall have separate arcing contacts.

G. Neutral Terminal: Solid and fully rated, unless otherwise indicated.

D263143 1217


H. Annunciation, Control, and Programming Interface Components: Devices at transfer switches for communicating with remote programming devices, annunciators, or annunciator and control panels shall have communication capability matched with remote device.

I. Factory Wiring: Train and bundle factory wiring and label, consistent with Shop Drawings, either by color-code or by numbered or lettered wire and cable tape markers at terminations. Color-coding and wire and cable tape markers are specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Designated Terminals: Pressure type, suitable for types and sizes of field wiring indicated.

2. Power-Terminal Arrangement and Field-Wiring Space: Suitable for top, side, or bottom entrance of feeder conductors as indicated.

3. Control Wiring: Equipped with lugs suitable for connection to terminal strips.

J. Enclosures: General-purpose NEMA 250, Type 1, complying with NEMA ICS 6 and UL 508, unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES

A. Comply with Level 1 equipment according to NFPA 110.

B. Switching Arrangement: Double-throw type, incapable of pauses or intermediate position stops during normal functioning, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Manual Switch Operation: Under load, with door closed and with either or both sources energized. Transfer time is same as for electrical operation. Control circuit automatically disconnects from electrical operator during manual operation.

D. Manual Switch Operation: Unloaded. Control circuit automatically disconnects from electrical operator during manual operation.

E. Signal-Before-Transfer Contacts: A set of normally open/normally closed dry contacts operates in advance of retransfer to normal source. Interval is adjustable from 1 to 30 seconds.

F. Digital Communication Interface: Matched to capability of remote annunciator or annunciator and control panel.

G. Motor Disconnect and Timing Relay: Controls designate starters so they disconnect motors before transfer and reconnect them selectively at an adjustable time interval after transfer. Control connection to motor starters is through wiring external to automatic transfer switch. Time delay for reconnecting individual motor loads is adjustable between 1 and 60 seconds, and settings are as indicated. Relay contacts handling motor-control circuit inrush and seal currents are rated for actual currents to be encountered.

D2631431218


H. Programmed Neutral Switch Position: Switch operator has a programmed neutral position arranged to provide a midpoint between the two working switch positions, with an intentional, time-controlled pause at midpoint during transfer. Pause is adjustable from 0.5 to 30 seconds minimum and factory set for 0.5 second, unless otherwise indicated. Time delay occurs for both transfer directions. Pause is disabled unless both sources are live.

I. Automatic Transfer-Switch Features:

1. Undervoltage Sensing for Each Phase of Normal Source: Sense low phase-to-ground voltage on each phase. Pickup voltage shall be adjustable from 85 to 100 percent of nominal, and dropout voltage is adjustable from 75 to 98 percent of pickup value. Factory set for pickup at 90 percent and dropout at 85 percent.

2. Voltage/Frequency Lockout Relay: Prevent premature transfer to generator. Pickup voltage shall be adjustable from 85 to 100 percent of nominal. Factory set for pickup at 90 percent. Pickup frequency shall be adjustable from 90 to 100 percent of nominal. Factory set for pickup at 95 percent.

3. Time Delay for Retransfer to Normal Source: Adjustable from 0 to 30 minutes, and factory set for 10 minutes to automatically defeat delay on loss of voltage or sustained undervoltage of emergency source, provided normal supply has been restored.

4. Test Switch: Simulate normal-source failure. 5. Switch-Position Pilot Lights: Indicate source to which load is connected. 6. Source-Available Indicating Lights: Supervise sources via transfer-switch normal- and

emergency-source sensing circuits.

a. Normal Power Supervision: Green light with nameplate engraved "Normal Source Available."

b. Emergency Power Supervision: Red light with nameplate engraved "Emergency Source Available."

7. Unassigned Auxiliary Contacts: Two normally open, single-pole, double-throw contacts for each switch position, rated 10 A at 240-V ac. These contacts shall be utilized for interface CCS. Coordinate with Building Automation System requirement. Minimum signals to be provided: a. Normal Source Acceptable b. Emergency Source Acceptable c. Status of Transfer Switch

8. Transfer Override Switch: Overrides automatic retransfer control so automatic transfer switch will remain connected to emergency power source regardless of condition of normal source. Pilot light indicates override status.

J. All instructions and controller settings shall be easily accessible, readable and accomplished

without the use of codes, calculations, or instruction manuals.

K. N. LED indicating lights (16 mm industrial grade, type 12) shall be provided; one to indicate when the ATS is connected to the normal source (green) and one to indicate when the ATS is connected to the emergency source (red).

D263143 1219


L. LED indicating lights (16 mm industrial grade, type 12) shall be provided and energized by controller outputs. The lights shall provide true source availability of the normal and emergency sources, as determined by the voltage sensing trip and reset settings for each source.


A. Factory test and inspect components, assembled switches, and associated equipment. Ensure proper operation. Check transfer time and voltage, frequency, and time-delay settings for compliance with specified requirements. Perform dielectric strength test complying with NEMA ICS 1.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Design each fastener and support to carry load indicated by seismic requirements and according to seismic-restraint details. See Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

1. Wall mounted.

B. Annunciator and Control Panel Mounting: on wall, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Identify components according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

D. Set field-adjustable intervals and delays, relays, and engine exerciser clock.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Wiring to Remote Components: Match type and number of cables and conductors to control and communication requirements of transfer switches as recommended by manufacturer. Increase raceway sizes at no additional cost to Owner if necessary to accommodate required wiring.

B. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

C. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

D2631431220


B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. Report results in writing.

C. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in testing.

2. After installing equipment and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements.


4. Measure insulation resistance phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with insulation-resistance tester. Include external annunciation and control circuits. Use test voltages and procedure recommended by manufacturer. Comply with manufacturer's specified minimum resistance.

a. Check for electrical continuity of circuits and for short circuits. b. Inspect for physical damage, proper installation and connection, and integrity of

barriers, covers, and safety features. c. Verify that manual transfer warnings are properly placed. d. Perform manual transfer operation.

5. After energizing circuits, demonstrate interlocking sequence and operational function for each switch at least three times.

a. Simulate power failures of normal source to automatic transfer switches and of emergency source with normal source available.

b. Simulate loss of phase-to-ground voltage for each phase of normal source. c. Verify time-delay settings. d. Verify pickup and dropout voltages by data readout or inspection of control

settings. e. Test bypass/isolation unit functional modes and related automatic transfer-switch

operations. f. Perform contact-resistance test across main contacts and correct values exceeding

500 microhms and values for 1 pole deviating by more than 50 percent from other poles.

g. Verify proper sequence and correct timing of automatic engine starting, transfer time delay, retransfer time delay on restoration of normal power, and engine cool-down and shutdown.

6. Ground-Fault Tests: Coordinate with testing of ground-fault protective devices for power delivery from both sources.

a. Verify grounding connections and locations and ratings of sensors.

D263143 1221


D. Testing Agency's Tests and Inspections:

1. After installing equipment and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements.


3. Measure insulation resistance phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with insulation-resistance tester. Include external annunciation and control circuits. Use test voltages and procedure recommended by manufacturer. Comply with manufacturer's specified minimum resistance.

a. Check for electrical continuity of circuits and for short circuits. b. Inspect for physical damage, proper installation and connection, and integrity of

barriers, covers, and safety features. c. Verify that manual transfer warnings are properly placed. d. Perform manual transfer operation.

4. After energizing circuits, demonstrate interlocking sequence and operational function for each switch at least three times.

a. Simulate power failures of normal source to automatic transfer switches and of emergency source with normal source available.

b. Simulate loss of phase-to-ground voltage for each phase of normal source. c. Verify time-delay settings. d. Verify pickup and dropout voltages by data readout or inspection of control

settings. e. Test bypass/isolation unit functional modes and related automatic transfer-switch

operations. f. Perform contact-resistance test across main contacts and correct values exceeding

500 microhms and values for 1 pole deviating by more than 50 percent from other poles.

g. Verify proper sequence and correct timing of automatic engine starting, transfer time delay, retransfer time delay on restoration of normal power, and engine cool-down and shutdown.

5. Ground-Fault Tests: Coordinate with testing of ground-fault protective devices for power delivery from both sources.

a. Verify grounding connections and locations and ratings of sensors.

E. Coordinate tests with tests of generator and run them concurrently.

F. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and measured insulation and contact resistances and time delays. Attach a label or tag to each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests.

G. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

D2631431222


H. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each switch. Remove all access panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

1. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each switch 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

2. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

3. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies switches checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

I. Testing results shall be submitted in Megger Power Db format.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain transfer switches and related equipment as specified below. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."

B. Coordinate this training with that for generator equipment.


D263143 1223


D2631431224

Section 264113 - 1 Lightning Protection for Structures

SECTION 264113 LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR STRUCTURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes lightning protection for structures.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For air terminals and mounting accessories.

1. Layout of the lightning protection system, along with details of the components to be used in the installation.

2. Include indications for use of raceway, data on how concealment requirements will be met, and calculations required by NFPA 780 for bonding of grounded and isolated metal bodies.

C. Field quality-control reports.


A. Installer Qualifications: Certified by LPI as a Master Installer/Designer, trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.

B. System Certificate:

1. UL Master Label.

2. LPI System Certificate.

3. UL Master Label Recertification.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 780, "Definitions" Article.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. Comply with UL 96 and NFPA 780.

B. Roof-Mounted Air Terminals: NFPA 780, Class I, aluminum unless otherwise indicated.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

D263143 1225


2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements,

product name or designation or comparable product by one of the following:

a. East Coast Lightning Equipment Inc.

b. ERICO International Corporation.

c. Harger.

d. Heary Bros. Lightning Protection Co. Inc.

e. Independent Protection Co.

f. Preferred Lightning Protection.

g. Robbins Lightning, Inc.

h. Thompson Lightning Protection, Inc.

3. Air Terminals More than 24 Inches Long: With brace attached to the terminal at not less than half the height of the terminal.

4. Single-Membrane, Roof-Mounted Air Terminals: Designed specifically for single-membrane roof system materials. Comply with requirements in Division 07 roofing Sections.

C. Main and Bonding Conductors: Aluminum unless otherwise indicated on drawings as ‘Copper’.

D. Ground Loop Conductor: The same size and type as the main conductor except tinned.

E. Ground Rods: Copper-clad, 5/8 inch in diameter by 96 inches long.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install lightning protection components and systems according to UL 96A and NFPA 780.

B. Conceal the following conductors:

1. System conductors.

2. Down conductors.

3. Interior conductors.

4. Conductors within normal view of exterior locations at grade within 200 feet of building.

C. Cable Connections: Use crimped or bolted connections for all conductor splices and connections between conductors and other components. Use exothermic-welded connections in underground portions of the system.

D. Cable Connections: Use exothermic-welded connections for all conductor splices and connections between conductors and other components.

D2631431226


1. Exception: In single-ply membrane roofing, exothermic-welded

connections may be used only below the roof level.

E. Air Terminals on Single-Ply Membrane Roofing: Comply with roofing membrane and adhesive manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Bond extremities of vertical metal bodies exceeding 60 feet in length to lightning protection components.

G. Ground Loop: Install ground-level, potential equalization conductor and extend around the perimeter of structure.

1. Bury ground ring not less than 24 inches from building foundation.

2. Bond ground terminals to the ground loop.

3. Bond grounded building systems to the ground loop conductor within 12 feet of grade level.

H. Bond lightning protection components with intermediate-level interconnection loop conductors to grounded metal bodies of building at 60-foot intervals.

3.2 CORROSION PROTECTION

A. Do not combine materials that can form an electrolytic couple that will accelerate corrosion in the presence of moisture unless moisture is permanently excluded from junction of such materials.

B. Use conductors with protective coatings where conditions cause deterioration or corrosion of conductors.


A. Notify Architect at least 48 hours in advance of inspection before concealing lightning protection components.

B. UL Inspection: Meet requirements to obtain a UL Master Label for system.

C. LPI System Inspection: Meet requirements to obtain an LPI System Certificate.


D263143 1227


D2631431228

Section 265100 - 1 Interior Lighting

SECTION 265100 INTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Interior lighting fixtures, lamps, ballasts and drivers. 2. Exit signs. 3. Lighting fixture supports.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 260923 "Lighting Control Devices" for automatic control of lighting, including time switches, photoelectric relays, occupancy sensors, and multipole lighting relays and contactors.

2. Section 262726 "Wiring Devices" for manual wall-box dimmers for incandescent lamps.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. BF: Ballast factor.

B. CCT: Correlated color temperature.

C. CRI: Color-rendering index.

D. HID: High-intensity discharge.

E. LED: Light emitting diode.

F. LER: Luminaire efficacy rating.

G. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.

H. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided.


A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:

1. Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions. 2. Ballast, including BF. 3. LED driver for LED light fixtures. 4. Energy-efficiency data. 5. Life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy-efficiency data for lamps and LED

sources.

D263143 1229


6. Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests, complying with IESNA Lighting Measurements Testing & Calculation Guides, of each lighting fixture type. The adjustment factors shall be for lamps, ballasts, and accessories identical to those indicated for the lighting fixture as applied in this Project.

a. Testing Agency Certified Data: For indicated fixtures, photometric data shall be certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining fixtures shall be certified by manufacturer.

b. Manufacturer Certified Data: Photometric data shall be certified by a manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

7. Light fixture cutsheet booklet complete with color light fixture catalog pages, lighting controls, light fixture layouts and lighting controls. 2 copies of the booklet are to be submitted.



A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1. Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project; use ANSI and manufacturers' codes.


A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by manufacturers' laboratories that are accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.


C. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products indicated on Drawings.

D2631431230


2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS

A. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures.

B. Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5 and NEMA LE 5A as applicable.

C. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

D. Sheet Metal Components: Steel unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.

E. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position.

F. Diffusers and Globes:

1. Lens shall be 100% virgin acrylic injection molded prismatic diffusers meeting the ASTM specifications for methacrylite molding compounds D.788-69A. Minimum lens thickness shall be 0.125”.

2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated.

G. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps and ballasts. Labels shall be located where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place.

1. Label shall include the following lamp and ballast characteristics:

a. "USE ONLY" and include specific lamp type. b. Lamp diameter code (T-4, T-5, T-8, T-12, etc.), tube configuration (twin, quad,

triple, etc.), base type, and nominal wattage for fluorescent. c. Start type (preheat, rapid start, instant start, etc.) for fluorescent luminaires. d. CCT and CRI for all luminaires.

2.3 DRIVERS FOR LED LIGHT FIXTURES

A. Ten-year operational life while operating with a case temperature range of 0 degrees C to 62 degrees C and 90 percent non-condensing relative humidity.

B. Designed and tested to withstand electrostatic discharges up to 15,000 V without impairment per IEC 801-2.

C. Electrolytic capacitors to operate at least 20 degrees C below the capacitor’s maximum temperature rating when the driver is under fully-loaded conditions and case temperature is 62 degrees C.

D. Maximum inrush current of 2 amperes for 120V and 277 V drivers.

E. Withstand up to a 4,000 volt surge without impairment of performance as defined by ANSI C62.41 Category A.

F. Manufactured in a facility that employ ESD reduction practices in compliance with ANSI/ESD S20.20.

G. Inaudible in a 27 dBA ambient.

H. No visible change in light output with a variation of +/- 10 percent line voltage input.

D263143 1231


I. Total Harmonic Distortion less than 10 percent and meet ANSI C82.11 maximum allowable THD requirements

J. Drivers to track evenly across

1. Multiple fixtures. 2. All light levels.

K. Compatibility of driver and LED light engine must be tested and ensured by driver manufacturer.

L. Driver Labels: Provide driver label stickers on each luminaire driver chamber/housing indicating the following information:

_____ V; Power Factor, _____; Temperature Rating ______All label lettering shall be minimum 1/8” text.

M. Driver disconnects: Provide in-line disconnects on all drivers to meet NEC 2008 Article 410.130(G). Lighting manufacturer shall provide “wire-nut” connections on the load side of the driver disconnects to facilitate driver replacement.

N. Power Factor: 90 percent, minimum.

O. Maximum drive current: 350mA.

P. Load regulation shall be +/-1% from no load to full load.

Q. Minimum Efficiency: 85%

R. Operating Temperature Range: -40C to 50C.

S. Minimum Rated Life: 50,000 hours

T. UL Class I or II output

U. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent.

V. Case temperature shall be rated for –40 deg C through +80 deg C and provided with thermal protection and self-limited short circuit and overload protection.

W. Output shall be isolated.

X. Driver Life Rating shall have less than 0.5% failure rate at the LED module’s maximum L70 rated life.

Y. Driver manufacturer to be an industry leader, such as Advance or approved equal.

Z. Comply with FCC 47 CFR part 15 non-consumer RFI/EMI standards.

AA. LED dimming driver.

1. Ten-year operational life while operating with a case temperature range of 0 degrees C to 62 degrees C and 90 percent non-condensing relative humidity.

2. Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) testing is done according to the IEC 801-2 standard (human body model). This testing is completed on all user accessible points. Devices that are not protected against static discharges can have intermittent performance or failure due to normal usage and handling (walking across carpet during periods of low humidity).

D2631431232


3. Designed and tested to withstand electrostatic discharges up to 15,000 V without impairment per IEC 801-2.

4. Long term driver failures are due to capacitors “drying up” which is exponentially related to operating temperature. Dimming drivers that run cooler or are made with components with higher temperature ratings will last longer.

5. Electrolytic capacitors are sensitive to heat in a dimming circuit. Their expected lifetime doubles for every 10 degrees C that the component operates below the capacitor’s rated operating temperature.

6. A component operated at 10 degrees C above the rated temperature will have HALF the life expectancy. A component operated at 20 degrees C above the rated temperature will have one quarter the life expectancy.

7. A component operated at 10 degrees C below the rated temperature will have DOUBLE the life expectancy. A component operated at 20 degrees C below the rated temperature will have quadruple the life expectancy.

8. The following statement ensures a minimum 10-year operating life under worst case field conditions

9. Electrolytic capacitors to operate at least 20 degrees C below the capacitor’s maximum temperature rating when the driver is under fully-loaded conditions and case temperature is 62 degrees C.

10. To reduce false circuit breaker tripping due to turn on inrush, the following statement ensures that electronic dimming ballast will meet NEMA inrush recommendations.

11. Maximum inrush current of 2 amperes for 120V and 277 V drivers. 12. Withstand up to a 4,000 volt surge without impairment of performance as defined by

ANSI C62.41 Category A. 13. During manufacturing, drivers are more susceptible to damage by Electrostatic Discharge

(ESD). A facility that does not meet this requirement could have excessive defective units delivered to a job site.

14. Manufactured in a facility that employ ESD reduction practices in compliance with ANSI/ESD S20.20.

15. This means that the driver will be inaudible in a general office space (30dBA is a quiet whisper at 5 feet).

16. Line voltage fluctuates throughout the day as equipment (i.e. equipment or other buildings in the vicinity) come on line. Line voltage fluctuations will cause noticeable changes in light output. The driver automatically compensates to variations in voltage to provide constant light output.

17. No visible change in light output with a variation of +/- 10 percent line voltage input. 18. Line voltage fluctuates throughout the day as equipment (i.e. equipment or other

buildings in the vicinity) come on line. Line voltage fluctuations will cause noticeable changes in light output. The driver automatically compensates to variations in voltage to provide constant light output.

19. Total Harmonic Distortion less than 10 percent and meet ANSI C82.11 maximum allowable THD requirements

20. In applications with multiple lamp lengths (15 feet pendant with 3 four foot fixtures and 1 three foot fixture), all drivers track together with even illumination.

21. Drivers to track evenly across 22. Multiple fixtures. 23. All light levels. 24. Compatibility of driver and LED light engine must be tested and ensured by driver

manufacturer.

D263143 1233


2.4 EXIT SIGNS

A. General Requirements for Exit Signs: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Internally Lighted Signs:

1. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 50,000 hours minimum rated lamp life.

2.5 INTERIOR AREA LED FIXTURES/LAMPS:

A. Kelvin temperature of in the range of 4000k to 4100k

B. 75 plus lumens per watt

C. CRI 85 or greater

D. 5-year warranty minimum with L70 of 50,000 hours or greater

E. Ability to be used in insulated ceilings

F. Occupancy sensors for each room

G. Modular design for field replacement of parts

H. Series parallel matrix for prevention of LED string outages (not applicable to exit lights and recessed can fixtures).

I. Tool less access to driver and LED modules

J. Cannot have LED pixilation (or commonly called bug eye effect)

K. UL certified up to 90F degrees operating temperature

2.6 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS

A. Comply with Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel- and angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.

B. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage.

C. Wires for Humid Spaces: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Composition 302 or 304, annealed stainless steel, 12 gage.

D. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.

E. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Lighting fixtures:

1. Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install lamps in each luminaire. 3. Align all fixtures in a given area in the same relative orientation from one fixture to the

next.

D2631431234


B. Temporary Lighting: If it is necessary, and approved by Architect, to use permanent luminaires for temporary lighting, install and energize the minimum number of luminaires necessary. When construction is sufficiently complete, remove the temporary luminaires, disassemble, clean thoroughly, install new lamps, and reinstall.

C. Remote Mounting of Ballasts or Drivers: Distance between the ballast and fixture shall not exceed that recommended by ballast manufacturer. Verify, with ballast manufacturers, maximum distance between ballast and luminaire.

D. Lay-in Ceiling Lighting Fixtures Supports: Use grid as a support element.

1. Install ceiling support system rods or wires, independent of the ceiling suspension devices, for each fixture. Locate not more than 6 inches from lighting fixture corners.

2. Support Clips: Fasten to lighting fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each fixture corner with clips that are UL listed for the application.

3. Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling plans or center in acoustical panel, and support fixtures independently with at least two 3/4-inch metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees.

E. Suspended Lighting Fixture Support:

1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging. 2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. 3. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for

suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end. 4. Do not use grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires or rods to

building structure.

F. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

G. Recessed compact fluorescent and 2x2 fluorescent luminaires shall be installed such that lamps are aligned in the same relative orientation from one fixture to the next.

H. Cleaning: All luminaires shall be thoroughly cleaned and clear from dust, paint, construction debris and fingerprints after all other trades are complete, but prior to the date of substantial completion.

I. Light fixture whips may be ½” flexible metallic conduit, limited to no longer than 72 inches in length.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labels with panel and circuit numbers on concealed junction and outlet boxes. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards.

B. Cleaning: All luminaires shall be thoroughly cleaned and clear from dust, paint, construction debris and fingerprints after all other trades are complete, but prior to the date of substantial completion.

D263143 1235


3.4 SPARE PARTS

A. 10% of each lamp type, minimum of five (5).

B. 10% of each ballast or driver, minimum of five (5).

C. 5% of each LED module type, minumum of two (2) of each. On projects with a large number of a single type, limit the number of spare parts as they will become outdated quickly.

D. 10% of replacement lenses and globes, minimum of three (3) of each. Note specifically to which luminaire types this applies and reference the spare parts in the luminaire schedule. If decorative bowls are large, confirm with the end user whether they have space to store these materials.

3.5 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Burn-in all lamps that require specific aging period to operate properly, prior to occupancy by Owner. Burn-in fluorescent and compact fluorescent lamps intended to be dimmed, for at least 100 hours at full voltage.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting aimable luminaires to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose. Some of this work may be required after dark.

1. Adjust aimable luminaires in the presence of Architect.

3.7 COMMISSIONING

A. Require that the lighting control elements be properly set and tested for optimal operation. Commissioning agent shall provide a report for the following systems (edit as required for the project):

1. Daylight harvesting 2. Occupancy sensors 3. Dimming Systems 4. Emergency relays

B. Engineering Service shall be invited to attend these sessions. Provide at least 7 days notice prior to any session.


D2631431236

Section 270526 - 1 Grounding And Bonding For Communications Systems

SECTION 270526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Grounding conductors. 2. Grounding connectors. 3. Grounding labeling.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. BCT: Bonding conductor for telecommunications.

B. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

C. TGB: Telecommunications grounding busbar.

D. TMGB: Telecommunications main grounding busbar.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.



A. As-Built Data: Plans showing as-built locations of grounding and bonding infrastructure, including the following:

B. Field quality-control reports.


A. Installer Qualifications: Cabling Installer must have personnel certified by BICSI on staff.

1. Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under the direct supervision of ITS Technician, who shall be present at all times when Work of this Section is performed at Project site.

2. Field Inspector: Currently registered by BICSI as ITS Installer 2 to perform the on-site inspection.

D263143 1237


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. Comply with J-STD-607-A.

2.2 CONDUCTORS


1. Harger Lightning and Grounding. 2. Panduit Corp. 3. Tyco Electronics Corp.

B. Comply with UL 486A-486B.

C. Insulated Conductors: Stranded copper wire, green or green with yellow stripe insulation, insulated for 600 V, and complying with UL 83.

1. Ground wire for custom-length equipment ground jumpers shall be No. 6 AWG, 19-strand, UL-listed, Type THHN wire.

2. Cable Tray Equipment Grounding Wire: No. 6 AWG.

D. Cable Tray Grounding Jumper:

1. Not smaller than No. 10 AWG and not longer than 12 inches. If jumper is a wire, it shall have a crimped grounding lug with one hole and standard barrel for one crimp. If jumper is a flexible braid, it shall have a one- or two-hole ferrule. Attach with grounding screw or connector provided by cable tray manufacturer.

E. Bare Copper Conductors:

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 3. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmils, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, and 1/4 inch in

diameter. 4. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor. 5. Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors terminated with two-hole

copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.

2.3 CONNECTORS

A. Irreversible connectors listed for the purpose. Listed by an NRTL as complying with NFPA 70 for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected. Comply with UL 486A-486B.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

C. Compression Wire Connectors: Crimp-and-compress connectors that bond to the conductor when the connector is compressed around the conductor. Comply with UL 467.

1. Electroplated tinned copper, C and H shaped.

D2631431238


D. Signal Reference Grid Connectors: Combination of compression wire connectors, access floor grounding clamps, bronze U-bolt grounding clamps, and copper split-bolt connectors, designed for the purpose.

E. Busbar Connectors: Cast silicon bronze, solderless exothermic-type, mechanical connector; with a long barrel and two holes spaced on 5/8- or 1-inch centers for a two-bolt connection to the busbar.

F. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions.

2.4 LABELING


1. Brother International Corporation. 2. HellermannTyton. 3. Panduit Corp.

B. Comply with TIA/EIA-606-A and UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers.

C. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine the ac grounding electrode system and equipment grounding for compliance with requirements for maximum ground-resistance level and other conditions affecting performance of grounding and bonding of the electrical system.

B. Inspect the test results of the ac grounding system measured at the point of BCT connection.

C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.

D. Proceed with connection of the BCT only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Bonding shall include the ac utility power service entrance, the communications cable entrance, and the grounding electrode system. The bonding of these elements shall form a loop so that each element is connected to at least two others.

B. Comply with NECA 1.

C. Comply with J-STD-607-A.

D263143 1239


3.3 APPLICATION

A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.

1. The bonding conductors between the TGB and structural steel of steel-frame buildings shall not be smaller than Insert number AWG.

2. The bonding conductors between the TMGB and structural steel of steel-frame buildings shall not be smaller than No. 6 Insert number AWG.

B. Conductor Terminations and Connections:

1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as otherwise

indicated. 3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors. 4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.

C. Conductor Support:

1. Secure grounding and bonding conductors at intervals of not less than 36 inches

D. Grounding and Bonding Conductors:

1. Install in the straightest and shortest route between the origination and termination point, and no longer than required. The bend radius shall not be smaller than eight times the diameter of the conductor. No one bend may exceed 90 degrees.

2. Install without splices. 3. Support at not more than 36-inch intervals. 4. Install grounding and bonding conductors in 3/4-inch PVC conduit until conduit enters a

telecommunications room. The grounding and bonding conductor pathway through a plenum shall be in EMT. Conductors shall not be installed in EMT unless otherwise indicated.

a. If a grounding and bonding conductor is installed in ferrous metallic conduit, bond the conductor to the conduit using a grounding bushing that complies with requirements in Section 270528 "Pathways for Communications Systems," and bond both ends of the conduit to a TGB.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Bond metallic equipment in a telecommunications equipment room to the grounding busbar in that room, using equipment grounding conductors not smaller than No. 6 AWG.

B. Stacking of conductors under a single bolt is not permitted when connecting to busbars.

C. Assemble the wire connector to the conductor, complying with manufacturer's written instructions and as follows:

1. Use crimping tool and the die specific to the connector. 2. Pretwist the conductor. 3. Apply an antioxidant compound to all bolted and compression connections.

D2631431240


D. Primary Protector: Bond to the TMGB with insulated bonding conductor.

E. Interconnections: Interconnect all TGBs with the TMGB with the telecommunications backbone conductor. If more than one TMGB is installed, interconnect TMGBs using the grounding equalizer conductor. The telecommunications backbone conductor and grounding equalizer conductor size shall not be less than 2 kcmils/linear foot of conductor length, up to a maximum size of No. 3/0 AWG unless otherwise indicated.

F. Telecommunications Enclosures and Equipment Racks: Bond metallic components of enclosures to the telecommunications bonding and grounding system. Install vertically mounted rack grounding busbar unless the enclosure and rack are manufactured with the busbar. Bond the equipment grounding busbar to the TGB No. 2 AWG bonding conductors.

G. Structural Steel: Where the structural steel of a steel frame building is readily accessible within the room or space, bond each TGB and TMGB to the vertical steel of the building frame.

H. Electrical Power Panelboards: Where an electrical panelboard for telecommunications equipment is located in the same room or space, bond each TGB to the ground bar of the panelboard.

I. Shielded Cable: Bond the shield of shielded cable to the TGB in communications rooms and spaces. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1 and TIA/EIA-568-B.2 when grounding screened, balanced, twisted-pair cables.

J. Rack- and Cabinet-Mounted Equipment: Bond powered equipment chassis to the cabinet or rack grounding bar. Power connection shall comply with NFPA 70; the equipment grounding conductor in the power cord of cord- and plug-connected equipment shall be considered as a supplement to bonding requirements in this Section.

K. Equipment Room Signal Reference Grid: Provide a low-impedance path between telecommunications cabinets, equipment racks, and the reference grid, using No. 6 AWG bonding conductors.

1. Install the conductors in grid pattern on 4-foot centers, allowing bonding of one pedestal from each access floor tile.

2. Bond the TGB of the equipment room to the reference grid at two or more locations. 3. Bond all conduits and piping entering the equipment room to the TGB at the perimeter of

the room.

L. Insert connections of other equipment.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type.

1. Label TMGB(s) with "fs-TMGB," where "fs" is the telecommunications space identifier for the space containing the TMGB.

2. Label TGB(s) with "fs-TGB," where "fs" is the telecommunications space identifier for the space containing the TGB.

3. Label the BCT and each telecommunications backbone conductor at its attachment point: "WARNING! TELECOMMUNICATIONS BONDING CONDUCTOR. DO NOT REMOVE OR DISCONNECT!"


D263143 1241


A. Testing Agency: The Contractor shall engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Perform tests and inspections.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Test the bonding connections of the system using an ac earth ground-resistance tester, taking two-point bonding measurements in each telecommunications equipment room containing a TMGB and a TGB and using the process recommended by BICSI TDMM. Conduct tests with the facility in operation.

a. Measure the resistance between the busbar and the nearest available grounding electrode. The maximum acceptable value of this bonding resistance is 100 milliohms.

3. Test for ground loop currents using a digital clamp-on ammeter, with a full-scale of not more than 10 A, displaying current in increments of 0.01 A at an accuracy of plus/minus 2.0 percent.

a. With the grounding infrastructure completed and the communications system electronics operating, measure the current in every conductor connected to the TMGB and in each TGB. Maximum acceptable ac current level is 1 A.

D. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground at the BCT exceeds 5 ohms, notify Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.

E. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.


D2631431242

Section 270528 - 1 Pathways For Communications Systems

SECTION 270528 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Metal conduits and fittings. 2. Optical-fiber-cable pathways and fittings. 3. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters. 4. Surface pathways. 5. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets. 6. Fire rated penetrations.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for conduits, wireways, surface raceways, boxes, enclosures, cabinets, handholes, and faceplate adapters serving electrical systems.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit.

B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.


A. Product Data: For surface pathways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUITS AND FITTINGS


1. Allied Tube & Conduit. 2. Electri-Flex Company. 3. O-Z/Gedney. 4. Southwire Company. 5. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 6. Western Tube and Conduit Corporation. 7. Wheatland Tube Company.

D263143 1243


B. General Requirements for Metal Conduits and Fittings:

1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2. Comply with TIA-569-B.

C. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.

D. ARC: Comply with ANSI C80.5 and UL 6A.

E. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242.

F. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.

G. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.

1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886 and NFPA 70.

2. Fittings for EMT:

a. Material: Steel. b. Type: compression.

3. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL-467, rated for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper.

4. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness of 0.040 inch, with overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints.

H. Joint Compound for IMC, GRC, or ARC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.

2.2 OPTICAL-FIBER-CABLE PATHWAYS AND FITTINGS


1. Alpha Wire Company. 2. Arnco Corporation. 3. Endot Industries Inc. 4. IPEX. 5. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.

B. Description: Comply with UL 2024; flexible-type pathway, approved for general-use installation unless otherwise indicated.



2.3 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS


D2631431244


1. Cooper B-Line, Inc. 2. Hoffman. 3. Mono-Systems, Inc. 4. Square D.

B. Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 1 unless otherwise indicated, and sized according to NFPA 70.

1. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.


C. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

D. Wireway Covers: Hinged type unless otherwise indicated.

E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.

2.4 SURFACE PATHWAYS

A. General Requirements for Surface Pathways:



B. Surface Metal Pathways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers complying with UL 5. Manufacturer's standard enamel finish in color selected by Architect.


a. Mono-Systems, Inc. b. Niedax-Kleinhuis USA, Inc. c. Panduit Corp. d. Wiremold / Legrand.

C. Surface Nonmetallic Pathways: Two- or three-piece construction, complying with UL 5A, and manufactured of rigid PVC with texture and color selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. Product shall comply with UL-94 V-0 requirements for self-extinguishing characteristics.


a. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. b. Mono-Systems, Inc. c. Panduit Corp. d. Quazite:Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. e. Wiremold / Legrand.

D263143 1245


2.5 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS


1. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company. 2. Hoffman. 3. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. 4. Milbank Manufacturing Co. 5. Molex; Woodhead Brand. 6. Mono-Systems, Inc. 7. O-Z/Gedney. 8. RACO; Hubbell. 9. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company. 10. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 11. Wiremold / Legrand.

B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets:

1. Comply with TIA-569-B. 2. Boxes, enclosures and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet

locations.

C. Sheet-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.

D. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with gasketed cover.

E. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box.

F. Metal Floor Boxes:

1. Material: sheet metal. 2. Type: Fully adjustable. 3. Shape: Rectangular. 4. Listing and Labeling: Metal floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

G. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

H. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773, cast aluminum with gasketed cover.

I. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep.

J. Gangable boxes are allowed.

K. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 1 with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated.

1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel.

L. Cabinets:

D2631431246


1. NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. 3. Key latch to match panelboards. 4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. 5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment. 6. Nonmetallic cabinets shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified

testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.6 FIRE RATED PENETRATIONS

A. Penetration device

1. Cables passing through fire-rated floors or walls shall pass through fire-rated penetration device which contain an intumescent insert material that adjusts automatically to cable additions or subtractions.

2. The penetration device (per code requirements) shall include both internal and external firestopping.

3. Cables penetrating through fire-rated floors or walls shall utilize fire-rated pathway penetration devices capable of providing an F rating equal to the rating of the barrier in which the device is installed.

4. The penetration device shall be tested for smoke leakage (L rating) and shall not require the use of any optional sealing materials to achieve the published rating.

5. The penetration device shall utilize a fire and smoke sealing system that automatically adjusts to the addition or removal of cables.

6. Penetration devices shall be capable of allowing a 0 to 100-percent visual fill of cables. 7. Penetration devices shall be of a sufficient size to accommodate the quantity and size of

electrical wires and data cables required and shall be suitable for use with new or existing cable installations.

8. The installed penetration device (in normal use) shall require no maintenance and shall accommodate future cable changes without mechanical adjustment and/or removal or replacement of protective materials.

9. Penetration devices to be provided with steel wall plates allowing for single or multiple devices to be ganged together.

10. The penetration device shall be modular and shall provide mechanical installation options for common wall and floor constructions as well as common construction conditions including over-sized or damaged openings or existing sleeves.

B. Acceptable manufacturers:

1. Specified Technologies Inc. EZ Path or approved equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PATHWAY APPLICATION

A. Indoors: Apply pathway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. 2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT identified for such use. 3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC. Pathway locations include the

following:

D263143 1247


a. Loading dock. b. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet-handling units. c. Mechanical rooms. d. Gymnasiums

4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT. 5. Damp or Wet Locations: GRC. 6. Pathways for Optical-Fiber or Communications Cable in Spaces Used for Environmental

Air: EMT. 7. Pathways for Optical-Fiber or Communications-Cable Risers in Vertical Shafts: EMT. 8. Pathways for Concealed General-Purpose Distribution of Optical-Fiber or

Communications Cable: EMT. 9. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250 Type 1, except use NEMA 250 Type 4 stainless steel

in institutional and commercial kitchens and damp or wet locations.

B. Minimum Pathway Size: 3/4-inch trade size. Minimum size for optical-fiber cables is 1 inch.

C. Pathway Fittings: Compatible with pathways and suitable for use and location.

1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.

2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this type of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer.

3. EMT: Use compression, steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.

D. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth.

E. Install surface pathways only where indicated on Drawings.

F. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1, NECA 101, and TIA-569-B for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum pathways. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of pathways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors.

B. Keep pathways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal pathway runs above water and steam piping.

C. Complete pathway installation before starting conductor installation.

D. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for hangers and supports.

E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.

F. Install no more than the equivalent of two 90-degree bends in any pathway run. Support within 12 inches of changes in direction. Utilize long radius ells for all optical-fiber cables.

G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.

H. Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached.

D2631431248


I. Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings:

1. Use EMT, IMC, or RMC for pathways. 2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or

in an enclosure.

J. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of pathway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.

K. Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated pathway with a corrosion-preventing conductive compound prior to assembly.

L. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or cabinets. Install insulated bushings on conduits terminated with locknuts.

M. Install pathways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more.

N. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path.

O. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits of 2-inch trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to ensure cut is straight and perpendicular to the length.

P. Install pull wires in empty pathways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lbtensile strength. Leave at least 12 inchesof slack at each end of pull wire. Cap underground pathways designated as spare above grade alongside pathways in use.

Q. Surface Pathways:

1. Install surface pathway for surface telecommunications outlet boxes only where indicated on Drawings.

2. Install surface pathway with a minimum 2-inch radius control at bend points. 3. Secure surface pathway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not

exceeding 48 inches and with no less than two supports per straight pathway section. Support surface pathway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape and glue are not acceptable support methods.

R. Pathways for Optical-Fiber and Communications Cable: Install pathways, metal and nonmetallic, rigid and flexible, as follows:

1. 3/4-Inch Trade Size and Smaller: Install pathways in maximum lengths of 50 feet. 2. 1-Inch Trade Size and Larger: Install pathways in maximum lengths of 75 feet.

D263143 1249


3. Install with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent for each length of pathway unless Drawings show stricter requirements. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes or terminations at distribution frames or cabinets where necessary to comply with these requirements.

S. Install pathway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed pathways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install pathway sealing fittings according to NFPA 70.

T. Install devices to seal pathway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all pathways at the following points:

1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces.

2. Where an underground service pathway enters a building or structure. 3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

U. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding PVC conduit and fittings.

V. Expansion-Joint Fittings:

1. Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F, and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet. Install in each run of aboveground RMC and EMT conduit that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 100 deg F and that has straight-run length that exceeds 100 feet.

2. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each of the following locations:

a. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F temperature change.

b. Attics: 135 deg F temperature change.

3. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.000078 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for metal conduits.

4. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure expansion joints.

5. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement.

W. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to center of box unless otherwise indicated.

X. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surface to provide a flat surface for a raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box.

D2631431250


Y. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel.

Z. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.

AA. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits.

BB. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.

CC. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface.

3.3 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 270544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Communications Pathways and Cabling."

3.4 FIRESTOPPING

A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

B. Penetration devices

1. Penetration devices shall be installed in locations where indicated on the Contract Drawings, arranged singly or in gangs at the height specified.

2. Install the devices in strict accordance with the approved shop drawings and the equipment manufacturer’s recommendations.

3. Apply the factory supplied gasketing material prior to the installation of the wall plates. 4. Secure wall plates to devices per the equipment manufacturer’s recommendations.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage or deterioration.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.


D263143 1251


D2631431252

Section 280528 - 1 Pathways For Electronic Safety And Security

SECTION 280528 PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings. 2. Nonmetallic conduits, tubing, and fittings. 3. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters. 4. Surface pathways. 5. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for conduits, wireways, surface raceways, boxes, enclosures, cabinets, handholes, and faceplate adapters serving electrical systems.

2. Section 270528 "Pathways for Communications Systems" for conduits, surface pathways, innerduct, boxes, and faceplate adapters serving communications systems.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit.

B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.


A. Product Data: For surface pathways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS


1. Allied Tube & Conduit. 2. Alpha Wire Company. 3. Electri-Flex Company. 4. O-Z/Gedney. 5. Republic Conduit. 6. Southwire Company. 7. Thomas & Betts Corporation.

D263143 1253


8. Western Tube and Conduit Corporation. 9. Wheatland Tube Company.

B. General Requirements for Metal Conduits and Fittings:



C. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.

D. ARC: Comply with ANSI C80.5 and UL 6A.

E. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242.

F. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.

G. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel.

H. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360.

I. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.

1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886 and NFPA 70.

2. Fittings for EMT:

a. Material: Steel. b. Type: compression.

3. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 467, rated for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper.

4. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness of 0.040 inch, with overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints.

J. Joint Compound for IMC, GRC, or ARC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.

2.2 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS


1. Cooper B-Line, Inc. 2. Hoffman. 3. Mono-Systems, Inc. 4. Square D.

B. Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 1 unless otherwise indicated, and sized according to NFPA 70.

D2631431254


1. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.


C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

D. Wireway Covers: Hinged type unless otherwise indicated.

E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.

2.3 SURFACE PATHWAYS

A. General Requirements for Surface Pathways:



B. Surface Metal Pathways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers complying with UL 5. Manufacturer's standard enamel finish in color selected by Architect.


a. Mono-Systems, Inc. b. Niedax-Kleinhuis USA, Inc. c. Panduit Corp. d. Wiremold / Legrand.

2.4 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS


1. Cooper Technologies Company; Cooper Crouse-Hinds. 2. EGS/Appleton Electric. 3. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company. 4. Hoffman. 5. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. 6. Milbank Manufacturing Co. 7. Mono-Systems, Inc. 8. O-Z/Gedney. 9. RACO; Hubbell. 10. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company. 11. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 12. Wiremold / Legrand.

B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets:


D263143 1255


2. Boxes, enclosures and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations.

C. Sheet-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.

D. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with gasketed cover.

E. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box.

F. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

G. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773, cast aluminum with gasketed cover.

H. Device Box Dimensions: 4-inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep.

I. Gangable boxes are allowed.

J. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 1 with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated.

1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel.

K. Cabinets:

1. NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. 3. Key latch to match panelboards. 4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. 5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment. 6. Nonmetallic cabinets shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified

testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PATHWAY APPLICATION

A. Indoors: Apply pathway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. 2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT. 3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC. Pathway locations include the

following:

a. Loading dock. b. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet-handling units. c. Mechanical rooms.

4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT.

D2631431256


5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric-Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations.

6. Damp or Wet Locations: GRC. 7. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 stainless

steel in institutional and commercial kitchens and damp or wet locations.

B. Minimum Pathway Size: 3/4-inch trade size. Minimum size for optical-fiber cables is 1 inch.

C. Pathway Fittings: Compatible with pathways and suitable for use and location.

1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.

2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this type of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer.

3. EMT: Use compression, steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 4. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with

NEMA FB 2.20.

D. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth.

E. Install surface pathways only where indicated on Drawings.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1, NECA 101, and TIA-569-B for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum pathways. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of pathways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors.

B. Keep pathways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal pathway runs above water and steam piping.

C. Complete pathway installation before starting conductor installation.

D. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for hangers and supports.

E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.

F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for communications wiring conduits for which only two 90-degree bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches of changes in direction.

G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.

H. Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached.

I. Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings:

1. Use EMT, IMC, or RMC for pathways. 2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or

in an enclosure.

D263143 1257


J. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of pathway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.

K. Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated pathway with a corrosion-preventing conductive compound prior to assembly.

L. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or cabinets. Install insulated bushings on conduits terminated with locknuts.

M. Install pathways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more.

N. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to conduit assembly to assure a continuous ground path.

O. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits of 2-inch trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to ensure cut is straight and perpendicular to the length.

P. Install pull wires in empty pathways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap underground pathways designated as spare above grade alongside pathways in use.

Q. Surface Pathways:

1. Install surface pathway for surface electrical outlet boxes only where indicated on Drawings.

2. Install surface pathway with a minimum 2-inch radius control at bend points. 3. Secure surface pathway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not

exceeding 48 inches and with no less than two supports per straight pathway section. Support surface pathway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape and glue are not acceptable support methods.

R. Install pathway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed pathways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install pathway sealing fittings according to NFPA 70.

S. Install devices to seal pathway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all pathways at the following points:

1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces.

2. Where an underground service pathway enters a building or structure. 3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

T. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding PVC conduit and fittings.

U. Expansion-Joint Fittings:

1. Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F, and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet. Install in each run of aboveground RMC and EMT conduit that is located where environmental

D2631431258


temperature change may exceed 100 deg F and that has straight-run length that exceeds 100 feet.

2. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each of the following locations:

a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F temperature change.

b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F temperature change. c. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F

temperature change. d. Attics: 135 deg F temperature change.

3. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.000078 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for metal conduits.

4. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure expansion joints.

5. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement.

V. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to center of box unless otherwise indicated.

W. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surface to provide a flat surface for a raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box.

X. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel.

Y. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.

Z. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits.

AA. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.

BB. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface.

3.3 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electronic Safety and Security Pathways and Cabling."

3.4 FIRESTOPPING

A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

3.5 PROTECTION

D263143 1259


A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.

2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer.

END OF SECTION

D2631431260

Section 283111 - 1 Digital Addressable Fire-Alarm System

SECTION 283111 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Fire-alarm control unit.

2. Manual fire-alarm boxes.

3. System smoke detectors.

4. Heat detectors.

5. Notification appliances.

6. Magnetic door holders.

7. Remote annunciator.

8. Addressable interface device.

9. Digital alarm communicator transmitter.

1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Noncoded, addressable system, with multiplexed signal transmission, dedicated to fire-alarm service only.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General Submittal Requirements:

1. Submittals shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction prior to submitting them to Architect.

2. Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications:

a. Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire-alarm system design.

b. NICET-certified fire-alarm technician, Level III minimum.

B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

C. Shop Drawings: For fire-alarm system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Comply with recommendations in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter in NFPA 72.

2. Include voltage drop calculations for notification appliance circuits.

3. Include battery-size calculations.

4. Include performance parameters and installation details for each detector, verifying that each detector is listed for complete range of air velocity, temperature, and humidity possible when air-handling system is operating.

5. Include plans, sections, and elevations of heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning ducts, drawn to scale and coordinating installation of duct smoke

283111 -1

D263143 1261


detectors and access to them. Show critical dimensions that relate to placement and support of sampling tubes, detector housing, and remote status and alarm indicators. Locate detectors according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

6. Include floor plans to indicate final outlet locations showing address of each addressable device. Show size and route of cable and conduits.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For smoke and heat detectors indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Drawings showing the location of each smoke and heat detector, ratings of each, and installation details as needed to comply with listing conditions of the detector.

2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting the spacing and sensitivity of detection, complying with NFPA 72.

E. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

F. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For fire-alarm control unit, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

G. Field quality-control reports.

H. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire-alarm systems and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Comply with the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72.

2. Provide "Record of Completion Documents" according to NFPA 72 article "Permanent Records" in the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter.

3. Record copy of site-specific software.

4. Provide "Maintenance, Inspection and Testing Records" according to NFPA 72 article of the same name and include the following:

a. Frequency of testing of installed components.

b. Frequency of inspection of installed components.

c. Requirements and recommendations related to results of maintenance.

d. Manufacturer's user training manuals.

5. Manufacturer's required maintenance related to system warranty requirements.

6. Abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at fire-alarm control unit.

7. Copy of NFPA 25.

I. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation:

1. Software operating and upgrade manuals.

2. Program Software Backup: On magnetic media or compact disk, complete with data files.

283111 -2

D2631431262


3. Device address list.

4. Printout of software application and graphic screens.


A. Installer Qualifications: Personnel shall be trained and certified by manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project.

B. Installer Qualifications: Installation shall be by personnel certified by NICET as fire-alarm Level III technician.

C. Source Limitations for Fire-Alarm System and Components: Obtain fire-alarm system from single source from single manufacturer. Components shall be compatible with, and operate as, an extension of existing system.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

1.5 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT

A. Comply with UL 864.

B. Technical Support: Beginning with Substantial Completion, provide software support for two years.

C. Upgrade Service: Update software to latest version at Project completion. Install and program software upgrades that become available within two years from date of Substantial Completion. Upgrading software shall include operating system. Upgrade shall include new or revised licenses for use of software.

1. Provide 30 days' notice to Owner to allow scheduling and access to system and to allow Owner to upgrade computer equipment if necessary.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

1. NOTIFIER; a Honeywell company.

2. Siemens Building Technologies, Inc.; Fire Safety Division.

3. SimplexGrinnell LP; a Tyco International company.

2.2 SYSTEMS OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION

A. Fire-alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and systems:

1. Manual stations.

2. Heat detectors.

3. Smoke detectors.

4. Duct smoke detectors.

5. Automatic sprinkler system water flow.

283111 -3

D263143 1263


B. Fire-alarm signal shall initiate the following actions:

1. Continuously operate alarm-notification appliances.

2. Identify alarm at the fire-alarm control unit and remote annunciator.

3. Transmit an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station.

4. Unlock electric door locks in designated egress paths.

5. Release fire and smoke doors held open by magnetic door holders.

6. Switch heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning equipment controls to fire-alarm mode.

7. Activate emergency shutoffs for gas and fuel supplies.

8. Record events in the system memory.

C. Supervisory signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions:

1. Valve supervisory switch.

2. Low-air-pressure switch of a dry-pipe sprinkler system.

D. System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions:

1. Open circuits, shorts, and grounds in designated circuits.

2. Opening, tampering with, or removing alarm-initiating and supervisory signal-initiating devices.

3. Loss of primary power at fire-alarm control unit.

4. Ground or a single break in fire-alarm control unit internal circuits.

5. Abnormal ac voltage at fire-alarm control unit.

6. Break in standby battery circuitry.

7. Failure of battery charging.

8. Abnormal position of any switch at fire-alarm control unit or annunciator.

9. Low-air-pressure switch operation on a dry-pipe or preaction sprinkler system.

E. System Trouble and Supervisory Signal Actions: Initiate notification appliance and annunciate at fire-alarm control unit and remote annunciator.

2.3 FIRE-ALARM CONTROL UNIT

A. General Requirements for Fire-Alarm Control Unit:

1. Field-programmable, microprocessor-based, modular, power-limited design with electronic modules, complying with UL 864 and listed and labeled by an NRTL.

a. System software and programs shall be held in flash electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), retaining the information through failure of primary and secondary power supplies.

b. Include a real-time clock for time annotation of events on the event recorder and printer.

2. Addressable control circuits for operation of mechanical equipment.

283111 -4

D2631431264


B. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human

operator at fire-alarm control unit and addressable system components including annunciation and supervision. Display alarm, supervisory, and component status messages and the programming and control menu.

1. Annunciator and Display: Liquid-crystal type, 3 line(s) of 40 characters, minimum.

2. Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and control commands.

C. Circuits:

1. Initiating Device, Notification Appliance, and Signaling Line Circuits: NFPA 72, Class A.

a. Initiating Device Circuits: Style D.

b. Notification Appliance Circuits: Style Z.

c. Signaling Line Circuits: Style 6.

d. Install no more than 50 addressable devices on each signaling line circuit.

D. Notification Appliance Circuit: Operation shall sound in a synchronized pattern.

E. Door Controls: Door hold-open devices that are controlled by smoke detectors at doors in smoke barrier walls shall be connected to fire-alarm system.

F. Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Station: Automatically transmit alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals to a remote alarm station.

G. Primary Power: 24-V dc obtained from 120-V ac service and a power-supply module. Initiating devices, notification appliances, signaling lines, trouble signals, supervisory signals shall be powered by 24-V dc source.

1. Alarm current draw of entire fire-alarm system shall not exceed 80 percent of the power-supply module rating.

H. Secondary Power: 24-V dc supply system with batteries, automatic battery charger, and automatic transfer switch.

1. Batteries: Vented, wet-cell pocket, plate nickel cadmium.

I. Instructions: Computer printout or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a plastic or glass cover in a stainless-steel or aluminum frame. Include interpretation and describe appropriate response for displays and signals. Briefly describe the functional operation of the system under normal, alarm, and trouble conditions.

2.4 MANUAL FIRE-ALARM BOXES

A. General Requirements for Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes: Comply with UL 38. Boxes shall be finished in red with molded, raised-letter operating instructions in contrasting color; shall show visible indication of operation; and shall be mounted on recessed outlet box. If indicated as surface mounted, provide manufacturer's surface back box.

1. Single-action mechanism, pull-lever type. With integral addressable module arranged to communicate manual-station status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.

283111 -5

D263143 1265


2. Double-action mechanism requiring two actions to initiate an alarm, pull-lever

type; with integral addressable module arranged to communicate manual-station status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.

3. Station Reset: Key- or wrench-operated switch.

4. Indoor Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated clear plastic enclosure hinged at the top to permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm. Lifting the cover actuates an integral battery-powered audible horn intended to discourage false-alarm operation.

5. Weatherproof Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated clear plastic enclosure hinged at the top to permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm.

2.5 SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS

A. General Requirements for System Smoke Detectors:

1. Comply with UL 268; operating at 24-V dc, nominal.

2. Detectors shall be four-wire type.

3. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.

4. Base Mounting: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted in a twist-lock module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals in the fixed base for connection to building wiring.

5. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore them to normal operation.

6. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type indicating detector has operated and power-on status.

B. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:

1. Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be able to identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting.

2. An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to manually access the following for each detector:

a. Primary status.

b. Device type.

c. Present average value.

d. Present sensitivity selected.

e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).

C. Duct Smoke Detectors: Photoelectric type complying with UL 268A.

1. Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be able to identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting.

2. An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to manually access the following for each detector:

a. Primary status.

283111 -6

D2631431266


b. Device type.

c. Present average value.

d. Present sensitivity selected.

e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).

3. Weatherproof Duct Housing Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4X; NRTL listed for use with the supplied detector.

4. Each sensor shall have multiple levels of detection sensitivity.

5. Sampling Tubes: Design and dimensions as recommended by manufacturer for specific duct size, air velocity, and installation conditions where applied.

6. Relay Fan Shutdown: Rated to interrupt fan motor-control circuit.

2.6 HEAT DETECTORS

A. General Requirements for Heat Detectors: Comply with UL 521.

B. Heat Detector, Combination Type: Actuated by either a fixed temperature of 135 deg F or a rate of rise that exceeds 15 deg F per minute unless otherwise indicated.

1. Mounting: Twist-lock base interchangeable with smoke-detector bases.

2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.

C. Heat Detector, Non-Addressable Type: Actuated by either a fixed temperature of 135 degrees F or a rate of rise that exceeds 15 degrees F per minute unless otherwise indicated. 1. Mounting: Twist-lock base interchangeable with smoke-detector bases. 2. Addressable control/monitor module: Arranged to communicate detector status

(normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.

2.7 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES

A. General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Connected to notification appliance signal circuits, zoned as indicated, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system connections.

1. Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a single-mounting assembly, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system connections.

B. Chimes, Low-Level Output: Vibrating type, 75-dBA minimum rated output.

C. Chimes, High-Level Output: Vibrating type, 81-dBA minimum rated output.

D. Horns: Electric-vibrating-polarized type, 24-V dc; with provision for housing the operating mechanism behind a grille. Comply with UL 464. Horns shall produce a sound-pressure level of 90 dBA, measured 10 feet from the horn, using the coded signal prescribed in UL 464 test protocol.

E. Visible Notification Appliances: Xenon strobe lights comply with UL 1971, with clear or nominal white polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is engraved in minimum 1-inch- high letters on the lens.

283111 -7

D263143 1267


1. Rated Light Output:

a. 15/30/60/90/110 cd, selectable in the field.

2. Mounting: Wall mounted unless otherwise indicated.

3. For units with guards to prevent physical damage, light output ratings shall be determined with guards in place.

4. Flashing shall be in a temporal pattern, synchronized with other units.

5. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals.

6. Mounting Faceplate: Factory finished, red.

2.8 MAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS

A. Description: Units are equipped for wall or floor mounting as indicated and are complete with matching doorplate.

1. Electromagnet: Requires no more than 3 W to develop 25-lbf holding force.

2. Wall-Mounted Units: Flush mounted unless otherwise indicated.

3. Rating: 24-V ac or dc.

4. Rating: 120-V ac.

B. Material and Finish: Match door hardware.

2.9 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR

A. Description: Annunciator functions shall match those of fire-alarm control unit for alarm, supervisory, and trouble indications. Manual switching functions shall match those of fire-alarm control unit, including acknowledging, silencing, resetting, and testing.

1. Mounting: Surface cabinet, NEMA 250, Type 1.

B. Display Type and Functional Performance: Alphanumeric display and LED indicating lights shall match those of fire-alarm control unit. Provide controls to acknowledge, silence, reset, and test functions for alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals.

2.10 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICE

A. Description: Microelectronic monitor module, NRTL listed for use in providing a system address for alarm-initiating devices for wired applications with normally open contacts.

B. Integral Relay: Capable of providing a direct signal to circuit-breaker shunt trip for power shutdown.

2.11 DIGITAL ALARM COMMUNICATOR TRANSMITTER

A. Digital alarm communicator transmitter shall be acceptable to the remote central station and shall comply with UL 632 and be listed and labeled by an NRTL.

B. Functional Performance: Unit shall receive an alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal from fire-alarm control unit and automatically capture two telephone lines and dial a preset number for a remote central station. When contact is made with central station(s), signals shall be transmitted. If service on either line is interrupted for longer than 45 seconds, transmitter shall initiate a local trouble signal and transmit the signal indicating loss of telephone line to the remote alarm receiving station over the remaining line. Transmitter

283111 -8

D2631431268


shall automatically report telephone service restoration to the central station. If service is lost on both telephone lines, transmitter shall initiate the local trouble signal.

C. Local functions and display at the digital alarm communicator transmitter shall include the following:

1. Verification that both telephone lines are available.

2. Programming device.

3. LED display.

4. Manual test report function and manual transmission clear indication.

5. Communications failure with the central station or fire-alarm control unit.

D. Digital data transmission shall include the following:

1. Address of the alarm-initiating device.

2. Address of the supervisory signal.

3. Address of the trouble-initiating device.

4. Loss of ac supply or loss of power.

5. Low battery.

6. Abnormal test signal.

7. Communication bus failure.

E. Secondary Power: Integral rechargeable battery and automatic charger.

F. Self-Test: Conducted automatically every 24 hours with report transmitted to central station.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NFPA 72 for installation of fire-alarm equipment.

B. Smoke- or Heat-Detector Spacing:

1. Comply with NFPA 72, "Smoke-Sensing Fire Detectors" Section in the "Initiating Devices" Chapter, for smoke-detector spacing.

2. Comply with NFPA 72, "Heat-Sensing Fire Detectors" Section in the "Initiating Devices" Chapter, for heat-detector spacing.

3. Smooth ceiling spacing shall not exceed 30 feet.

4. Spacing of detectors for irregular areas, for irregular ceiling construction, and for high ceiling areas shall be determined according to Appendix A or Appendix B in NFPA 72.

5. HVAC: Locate detectors not closer than 3 feet from air-supply diffuser or return-air opening.

6. Lighting Fixtures: Locate detectors not closer than 12 inches from any part of a lighting fixture.

283111 -9

D263143 1269


C. Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with NFPA 72 and NFPA 90A. Install sampling tubes

so they extend the full width of duct.

D. Remote Status and Alarm Indicators: Install near each smoke detector and each sprinkler water-flow switch and valve-tamper switch that is not readily visible from normal viewing position.

E. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install not less than 6 inches below the ceiling. Install bells and horns on flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating mechanism concealed behind a grille.

F. Visible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install adjacent to each alarm bell or alarm horn and at least 6 inches below the ceiling.

G. Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor.

H. Fire-Alarm Control Unit: Surface mounted, with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches above the finished floor.

I. Annunciator: Install with top of panel not more than 72 inches above the finished floor.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. For fire-protection systems related to doors in fire-rated walls and partitions and to doors in smoke partitions, comply with requirements in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware." Connect hardware and devices to fire-alarm system.

1. Verify that hardware and devices are NRTL listed for use with fire-alarm system in this Section before making connections.

B. Make addressable connections with a supervised interface device to the following devices and systems. Install the interface device less than 3 feet from the device controlled. Make an addressable confirmation connection when such feedback is available at the device or system being controlled.

1. Alarm-initiating connection to smoke-control system (smoke management) at firefighter smoke-control system panel.

2. Alarm-initiating connection to activate emergency shutoffs for gas and fuel supplies.

3. Supervisory connections at valve supervisory switches.

4. Supervisory connections at low-air-pressure switch of each dry-pipe sprinkler system.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Install framed instructions in a location visible from fire-alarm control unit.

3.4 GROUNDING

A. Ground fire-alarm control unit and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. Install a ground wire from main service ground to fire-alarm control unit.


A. Field tests shall be witnessed by authorities having jurisdiction.

283111 -10

D2631431270



1. Visual Inspection: Conduct visual inspection prior to testing.

a. Inspection shall be based on completed Record Drawings and system documentation that is required by NFPA 72 in its "Completion Documents, Preparation" Table in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter.

b. Comply with "Visual Inspection Frequencies" Table in the "Inspection" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72; retain the "Initial/Reacceptance" column and list only the installed components.

2. System Testing: Comply with "Test Methods" Table in the "Testing" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72.

3. Test audible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions. Perform the test using a portable sound-level meter complying with Type 2 requirements in ANSI S1.4.

4. Test audible appliances for the private operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions.

5. Test visible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions.

6. Factory-authorized service representative shall prepare the "Fire Alarm System Record of Completion" in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter in NFPA 72 and the "Inspection and Testing Form" in the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72.

C. Reacceptance Testing: Perform reacceptance testing to verify the proper operation of added or replaced devices and appliances.

D. Fire-alarm system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

F. Maintenance Test and Inspection: Perform tests and inspections listed for weekly, monthly, quarterly, and semiannual periods. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.

G. Annual Test and Inspection: One year after date of Substantial Completion, test fire-alarm system complying with visual and testing inspection requirements in NFPA 72. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.


283111 -11

D263143 1271

BEST VALUE SUBMISSION Best Value Submission NOTE: This form was developed for repetitive use throughout all contract proposals and may identify items not applicable to this specific project.

03701 Per DQAB L09/04/14

Page 1 of 1

D2631431272

SPECIAL NOTE DESIGN-BID-BUILD BEST VALUE SUBMISSION

3/21/16 Page 1 of 5

1. SUBMISSION CONTENT AND FORMAT

All Best Value Submissions will be evaluated under the direction of the Department’s Contract Management Bureau. Submissions will be scored according to the Best Value Selection Scoring Criteria, as outlined below. A combination of the Price Proposal and Project Completion Date will be utilized to determine the Best Value. All Best Value Submission Forms and Cover Letters shall be hand-delivered in a sealed envelope or sent via overnight mail to the NYSDOT Contract Management Bureau, 50 Wolf Road, Suite 1CM, Albany NY 12232. Forms/Cover letters must be received prior to noon on the proposal due date. The Company Name, Street Address, Federal Identification Number, Project Number and Project Description should be clearly marked. Proposers still must submit their itemized proposal/bid in accordance with the Important Bidder Information on the inside cover of Proposal Book 2

1.1. COVER LETTER

Best Value Submissions shall be accompanied by a Cover Letter no more than two pages in length. Include the following elements of information in the letter as a minimum:

- Contract number and project name. - Company Name, Street Address, Federal Identification Number - Name, telephone number, and e-mail address of the individual to contact

regarding the submittal. - Certification that “The undersigned hereby certifies that, to the best of his or her

knowledge and belief, the information submitted is complete, true and accurate.”

- The Cover Letter shall be signed by a principal, partner, or officer of the firm who has authority to make such commitments on behalf of the firm.

1.2. SUBMISSION CHECKLIST

The Best Value Submission shall include all information required in this Special Note, and the following is a checklist of information that shall be submitted: Technical Submission

Cover Letter (2 page limit) Construction Overall Completion date form(SCD Form)

Price Proposal Submission

Itemized Proposal (including CD with Expedite file) *See Proposal Book 1, Contractor’s Bid Package, for full requirements of Price

Proposal Submission.

The Technical and Price Proposal Submissions may be submitted in the same sealed container, as long as they are clearly separate from each other.

D263143 1273


3/21/16 Page 2 of 5

2. DESIGNATED CONTACT

Under New York State Finance Law Section 139-j, communication on procurements can be made only to designated contact persons. The Department’s Designated Representative for this procurement is:

Peter Russell Attention: “Long Island Welcome Center Project D263143, PIN 0229.14”,

Office of Contracts Management New York State Department of Transportation 50 Wolf Road, 6th Floor Albany, New York 12232, USA e-mail: [email protected]

The above named person, as the Department’s Designated Representative for this procurement, shall be the Department’s single point of contact and source of information for this procurement.

3. CONTACTS/QUESTIONS

NYS Finance Law restricts communication with NYSDOT personnel on procurements, and contact can only be made with designated persons. Contact with non-designated persons or other involved Agencies will be considered a serious matter and may result in disqualification. Contacts are listed in the Important Bidder Information in the contract proposal (inside cover of Book 2). Project-related technical questions or comments, and questions related to the Best Value Submission, must be submitted through the Contract Documents tab of the Department’s website at: www.dot.ny.gov/doingbusiness/opportunities/const-notices.

4. BEST VALUE SELECTION SCORING CRITERIA

All submissions will be evaluated under the direction of the Department’s Contract Management Bureau. Submittals will be evaluated based on a 60-40 Price – Completion Date based weighting.

4.1 PRICE PROPOSAL – 60%

The Total Contract Bid Price shall be entered on the attached BEST VALUE SUBMISSION FORM (Proposers still must submit their itemized proposal/bid in accordance with the Important Bidder Information on the inside cover of Proposal Book 2). There will be no bid opening. The Contract Management Bureau will review the price proposals and assign points. A total of 100 Cost Ranking Points will be assigned to the Contractor with the lowest total Bid. Remaining bids will receive Cost Ranking Points based on the percent that their bid exceeds the low bid (i.e. (lowest Cost Bid / applicable Contractor’s total Cost Bid) * 100 Cost Ranking Points). These Cost Ranking Points encourage proposals with the lowest Cost.

D2631431274


3/21/16 Page 3 of 5

4.2 COMPLETION DATE – 40%

The overall Project Completion shall be entered on the attached BEST VALUE SUBMISSION FORM. Both the Duration (Calendar Days past Award) and Projected Completion Date shall be entered. The Projected Completion Date shall be based on an assumed Award Date of June 13, 2016; however, the Department will seek a priority award which may accelerate the award date to May 19, 2016. The Contractor shall mobilize within ten (10) days of award.

Firms will be scored based on a schedule with the fewest consecutive calendar days from Award to Project Completion (as defined on the BEST VALUE SUBMISSION FORM). A total of 100 Completion Date Ranking Points will be assigned to the Firm with the fewest consecutive calendar days from Award to Projected Completion Date. Remaining Firms will receive Completion Date Ranking Points based on the percent that their schedule exceeds the lowest number of consecutive calendar days submitted to complete all work (i.e. (fewest consecutive calendar days / applicable Contractor’s total consecutive calendar days) * 100 Completion Date Ranking Points). These Completion Date Ranking Points encourage proposals with the shortest construction duration.

The Overall Project Completion Date shall be no later than October 1, 2016 or the proposal will be declared non-responsive and removed from further “Best Value” evaluation or consideration.

5. BEST VALUE SELECTION

The Department reserves the right to award this Contract to the Contractor, which through the evaluation process described herein, is determined to be the “Best Value”. This means the “Best Value” firm (evaluated using the criteria above) has demonstrated their ability to meet all the contract requirements in a manner that is most beneficial to the Department and the traveling public. Upon completion of the evaluation process the Department will select the Contractor whose proposal is the Best Value for New York State. Below is an example of how the Price Proposal and Completion Date Best Value Submissions are scored and combined.

D263143 1275


3/21/16 Page 4 of 5

Price Duration Ranking Points

Weight Weighted Score

Ranking

Bidder A Cost 24,000,000.00$ 100 60% 60.0Completion Date 375 88 40% 35.2

Total Score 95 2

Bidder B Cost 27,000,000.00$ 89 60% 53.3Completion Date 390 85 40% 33.8

Total Score 87 4

Bidder C Cost 34,000,000.00$ 71 60% 42.4Completion Date 330 100 40% 40.0

Total Score 82 5

Bidder D Cost 28,000,000.00$ 86 60% 51.4Completion Date 350 94 40% 37.7

Total Score 89 3

Bidder E Cost 25,000,000.00$ 96 60% 57.6Completion Date 345 96 40% 38.3

Total Score 96 1

Based on the Total Score, Bidder E is the Apparent Best Value proposer.

6. STATE’S RESERVED RIGHTS

The State reserves the right to:

a. Require clarification at any time during the procurement process and/or require correction of arithmetic or other apparent errors for the purpose of assuring a full and complete understanding of a Proposer’s Best Value Submission and/or to determine a Proposer’s compliance with the requirements of the Best Value criteria.

b. Seek or obtain data from any source that has the potential to improve the understanding

and evaluation of the Best Value Submission.

c. The Department reserves the right, at its discretion, to request Best and Final Offers from all proposers that are determined to be susceptible for determination of Best Value. Proposers should not assume that the Department will in fact request Best and Final Offers.

D2631431276


3/21/16 Page 5 of 5

FORM SCD SCHEDULE OF CONTRACT DURATIONS

Table SCD - 1

CONSTRUCTION OVERALL PROJECT COMPLETION DATE D263143 – LONG ISLAND WELCOME CENTER

ACTIVITY DURATION

(Calendar Days past 10 days after

award)

PROJECTED CONSTRUCTION

OVERALL COMPLETION

DATE (MM/DD/YYYY)

LIQUIDATED DAMAGES

AMOUNT (PER DAY)

OVERALL PROJECT COMPLETION

$10,000

Notes: 1.) The Construction Overall Project Completion Date shall be defined by the number of calendar

days following 10 days after award of the contract as proposed by the successful Proposer and agreed to by the Department. Project Completion for the purposes of this Form SCD is defined as all construction activities completed, no additional impacts to traffic, complete demobilization from the work site(s), and opening of the Welcome Center to the public.. Remaining paperwork (i.e. close-out documentation, payments) may occur after the Project Completion date for the purposes of this Form SCD.

2.) The Overall Project Completion Date shall be no later than October 1,2016 or the proposal will be declared Non-responsive and removed from further “Best value” evaluation or consideration

3.) Liquidated Damages will be assessed, in the amount indicated, for failure to achieve the Construction Overall Project Completion Date in accordance with the provisions of this contract and as described in the Special Note..

4.) An Early Completion Bonus will be paid for: each calendar day work is completed in advance of the Construction Overall Project Completion date submitted by the Contractor. Such Bonuses will be based on the Durations (Number of Days) listed in Tables SCD-1

The Proposer commits to meet the Contract Durations specified above.

PROPOSER

SIGNED

DATE NAME

(printed or typed)

TITLE

D263143 1277

03750 Per DQAB L05/07/09

Page 1 of 1

SPECIAL SPECIFICATIONS NOTE: This form was developed for repetitive use throughout all contract proposals and may identify items not applicable to this specific project.

D2631431278

ITEM 202.32010008 - TEST PITS

Page 1 of 1 10/18/2013

DESCRIPTION: This work shall consist of excavating exploratory test pits where indicated in the contract documents and as directed by the Engineer. MATERIALS: Not specified. CONSTRUCTION DETAILS: The purpose of the test pits is to locate the limit of a waste layer, where applicable, or other buried items (eg., utility lines, existing sewers, etc.) at various locations as directed by the Engineer. The test pits shall be dug only when the Engineer and/or an authorized (by the NYSDOT) on-site geologist is present. The contractor shall excavate the test pits beginning in soil and proceeding, if applicable, toward a landfill until waste is found is determined by the Engineer and/or the geologist. The contractor shall make test pits at least 3’ wide and stockpile the excavated material near the test pit. When the limit of the waste, if applicable, or buried item has been determined by the Engineer and/or geologist, the contractor shall mark it’s location with a stake at the surface and on a copy of an appropriate plan sheet. After the test pit excavation is completed, as determined by the Engineer, and the waste limit or buried item has been found and marked, the contractor shall backfill the test pit with suitable excavated material and compact it to the same density as the surrounding soil. The contractor shall take care to return native soils to the native soil interval and fill materials to the fill interval. If drums are encountered, the contractor shall have the excavator equipment operator carefully uncover and remove the drums from the excavation. The drums shall then be handled in accordance with the appropriate measures for removal, storage, and disposal (if applicable) as directed by the Engineer. METHOD OF MEASUREMENT: This work will be measured as the number of cubic yard of test pits. The cubic yard measurement of material will be computed it’s original position. BASIS OF PAYMENT: The unit price bid shall include the cost of furnishing all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to complete the work. Drum removal, where applicable, shall be paid for separately under the appropriate Item(s).

D263143 1279

ITEM 202.99010010 - PAVEMENT EXCAVATION

4/03/08E

2/1/96 M

DESCRIPTION: The Contractor shall remove and dispose of existing pavement where indicated on the plans or where directed by the Engineer. MATERIALS: Not specified. CONSTRUCTION DETAILS: The Contractor shall remove the pavement in a neat workmanlike manner by any suitable means that does not damage the adjacent pavement or existing underground utilities. Sawing to neat lines will be required before the removal of concrete pavement. This work must conform to the details shown on the plans. The removed concrete shall be properly disposed of by the contractor, off the right-of-way as approved by the Engineer. METHOD OF MEASUREMENT: Pavement Excavation will be measured by the number of square yards of pavement removed and disposed of. BASIS OF PAVEMENT: The unit price bid per square yard for this item shall include the cost of furnishing all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to remove and dispose of the pavement, mesh reinforcement, transverse joints, and longitudinal ties. Payment shall be the same regardless of whether the entire thickness of pavement is removed or simply the top surface of pavement is removed to provide a transition for resurfacing. Saw cutting will be paid for under the appropriate items; except that no payment will be made for sawcuts which are not called for in the plans and which are made for the Contractor’s convenience.

D2631431280

ITEM 209.11000011- INLET FILTER SEDIMENT CONTROL FOR NEW CATCH BASINS

ITEM 209.12000011- INLET FILTER SEDIMENT CONTROL FOR EXISTING CATCH BASINS

01/02/08

DESCRIPTION This work shall consist of installing, maintaining, and removing the sediment control filters as shown on the plans for all existing and proposed drainage structures shown in the contract documents. Inlet filters, consisting of welded mesh and geotextile fabric, shall be installed to control sedimentation at new inlet drainage structures. Inlet filters of geotextile fabric alone shall be installed to control sedimentation at existing inlet drainage structures. MATERIALS The materials used to construct the sediment control filters as shown in the details and in the contract documents shall meet the requirements of the following:

The filter fabric shall conform to the requirements specified in §737-01A. Geotextile Bedding. The 6 inch x 6 inch wire mesh used to support the silt protection screening shall be 14 gauge steel wire cloth. Coarse aggregate shall be Size Designation 1A in accordance with §703-02 Coarse Aggregate.

CONSTRUCTION DETAILS All construction of the sediment control filters shall be done in accordance to the specifications and details. For new inlet structures, welded steel wire mesh shall be molded around the inlet frames and grates, or inlet structures, and extend a minimum of 6 inches down each side of the new structures. Geotextile fabric shall then be secured to the welded wire mesh. Coarse aggregate Size Designation 1A shall be placed against the inlet structures to hold the inlet filter in place. For existing inlet structures, geotextile fabric shall be placed under the grates, over the curb pieces and extend a minimum of 6 inches beyond. Coarse aggregate Size Designation 1A shall be placed behind each curb piece and on the geotextile fabric to secure the fabric in place. The Geotextile Filter Material shall be attached to the wire frame by using wire ties. The ties shall be placed every 12 inches on center. The purpose of the coarse aggregate will be to hold the filtering system in place and divert the runoff that occurs along the curb into the drainage grate. The placement of the coarse aggregate shall be done at the same time that the filtering system is installed.

D263143 1281

ITEM 209.11000011- INLET FILTER SEDIMENT CONTROL FOR NEW CATCH BASINS

ITEM 209.12000011- INLET FILTER SEDIMENT CONTROL FOR EXISTING CATCH BASINS

01/02/08

The installation of the sediment control filters shall be done as soon as any excavation is started on the job that could result in erosion runoff into the existing or proposed drainage system. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to inspect the basins weekly and after each rainfall. The Contractor shall be required to clean all sediment that is accumulated in the drainage grate. The filtering system shall be cleaned by using methods approved by the Engineer. The sediment material that is removed from the drainage grate shall be removed from the site. All material that accumulates shall be disposed of by the Contractor in accordance with any State and Federal requirements at the time of removal. The silt protection screening shall then be reinstalled in the same basin unless ordered to be disposed of by the Engineer. In the event that any part of the silt protection screening is determined unusable, the Contractor shall reconstruct or refurbish the silt protection at no additional cost to the State. Inlet Filters shall be removed the same day as scheduled paving operations. METHOD OF MEASUREMENT The work will be measured as the number of inlet filter sediment control units that are installed. BASIS OF PAYMENT The unit price bid for each inlet filter sediment control unit shall include the cost of equipment, labor, materials, installation, cleaning and removal necessary to complete the work. The placement of the coarse aggregate shall be included in this item. The Contractor will be paid 50% of the bid price upon the installation of the silt protection screening units and the remaining 50% upon the removal of the units when no longer needed as determined by the Engineer.

D2631431282

ITEM 209.13000007 – MAINTAIN, REPAIR AND REMOVE PREVIOUSLY INSTALLED TEMPORARY SILT FENCE

12/09

DESCRIPTION:

This work shall consist of maintaining, repairing and removing previously furnished and installed temporary silt fence when directed by the Engineer.

MATERIALS:

Any new materials used to replace previously installed temporary silt fence shall conform to the requirements of Item 209.13.

CONSTRUCTION DETAILS:

The existing temporary silt fence shall be maintained in good condition and repaired in accordance with Item 209.13 as directed by the Engineer.

METHOD OF MEASUREMENT:

Payment for maintaining, repairing and removing existing temporary silt fence will be made on the lump sum basis for the existing temporary silt fence maintained, repaired and subsequently removed upon completion of work.

BASIS OF PAYMENT:

The unit price bid shall include the cost of furnishing all labor, materials and equipment necessary to satisfactorily complete the work. Monthly payments will be made in proportion to the amount of work done as determined by the Engineer. The remainder of the unit bid price shall be paid for after complete removal of the existing temporary silt fence.

D263143 1283

420.50030110 - Top Course Porous Asphalt Pavement with Fiber F3 420.50090110 - Top Course Porous Asphalt Pavement with Fiber F9 420.70090110 - Binder Course Porous Asphalt Pavement F9

Aug. 2015

DESCRIPTION: Furnish and place Porous Asphalt Pavement courses in accordance with the contract documents and/or as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. The top course mixture requires the use of Fibers as outlined in this specification. MATERIALS: The materials and composition for the Porous Asphalt Pavement mixtures shall meet the requirements specified in §401-2 Materials, except as noted herein. Formulate a job mix formula (JMF) that satisfies the design limits listed below and submit it to the Regional Materials Engineer (RME), at least one week prior to placement of the test section.

Porous Asphalt Pavement Mixtures Gradation Requirements

Screen Sizes Top Course Binder Course General Limits

% Passing General Limits

% Passing 2 inch --- 100

1 1/2 inch --- 75-100 1 inch --- 55-80

3/4 inch 100 --- 1/2 inch 85-100 23-42 3/8 inch 55-75 --- 1/4 inch --- 5-20

No. 4 10-25 --- 1/8 inch --- 2-15

No. 8 5-10 --- No. 16 --- --- No. 30 --- --- No. 200 4 maximum ---

D2631431284


Aug. 2015

Porous Asphalt Pavement Mixtures Design Criteria

Mix Ndesign Air

Voids @ Ndesign

PG Binder Content VCAmix

2

Draindown of Uncompacted

Asphalt Mixtures, AASHTO T305,

maximum

Mixing and Compaction Temperature

Range4 °F

Top Course 50 20.0 6.0 %

minimum

Less than

VCAdrc3

0.3 % 285°F - 325°F

Binder Course1 35 --- 2.5 % –

4.5 % --- 0.3 % 285°F - 325°F

Notes: 1. Sufficient PG Binder shall be used in the mixture such that at least 95 percent of the

aggregate particles are completely coated with binder as determined by AASHTO T195. In addition, when compacted in a gyratory compactor to 35 gyrations, the resulting specimen shall be stable and must not fall apart under its own weight.

2. VCAmix = The voids in the coarse aggregate fraction of the mix based on specimens compacted to Ndesign. The coarse aggregate fraction of the aggregate is that portion of the JMF aggregate skeleton not passing the No. 4 sieve.

= 100 − ∗

Where: Pca = The percent of the coarse aggregate fraction by weight of total mix.

Gmb = The bulk specific gravity of the mix at the design PG Binder content as determined by AASHTO T275 or T331. Gca = The bulk specific gravity of the coarse aggregate fraction as determined by AASHTO T85.

3. VCAdrc = The voids in the coarse aggregate fraction of the JMF aggregate skeleton, determined using the dry rodding technique according to AASHTO T19. = 100 −

Where: Gsbca = The bulk specific gravity of the coarse aggregate fraction as

determined by AASHTO T85. = The unit weight of the coarse aggregate fraction (as determined by

AASHTO T19. = The unit weight of water.

4. Or as specified by the PG Binder Supplier. Coarse Aggregate Type F3 Conditions. Use one of the following types of coarse aggregate.

1. Limestone or a blend of limestone and dolomite having an acid-insoluble residue content of not less than 20.0%.

2. Dolomite.

D263143 1285


Aug. 2015

3. Sandstone, granite, chert, traprock, ore tailings, slag or other similar noncarbonate materials.

4. Gravel, or a natural or manufactured blend of the following types of materials: limestone, dolomite, gravel, sandstone, granite, chert, traprock, ore tailings, slag or other similar materials, where the noncarbonate plus 1/8 inch particles must comprise a minimum of 10.0% of the total aggregate (by weight with adjustments to equivalent volumes for materials of different specific gravities). A minimum of 20.0% of plus 3/8 inch particles must be noncarbonate.

Coarse Aggregate Type F9 Conditions. Use coarse aggregate meeting the requirements of §703-02, Coarse Aggregate. Performance-Grade (PG) Binder. Use polymer or terminal blend Crumb Rubber Modified (CRM) PG 64E-22 Binder, in the production of both of these mixtures. The PG Binders shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 332, Standard Specification for Performance Graded Asphalt Binder using Multiple Stress Creep Recovery (MSCR), for the production of the Porous Asphalt Pavement mixtures. In addition, the binder grade must also meet the elastomeric properties as indicated by one of the following equations for %R3.2:

1. For Jnr3.2 ≥ 0.1, %R3.2 >29.371 * Jnr3.2-0.2633

2. For Jnr3.2 <0.1, %R3.2 > 55 Where R3.2 is % recovery at 3.2 kPa Jnr 3.2 is the average non-recoverable creep compliance at 3.2 kPa When terminal blend CRM PG binder is used, the following shall apply:

• Crumb rubber particles shall be finer than #30 sieve size. • The terminal blend CRM PG binder shall be storage-stable and homogeneous. • The Dynamic Shear Rheometer (DSR) shall be set at 2-mm gap. • The terminal blend CRM PG binder shall be 99% free of particles retained on the 600 µm

sieve as tested in accordance with Section 5.4 of M 332. In addition, the PG Binder must meet the following requirements:

• Downstate (Orange, Putnam, Rockland, Westchester, Nassau, Suffolk counties and City of New York), use of Polyphosphoric Acid (PPA) to modify the PG binder properties is prohibited for mixtures containing limestone, limestone as an aggregate blend component, or limestone as a constituent in crushed gravel aggregate. This prohibition also applies to the use of PPA as a cross-linking agent for polymer modification.

• Upstate (all other counties not listed under Downstate), use of PPA to modify PG binder properties is prohibited. This prohibition also applies to the use of PPA as a cross-linking agent for polymer modification.

Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement (RAP). The use of RAP will not be allowed.

D2631431286


Aug. 2015

Fiber. Top Course Porous Asphalt Mixtures shall contain either a Mineral fiber or Cellulose fiber stabilizing additive.

• If a Mineral fiber is utilized in the production of the porous asphalt, then the dosage rate for the Mineral fiber shall be approximately 0.4% by total mixture mass and sufficient to prevent draindown. The mineral fibers must meet the properties in the table below.

Mineral Fiber Properties1

Property Specification Size Analysis Fiber Length 2

Thickness 3

0.25 in. maximum mean test value

0.0002 in. maximum mean test value Shot Content 4

Passing No. 60 sieve Passing No.230 sieve

90 ± 5% 70 ± 10%

Notes: 1. The European experience and development of the above criteria are based on the use of basalt mineral fibers. 2. The fiber length is determined according to the Bauer McNett fractionation. 3. The fiber thickness, or diameter, is determined by measuring at least 200 fibers in a phase-contrast microscope. 4. Shot content is a measure of non-fibrous material. The shot content is determined on vibrating sieves. Two sieves, the 0.250 mm and the 0.063 mm, are typically utilized. For additional information, see AASHTO C612.

• If a Cellulose fiber utilized in production of the porous asphalt mixture, then the

dosage rate for the Cellulose fiber shall be approximately 0.3% by total mixture mass and sufficient to prevent draindown. The Cellular fibers must meet the properties in the table below.

D263143 1287


Aug. 2015

Cellulose Fiber Properties

Property Specification Sieve Analysis

Method A - Alpine Sieve5 Analysis Fiber Length

Percent Passing 0.150 mm

6 mm Maximum 70 ± 10

Method B - Mesh Screen6 Analysis Fiber Length

Percent Passing 0.850 mm 0.425 mm 0.106 mm

6 mm Maximum

85 ± 10 65 ± 10 30 ± 10

Ash Content7 18 ± 5% Non Volatiles pH8 7.5 ± 1.0

Oil Absorption9 5.0 ± 1.0 (times fiber mass) Moisture Content10 Less than 5% (by mass)

Notes: 5. This test is performed using an Alpine Air Jet Sieve (Type 200 LS). A representative 5 gram sample of fiber is sieved for 14 minutes at a controlled vacuum of 75 kPa of water. The portion remaining on the screen is weighed. 6. This test is performed using standard No. 20, 40, 60, 80, 100, and 140 sieves (0.850, 0.425, 0.250, 0.180, 0.150, and 0.106 mm), nylon brushes, and a shaker. A representative 10 gram sample of the fiber sieved using a shaker and two nylon brushes on each screen. The amount retained on each sieve is weighed and the percentage passing calculated. Repeatability of this method is suspect and needs to be verified. 7. A representative 2 to 3 gram sample of fiber is placed in a tared crucible and heated to between 1100 º and 1112 º F (595º and 600º C) for not less than two hours. The crucible and ash are cooled in a desiccator and weighed. 8. Five grams of fiber are added to 100 ml of distilled water, stirred, and allowed to sit for 30 minute. The pH is determined with a probe calibrated with a pH buffer of 7.0. 9. Five grams of fibers are accurately weighed and suspended in an excess of mineral spirits for not less than 5 minutes to ensure total saturation. They are then placed in a screen-mesh strainer (approximately 0.5 mm 2 opening size) and shaken on a wrist-action shaker for 10 minutes (approximately a 1.25 inch (32 mm) motion at 240 shakes per minute). The shaken mass is then transferred without touching to a tared container and weighed. Results are reported as the amount (number of times its own weight) the fibers are able to absorb. 10. Ten grams of fibers are weighed and placed in a 250 º F (121º C), forced air oven for two hours. The sample is then reweighed immediately upon removal from the oven.

D2631431288


Aug. 2015

CONSTRUCTION DETAILS: The provisions of §401-3 and §402-3, Construction Details, shall apply except as modified herein. Plant QC/QA. The QCT/QAT shall perform all testing required in Materials Procedure 401, Table 3 Sampling and Testing Matrix, including air voids testing. However, acceptance of the mixture quality will be based on aggregate gradation and asphalt binder content only. Plant Production. If the top course mixture is produced in a batch type plant, the mixing time of the dry constituents of the mixture (aggregates and mineral fibers), must be increased by a minimum of 15 seconds. Paving. Keep the porous asphalt pavement free of contamination from the construction operations. Take precautions as necessary such as washing truck tires, installation of silt fence, tarps on heavily traveled areas, etc. Stage the placement of the porous asphalt pavement after the surrounding areas have been final graded and stabilized to minimize potential sediment laden water from reaching the pavement surface. Do not place the porous asphalt pavement mixture on a wet surface or when the surface temperature is below 50° F. The use of Tack Coat will be prohibited. Prior to the placement of the Top Course, the Binder Course must be cleaned to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-charge. Place each course of porous asphalt pavement in one lift. Use a mechanical rubber track paver to place as much of the mix as possible. After completion of each pavement course, allow the pavement to cure for a minimum of 24 hours before placing the next course or allowing traffic of any kind on it. Rollers. A 10 ton double drum asphalt roller, with a minimum drum width of 54 inches, is required. The roller must be operated in static mode at all times. Operation of the roller in vibratory and/or oscillatory mode is prohibited. Pneumatic Tire rollers are prohibited. Do not stop the roller on the freshly placed mix for more than 30 seconds. Make the desired number of passes, with the roller to get the final in-place air voids of pavement layer that shall be 16% to 22% for the Top Course and 20% to 26% for the Binder Course. Density Gauge. Provide a density gauge operator that possesses a current Density Gauge Inspector Certification from The Associated General Contractors, New York State, or its equivalent. The density gauge operator will monitor the in-place density to ensure that the pavement is being compacted to the Project Target Density (PTD). The PTD will be determined as 81% of the Mixture’s Maximum Theoretical Density (MMTD) for the top course and 79% for the Binder course. Perform a minimum of one density gauge reading for every 200 square feet of pavement surface placed.

D263143 1289


Aug. 2015

Acceptance of the finished product will be based on:

1. Acceptable in-place density gauge readings at each test location will be between 95% and 105% of the PTD. Acceptable in-place densities of the pavement as determined by the density gauge operator and the Engineer-in-Charge.

2. Porosity Test. Allow a minimum of 24 hours after completion of the Top Course, before testing. Perform a porosity test at 3 locations chosen by the Engineer-in-charge. . At each location, test the porosity for a minimum of 3 minutes. The test is accomplished by applying clean water at a measured rate of at least 5 gal/min over the surface of about one square foot area, using a hose or other distribution device. Water used for the test shall be clean, free from suspended solids and deleterious materials and will be provided at no additional cost. All applied water shall infiltrate the test panel directly, without puddle formation or surface runoff, and shall be observed by the Engineer-in-charge.

METHOD OF MEASUREMENT: The Provisions of §401-4 and §402-4 shall apply except as noted herein. This work will be measured as the number of tons of compacted porous asphalt pavement satisfactorily furnished and installed in accordance with the plans, specifications, and orders of the Engineer. Production meeting the specification requirements will be paid at the bid price. Production failing to meet the specification requirements will be subject to evaluation by the Engineer-in-Charge. If left in place, it will be paid for at 0.85 times the bid price. BASIS OF PAYMENT: The Provisions of §401-5 and §402-5, Basis of Payment shall apply. Payment will be made under: ITEM NO. ITEM PAY UNIT 420.50030110 Top Course Porous Asphalt Pavement with Fiber F3 Ton 420.50090110 Top Course Porous Asphalt Pavement with Fiber F9 Ton 420.70090110 Binder Course Porous Asphalt Pavement F9 Ton

D2631431290

ITEM 520.09000010 - SAW CUTTING ASPHALT CONCRETE

08/15/08E 8/81 2/1/96 M

DESCRIPTION. This work shall consist of saw cutting existing asphalt concrete pavement or sidewalk at the locations indicated on the plans or where directed by the Engineer. MATERIALS. All equipment proposed for this work shall be approved by the Engineer prior to actual use. CONSTRUCTION DETAILS. Saw cutting shall be along a neat line as indicated on the plans or where directed by the Engineer. Saw cuts shall be made to the depth(s) indicated on the plans. Any damage to material not indicated for removal, caused by the Contractor’s operations shall be repaired by the Contractor. All repair shall be done in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. METHOD OF MEASUREMENT. This work will be measured by the number of linear feet of saw cutting done. No allowances will be made for saw cuts of different depths. No saw cutting will be measured for payment under this item which the Contractor may choose to do for his own convenience. BASIS OF PAYMENT. The unit price bid per linear foot of saw cutting shall include the cost of all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to complete the work. Any repairs made necessary by the Contractor’s operations shall be done to the satisfaction of the Engineer at no additional cost to the State.

D263143 1291

ITEM 555.72950010 - ARCHITECTURAL TREATMENT VERTICAL STAINED CONCRETE SURFACES

08/19/08E 07/29/04

DESCRIPTION This work shall consist of architecturally treating and staining the vertical surfaces of integrally colored concrete retaining walls, structures, pilasters, piers or other similar vertical surfaces with designated patterns and textures. All work shall be in accordance with these specifications and in reasonably close conformity to the lines, grades, patterns and textures shown on the plans. MATERIALS Form Liner and Rustication Strips. Commercially produced Form Liner and Rustication Strip shall meet the requirements of Section 555-3. The form liners and Rustication Strips shall:

1. Produce the patterns, textures and joints indicated on the plans. 2. Be composed of a material(s) that will not bond to concrete. 3. Be attachable to standard plywood, steel, or concrete forms, such that no distortions, or stray

markings occur within the concrete surfaces. 4. Be fabricated with care so that all strips are equal in cross-section so that the ends of the strips

can be matched during installation. Concrete. Concrete shall meet the requirements of Section 501 and 555 of the Standard Specifications except for the following. The class of concrete will be as specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. Color Admixture. All concrete which is visible above the finished grade shall be integrally colored using pigment admixture, Federal color as noted on drawings and as approved by the Regional Landscape Architect. The color admixture for integrally colored concrete shall be certified by the manufacturer as meeting the requirements of ASTM 979, Standard Specifications for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete and be packaged such that one dose is the proper dosage for one cubic meter of concrete. Releasing Agents. If the form liner manufacturer requires the use of an agent to facilitate the release of the form liner panel from the concrete, or when its use is specified on the plans, such agent shall appear on the Departments Approved List – Form Coatings for Structural Concrete, be non-staining and evenly spread over the entire liner surface. Formwork shall also be treated as needed. Concrete Penetrating Stain. To unify minor variations in color, a concrete penetrating stain shall be applied in the field on all surfaces of the integrally colored concrete. The color of the concrete penetrating stain shall match the integrally colored concrete. The penetrating stain shall be a single component water-based thermoplastic acrylic emulsion which carries its color and water repellent protection into the concrete. The stain shall be delivered in original, sealed plastic pails clearly labeled with the manufacturer’s name and batch number of the material. The penetrating stain shall conform to the following performance requirements: PHYSICAL PROPERTIES CONDITION RESULTS TEST METHOD Dry-through time 25 minutes maximum ASTM D 1640

D2631431292


08/19/08E 07/29/04

Dry-to-recoat time 1 hour maximum ASTM D 1640 Oil, Wax & Silicone Content None Adhesion to Concrete 200 lb/sq.in ASTM D 4541- (Average of 5 Tests) Elcometer Test Weather-Q-Meter Tests No Visible ASTM G 23-Atlas (500 Hours) Degradation Carbon Arc Solids by Weight 57% ± 2% Viscosity 70-75 KU ASTM D 562 The unpigmented, clear, non-volatile portion of the stain shall match the infrared spectrograph on file at the central laboratory. The penetrating concrete stain shall comply with New York State Laws regulating the use of volatile organic compounds and solvents. Caulking Compounds. When a caulking compound is required to seal any necessary concrete joints in the surface, such caulking compounds shall be color matched to the adjacent concrete and meet the material requirements of U.S. Federal Specification TT-S-00227E (COM-NBS) as a multi component, Class A, Type II sealant with ASTM C 920, Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants as a Type M, Grade NS, Class 25 joint sealant for uses NT, A, M, and O. SUBMITTALS The Contractor shall submit the following for approval:

1. A separate 3ft x 3ft x 4 inch thick completely finished sample of integrally colored, stained concrete with form liner/rustication joint treatment shall be cast on-site using the methods, materials and finishes stated in this specification and on the plans for the approval of the Engineer and the Regional Landscape Architect. When approved, this sample shall be used as the standard for all Architecturally Treated Stained Concrete work on the project.

2. Form Liner and Rustication Strip samples with manufacturer’s specifications shall be submitted to the Regional Landscape Architect for approval.

3. Shop drawings of layouts for vertical stained concrete surfaces on retaining walls, abutment walls, parapets, piers and pier caps, including all dimensions and radii.

CONSTRUCTION DETAILS All provisions of Section 555-3 shall apply with the following modifications: To integrally color the concrete, use a color admixture dosage rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve the Federal color as noted on drawings. This rate is to remain constant for all batches of concrete produced. Introduce color admixtures into the mixer drum in a manner recommended by the manufacturer. The quantity of concrete being delivered shall be no less than one-third the capacity of the mixer drum. Batch the concrete in full cubic meter increments. Once a portion of the batch has been placed, no additional mixing water shall be added to the remaining batch.

D263143 1293


08/19/08E 07/29/04

Special care shall be taken after installation to ensure that all form liner surfaces are thoroughly clean of all stray material of any nature. No concrete shall be placed prior to the Engineer’s inspection and approval of form liner surfaces. Approximately 5/64 in of the form liner panel shall overlap on either side of the formwork panel so that when the formwork sections are forced together, the form liners compress at the edges to form a tight joint. Joints between panels shall be sealed, taped or fused to form a watertight seam, according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Unless specified on the plans, texturing is not required on surfaces which will be below finished grade. Plastic snap tie cones are to be of the non-leaking type. Metal form ties are not to be placed closer than 1.5 inch to the interior surface. Construction joints shall extend to the full depth of the concrete at the locations shown on the plans. When construction joints are needed but are not shown on the plans, the Contractor and the Engineer shall agree on the proper locations of such joints so as not to detract from the appearance of the imprinted pattern and to minimize the possibilities of cracking. Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, all horizontal and vertical construction joints and contraction joints shall be rusticated with the use of chamfer strips of the size indicated on the plans installed on the formwork. The rustication strips shall be carefully installed true to line and grade. The rustication strips shall be so installed as to leave a neat regular groove in the concrete at all construction joints, along the vertical and horizontal showing edges of contraction joints and at all exposed corners and edges of the concrete. When used to form the showing edge of construction joints or at the top edges of pours, the concrete shall be placed even with the top of the strip to provide a formed groove with the same dimensions as that of the strip. To avoid inclusion of dust and debris beneath chamfer strips located at construction joints, the strips at the bottom of the form shall not be positioned until the joint surface has been washed or blown clean of all debris and accepted by the Engineer. After formwork removal the Engineer will inspect architecturally patterned concrete surfaces. All such surfaces which do not exhibit the required architectural pattern shall be repaired in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer at no cost to the State. The repair shall match the concrete surface. Concrete repair material, if used, shall meet the requirements of Subsection 701-04, Concrete Repair Material of the Standard Specifications. Under Subsection 555-3.08, clear (fugitive dye) membrane curing compound shall not be used. Surfaces to receive the penetrating stain shall be structurally sound, fully cured, clean, dry and free from dust, curing agents, oil, grease, efflorescence and any other contaminants that could prevent proper adhesion. After the concrete has cured 28 days, power wash at a minimum of 2,900 lb/sq inch the surface of the area to receive stain. Sandblasting will not be permitted. Prior to use, the stain shall be thoroughly mixed using the appropriate mechanical means and shall be remixed during spraying operations as required to maintain uniformity. Penetrating stain shall be applied in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s written instructions and precautions. At the time of stain application, both the concrete and air temperatures must be between 45E F and 90E F. Stain shall not be applied unless weather conditions will permit complete drying of material prior to rain, fog, dew or temperatures beyond the prescribed limits.

D2631431294


08/19/08E 07/29/04

The penetrating concrete stain shall be spray applied using conventional or airless spray. The stain shall be applied in two thin coats providing a uniform appearance. The first coat must be applied to become tack free before the second coat is applied. The final coat shall be consistent with the quality and appearance of the approved sample area. The rate of applications shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Area of coverage may vary depending on absorption rates of the various surface materials and textures. Stain may be brushed or roller applied only at locations where overspray would affect adjacent materials and where not practical for spray application. Adequate protection shall be provided to protect adjacent persons, vehicles and property from overspray during staining operations. Prior to any staining operations, the Contractor shall be required to complete a test staining program for color acceptance and surface area coverage. This work shall be performed on a portion of the erected structure, location of which to be determined by the Engineer. The Contractor shall apply stain to one complete section of the structure, which, when approved, shall serve as a standard of acceptance for all further work. The completed stain surfaces shall be consistent with the quality and appearance of the approved sample area. If unevenness in color, lines or the work termination, etc. exist, the Engineer may have all such surfaces resprayed at the Contractor’s’s expense. Respraying, if required, shall be carried to a natural break-off point. METHOD OF MEASUREMENT Architectural Treatment Vertical Stained Concrete Surfaces will be measured by the number of square feet of concrete treated to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The quantity will be as computed from payment lines shown on the plans or as established by the Engineer in writing. Measurement will be taken as the vertical plane projection of the treated location. No measurement will be taken of actual concrete surfaces. BASIS OF PAYMENT The unit price bid per square foot shall include the cost of the form liners, rustication strips, color admixture, concrete penetrating stain, releasing agent, caulking compound, concrete repair material and all other materials, equipment and labor necessary to complete the work as specified, as well as the cost associated with all submittals and samples required. Structural concrete will be paid for separately.

D263143 1295

ITEM 559.90010011 - ANTI-GRAFFITI PROTECTION COATING

1 of 1 01/99

DESCRIPTION. The work shall consist of the application of Anti-Graffiti Protection Coating to the concrete, brick or stone masonry surfaces indicated on the Contract Plans and where directed by the Engineer. MATERIALS. One of the following three products shall be used, as approved by the Engineer for the applicable surface: 1. Knight and Shield-100, as manufactured by East Coast Clean-up Corp., 799 Broadway, NY 10003,

Tel. (212) 875-9044. 2. Protect Epoxy, as manufactured by A.G.P. Systems, Inc., Windham, NY 12496, Tel. (518) 734-

5880. 3. Graffiti Control, as manufactured by Prosoco, Inc., 111 Snyder Road, S. Plainfield, NJ 07080, Tel.

(908) 754-4410. or, an approved equal. CONSTRUCTION DETAILS. 1. Prior to application of the Anti-Graffiti Protection Coating, the surfaces to be coated shall be clean,

dry and free of dirt, oil and contaminants and meet the approval of the Engineer. 2. The Anti-Graffiti Protection Coating shall be applied to the surfaces in accordance with the

manufacturer’s instruction and recommendations and shall meet the approval of the Engineer. The Contractor shall supply the instructions to the Engineer at least two (2) weeks prior to starting work. The Contractor shall provide protection to collect anti-graffiti protection coating material to prevent the material from falling onto all areas below the work area.

METHOD OF MEASUREMENT. The Anti-Graffiti Protection Coating will be measured per square yard of area coated. Measurement will be taken as the vertical plans projection for the coated area. BASIS OF PAYMENT. The unit price bid for this item shall include the cost of all labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete this work. No payment will be made for repair of, or replacement of, damaged material, caused by the Contractor’s operations.

D2631431296

May, 2015

ITEM 560.12010010 – SEAT WALL

DESCRIPTION

Under this item the Contractor shall furnish and install Seat Walls of the size and at the locations shown in the contract documents and as directed by the Engineer.

MATERIALS

Concrete for footing and core shall be Class A, conforming to Section 501. Portland Cement - Type 1 or Type 2, conforming to Section 701-01. Masonry Cement, conforming to Section 701-02. Fine Aggregates, conforming to Section 703-01. Coarse Aggregates, conforming to Section 703-02. Mortar Sand, conforming to Section 703-03. Masonry Mortar, conforming to Section 705-21. Epoxy Coated Bar Reinforcement, Grade 60, conforming to Section 709-04. Bluestone cap shall conform to Dimensional Masonry, Section 560-2.01. Manufactured Masonry Veneer shall match base of adjacent Taste NY building as follows:

A. Profile: Drystack. Include matching corner pieces. B. Stone Accents:

1. Color: To match main building. To be selected from the manufacturer’s full range of material styles and colors.

2. Texture: To match main building. To be selected from the manufacturer’s full range of material styles.

C. Veneer Unit properties: Precast veneer units consisting of Portland cement, lightweight aggregates, and mineral oxide pigments.

D. Compressive Strength: ASTM C 192 and ASTM C 39, 5 sample average: greater than 1,800 psi (12.4MPa).

E. Shear Bond: ASTM C 482: 50 psi (345kPa), minimum. F. Freeze-Thaw Test: ASTM C 67: Less than 3 percent weight loss and no

disintegration. G. Thermal Resistance: ASTM C 177: 0.473 at 1.387 inches thick. H. Weight per square foot: 2012 IBC and 2012 IRC, ASTM C1670, 15 pounds,

saturated I. Manufacturer:

1. Eldorado Stone, LLC 1370 Grand Ave., Bldg. B San Marcos, CA 92069

www.eldoradostone.com

D263143 1297

http://www.eldoradostone.com/

May, 2015


2. Boral Stone Products LLC One Owens Corning Parkway Toledo, OH 43659www.culturedstone.com

3. Quality Stone Veneer Inc. 50 Refton Road Refton, PA 17568 [email protected]

CONSTRUCTION DETAILS

The Contractor shall perform all work necessary to construct seat walls at the locations shown on the Plans and as shown in the Details. Excavation shall be performed in accordance with Section 206 of the Standard Specifications. Masonry work shall comply with Section 560 of the Standard Specifications. Concrete for foundation and core shall meet the requirements for Class A concrete for structures as specified in Section 501. General: No masonry shall be constructed when the ambient temperature is 40⁰ F or below, or when any masonry unit exhibits frost, except by written permission of the Engineer and subject to any conditions he may require.

Masonry units shall not be dropped upon or slid over existing masonry, nor shall hammering or turning of masonry units on the existing masonry be allowed. Masonry units shall be carefully set without jarring masonry already laid, and they shall be handled in a manner so as not to cause disfigurement. Protection and Handling: Upon delivery to the site, the masonry units shall be neatly piled off the ground, on pallets or other approved implements, and protected from moisture by wrapping them with 4 mil polyethylene. Masonry units which become wet shall be permitted to dry for at least seven days before being laid in the wall. Laying: The manufactured masonry veneer masonry shall be laid up, in the pattern shown on the plans, by skilled masons and in first-class manner. The masonry shall be laid true to line and grade in level horizontal beds and be properly anchored. Each masonry unit shall be laid in a full mortar bed and in a manner to form a full end joint in one operation. The space between the masonry veneer and the adjacent concrete core shall be filled with mortar as each unit is placed.

METHOD OF MEASUREMENT

The work will be measured as the number of linear feet of seat wall, measured along the center line of the top of the wall, furnished and erected in accordance with the contract documents.

D2631431298

http://www.culturedstone.com/

mailto:[email protected]

May, 2015


BASIS OF PAYMENT

The unit price bid per linear foot of seat wall shall include the cost of furnishing all labor, materials, tools, and equipment necessary to satisfactorily complete the work for each sign. Excavation, concrete footing, masonry work and installation and disposal of excess materials and backfilling are all included in this item.

D263143 1299

ITEM 560.12020010 – TASTE NY ENTRANCE WALL SIGN

DESCRIPTION

Under this item the Contractor shall furnish and install Taste NY Entrance Signs of the size, dimensions, configuration and at the locations shown in the contract plans and as directed by the Engineer.

MATERIALS

• Concrete for footings shall be Class A, conforming to Section 501. • Concrete block masonry shall be ASTM C-90, Type 1, medium weight open core units. • Portland Cement - Type 1 or Type 2, conforming to Section 701-01. • Masonry Cement, conforming to Section 701-02. • Fine Aggregates, conforming to Section 703-01. • Coarse Aggregates, conforming to Section 703-02. • Mortar Sand, conforming to Section 703-03. • Caulking Compound for Structures 705-06. • Premolded Resilient Joint Filler, conforming to Section 705-07. • Mortar for Concrete Masonry, conforming to Section 705-21. • Bar Reinforcement, Grade 420 709-01. • Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement, conforming to Section 709-02. • Epoxy Coated Bar Reinforcement, Grade 420, conforming to Section 709-04. • Bluestone cap shall conform to Dimensional Masonry, Section 560. • Aluminum letters and Taste NY logo shall be Dark Bronze anodized 6061 aluminum alloy

that complies with ASTM B179 Specification for Aluminum Alloys in Ingot and Molten Forms for Castings from All Casting Processes, ASTM B85 Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Die Castings and ASTM B26, Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Sand Castings.

• Horizontal joint reinforcement shall be 9 gauge side rods with 9 gauge cross rod radius shaped ladders, mill galvanized steel and shall conform to the requirements of Section 709-02.

• Manufactured Masonry Veneer shall match base of adjacent Taste NY building as follows: A. Profile: Drystack. Include matching corner pieces. B. Stone Accents:

1. Color: To match main building. To be selected from the manufacturers full range of material styles and colors.

2. Texture: To match main building. To be selected from the manufacturer’s full range of material styles.

C. Veneer Unit properties: Precast veneer units consisting of Portland cement, lightweight aggregates, and mineral oxide pigments.

D. Compressive Strength: ASTM C 192 and ASTM C 39, 5 sample average: greater than 1,800 psi (12.4MPa).

May, 2015

D2631431300

javascript:goRefDoc('B179')


E. Shear Bond: ASTM C 482: 50 psi (345kPa), minimum. F. Freeze-Thaw Test: ASTM C 67: Less than 3 percent weight loss and no

disintegration. G. Thermal Resistance: ASTM C 177: 0.473 at 1.387 inches thick. H. Weight per square foot: 2012 IBC and 2012 IRC, ASTM C1670, 15 pounds,

saturated I. Manufacturer shall be one of:

1. Eldorado Stone, LLC 1370 Grand Ave., Bldg. B San Marcos, CA 92069

www.eldoradostone.com

2. Boral Stone Products LLC One Owens Corning Parkway Toledo, OH 43659 www.culturedstone.com

3. Quality Stone Veneer Inc. 50 Refton Road, Refton, PA 17568 [email protected]

CONSTRUCTION DETAILS Contractor shall perform all work necessary to construct masonry Taste NY Entrance Signs at the locations shown on the Plans and as shown in the Details. Excavation shall be performed in accordance with Section 206 of the Standard Specifications. Masonry work shall comply with Section 560 of the Standard Specifications. Concrete for foundation shall meet the requirements for Class A concrete for structures as specified in Section 501. General: No masonry shall be constructed when the ambient temperature is 40 F or below, or when any masonry unit exhibits frost, except by written permission of the engineer and subject to any conditions he may require.

Masonry units shall not be dropped upon or slid over existing masonry, nor shall hammering or turning of masonry units on the existing masonry be allowed. Masonry units shall be carefully set without jarring masonry already laid, and they shall be handled in a manner so as not to cause disfigurement. Protection and Handling: Upon delivery to the site, the masonry units shall be neatly piled off the ground, on pallets or other approved implements, and protected from moisture by wrapping them with 4 mil polyethylene. Masonry units which become wet shall be permitted to dry for at least seven days before being laid in the wall.

May, 2015

D263143 1301

http://www.eldoradostone.com/

http://www.culturedstone.com/

mailto:[email protected]


Laying: The concrete block and manufactured masonry veneer masonry shall be laid up, in the pattern shown on the plans, by skilled masons and in first-class manner. The masonry shall be laid true to line and grade in level horizontal beds and be properly anchored. Each masonry unit shall be laid in a full mortar bed and in a manner to form a full end joint in one operation. The space between the masonry veneer and the adjacent concrete block and the cells of each concrete block unit shall be filled with mortar and rodded until the mortar rises to the top of the masonry unit as each unit is placed. The entrance sign letter fabrication and installation shall be performed by a supplier/subcontractor having experience in similar work of 5 years and 10 projects minimum as approved by the Engineer. The entrance sign shall be warranted to be free from all manufacturing and installation defects for a period not less than two years from the date of acceptance.


Item will be measured as the number of Taste NY Entrance Wall Signs properly furnished and installed in accordance with the contract documents.

BASIS OF PAYMENT

The unit price bid for each Taste NY Entrance Wall Sign shall include the cost of furnishing all labor, materials, tools, and equipment necessary to satisfactorily complete the work for each sign. Excavation, concrete footing, masonry work, aluminum letters and installation and disposal of excess materials and backfilling are all included in this item.

May, 2015

D2631431302

601.04020011– Methyl Methacrylate Color Surface Treatment for Pavements (MMA-CST)

Page 1 of 3 09/15/15

DESCRIPTION. Under this work, the Contractor shall furnish and apply MMA-CST at the location and in accordance with patterns as specified on provided Work Orders or Plans or as ordered by the Engineer and in conformance with these specifications.

MATERIALS. The MMA-CST shall be capable of application on new and existing asphalt and portland cement concrete surfaces, and shall:

Be VOC compliant and lead chromate free.

Not contain 0.1% or more of any chemical listed by the International Agency for Research on

Cancer (IARC), the National Toxicology Program (NTP), or regulated by the US Occupational

Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) as a carcinogen.

Conform to current Federal, State and Local air pollution regulations, including those for the control (emission) of volatile organic compounds (VOC).

Be packaged and stored in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and requirements for shelf life and storage conditions in original unopened containers. Shipping documents and containers shall have identification numbers or batch dates for confirmation of when products were manufactured, clearly labeled as to the type material and the ratio of the components to be mixed by volume as well as showing resin or hardener components, brand name, name of manufacturer, lot or batch number, temperature range for storage, expiration date and the quantity contained. Include any special instructions regarding mixing and the Material Safety Data Sheets. This information shall be made available for inspection at any time.

Be colored green for bicycle lanes, terra cotta for bus lanes, or truffle for plazas as specified on provided Work Orders or Plans. Colors for each work type shall be approved by the Engineer prior to the material purchase by the Contractor.

Incorporate aggregates compatible approved by the MMA manufacture for compatibility and handling in compliance with manufacturer recommendations – providing a surface friction level equivalent or better than existing pavement.

APPROVED MATERIALS. Products appearing on the list below with a Manufacturer’s certification that the product meets the requirements of this specification, or a Product approved equal as determined by the Engineer, are deemed acceptable for use:

Color-Safe® Transpo Industries, Inc. 20 Jones Street, New Rochelle, NY 10801 800-321-7870 www.transpo.com CycleGrip®MMAX Ennis-Flint 115 Todd Court, Thomasville, NC 27360 336-475-6600 www.ennisflint.com

Safetrack®SC Stirling Lloyd North America 152 Rockwell Road, Building A, Newington, CT 06111 860-666-5008 www.northamerica.stirlinglloyd.com

D263143 1303

http://www.transpo.com/

http://www.ennisflint.com/

http://www.northamerica.stirlinglloyd.com/


Page 2 of 3 09/15/15

CONSTRUCTION DETAILS.

General. MMA-CST shall be placed as shown on the Contract or Work Order Documents or as ordered by the Engineer.

Before any surface treatment work is begun, a schedule of operations shall be submitted for the approval of the Engineer and his/her authorized representative. At least five (5) days prior to starting application, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer with the MMA color manufacturer's written instructions for use. These instructions shall include, but not be limited to, material mixing ratios and application temperatures.

When MMA-CST is applied under traffic, the Contractor shall provide all necessary flags, markers, signs, etc. in accordance with the MUTCD to maintain and protect traffic, and to protect marking operations and the markings until thoroughly set.

The Contractor shall be responsible for removing, to the satisfaction of the Engineer, all tracking marks, spilled MMA-CST applied in unauthorized areas.

Atmospheric Conditions. MMA-CST shall only be applied during conditions of dry weather and on dry pavement surfaces. At the time of installation the pavement surface temperature shall be at or above manufacturer recommendations.

Surface Preparation. The Contractor shall clean the pavement and existing durable markings to the satisfaction of the Engineer. At the time of application, all pavement surfaces and existing durable markings shall be free of oil, dirt, dust, grease and similar foreign materials.

Application Equipment. Equipment for the placement of MMA-CST shall be approved by the Engineer prior to the start of work. Application equipment shall include:

1. Squeegees designed for heavy duty use (3/16” notched) 2. Rollers that are medium nap in texture and contain a roller cage and handle 3. High speed, high torque drills capable of supplying enough power to thoroughly mix MMA-CST

additives when paired with a paint mixing paddle

Application. MMA-CST shall be placed at the width, thickness, and pattern designated by the Contract Documents. Surface treatment operations shall not begin until applicable surface preparation work is completed and approved by the Engineer, and the atmospheric conditions and pavement surface temperature are acceptable to the Engineer.

MMA-CST shall be poured onto pavement and evenly distributed using a squeegee. The applied film thickness shall be 95 +/- 5 mils. Trowels may be used in cases where squeegees are not effective. Rollers should then be used to distribute MMA-CST, remove working lines and create a consistent anti-slip texture. Masking tape or similar should be removed as material gels, but before it cures. If required by manufacturer, all concrete surface areas to be coated with MMA-CST shall be masked with primer prior to MMA-CST application.

Defective Results. MMA-CST, which after application and curing is determined by the Engineer to be defective and not in conformance with this specification, shall be repaired. Repair of defective MMA-CST shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and shall be performed to the satisfaction of the Engineer as follows:

1. Insufficient film thickness:

D2631431304


Page 3 of 3 09/15/15

Repair Method. Prepare the surface of the MMA-CST to the satisfaction of the Engineer. - Cleaning and Surface Preparation. Repair shall be made by reapplying MMA-CST over the cleaned surface in accordance with the requirements of this specification at the full thickness.

2. Uncured or discolored MMA-CST and/or insufficient bond (to pavement surface or existing durable marking):

Repair Method. The defective MMA-CST shall be completely removed and cleaned to the underlying pavement surface to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

After surface preparation work is complete, repair shall be made by reapplying MMA color over the cleaned pavement surface in accordance with the requirements of this specification.

Other defects not noted above, but determined by the Engineer to need repair, shall be repaired or replaced as directed by and to the satisfaction of the Engineer. All work in conjunction with the repair or replacement of defective MMA color shall be performed at the Contractor’s expense. Personal Protective Equipment. Follow all exposure, respiratory and personal protective equipment controls, handling and safety precautions and spill and disposal procedures as identified by s safety data sheets (SDS), labels and other manufacturer’s recommendations for the products used. WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL (WZTC). The Contractor is responsible for ensuring appropriate WZTC in compliance with the MUTCD appropriate for the dry time of the selected material applied. The Contractor is responsible to ensure adequate WZTC to prevent those walking, skating, bicycling, and driving from coming into contact with applied material that is still capable of being tracked. The Contractor shall be liable for such tracking and property damage should it occur.

METHOD OF MEASUREMENT. The quantity for payment, in square feet of MMA-CST, shall be computed within the payment lines shown on the plans, Work Order, or as otherwise ordered in writing by the Engineer.

BASIS OF PAYMENT. The accepted quantities of MMA-CST will be paid for at the contract unit price, which shall include the cost of furnishing all labor, materials and equipment to satisfactorily complete the work. The cost of removal of concrete curing compounds and existing pavement markings will be paid under separate items and are not included in this item.

Payment will be made under:

Item No. Item Pay Unit 601.04020011 Methyl Methacrylate Color Surface Treatment for Pavements Square Foot

D263143 1305

ITEM 603.98XX0007- POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) SEWER PIPE & FITTINGS

Rev 1/00 Rev 11/08

DESCRIPTION: Under this item the Contractor shall furnish, install and test (PVC) Sewer Pipe and fittings of the size and at the locations shown on the plans or as ordered by the Engineer. MATERIALS: The Contractor shall be responsible for all material furnished under this item and shall replace at his expense all material found defective in manufacture or damaged in handling. Materials shall be as follows: POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) SEWER PIPE

All Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) pipe and fittings shall meet or exceed all of the requirements of ASTM specification D3034, "Type PSM Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings," 4 NPS through 15 NPS, Class SDR-35 and ASTM F679 "(Polyvinyl Chloride) (PVC) Large Diameter Plastic Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings" for 18 NPS through 36 NPS. The minimum modules of elasticity shall be 19 lbs/sq. ft. All pipes shall be suitable for use as a gravity sewer conduit. Provisions must be made for contraction and expansion at each joint with a rubber ring. The bell shall consist of an integral wall section which securely locks the solid cross-section rubber ring into position. The gasket shall meet the requirements of ASTM F477-76.

Fittings - All fittings and accessories shall be as manufactured and furnished by the pipe supplier, and have bell and/or spigot configurations identical to that of the pipe to which they are connected. Service connections shall be of the "tee-wye" combination. The PVC pipe shall be cut to the correct length in the field as necessary to allow installation of new service connections or service connections to existing laterals.

Saddles - Where it is impractical to install a PVC "tee-wye" service connection, a saddle may be used to make a service connection for new lateral.

The saddle shall contain a rubber (O) - ring gasket cemented in place in accordance with ASTM D1869 specifications. The saddle shall have a spigot or bell inlet suitable for acceptance of the kind and size of lateral pipe to be connected. If necessary, a flexible coupling or gasket may be used to connect the lateral to this saddle. The saddle shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications and shall meet any requirements established by the owners of the sewer system.

D2631431306


Rev 1/00 Rev 11/08

CONSTRUCTION DETAILS: A) EXCAVATION - Excavation shall conform to the requirements of Item 206.02 -

Trench and Culvert Excavation or Item 206.04 - Trench and Culvert Excavation - O.G., except as modified herein and the limits are shown in the Contract Plans.

B) BACKFILLING - No trench, pit or other excavation shall be backfilled until the pipe or appurtenant structures contained therein shall have been completely installed and inspected and approved by the Engineer. In backfilling around and over pipes, stone bedding material shall be spread in layers not over 6 inches in depth on both sides of the pipe and thoroughly spaded and tamped around the pipe so that no displacement of the pipe results. Backfill for a minimum distance of 2 ft above the top of the pipe shall be of the same material and shall be spread in layers not to exceed 6 inches in thickness or depth and each layer shall be thoroughly compacted by spading and tamping before further refilling is done. In all cases, the backfill above the top of the pipe shall be placed to a minimum of 18 inches before compaction is begun directly over the pipe.

C) DISPOSAL OF WATER - Except when included in another specification (i.e. work

area located in a hazardous or contaminated area), water in excavated trenches or pits shall be removed by pumping, bailing or other satisfactory method before the installation of any pipe or structure. Water so removed shall be conveyed to such places and points that it will not interfere with the progress of the work or be a hazard or damage to public or private property. No water containing mud, grit or substances that would settle and be detrimental to the operation of sanitary sewers shall be permitted to flow into any storm or sanitary sewer or drain. No sewage entering excavated trenches or pits shall be pumped or dumped into any surface drainage course. No water, sewage or other material shall be allowed to enter any water main.

D) LAYING SEWER PIPE - Excavation of trenches for sewer pipe shall be made to the

line and grade established or as directed by the Engineer and shall be made straight and true with no deviations from a straight line or grade between manholes.

The sewer pipe shall be bedded on a minimum of 6 inches of stone bedding material.

The trench bottom shall be flat. Holes for bells or couplings shall be dug so that no portion of the bell or coupling will contribute to the support of the pipe. The barrel of the pipe shall be uniformly supported throughout the entire length. Should over digging occur, all loosened material shall be removed and the trench bottom brought back to grade with stone bedding material. Bedding material shall be according to specifications and shall be placed and tamped in a manner satisfactory to the

D263143 1307


Rev 1/00 Rev 11/08

Engineer. Bedding material in such instances shall be placed at the sole expense of the Contractor.

In areas of rock excavation the pipe shall be bedded on a minimum of 6 inches bedding material.

In areas where unstable trench bottoms are encountered, the trench shall be excavated to an additional depth below the layer of stone bedding material and a layer of stone foundation material placed and graded so as to properly support the bedding material, pipe, and backfill. The depth shall vary according to the actual conditions. Payment for such foundation material shall be as hereinafter specified.

All preformed joints shall be made according to manufacturer's specifications. Where it may be necessary to connect to existing facilities of like or unlike materials, such connection shall be made by use of special manufactured adapters as approved by the Engineer.

The inside of each pipe shall be inspected and all foreign matter, joint material that squeezed through, etc., shall be removed before backfilling. Care shall be taken in placing backfill so that the joints are not loosened or sprung. The backfill shall be packed and tamped into place under the pipe. All loosened or broken joints shall be removed and replaced.

E) LEAKAGE TESTS - Unless otherwise ordered by the Engineer, all sewers, service

connections and sewer laterals, shall be tested for leakage and shall satisfactorily meet the test requirements. No connections to existing sewer laterals shall be made until the leakage requirements are met. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment and shall perform the tests. The Contractor shall make all necessary repairs or replacements and shall repeat the final leakage test(s), until the minimum leakage requirements are met.

Leakage tests shall be made only after backfilling is completed. Two types of tests will be acceptable: (a) Exfiltration Test or (b) Low Pressure Air Test. The type of test used will depend upon the extent and type of installation and shall be as directed by the Engineer.

(a) Exfiltration Test

This leakage test consists of an exfiltration test wherein the main sewer, sewer laterals and manholes are filled with clear water to provide a head of at least 5 ft above the top of the pipe or 5 ft above the level of the groundwater table, whichever is higher, at the highest point of the sewer line under test, and measuring the loss of water from the line by the amount which must be added to maintain the original level. In this test the

D2631431308


Rev 1/00 Rev 11/08

line must remain filled with water for at least 24 hours prior to taking measurements, and the actual test period shall not be less than two (2) hours.

For purposes of determining the elevation of the top of the groundwater table, the Contractor shall furnish and install an open-end standpipe of perforated pipe. The standpipe shall be installed at least 24 hours before the line is filled with water. One (1) standpipe shall be installed for each section of sewer line tested. A section of sewer is defined as the length of main sewer, including sewer laterals, between two consecutive manholes. Following successful completion of the leakage tests, the standpipe shall be filled with approved material and the top cut off at least 2 ft below finished grade. Exfiltration shall be measured by the drop of water level in a standpipe or in one of the sewer manholes. When a standpipe and plug arrangement is used in the upper manhole of a line under test, there must be some positive method of releasing entrapped air in the sewer prior to taking measurements. In the case of sewers laid on steep grades, the length of line to be tested at any one time may be limited by the maximum allowable internal pressure on the pipe and joints at the lower end of the line. The recommendations of the pipe manufacturer shall be followed.

When the level of the groundwater table is of such height that the manholes cannot be used for convenient measuring, or if the vertical distance between the top of the pipe and the manhole rim is less than 5 ft, the Contractor shall test the pipe separately from the manholes utilizing the standpipe method including plugs, hoses, etc., to establish the required head of water. Manholes shall then be tested separately.

The total leakage of any section tested shall not exceed the rate of 30 gallons per mile of pipe per 24 hours per 1 inch of nominal pipe diameter. For purposes of determining the maximum allowable leakage, manholes shall be considered as sections of 4 ft or 5 ft diameter pipe, depending on the type manhole included in the test. The equivalent leakage allowance shall be 5 gallons per manhole per 24 hours for 4 ft diameter manholes, and 6 gallons per manhole per 24 hours for 5 ft diameter manholes.

(b) Low Pressure Air Test

This leakage test consists of plugging each section of sewer, pressurizing the line with air, and measuring the pressure drop time relationship.

Each end of the section of line to be tested shall be sealed off with inflatable pneumatic or manual plugs which shall hold against the air pressure without external bracing and without movement. Plugs shall have at least two valved connections opening into the pipe section, one for introducing low pressure air and one for

D263143 1309


Rev 1/00 Rev 11/08

connecting an approved air gauge calibrated in .25 psi increments.

Air shall be introduced into the test section to a pressure of 4 psi above the average pressure of any ground water that may be over the pipe. In such ground water areas, the Contractor shall install during the original installation a ½ inch capped pipe nipple through the manhole wall at a level of the top of the lowest pipe. The ground water level shall be determined by clearing the nipple with air and connecting a clear plastic hose to the same and measuring the water level in the hose. The height of the water level in feet above the pipe invert divided by 2.3 shall establish the pounds pressure to be added to all readings.

A minimum of two minutes shall be allowed for the pressure to stabilize during which time the pressure shall not drop more than 0.5 psi. The air supply shall then be disconnected and the time in minutes shall be recorded for the pressure to drop no more than 1 psi. Such time shall not be less than the following:

NOMINAL SIZE MINUTES 4 NPS 2.0 6 NPS 3.0 8 NPS 4.0 10 NPS 5.0 12 NPS 5.5 15 NPS 7.5 18 NPS 8.5 21 NPS 10.0 24 NPS 11.5 27 NPS 13.0 30 NPS 14.5 33 NPS 16.0 36 NPS 17.5

D2631431310

ITEM 603.98XX0007 M-POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) SEWER PIPE & FITTINGS

Rev 1/00 Rev 11/08

METHOD OF MEASUREMENT: The quantity to be paid for under these items will be the number of feet of new sewer pipe (including all necessary connections and fittings) furnished and installed in accordance with the plans, specifications and as ordered by the Engineer. BASIS OF PAYMENT: The unit prices bid per yard for these items shall include the cost of furnishing all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to satisfactorily complete the work including fittings, plugs, connections, and leakage tests. Excavation, sheeting, and backfill material will be paid for separately under their respective items. Payment will be made under: ITEM NO. DESCRIPTION UNIT OF PAYMENT 603.98040007 PVC Sewer Pipe & Fittings 4 NPS Feet 603.98060007 " 6 NPS Feet 603.98080007 " 8 NPS Feet 603.98100007 " 10 NPS Feet 603.98120007 " 12 NPS Feet 603.98150007 " 15 NPS Feet 603.98180007 " 18 NPS Feet 603.98210007 " 21 NPS Feet 603.98240007 " 24 NPS Feet 603.98270007 " 27 NPS Feet 603.98300007 " 30 NPS Feet 603.98330007 " 33 NPS Feet 603.98360007 " 36 NPS Feet

"Progress payments will be made at the unit price bid for 80 percent of the quantity of pipe installed. The remaining 20 percent will be paid for when the testing of the system has been completed."

D263143 1311

ITEM 603.98100204 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Sewer Pipe & Fittings 2 NPS ITEM 603.98100304 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Sewer Pipe & Fittings 3 NPS ITEM 603.98100404 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Sewer Pipe & Fittings 4 NPS ITEM 603.98100604 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Sewer Pipe & Fittings 6 NPS ITEM 603.98100804 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Sewer Pipe & Fittings 8 NPS ITEM 603.98101004 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Sewer Pipe & Fittings 10 NPS ITEM 603.98101204 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Sewer Pipe & Fittings 12 NPS ITEM 603.98101504 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Sewer Pipe & Fittings 15 NPS ITEM 603.98101804 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Sewer Pipe & Fittings 18 NPS ITEM 603.98102104 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Sewer Pipe & Fittings 21 NPS ITEM 603.98102404 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Sewer Pipe & Fittings 24 NPS ITEM 603.98102704 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Sewer Pipe & Fittings 27 NPS ITEM 603.98103004 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Sewer Pipe & Fittings 30 NPS ITEM 603.98103304 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Sewer Pipe & Fittings 33 NPS ITEM 603.98103604 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Sewer Pipe & Fittings 36 NPS

Page 1 of 1 11-20-97 Revised 5/21/14 Revised 5/29/14

DESCRIPTION Under this item the Contractor shall furnish, install and test (PVC) Sewer Pipe and fittings of the size and at the locations shown on the plans or where directed by the Engineer. MATERIALS As specified in the contract documents. CONSTRUCTION DETAILS As specified in the contract documents. METHOD OF MEASUREMENT The quantity will be measured as the number of linear feet of new sewer pipe (including all necessary connections and fittings) furnished and installed in accordance with the plans, specifications and as directed by the Engineer. BASIS OF PAYMENT The unit prices bid per linear foot shall include the cost of furnishing all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to satisfactorily complete the work including, but not limited to fittings, plugs, connections, and leakage tests. Excavation, sheeting, and backfill material will be paid for separately under their respective items. Progress payments will be made at the unit price bid for 80 percent of the quantity of pipe installed. The remaining 20 percent will be paid for when the testing of the system has been completed.

D2631431312

ITEM 604.07210010 - RESETTING EXISTING DRAINAGE FRAMES ON EXISTINGDRAINAGE STRUCTURES

12/05/08E 11/1/902/15/96 M

Revised 11/10/03Page 1 of 1

DESCRIPTIONThis work shall consist of removing, storing, and resetting existing drainage frames, complete withgrates, covers, and appurtenances, to grade on existing structures or on existing drainage structuresmodified under the item, "Rebuilding Top of Existing Drainage Structures."

MATERIALSMaterials shall meet the requirements of the following subsections ofSection 700:

Precast Concrete Pavers 704-13Masonry Mortar 705-21

Concrete shall be Class A meeting the requirements of Section 501.

CONSTRUCTION DETAILSThe existing frames, grates, covers and appurtenances shall be removed, stored if necessary, cleaned andreset to the line and grade indicated in the Plans or as directed by the Engineer.

The existing masonry adjustment collar, or a portion of it, shall be removed where necessary for resettingof the existing frame. The existing frames shall be set to grade using precast concrete pavers and mortarand/or Class A concrete. The frames shall be set in a mortar bed on the existing structure. If anadjustment frame or ring was removed from the structure, the collar shall be set at such grade that noadjustment frame or ring is needed.

Any asphalt pavement and shoulder courses, subcourses, curbs, sidewalks, lawns and other top surfacesremoved or damaged during the work of removing the existing frames and setting the new frames, shallbe replaced in kind, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. This shall include all sawcuttingnecessary for this removal.

Existing concrete/composite pavement shall be removed and restored as per the details given in the plans.


This work shall be measured by the number of existing drainage frames, complete with grates or covers,reset to grade on existing drainage structures or on existing drainage structures modified under the item,"Rebuilding Top of Existing Drainage Structures."

BASIS OF PAYMENT

The unit price bid for resetting each drainage frame shall include the cost of all labor, materials andequipment necessary to complete the work including any necessary sawcutting, removal and replacementof pavement and shoulder courses, subcourses, curbs, sidewalks, lawns and other top surfaces, unlessotherwise indicated in the plans or proposal. Removal and restoration of concrete/composite pavementwill be paid for separately.

Any frames, grates and covers broken through carelessness on the part of the Contractor shall be replacedat the Contractor's expense.

D263143 1313

ITEM 604.07240010 - REBUILDING TOP OF EXISTING DRAINAGE STRUCTURES

9/10/08E Rev. 02/16/10

DESCRIPTION.

This work shall consist of rebuilding the top of existing drainage structures as shown in the plans or as directed by the Engineer.

MATERIALS.

Unless otherwise indicated in the plans or directed by the Engineer, the materials for rebuilding the top of existing drainage structures shall be the same type as used in the original construction, except that neither concrete brick nor concrete block shall be used.

Concrete shall be Class A meeting the requirement of Section 501. Other materials shall conform to the following subsections of Section 700:

Precast Concrete Driveway and Sidewalk Pavers 704-13 Masonry Mortar 705-21 Precast Concrete Drainage Units 706-04 Bar Reinforcement, Grade 420 709-01

CONSTRUCTION DETAILS.

The top slab and/or top portion of the walls shall be removed and rebuilt as indicated in the plans or as directed by the Engineer. Removed material shall be disposed of off the work site.

Excavation shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of Subsection 206-3. This work shall include all necessary sawcutting and removal of all overlaying material including asphalt pavement and shoulder, curb, turf, etc. Existing concrete/composite pavement shall be removed and restored as per the details given in the plans.

Concrete construction shall conform to the requirements of Section 555.

No structure shall be backfilled until all the mortar has completely set. The requirements of Subsection 203-3.13 shall apply.

Each structure shall be cleaned of any accumulation of silt, debris, or foreign matter of any kind and shall be kept clean of such accumulation until final acceptance of the work.

METHOD OF MEASUREMENT.

This work will be measured by the number of existing drainage structures for which the top is rebuilt as specified.

BASIS OF PAYMENT.

Except as noted below, the unit price bid for rebuilding each top of existing drainage structures shall include the cost of all labor, materials, and equipment, including sawcutting, excavation and removal of underlying materials necessary to complete the work. Removing and resetting existing drainage frames on existing drainage structures, furnishing new frames and grates, setting new drainage frames on existing drainage structures, and all necessary backfill and restoration will be paid for under the appropriate items. Removal and restoration of concrete/composite pavement will be paid for separately.

D2631431314

ITEM 604.13000011 – ABANDONING DRAINAGE STRUCTURES

6/12/87

Rev. 8/8/95 U.S. Customary 11/15/10

DESCRIPTION Under this item, the Contractor shall do all the work and furnish all materials necessary to abandon the drainage structures indicated on the plans. The work shall include, but not be limited to; demolishing walls to the required depth, plugging pipes, breaking up bottom slabs, disposal of demolished material, filling openings, salvaging and delivering castings to a designated location, installing pavement, curb, sidewalk and lawn as required to replace damaged areas and areas previously occupied by the removed castings in accordance with the plans, specifications and directions of the Engineer. MATERIALS All materials shall be in accordance with NYSDOT Standard Specifications. Subsections 704-01, 704-02, 705-21 and Subsection 203-2.02C of the Standard Specifications apply. CONSTRUCTION DETAILS The Contractor shall remove and salvage the castings from the drainage structures to be abandoned and shall deliver them to a designated location to be temporarily stored for ultimate use elsewhere on the project, disposed of off the work site, or pick up by others, as ordered by the Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible for carefully removing, loading, transporting and unloading the salvaged castings. Damage caused by the Contractor’s negligence in handling the salvaged castings will be at the Contractor’s expense. The ends of pipes within the drainage structure shall be totally plugged at locations indicated on the plans in a manner approved by the Engineer. Drainage structures to be abandoned shall be demolished to a depth of at least 2 feet below the subgrade elevation and the demolished material shall be removed for disposal in accordance with the provisions of Subsection 203-3.08, “Disposal of Surplus Excavated Materials”. The bottom slab shall be broken up in such a manner as to prevent water from being trapped. The cavity within the drainage structure shall be filled solidly with select granular fill in accordance with the provisions of Subsection 203-3.12, “Compaction”. Any pavement courses, subcourses, curbs, sidewalks and lawns removed or damaged during the work of abandoning drainage structures shall be replaced in kind; areas previously occupied by the removed castings shall be restored with pavement, sidewalk, curbs and lawns as required, similar to those adjacent to them as directed by the Engineer.

D263143 1315

ITEM 604.13000011 – ABANDONING DRAINAGE STRUCTURES

6/12/87

Rev. 8/8/95 U.S. Customary 11/15/10

METHOD OF MEASUREMENT This work shall be measured by the number of drainage structures abandoned. BASIS OF PAYMENT The price bid shall include the cost of all labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work satisfactorily.

D2631431316

606.31120010 – SINGLE SLOPE FULL SECTION CONCRETE BARRIER CAST WITH

SIMULATED STONE PATTERN FINISH (PRECAST)

606.31130010 - SINGLE SLOPE HALF SECTION CONCRETE BARRIER CAST WITH


PAGE 1 OF 4 09/24/2009

Rev. August, 2015

DESCRIPTION:

This work shall consist of furnishing and installing a single slope full or half section precast

concrete barrier cast with a simulated stone pattern finish as indicated in the contract documents

and as directed by the Engineer.

MATERIALS:

The following sections of the standard specifications shall apply:

Concrete Barrier 606-2

Precast Concrete – General 704-03

The following ASTM references shall apply:

Standard Practice for Determination of the Effectiveness ASTM D7089

of Anti-Graffiti Coating for use on Concrete, Masonry

and Natural Stone Surfaces by Pressure Washing

Precast Concrete Barrier (additional information): The precast concrete barrier unit shall:

consist of precast concrete per §704-03,

be integrally colored by use of a “color pigment additive” per §704-03 C. (color as shown on

the contract documents), and

include a stone pattern facing (hereafter, “pattern”) of the type, dimensions, and/or finish

shown in the contract documents. This pattern shall comply with §704-03 A and be placed

on the road side face of both the full and half section barrier. The application of the pattern

shall not compromise the required minimum concrete cover over reinforcing steel at any

point as shown in the contract documents.

Each precast concrete barrier unit shall consist of three form liner segments. Each form liner

segment shall have different configurations of “stones” to create a random masonry pattern. All

three form liner segments shall be able to interlock with each other. The Contractor shall

fabricate at least three distinct precast concrete barrier units, each with a different sequence of

form liner segments.

Surface Finish Guidelines:

1. Textures added after formlined casting, if specified, shall have a maximum relief of a

third of an inch.

2. All form lined “mortar joints” and any other gaps, slots or grooves shall be less than a

half an inch in depth and one inch in width.

D263143 1317



606.31130010 – SINGLE SLOPE HALF SECTION CONCRETE BARRIER CAST WITH


PAGE 2 OF 4 09/24/2009

Rev. August, 2015

3. Any pattern shall have a maximum relief of three quarters of an inch over a distance of

one foot.

4. For any pattern that begins two feet or higher above the base of the precast concrete

barrier, the maximum relief shall be two and one half inches. No part of the pattern shall

protrude beyond the projected surface plane of the lower two feet of the precast concrete

barrier.

5. Regardless of where the patterning begins, all the leading edges of the precast concrete

barrier units shall be rounded or sloped to minimize the potential for vehicle snagging.

The precast concrete barrier units shall be nominal 20.0 ft. in length to the greatest extent

possible to provide a homogeneous appearance. At locations where unit lengths required are not

equal to 20.0 feet, the Contractor shall adjust the form liner patterning so that a homogeneous

appearance is maintained.

Anti-Graffiti Protective Coating: The protective coating shall be:

tested according to ASTM D7089 and capable of achieving a rating of “Cleanability Level 1”

after cleaning,

non-sacrificial (permanent),

applied at the precast manufacturer, no anti-graffiti coating shall be field applied, and

applied according to manufacturer’s instructions.

Submittals – Fabrication Drawings and Samples:

The Contractor shall provide fabrication drawings of the precast concrete barriers for approval.

Fabrication drawings shall include:

details showing the configuration of “stones” on each of the form liner segments proposed.

details showing the placement of each form liner segment on the precast concrete barrier.

The Contractor shall show at least three (3) different layouts of form liner segments on

precast concrete barrier units.

“Pattern layout plans” showing the placement of each precast concrete barrier unit at each

discrete location. The Contractor’s “Pattern Layout Plan” shall verify that the layout of the

precast concrete barriers will be done in a manner that maximizes a random appearance of

the simulated stone. No identically patterned precast concrete barrier units shall be placed

adjacent to each other.

The Contractor shall provide and assemble three 20.0 ft. samples of the precast concrete barrier

at a designated location, for use as a visual standard. Each sample shall show a different

configuration of the form liner segments. Additional precast concrete barrier shall not be

constructed until the sample is approved in writing. Once approved, sample precast concrete

barrier units shall be returned to the precast manufacturer and used as visual standards

D2631431318





PAGE 3 OF 4 09/24/2009

Rev. August, 2015

throughout fabrication of subsequent units. The Contractor shall furnish and install precast

concrete barrier conforming to approved visual standards.


The following sections of the standard specifications shall apply:

Trench, Culvert and Structure Excavation 206-3

Precast Concrete Barrier 606-3.05

Inspection, Storage and Handling of Barrier Sections:

The precast sections will be inspected at the installation site for the following:

Damage during shipment

Conformance to the material requirements

Dimensional tolerances under §606-3.05 A. 3.

An additional inspection will be made prior to placement of the barrier sections to determine any

damage during storage.

Installation of Barrier Sections:

A. Excavation and Backfill. The requirements specified in §206-3 Trench, Culvert and

Structure Excavation, shall apply. The bottom of the barrier shall have a full and even bearing

on the surface under it. After the barrier is in place, the excavation shall be backfilled in

accordance with §206-3.04.

B. Placement of Barrier. Sections shall be installed to form a longitudinal barrier in accordance

with §606-3.05A, true to line and grade on concrete leveling pads on prepared, compacted sub

base, as specified in the contract plans. If required on plans, weep holes for drainage shall be

provided.

The Contractor shall vary the order of the precast concrete barrier units so that the:

proposed sequence of precast concrete barrier units at each location shall maximize a random

appearance of the simulated stone, with no identical units adjacent to each other (“Pattern

layout plans” shall be submitted for approval with the fabrication drawings as noted above).

flow of joints from one form liner segment to the other or from one precast concrete barrier

unit (consisting of three form liner segments) to the other does not appear unnatural.

C. Half section barrier. Half section concrete barrier shall be erected in accordance with §606-

3.05A and with the appropriate continuity plates and back-up posts or earth back-up as shown on

the standard sheets and in the contract documents.

D263143 1319





PAGE 4 OF 4 09/24/2009

Rev. August, 2015

D. Joints. Barrier sections shall be installed and sealed as per the details of the system. The

Contractor shall use joint details provided by the manufacturer of the barrier and approved by the

Department.


This work will be measured as the number of feet, to the nearest one third of a foot, of the

Concrete Barrier Cast with Simulated Stone Pattern Finish (Precast) furnished and installed. The

measurement will be taken along the centerline of top of the barrier. Measurement will not

include any sample barrier sections not incorporated into the work.

BASIS OF PAYMENT:

The unit price bid for each foot of Concrete Barrier Cast with Simulated Stone Pattern Finish

(Precast) furnished and installed shall include the cost of all labor, materials and equipment

necessary to satisfactorily complete the work. Work includes excavation, grading, compaction,

back up posts, continuity connections and anti-graffiti protective coating.


Item No. Item Pay Unit

606.31120010 Single Slope Concrete Barrier Cast with Simulated FEET

Stone Pattern Finish (Precast)

606.31130010 Single Slope Half Section Concrete Barrier Cast with FEET

Simulated Stone Pattern Finish (Precast)

D2631431320

ITEM 607.08000010 - WOOD BOARD FENCE DESCRIPTION This work shall consist of furnishing and erecting wood board fence at the locations shown and in reasonably close conformity with the lines and grades shown in the contract documents and as directed by the Engineer. MATERIALS The following sections of the standard specifications shall apply:

Timber and Lumber 594-2 Subbase Course 304-2

The following ASTM standard specifications shall apply:

Standard Specification for Washers, Steel, Plain (Flat) Unhardened for General Use ASTM F844

Standard Specification for Zinc Coating, Hot-Dip, Requirements for Application to Carbon and Alloy Steel Bolts, Screws, Washers, Nuts, and Special Threaded Fasteners ASTM F2329

Standard Specification for Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Bolts, Studs, and Other Externally Threaded Fasteners` ASTM A354

Lumber. All lumber shall be nominal dimension (undressed) and shall comply with the requirements of §712-14 - Stress Graded Timber and Lumber. All lumber shall be commercial grade No. 2 or better. All lumber shall be pressure treated in accordance with the requirements of §708-31 - Wood Preservative - Waterborne. All treated lumber shall be dried to a moisture content of 19% following treatment. Application for approval of timber and lumber for use under this specification must contain the following information:

• Species of wood proposed for use, and • Type of preservative used and minimum retention in pounds per cubic foot.

Hardware. Reinforcing angles, clips, bolts and fasteners shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A354-11, Grade BD. All bolts shall be supplied with washers meeting the requirements of ASTM F844 and nylon- insert locknuts. All hardware shall be hot-dipped galvanized steel as per ASTM F2329. Holes in angles shall have a diameter no greater than 1/16 inch larger than that of the specified bolt, and may be punched. May 2015

D263143 1321

ITEM 607.08000010 - WOOD BOARD FENCE Subbase Course: Subbase course shall be the type indicated in the contract documents. Shop drawings shall be prepared in accordance with §105-16. CONSTRUCTION DETAILS The following sections of the standard specifications shall apply:

Clearing and Grubbing 201-3 Excavation and Embankment 203-3.01

The Contractor shall perform such incidental clearing and grubbing as may be necessary to construct the fence to the required grade and alignment, not to exceed ten feet from the fence line. Fence shall generally follow the contour of the ground. The location of all cuts and borings shall be within 1/4 inch of the dimensions shown. Bolt holes shall be drilled to a diameter no greater than 1/16 inch larger than that of the specified bolt. The boards shall be placed so that the weight is equally distributed to the uprights. The necessary grading shall be done to obtain the proper bearing. Bolt lengths shall be adjusted from those shown as necessary so that all components are assembled to clamp-tight condition, with a minimum of one complete bolt thread exposed beyond the outside end of the nut. The bolt shall provide enough thread length so that the nut can be tightened an additional 1/4 inch on the bolt after the tight-clamp condition has been achieved. Posts shall be placed in 12 inch diameter excavated or augured holes. The holes shall be backfilled to the finished ground in approximately 6 inch, compacted layers. METHOD OF MEASUREMENT The work will be measured by the number of linear feet of wood board fencing, measured along the top of the fence, furnished and erected in accordance with the contract documents. BASIS OF PAYMENT The unit price bid per linear foot of wood board fence shall include the cost of furnishing all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to satisfactorily complete the work.

May 2015

D2631431322

ITEM 607.21000011 - REMOVE AND DISPOSE OF CHAIN LINK FENCE ITEM 607.22000011 - REMOVE AND DISPOSE OF EXISTING FENCE POST

WITH ATTACHED ANCHOR PLATE ITEM 607.23000011 - REMOVE EXISTING GALVANIZED STEEL DOUBLE LEAF

CHAIN LINK FENCE GATE WITH POSTS (16 FEET HIGH X 13.5 FEET WIDE)

Rev. 8/07/1995 USC 3/10/2009

Description:

The Contractor shall remove and dispose of chain link fence, fence posts with attached anchor plate, and fence gates in accordance with the plans, specifications and orders of the Engineer.

Materials:

None specified.

Construction Details:

The Contractor shall remove the existing chain link fence, fence posts with attached anchor plates, and fence gates as indicated in the plans and remove them from the site of work in a manner approved by the Engineer.

Method of Measurement:

A. Removal and Disposal of Chain Link Fence - The quantity to be paid for will be the number of linear feet of chain link fencing removed and disposed of regardless of height, measured along the top of the fencing, in accordance with the plans and as ordered by the Engineer.

B. Removal and Disposal of Fence Posts with attached anchor Plates and Fence Gates - The quantity to be paid for will be the number of each removed and disposed of in accordance with the plans and as ordered by the Engineer.

Basis of Payment:

A. Removal and Disposal of Chain Link Fence - The unit price bid per linear feet for the removing and disposing of the chain link fence shall include the cost of furnishing all labor, equipment and materials necessary to complete the work.

B. Removal and Disposal of Fence Posts with attached Anchor Plate and Fence Gates - The unit price bid for each fence gate shall include the cost of furnishing all labor, equipment and materials necessary to complete the work of removing and disposing them. Anchor bolts shall not be removed. Any damage caused by the Contractor=s operation to the existing fencing and, appurtenances to remain and/or the surrounding areas shall be repaired/replaced by the Contractor as ordered by the Engineer, at no cost to the State.

D263143 1323

9/12/08E 01/8503/06/97 M

ITEM 607.31010010 - STEEL CHAIN LINK FENCE WITH TOP TENSION WIRE, 4 ft HIGH



ITEM 607.31040010 - STEEL CHAIN LINK FENCE WITH TOP TENSION WIRE, 10ft HIGH


All the provisions of Section 607 pertaining to Optional Chain-Link Fence, Type I, with Top Tension Wire shall apply, except for the following:

The fence fabric and frame options shall be as listed below.

Fabric Frame

1. Galvanized Steel Galvanized Steel

2. Aluminum Coated Steel Combined Coating on Steel or Aluminum Coated Steel

End, corner, pull, and line posts shall be either Class A, Schedule 40 Pipe or Class B, Steel Tubing at the Contractor's option. The alternative Roll-Formed and H Section posts shall not be used. The size of the posts shall be as indicated on the Standard Sheets.

Fittings shall conform to the requirements of Subsection 710-10 except that aluminum alloy fittings shall not be used.

Gate Posts shall be steel of the type and size indicated on the Standard Sheets except that the optional Roll-Formed posts shall not be used.

The fence fabric shall be attached to line posts with matching tie wires; either galvanized steel or aluminum coated steel. The tie wires shall be 9 Gage (0.15 inch Coated Wire Diameter) and shall be spaced at a maximum of 14 inches. The tie wires shall be installed in accordance with the special note "Fence Fabric Tie Wires" which is included elsewhere in the proposal. Minor damage to the coating on the tie wires, caused by the cutting and twisting operations, will be acceptable as determined by the Engineer.

The fabric shall be secured to all end, corner, pull, and gate posts with stretcher bars fastened to the posts with stretcher bands spaced at a maximum of 14 inches. When the installation of the fencing is completed, the threads of the bolts in the stretcher bands shall be damaged, as directed by the Engineer, to prevent removal of the bolts.

The top tension wire shall not be continuous at pull posts. Instead, the tension wire shall be cut and each end firmly attached to the pull post in a manner approved by the Engineer.

D2631431324

ITEM 607.96000008 - REMOVE AND DISPOSE OF EXISTING FENCE

01/07

DESCRIPTION: The contractor shall remove existing fence in accordance with the plans, specifications and directions of the Engineer. All references to "fencing" shall include existing gates, if any to be removed. MATERIALS: Materials needed for modifying end sections shall conform to the requirements of Section 710 of the Standard Specifications or shall conform to the material requirements of the existing fence, as directed by the Engineer. Concrete for footings shall conform to Section 607-2.01 of the Standard Specifications. CONSTRUCTION DETAILS: The contractor shall remove and dispose of the existing fence to a point shown on the plans or where directed by the Engineer. If a portion of the existing fence is to remain, the remaining end section shall be modified to adequately secure the fencing. This modified section shall include all hardware necessary to secure the fencing in a manner similar to the existing end section or as directed by the Engineer. Parts salvaged from the removed portion, acceptable to the Engineer, may be reused in the end section. All work shall be done in a workmanlike manner with care taken not to disturb the surrounding area or existing fence to remain. Any damage to the area or existing fence to remain caused by the contractor's operations shall be repaired to the original condition at no expense to the state. Any concrete post footings shall be either broken up and removed or removed in one piece as determined by the contractor and approved by the Engineer. All post holes shall be filled to meet existing grade. All excavation and backfill shall conform to Section 203 "Excavation and Embankment". METHOD OF MEASUREMENT: This work will be measured as the number of feet of fence removed in accordance with the plans or as directed by the Engineer. An additional 10 foot allowance will be paid for each end section modified to secure the remaining fence. BASIS OF PAYMENT: The unit price bid shall include the cost of all labor, equipment and materials necessary to complete the work, including the cost of any fill required to fill the post holes.

D263143 1325

ITEM 607.99620010 - NOISE BARRIER SYSTEM (HIGHWAYS)

12/16/08E Rev. Aug. 2012 1

DESCRIPTION This work shall consist of designing, furnishing and erecting noise barriers as detailed and at the locations shown on the Plans or as directed by the Engineer. All noise barriers shall consist of posts, panels, foundations, and all other associated members and attachments necessary to fabricate and erect sound abatement structures. Post spacing for panel systems shall be as specified on the plans. MATERIALS The noise barrier shall meet the material requirements of §704-03 Precast Concrete - General or §718-01 Prestressed Concrete Units (Structural) with the following modifications and additions: A. Concrete for Noise Barrier Posts, Panels and Footings

1. Concrete for precast noise barrier panels and columns shall have a minimum compressive strength of 5 ksi at 28 days after casting. Concrete for panels and columns shall have an integral color pigment.

2. Concrete for cast in place footings shall be Class HP concrete conforming to the

requirements of Section 501.

3. When a prestressed concrete barrier system is chosen, all precast units shall meet the requirements of the New York State Prestressed Concrete Construction Manual (P.C.C.M.). Also, the Contractor shall notify the Deputy Chief Engineer Structures (D.C.E.S.) of the source of prestressed units for approval within (7) days after the award of the contract.

B. Structural Steel

Steel shall meet the requirements of Subsections 709-04 and 715-01 or 563-2.02 and 709-06.

1. When base plates are used, they shall be fabricated from ASTM A572 steel and galvanized per §719-01, Type II.

2. When anchor bolts are used, they shall be hot-dipped galvanized ASTM A449 conforming to

§723-60. Nuts shall be galvanized steel heavy hex nuts meeting the requirements of ASTM A194, Grade 2H.

3. Nuts attached to threaded rebars shall be carbon steel heavy hex nuts meeting the

requirements of ASTM A194, Grade 2H. These nuts and all exposed rebars shall be coated, after assembly, with a galvanized repair material appearing on the Department’s Approved List.

D2631431326


12/16/08E 1/28/03

2

4. When threaded reinforcing is used as part of the design, the threads shall meet the

requirements of ANSI B1.1

5. All exposed steel to be shop painted with three coats to match in color concrete panels in accordance with the Special Note on Preparation and Painting of Steel Surfaces.

C. Integral Color and Anti-Graffiti Coating

1. Integral Color

The precast concrete shall be integrally colored using a pigment coloring system meeting the requirements of ASTM C979. Pigment for integrally coloring concrete shall be a chemically pure material pigment, manufactured by a company with proven color mixes capable of producing approved custom colors complying with all environmental codes and ordinances and as approved by the Engineer. The admixture color shall produce a color conforming to the Federal Standard 595B. The color shall be as indicated on the Plans.

2. Anti-Graffiti Coating

Exposed concrete surfaces shall receive an anti-graffiti coating where indicated on the Plans. The anti-graffiti coating shall be a two-component, oil free, non-yellowing, aliphatic, polyester polyurethane coating. The material shall be approved by the Engineer prior to its application.

D. Form Liners

Form liners shall be of elastomeric type of the patterns indicated on the Plans. The liner may be factory bonded or field laminated following the manufacturer’s recommendations and instructions. The number of uses per form liner shall not exceed the manufacturer’s recommendations.

E. Paint

Paint shall conform to the Special Note “Preparation and Painting of Steel Surfaces” in the Proposal.

All other materials specified in the Contractor’s noise barrier design shall be in accordance to the appropriate section of the NYSDOT Standard Specification (US Customary Units) of May 1, 2008. FABRICATION (Concrete Panels and Posts) The noise barrier shall meet the fabrication, curing and repair requirements of §704-03 Precast Concrete - General and/or §718-01 Prestressed Concrete Units (Structural) with the following modifications and additions:

D263143 1327


12/16/08E

3

A. General

Panels and posts shall be fabricated to conform to the shapes, sizes, textures, and colors shown on the Plans.

The contractor shall provide complete design details of the noise barrier. Noise barrier designs shall be submitted by the contractor, to the Department, for approval. Six (6) complete sets of working drawings and two (2) sets of design calculations for the concrete panels, posts, and foundations shall be submitted to the Materials Bureau or the Structures Division for approval as follows: The processing, approval, and transmittal of noise barrier designs shall be in accordance with procedural directives of the Materials Bureau for Precast Concrete Systems and the Structures Group for the Prestressed Concrete Systems and any other procedural directives as applicable. Designs shall be submitted to the Engineer at least 45 working days prior to the start of fabrication and shall include a complete set of working drawings and a complete set of design calculations. Design of the noise barrier system shall be in accordance with the AASHTO "Guide Specifications for the Structural Design of Sound Barriers, 1989" & “2002 Interim to Guide Specifications for Structural Design of Sound Barriers” except that the design wind load shall be 39 lb/sq ft applied perpendicular to the wall surface. For noise barriers in excess of 29 feet in height the contractor shall use design wind loads as specified by the Deputy Chief Engineer Structures (D.C.E.S.). The drawings and design calculations shall be stamped by a Professional Engineer licensed, and registered, to practice in New York State.

The manufacturer shall produce panels and posts that are uniform in appearance. The units shall be cast from steel forms with an elastomeric form liner of specified textures.

The panels and posts shall have a surface texture or treatment on both the highway and residential sides as shown on the Plans. The panel fabricator shall stipulate on the shop drawings the method he intends to use to achieve the above stated surface treatments. A sample of 24 inch by 24 inch by full panel thickness of the noise barrier panel with the integral color and with all proposed surface treatments shall be submitted to the Engineer for color approval prior to production of the sample noise barrier panels. The concrete precaster shall then construct, at his plant or at a location on the project determined by the Engineer, an acceptable sample noise barrier wall consisting of five posts and four panels. The wall shall be a minimum of 18 ft high and shall be the same size and configuration as the noise barriers on the actual project. These test posts and panels will be used to determine the acceptability of the various surface treatments, color and quality of the construction of both the roadway and residential sides of the noise barrier. If test sections are found to be unacceptable, the concrete precaster shall make additional samples until an acceptable product is produced. Any additional posts and panels will be made at the Contractor’s expense. No panels for the actual noise barrier shall be fabricated until written approval of the sample noise barrier is given. Once these posts and panels have been approved, they shall be retained and used as the standards to determine acceptability of production posts and panels. The panels may be used on the Project at the end of precasting operations when released by the Engineer.

D2631431328


12/16/08E 4

B. Integrally Colored Concrete.

The exact quantity of pigment to be added shall be determined based on the preparation, examination and approval of the 24 inch by 24 inch by full panel thickness test panel or panels to produce the color in the materials §C.1 of this Specification.

The tint used for all the concrete in the posts and panels shall be from the same batch.

A high quality form release oil, compatible with the integral color, shall be used.

C. Quality Assurance

1. When a Precast Noise Barrier System is used the Sampling and Testing, Shipping and Basis of Acceptance for the precast noise barrier units shall be in accordance with the requirements of §704-03.

2. When a Prestressed Noise Barrier System is used the inspection, testing, and acceptance for

shipping shall be in accordance with the P.C.C.M.

3. The units arriving at the job site are subject to final evaluation by the Engineer. Damaged or defective units are subject to rejection.

CERTIFICATION The Contractor shall submit a certificate stating his compliance with these Specifications and the Plans. CONSTRUCTION DETAILS Holes for post foundations shall be preaugered, true, and plumb as approved by the Engineer. Precautions shall be taken to protect the holes from collapse. Holes shall contain no free water at the time of concrete placement. The holes shall then be filled with Class HP concrete in direct contact with the soil, properly consolidated to a point shown on the Plans as the top of footing elevation. Posts and panels shall be true and plumb and installed after a seven day curing period in accordance with the approved Contractor’s noise barrier design details. The Contractor shall perform any required grading as specified on the plans. The Contractor shall employ an approved jig method to set posts or post plate anchor bolts to assure proper centerline to centerline spacing and plumbness of posts. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings for the jig method to be employed to the Engineer prior to the use. After the posts are set in their final, truly vertical position, if base plates are used, the space between the baseplate and the top of the footing shall be filled with grout meeting the requirements of Section 701-05, Concrete Grouting Material. The requirements of §568-3.02 shall apply. After final placement, exposed panel faces shall have the anti-graffiti coating applied where indicated on the Plans in accordance with the manufacturer’s surface preparation instructions and

D263143 1329


12/16/08E

5

recommendations. Minor defect repairs such as touch-up field painting shall be made as ordered by the Engineer after final placement. METHOD OF MEASUREMENT The Noise Barrier System will be measured by the total number of square feet of the noise barrier measured from the top to the bottom of the wall panels and from center to center of posts. Only one side of the barrier will be measured for payment. BASIS OF PAYMENT The unit price bid per square foot of Noise Barrier System shall include the cost of all structural design and detailing, as well as all labor, materials, grading, form liners, anti-graffiti coating and equipment necessary to perform the work. Structural steel, grout, footing concrete, and all other materials required by the Contractor’s specific noise barrier design will not be paid for under any other item. No additional payment will be made for the required samples. Progress payments for this work will be made as follows: 1. Twenty (20) percent of the quantity will be paid for after all foundations are in place to the

satisfaction of the Engineer. 2. Twenty (20) percent of the quantity will be paid for after all posts have been erected to the

satisfaction of the Engineer. 3. The remainder of the quantity will be paid for after all panels have been erected to the

satisfaction of the Engineer.

D2631431330

ITEM 608.01020005 – COLORED AND IMPRINTED PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE SIDEWALK

ITEM 608.01030005 – COLORED PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE SIDEWALK ITEM 608.01040005 – IMPRINTED PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE SIDEWALK

10/30/2000 R 03/23/2009

DESCRIPTION Construct Portland cement concrete sidewalks as shown on the contract documents according to §608 of the Standard Specifications, using colored and/or imprinted concrete, including color matching joint material, when specified. MATERIALS Apply §608-2.01 with the following modifications: Colored Concrete All coloring agents shall produce a color conforming to the Federal Standard 595B. The color shall be as indicated on plans. Color admixtures for integrally colored concrete will be certified by the manufacturer as meeting the requirements of ASTM C979 Standard Specifications for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete and be packaged such that one dose is the proper dosage for one cubic yard of concrete. Imprinted Concrete Use imprinting tools capable of imprinting the surface of the concrete with a uniform and aligned pattern and/or texture. Use a clear release agent as specified by the imprinting tool manufacturer. These materials shall be approved by the Engineer prior to their use. Color Matching Joint Material When specified for any location, use a color matched caulking compound designed for joint sealing. CONSTRUCTION DETAILS Apply §608-3.01 with the following modifications: Test Panels Prior to the start of work, the Contractor shall show evidence of successful completion of similar installations. The Contractor shall construct a job site test panel for each individual color and pattern or combination of color and pattern specified in the contract documents. The test panel(s) shall be 5 feet x 5 feet, minimum, and constructed at a location selected by the Engineer. As many test panels will be constructed as are necessary to produce sample panels that meet the approval of the Engineer. The permanent work shall be consistent with the appearance of the approved test panel(s) as determined by the Engineer. The test panel(s) shall not be incorporated into the work and will be removed when ordered by the Engineer.

D263143 1331



10/30/2000 R 03/23/2009

Colored Concrete Apply color admixtures and dry shake additives at the manufacturers recommended dosage rate. This rate is to remain constant for all batches of concrete produced. Prior to placing concrete, protect adjacent surfaces and structures from spatters. Once a portion of the batch has been placed, no additional water shall be added to the remaining batch. To integrally color the concrete, introduce the color additive into the mixer drum in a manner recommended by the manufacturer. The quantity of concrete being delivered shall be no less than one-third the capacity of the mixer drum. Batch the concrete in full cubic yard increments. After the concrete is placed, apply a color matching hardener evenly to the plastic surface by the “dry shake” method as recommended by the manufacturer. Imprinted Concrete Screed concrete to the finished grade and apply release agent. Using methods as recommended by the manufacturer, apply pre-approved imprinting tools to the surface while the concrete is still plastic. The requirement for a lightly broomed surface is waived. Unless otherwise specified, score or saw cut the surface to a minimum depth of ¼ the thickness of the slab at intervals of 5 feet. Tool the edges, joints and scored areas in a manner consistent with the imprinting pattern. If the saw cut option is used, the Contractor shall be responsible for performing the saw cut operation at such time as to minimize the possibility of spalling and/or cracking Within 24 hours, remove release agent with pressure wash and apply a pre-approved sealer, recommended by the coloring manufacturer, at a rate consistent with manufacturer’s specifications. Color Matching Joint Material Install pre-molded resilient joint filler (§705-07) where the sidewalk line intersects a building, walk, permanent structure or other location designated by the Engineer, to within 1-inch of the top of the slab. Caulk the top 1-inch of the joint with color matching caulking compound. METHOD OF MEASUREMENT Apply §608-4.01

D2631431332



10/30/2000 R 03/23/2009

BASIS OF PAYMENT Apply §608-5.01 The cost of construction and removal of the test panel(s) is to be included in the price bid for the specified item(s). Payment will be made under: Item No. Item Pay Unit 608.01020005 Colored and Imprinted Portland Cement Cubic Yard

Concrete Sidewalk 608.01030005 Colored Portland Cement Concrete Sidewalk Cubic Yard 608.01040005 Imprinted Portland Cement Concrete Sidewalk Cubic Yard

D263143 1333

ITEM 608.13000008 – FURNISH AND INSTALL GRASS PAVERS DESCRIPTION: This work shall consist of furnishing and installing a grass paver area on a prepared base in accordance with the details shown in the contract documents or as established by the Engineer. MATERIALS: Grass Paver: The contractor is directed to use either a precast concrete grass paver or an approved equal made of plastic products (see list of manufacturers).

List of Manufacturers for Plastic Product Grass Pavers:

NDS Inc. 851 North Harvard Ave, Lindsay, CA 92347, (559-562-9888)

PERMATURF CO. INC.

13 Dow Road, Bow, New Hampshire 03304, (800-498-4116)

GRASSPAVE INVISIBLE STRUCTURES, INC. 20100 E. 35th Drive, Aurora, CO 80011, (303-373-1234)

Materials shall meet the requirements specified in the following subsections of section 700-Materials:

Cushion Sand Precast Concrete Pavers Topsoil Seed

703-06 704-13 713-01 713-04

Cushion sand setting bed shall consist of hard, durable, uncoated particles of soil or rock, free from lumps of clay and all deleterious substances. The cushion sand setting bed materials shall meet the following gradation requirements and shall be approved by the Regional Geotechnical Engineer.

SIEVE SIZE PERCENT PASSING BY WEIGHT 1 / 4” No. 10 No.40 No. 200

100 50-85 20-45 3-10

D2631431334

ITEM 608.13000008 – FURNISH AND INSTALL GRASS PAVERS

Seed mixture shall meet the following

NAME VARIETY WT. OF PURE LIVE SEED 1000/SF

Red Fescue (Festuca rubra) Perennial Ryegrass (Lolium perenne Kentucky Blue (Poa pratensis)

Commercial Commercial Commercial

1.2 lbs .7 lbs .8lbs

Max. 25% hard seed Total: 2.7 lbs CONSTRUCTION DETAILS: The pavers shall be laid on a prepared 2” cushion sand setting bed to the grade and slope shown on the plans or as directed by the Engineer, placed over a prepared sub-grade, and laid per manufacturer’s specifications. After pavers have been set, topsoil shall be swept into the voids and seeded. The contractor shall protect the area until a reasonable stand of grass has been established as determined by the Engineer. Any damage caused by the contractor’s operations to the adjacent areas shall be repaired by the contractor at no expense to the State. Where substantial tree roots are encountered, setting the line and grade shall be adjusted as necessary to assure preservation of the tree roots as approved by the Engineer. Where necessary, material conforming to the subbase specification shall be utilized to perform such adjustment.

METHOD OF MEASUREMENT: This work will be measured as the number of square yards of pavers furnished and installed. BASIS OF PAYMENT: The unit price bid, per square yard, shall include the cost of furnishing all labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work, including setting bed material and seed. Necessary excavation and subbase course material will be paid for separately under their appropriate items.

D263143 1335

ITEM 609.06000008 - CURB REMOVAL

11/95 Rev. 07/2014

DESCRIPTION: Under this item the contractor shall remove and dispose of various types of existing curb where indicated on the plans or where directed by the Engineer. MATERIAL: Not specified. CONSTRUCTION DETAILS: The existing curbs shall be removed and disposed of in a neat and workmanlike manner. The existing curbs to be removed are adjacent to existing pavements that are to remain, the contractor shall exercise extreme care during their removal so as not to damage the existing adjacent facilities in any way. In the event that such damage does occur as a direct result of the contractor's curb removal operation, repairs shall be made by the contractor to these existing facilities at no cost to the State and in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. Existing longitudinal tie bars are to be removed and disposed of in areas where new construction abuts the existing pavements that are to remain. METHOD OF MEASUREMENT: This work will be measured as the number of feet of existing curbs removed and disposed of, measured along their center line and within the limits indicated on the plans or where directed by the Engineer. BASIS OF PAYMENT: The unit price bid per linear foot shall include the cost of all labor and equipment necessary to complete the work, including the removal and disposing of the existing longitudinal tie bars.

D2631431336

610.19010010 – IRRIGATION SYSTEM

May, 2015

DESCRIPTIONThis work shall consist of furnishing and installing a complete irrigation system at the locations shown in and as per the contract document and as directed by the Engineer.

MATERIALSThe following sections of the standard specifications shall apply:

Electric Utilities 661-2 Water Supply Utilities 663-2.01 Coarse Aggregate 703-02 Mulch 713-05

Refer to the contract documents for information on all irrigation system materials requirements.

Submittals

• Submit manuals pertaining to the operations and maintenance of the irrigation system prior to final approval. The manuals shall include, but not be limited to, specification sheets, operations and maintenance data, diagrams, replacement parts lists, and copies of field and test reports.

CONSTRUCTION DETAILSThe following sections of the standard specification shall apply:

Trench, Culvert and Structure Excavation 206-3Electrical Utilities 661-3 Water Supply Utilities 663-3.01

Refer to construction documents for information on all irrigation system construction details.

Permits and Fees: The Contractor shall obtain all permits and pay all required fees to any governmental agency having jurisdiction over the work. Inspections required by local ordinances during the course of construction shall be arranged as required. On completion of the work, satisfactory evidence shall be furnished by the installer of the irrigation system to show that all work has been installed in accordance with the ordinances and code requirements.

Submittals: • The Contractor shall provide two (2) 11”x17”, laminated copies and an electronic copy of

the irrigation as-built which shall identify, by color, each area serviced by its corresponding valve (color coded). One copy shall be maintained in the controller for ease of access.

Acceptance:The Contractor shall turn over the entire system in good operating condition. The Contractor

D263143 1337

610.19010010 – IRRIGATION SYSTEM

May, 2015

shall demonstrate a functioning irrigation system prior to receiving final approval.

The Contractor shall conduct a training and demonstration session for operation and maintenance staff. The training and demonstration session shall be performed by the installer of the irrigation system. The demonstration shall include, but not be limited to, the identification and operation of each component, trouble shooting for each component, winterizing the system, removal and replacement of defective components, general and specific requirements for system maintenance, and a check list for frequent attention of components.

METHOD OF MEASUREMENTThe work will be measured as the number of complete irrigation systems furnished and installed.

BASIS OF PAYMENTThe unit price bid for each complete irrigation system furnished and installed shall include the cost of furnishing all labor, materials and equipment necessary to satisfactorily complete the work.

D2631431338

ITEM 611.19010024 - POST-PLANTING CARE WITH REPLACEMENT - MAJOR DECIDUOUS TREES ITEM 611.19020024 - POST-PLANTING CARE WITH REPLACEMENT - MINOR DECIDUOUS TREES ITEM 611.19030024 - POST-PLANTING CARE WITH REPLACEMENT - CONIFEROUS TREES ITEM 611.19040024 - POST-PLANTING CARE WITH REPLACEMENT - DECIDUOUS SHRUBS ITEM 611.19050024 - POST-PLANTING CARE WITH REPLACEMENT - EVERGREEN SHRUBS ITEM 611.19060024 - POST-PLANTING CARE WITH REPLACEMENT– VINES, GROUNDCOVERS ITEM 611.19070024 - POST-PLANTING CARE WITH REPLACEMENT - HERBACEOUS PLANTS

EI 12-001 – Statewide Special Spec. USC L 09/06/2012

DESCRIPTION This work consists of the care of newly planted and transplanted trees, shrubs, vines, groundcovers and other plants and replacement of plants in kind and as necessary, in accordance with the contract documents and as directed by the Engineer. MATERIALS Materials shall meet the requirements of the following subsections of Section 700 Materials and Manufacturing.

Water 712-01 Topsoil 713-01 Mulch for Landscape Bedding 713-05 Trees, Shrubs and Vines 713-06 Materials for the Protection of Plants 713-08

Pesticides 713-13 CONSTRUCTION Post-Planting Care. The Contractor shall perform all work as specified under Standard Specification section 611-3.05 Post-Planting Care. Replacement Planting. Plants that die, become diseased or badly impaired during Post-Planting Care shall be removed and replaced in kind once with new, healthy plant material, in the same location as the initial planting. Replacement planting shall occur within the planting seasons shown in Standard Specification Table 611-1. For any plants replaced during the Post-Planting Care period, Post-Planting Care shall continue to the end of the period. Replacement plants shall be planted, maintained and accepted per Standard Specification Section 611-3.01. Planting soil used in the initial planting shall be reused for replacement plants and shall be supplemented with topsoil at no additional cost if additional material is needed to meet grade and surface finish. Watering shall accompany backfilling, at no additional cost. No replacement tree shall be staked, guyed or anchored.

D263143 1339

ITEM 611.19010024 - POST-PLANTING CARE WITH REPLACEMENT - MAJOR DECIDUOUS TREES ITEM 611.19020024 - POST-PLANTING CARE WITH REPLACEMENT - MINOR DECIDUOUS TREES ITEM 611.19030024 - POST-PLANTING CARE WITH REPLACEMENT - CONIFEROUS TREES ITEM 611.19040024 - POST-PLANTING CARE WITH REPLACEMENT - DECIDUOUS SHRUBS ITEM 611.19050024 - POST-PLANTING CARE WITH REPLACEMENT - EVERGREEN SHRUBS ITEM 611.19060024 - POST-PLANTING CARE WITH REPLACEMENT– VINES, GROUNDCOVERS ITEM 611.19070024 - POST-PLANTING CARE WITH REPLACEMENT - HERBACEOUS PLANTS

EI 12-001 – Statewide Special Spec. USC L 09/06/2012

METHOD OF MEASUREMENT. The quantity to be measured for payment will be the number of plants of each type cared for and, if necessary, replaced in kind. BASIS OF PAYMENT. The unit price bid shall include the cost of all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to satisfactorily complete the work. Payment will be made under: Item No. Item Pay Unit 611.19010024 Post Planting Care with Replacement - Major Deciduous Trees Each 611.19020024 Post Planting Care with Replacement - Minor Deciduous Trees Each 611.19030024 Post Planting Care with Replacement - Coniferous Trees Each 611.19040024 Post Planting Care with Replacement - Deciduous Shrubs Each 611.19050024 Post Planting Care with Replacement - Evergreen Shrubs Each 611.19060024 Post Planting Care with Replacement– Vines, Groundcovers Each 611.19070024 Post Planting Care with Replacement - Herbaceous Plants Each

D2631431340

ITEM 613.0501XX04 – KESTREL NEST BOX WITH OR WITHOUT SIGN SUPPORTS

Rev. October 2014

DESCRIPTION This work shall consist of furnishing and installing a Kestrel Nest Box at the location(s) indicated in and according to the contract documents and as directed by the Engineer. MATERIALS The materials shall conform to the requirements specified in the following sections of the Standard Specifications:

Portland Cement Concrete 501-2 Timber and Lumber 594-2 Mulch for Planting 713-05 Straw 713-19 Galvanized Coatings and Repair Methods 719-01 Type A Sign Supports 730-24 Stiffeners, Overhead Brackets and Miscellaneous Hardware 730-22

Kestrel Nesting Box Kestrel nesting box shall be constructed from lumber meeting the requirements of §712-13. The kestrel nesting box shall be assembled using either stainless steel or galvanized wood screws and wood glue. Wood glue shall be a heavy duty construction adhesive labeled for bonding wood. Other fasteners, including hinges, safety hooks, straps and/or wires shall be either galvanized or stainless. Galvanization of all fasteners shall be according to §719-01, Type II. Paint or waterproofing sealant may be applied to the exterior of the kestrel nesting box. Paint or waterproofing sealant shall be water based and labeled as “no VOC”. “zero-VOC” or “low-VOC”. Refer to the contract documents to determine if paint or waterproofing sealant is specified. Posts The kestrel nesting box shall be attached to an existing Type B sign post (associated with an existing highway sign) or on new post(s), as specified in the contract documents. When the kestrel nesting box is being supported with new posts, the post(s) shall meet one of the following configurations, as specified;

• Two post configuration, up to 10’ above ground: Type A sign supports with soil plates, and two Z-Bar stiffener cross supports on the steel posts. The cross supports shall be attached so that one is at the top of the nesting box, the other is at the bottom of the nesting box. Top of nesting box shall be within 6” of the top of posts.

• Two post configuration over 10’ above ground: Type A sign supports with extra embedment and soil plates, and two Z-Bar stiffener cross supports on the steel posts. The cross supports shall be attached so one is at the top of the nesting box, the other is at the bottom of the nesting box. Top of nesting box shall be within 6” of the top of posts.

• Single post with concrete footing up to 10’ above ground: Minimum 18” dia X 36”

D263143 1341


Rev. October 2014

concrete footing with a single Type A sign support. Post sizes and embedment depths should be determined using the Materials Details Sheets for Type A Sign Posts. Predator Guard: A 1/16” thick x 10” x 24” galvanized sheet metal plate, secured to the posts using galvanized or stainless steel bolt with lock washer and flatwasher. CONSTRUCTION DETAILS The following sections of the standard specifications shall apply:

Timber and Lumber 594-3.01 Signs 645-3

A. Nest Box Design: Kestrel nest box design and assembly shall be as shown in the contract

documents. Boxes shall be glued, screwed and fastened together.

B. Paint or Waterproofing Sealant: When specified, paint or waterproofing sealant shall only be applied to the exterior of the kestrel nesting box (not applied on the interior surfaces). Apply according to manufacturer’s instructions, or a minimum of two (2) coats.

C. Installation: a. Refer to plans for the location of nesting box(es). b. Install the post(s) according to the Materials Details for Type A Sign Support sheets

(common details and manufacturer specific details). c. Attach the box to a post 8 to 14 feet above the ground. d. When mounting on a two post configuration, the nest box shall be attached to the top and

bottom of the cross supports as noted in the contract documents. e. When specified, stainless steel strapping should be used to secure the nest box to the

sign-post(s). One strap is to be wrapped around the sign-post and board extending above the box, and a second strap is wrapped below in the same manner.

f. Place 3” of wood chips or straw on the bottom of the box. g. Attach the predator guard to each post on both sides, approximately half way up the post

using the galvanized or stainless steel bolt with lock washer and flatwasher.

D2631431342


Rev. October 2014

METHOD OF MEASUREMENT Kestrel Nest Box: This work will be measured by the number of only kestrel nest boxes satisfactorily furnished and installed on existing Type B sign supports. Kestrel Nest Box on new sign supports: This work will be measured by the number of kestrel nest boxes satisfactorily furnished and installed on specified sign support configurations. BASIS OF PAYMENT The unit price bid for each kestrel nest box shall include the cost of all labor, equipment and materials necessary to satisfactorily complete the work. Payment shall be made under the following items: Item Description Pay Unit 613.05010104 Kestrel Nest Box EA 613.05010204 Two post configuration, up to 10’ above ground EA 613.05010304 Two post configuration over 10’ above ground EA 613.05010404 Single post with concrete footing up to 10’ above ground EA

D263143 1343

ITEM 613.05010010 – BAT HOUSE

October 2012

DESCRIPTION This work shall consist of the construction and installation of bat houses in accordance with the contract documents and at the locations indicated on the plans or as designated by the Engineer. MATERIALS The materials shall meet the requirements of the following subsections of the Standard Specifications:

Portland Cement Concrete - General – Materials 501-2 Timber – Materials 594-2 Mulch for Planting, Type A 713-05 Wood Preservative – Waterborne 708-31 Timber and Lumber 712-13 Structural Steel 715-01 Galvanized Coatings and Repair Methods 719-01

Unless otherwise specified or approved, the following shall apply: Lumber: The lumber shall be rough cut cedar. Hardware: Nails shall be standard quality galvanized box nails. Sheet Metal: Sheet metal for predator guards shall be ASTM A606 and shall be hot-dip galvanized per Subsection 719-01 Type IV. Type 304 or 316 stainless steel sheet for bracket mounting plate shall conform to ASTM A276. CONSTRUCTION DETAILS The construction of each Bat House shall be as detailed in the contract plans. Bat Houses shall not be painted, nor shall they receive a stain or any other protective coating. A bead of silicon caulking shall be applied along each exterior joint to prevent heat loss. The treated wood posts shall be driven into the ground at the locations indicated, to the depth specified on the plans. The post top shall be cut off to the above-ground height indicated on the plans. If the Bat House is to be mounted to a tree it shall face south or southeast. The intent is for the house to catch the morning sun and be in the shade during midday. After a post is driven, the Bat House, along with bracket mounting plate, shall be securely fastened to the top of the post at the height indicated on the plans. Free standing, post mounted Bat Houses that are placed proximate to water shall be oriented to face south, or at a 90º angle to the prevailing winds. The Contractor shall exercise care and cause minimal disturbance to any pond or stream bed during the driving of posts and subsequent

D2631431344

ITEM 613.05010010 – BAT HOUSE

October 2012

attachment of the Bat Houses. Sheet metal predator guards shall be fastened to the posts as detailed on the plans. METHOD OF MEASUREMENT This work will be measured as the number of Bat Houses installed. BASIS OF PAYMENT The unit price bid shall include the cost of all labor, equipment and material necessary to satisfactorily complete the work. Payment will be made upon acceptance of the completed Bat Houses.

D263143 1345

ITEM 615.0101NN10 – LITTER (TRASH) RECEPTACLE

September 2012

DESCRIPTION The work shall consist of furnishing and installing litter (trash) receptacles in accordance with the contract documents and as directed by the Engineer. MATERIALS The materials for this work shall conform to the requirements listed here and in the contract documents, unless otherwise approved. Litter (trash) receptacles shall be as manufactured by the Manufacturers listed in the contract documents or approved equals. Litter (trash) receptacles that are received chipped, scratched, bent, dented or damaged in any way will not be accepted and shall be removed and replaced with new containers or parts which are free from all defects. CONSTRUCTION DETAILS Prior to ordering litter (trash) receptacles, the Contractor shall submit catalog cuts and/or shop drawings along with color samples for approval and shall verify the quantity and location of each type of litter receptacle with the Engineer. Litter (trash) receptacles shall be installed in the positions and manner shown on the plans, according to the Manufacturer's instructions, and as approved by the Engineer. METHOD OF MEASUREMENT This work will be measured as the number of litter (trash) receptacles installed in accordance with the contract documents and as directed by the Engineer. BASIS OF PAYMENT The unit bid price for each litter (trash) receptacle shall include the cost of furnishing all equipment, hardware, materials and labor necessary to complete the work. Payment will be made under Item Description Pay Unit 615.01010110 Litter (Trash) Receptacle Type 1 Each 615.01010210 Litter (Trash) Receptacle Type 2 Each 615.01010310 Litter (Trash) Receptacle Type 3 Each 615.01010410 Litter (Trash) Receptacle Type 4 Each 615.01010510 Litter (Trash) Receptacle Type 5 Each

D2631431346

ITEM 615.08XX0005 – BENCH, TYPE XX

Rev. July 2012

DESCRIPTION: The Contractor shall furnish and install benches as shown in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall verify the type, quantity, location and installation method for each bench with the Engineer prior to ordering. This may include approval by owning or maintaining agencies other than NYSDOT.

MATERIALS: As indicated in the contract documents.

CONSTRUCTION DETAILS: The benches shall be installed in the locations indicated in the contract documents, in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and as approved by the Engineer.

METHOD OF MEASUREMENT: Quantity will be measured by the number of benches installed to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

BASIS OF PAYMENT: The unit price bid for each bench shall include the cost of all labor, materials and equipment necessary to satisfactory complete the work.

D263143 1347

ITEM 615.5ABCNN01 – PICNIC TABLE

December, 2013

DESCRIPTION This work shall consist of furnishing and installing a picnic table at the locations indicated in, and in accordance with, the contract documents and as directed by the Engineer. Picnic table benches may be integrated into the picnic table as a unit or separate freestanding elements. Refer to the contract documents for additional information. Picnic table shall include assembly hardware, mounting hardware and, if specified, concrete for footings. Additional information on the picnic table materials and installation shall be described in a special note titled, “615.5ABCNN05 – Picnic Table”. MATERIALS The following sections of the standard specifications shall apply:

Structural Concrete 555-2 Timber and Lumber 594-2 Precast Concrete – General 703-03 Galvanized Coatings and Repair Methods 719-01 Anchor Bolts 723-60

The following ASTM references shall apply:

Standard Specification for Polyethylene-Based Structural-Grade ASTM D7568 Plastic Lumber for Outdoor Applications

The following standards shall apply:

The 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design Department of Justice (DOJ) Architectural Barriers Act Accessibility Guidelines; Architectural and Outdoor Developed Areas Transportation Barriers Compliance Board

MOUNTING: Concrete Footings: When specified, concrete support footings shall be Class A concrete as specified in §501, Portland Cement Concrete - General.

D2631431348


December, 2013

Mounting Hardware: Mounting hardware is included in the cost of this pay item, and, when required, shall be as provided or recommended by the manufacturer or as specified in the contract documents. Mounting hardware for separate (non-integrated) picnic table benches, when specified, shall also be included in the cost of this pay item. Note: Mounting hardware packages may not be included in the purchase of a picnic table. The Contractor shall check with the picnic table manufacturer to determine if additional hardware is required to complete the installation as specified. PICNIC TABLE: General: The picnic table may be constructed of wood, metal, plastic, concrete or as specified. Refer to the contract documents for additional information on the materials used to construct the picnic table. Picnic table color, patterns and finishes shall be as described in the contract document. Wheelchair Accessible Picnic Tables: Wheelchair accessible picnic tables shall conform to the following regulations:

Architectural Barriers Act Accessibility Guidelines; §1011.4 Outdoor Developed Areas

The 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design §902.3 The 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design §306

The Contractor shall provide manufacturer’s documentation verifying that the picnic table is compliant with the American with Disabilities Act (ADA) guidelines. Assembly Hardware: All assembly hardware is included in the cost of this pay item and shall be as per the contract documents and as provided or recommended by the manufacturer. SUBMITTALS: The Contractor shall submit shop drawings and catalog cuts for approval prior to ordering. Shop drawings shall show clearly all materials, finishes, connecting and joining methods and mounting details (including hardware, as required). CONSTRUCTION DETAILS The following sections of the standard specifications shall apply:

Excavation and Embankment 203-3.01

D263143 1349


December, 2013

The picnic table shall be installed at the location indicated in the contract documents. The picnic table shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s specifications and recommendations and the contract documents. METHOD OF MEASUREMENT The work will be measured as the number of each picnic table furnished and installed. BASIS OF PAYMENT The unit price bid for each picnic table shall include the cost of furnishing all labor, equipment and materials necessary to satisfactorily complete the work. Where: A = Construction B = Accessibility Option C = Mounting 1 = Metal 1 = Non-Accessible 1 = Freestanding 2 = Wood 2 = Wheelchair Accessible 2 = In-Ground - Fixed 3 = Concrete 3 = Surface Mounted – Fixed 4 = Plastic 4 = Surface Mounted – Removable 5 = As Specified 5 = As Specified And NN is serialization for each unique picnic table type.

D2631431350

ITEM 615.90000010 GRAPE TRELLIS

May 2015

DESCRIPTION This work shall consist of furnishing and erecting a grape trellis at the locations shown in, in reasonable close conformity to the lines and grades shown in, and according to the contract documents and as directed by the Engineer. MATERIALS The following sections of the standard specifications shall apply:

Timber and Lumber 594-2 Galvanized Coatings and Repair Methods 719-01

with the following exceptions: Timber and lumber shall be round. Lumber.

Posts: All posts shall comply with §712-13, with the following exceptions:

o be the sizes shown in the contract documents, o be Black Locust lumber (Robinia pseudoacacia), grown in the Eastern USA, o have sound knots 3" in diameter or less, o have bark intact. Minor small bark insertions and checks are permitted; small grub

holes are not permitted. o End posts shall be five-inch (5”) diameter. o Line posts shall be three-inch (3”) diameter.

Approval of order, as described under §594-2.02 must also contain the following information: Species of wood proposed for use. Wire. Catch and Cordon Wire: Wire shall be 12.5 gauge, high tensile 200 KPSI, high carbon

steel wire with a 1,300 pound minimum breaking strength and a Class 3 galvanized zinc finish made from steel rod with 0.28% carbon content.

Support Wire: Wire shall be 10 gauge, high tensile 200 KPSI, high carbon steel

wire with a 1,300 pound minimum breaking strength and a Class 3 galvanized zinc finish made from steel rod with 0.28% carbon content.

D263143 1351

ITEM 615.90000010 GRAPE TRELLIS

May 2015

Anchors.

Earth anchors: shall be helical screw-type earth anchors, galvanized carbon steel with a ½” diameter shaft, 30” long with a 4” diameter blade and a 1” diameter eye at one end capable of withstanding a minimum 2,500 pound pull resistance force. Hardware.

One-way Wire Tightening Vice Grip Anchors for Posts: shall be a one-way wire tightening vice grip-type coated anchor intended for 12.5 gauge wire fence and grape trellis application. All wire crimps and clamps shall be hot dipped galvanized steel. CONSTRUCTION DETAILS

All posts shall be placed in 12 inch diameter excavated or augured holes. The holes shall be backfilled to the finished ground in approximately 6 inch, compacted layers. Set earth anchors as shown. Insert wire anchors in line posts as recommended by manufacturer. Run trellis wire as shown on plans. Tension wire to 200 pounds.

METHOD OF MEASUREMENT The work will be measured as the number of linear feet of Grape trellis furnished and erected. BASIS OF PAYMENT The unit price bid per linear foot of grape trellis furnished and erected shall include the cost of furnishing all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to satisfactorily complete the work.

D2631431352

615.91000010 – ALUMINUM FLAGPOLE

DESCRIPTION: The work consists of furnishing and installing an aluminum flagpole at the location shown in and in accordance with the contract documents and as directed by the Engineer. MATERIALS: The following sections of the standard specifications shall apply:

Structural Concrete 555-2 Concrete Grouting and Anchoring Material 701-05 Mortar Sand 703-03 Caulking Compound for Structures 705-06 Galvanized Coatings and Repair Methods 719-01

The following ASTM standards shall apply:

Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Seamless Pipe and Seamless Extruded Tube ASTM B241

The following AASHTO standard specifications shall apply:

Standard Specification for Corrugated Steel Pipe, AASHTO M 36 Standard Specification for Bituminous-Coated

Corrugated Metal Culvert Pipe and Pipe-Arches AASHTO M 190 The following guide specifications shall apply:

National Association of Architectural Metal ANSI/NAAM FP 1001-07 Manufacturers' (NAAMM) Guide Specification for Design of Metal Flagpoles

Pole: The pole shall be made of aluminum in accordance with ASTM B241. Alloy type, temper and pipe size and/or schedule number shall be as per the contract documents. The pole construction shall be seamless throughout and comprised of one section. The pole and pole foundation design shall comply with the National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers’ (NAAMM) Guide Specifications For Design Of Metal Flagpoles (ANSI/NAAMM FP 1001-07) and shall be designed to meet or exceed the AASHTO Standard Specifications, for Structural Supports for Highway Signs, Luminaries and Traffic Signals, 2009 with interims. Refer to Appendix C – Alternative Method for Wind Pressures for a method to determine design wind pressures. Wind speeds shall be designed for the following wind speeds:

May 2015

D263143 1353

615.91000010 – ALUMINUM FLAGPOLE Wind Speed Counties 80 mph Allegany, Bronx, Cattaraugus, Chautauqua, Erie, Genesee, Kings,

Livingston, Monroe, Nassau, New York, Niagara, Orleans, Ontario, Queens, Richmond, Rockland, Suffolk, Wayne, Westchester and Wyoming

70 mph All other counties The design wind loading shall be chosen to be consistent with the location of the structure and the height factor. Flagpole Fittings: Shall be as per the contract documents. Foundation: Portland cement concrete used for the foundation shall meet the requirements for Class A concrete for structures as specified in §501, Portland Cement Concrete B General. Corrugated steel pipe sleeve: Shall be 1/16 inch thick (16 gauge), and shall meet the requirements for fabrication as specified in ASTM A760 for Type I and for Type II in AASHTO M36 and M190. All steel, except the steel reinforcing bar, shall be galvanized in accordance with Type I and III coating as specified in §719-01, Galvanized Coatings and Repair Methods. Sand: Shall meet the requirements of §703-03, Mortar Sand. Concrete grouting material : Shall meet the requirements of §701-05, Concrete Grouting and Anchoring Material. Wooden wedges: Shall be oak. Caulking compound: Shall meet the requirements of §705-06, Caulking Compound for Structures. CONSTRUCTION DETAILS: The following sections of the standard specifications shall apply:

Trench Culvert and Structure Excavation 206-3 Structural Concrete 555-3

Excavation required for the installation of the flagpole shall conform to § 206-3. The Contractor shall construct the flag pole base and install the flag pole according to the details shown in the contract documents. The flag pole shall be set truly vertical. May 2015

D2631431354

615.91000010 – ALUMINUM FLAGPOLE Concrete shall be furnished and placed as shown in the contract documents and in accordance with §555-3 Structural Concrete, All steel in the foundation, except for the corrugated steel pipe and the reinforcing bar, shall be welded together before galvanizing. The Contractor shall test the flag pole for full functionality and integrity by unfurling a plain cloth flag devoid of color or design 5’ x 8’ in size for a period of one week or longer as required. METHOD OF MEASUREMENT: The work will be measured by the number of flagpoles furnished and installed in accordance with the contract documents. BASIS OF PAYMENT: The unit price bid for each flagpole shall include the cost of the furnishing all labor, equipment and material necessary to satisfactorily complete the work.

May 2015

D263143 1355

ITEM 615.9906XX04 – LANDSCAPE BOULDERS

June, 2013

DESCRIPTION The work shall consist of furnishing and installing landscape boulders in accordance with the contract documents and as directed by the Engineer. MATERIALS The boulder and bedding material shall be described in the contract documents in a special note entitled “Landscape Boulders”. Submittals The Contractor shal1 submit two (2) samples of the proposed landscape boulder for approval prior to delivery. Samples shall be large enough to convey the boulder appearance, including texture and color, but no larger than 20 pounds. CONSTRUCTION DETAILS The Engineer shall be notified two weeks before the boulders are delivered to the construction site. The Contractor shall stockpile the materials at an approved location. The boulders shall be approved prior to placement. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer when the boulder placement site is complete and ready for boulder placement. The contractor shall mark out the location of boulders in the field for approval, based on the contract documents and as directed by the Engineer. After the arrangement of boulders is approved, the Contractor shall set the boulders in place and backfill around them with specified bedding material as shown in the contract documents. The placed boulders shall be clean, free from marks or scars caused by construction equipment and in a stable position that prevents future removal or displacement. METHOD OF MEASUREMENT The work will be measured as the number of each boulder installed in accordance with the contract documents. BASIS OF PAYMENT The unit price bid for each landscape boulder shall include the cost of all labor, material, and equipment necessary to satisfactorily complete the work. Payment will not be made for repairs to damaged areas caused by the Contractor’s operations. No payment will be made for installing landscape boulders or work related thereto that have not been pre-approved or that have degraded due to the Contractor’s negligence, material failure, or improper storage of the material.

D2631431356

ITEM 615.9906XX04 – LANDSCAPE BOULDERS

June, 2013

Payment will be made under the following: ITEM DESCRIPTION Pay Unit615.99060104 Landscape Boulders, Type 1 EACH615.99060204 Landscape Boulders, Type 2 EACH615.99060304 Landscape Boulders, Type 3 EACH615.99060404 Landscape Boulders, Type 4 EACH

D263143 1357

ITEM 621.25nnnn10 - TRIMMING EXISTING RECHARGE BASINS

DESCRIPTION

The Contractor shall form and trim the bottom and eroded side slope areas of the recharge basins to the lines and grades shown on the plans or as modified by the Engineer. This item is limited to the final shaping and grading operations of existing recharge basins where work has been performed under the unclassified excavation items and embankment items where shown on the plans or as directed by the Engineer.

MATERIALS

Not specified.


The work under this item shall not be performed until all excavation and embankment work has been completed.

Restored side slopes and bottom surfaces in the existing recharge basin area shall be smoothed and trimmed in reasonably close conformity (plus or minus 6 inch) to true line and slope. The recharge basin area shall be left in a satisfactory condition free of large stones or other objectionable materials after trimming.

In addition, after trimming, the excavated bottom surface of the recharge basin shall be loosened to a depth of 6 inch by means of a disc harrow, roto tiller, pulvimixer, plow, or other means acceptable to the Engineer.


Payment for trimming existing recharge basins will be made on a lump sum basis for each recharging basin satisfactorily trimmed.

BASIS OF PAYMENT

The lump sum price bid for each recharge basin shall cover the cost of all materials, tools, equipment, and labor necessary to form and trim the existing recharge basin area to the lines and grades as shown on the plans or as ordered by the Engineer, including loosening of the basin floor soil.

Monthly payments will be made under this work in proportion to the amount of work done as determined by the Engineer.

Note: nnnn equals each location

11/78 4/4/08 E M 1/12/98 4/14/10E

D2631431358

May, 2015

ITEM 622.01000010 - WOOD ENCLOSURE

DESCRIPTION Under this item the Contractor shall furnish and install enclosures of the size and at the locations shown in the contract documents and as directed by the Engineer. MATERIALSThe following sections of the standard specifications shall apply:

Wood Preservative – Oil Based 708-32 Timber and Lumber 712-13 Stress Graded Timber and Lumber 712-14

Galvanized Coatings and Repair Methods 719-01

Lumber. All lumber shall be nominal dimension (undressed) and shall comply with the requirements of '712-14 of the Standard Specifications, Stress Graded Timber and Lumber. All lumber shall be commercial grade No. 2 or better. Dimensional wood members shall meet or exceed the mechanical properties as defined by U.S. Forest Product Laboratories testing methods (2" standard) as follows:

Bending strength: 2,400 psi Modulus of elasticity: 1,700,000 psi Modulus of rupture: 14,000 lbf/in² Hardness: 1,200 lbf

Structural Members: Species and grade as listed in the AFPA, National Design Specification for Wood Construction having design stresses as shown.

Lumber Other Than Structural: Unless otherwise specified, species graded under the grading rules of an inspection agency approved by Board of Review, American Lumber Standards Committee.

Framing lumber: Minimum extreme fiber stress in bending of 1100.

Furring, blocking, nailers and similar items 4 inches and narrower: Standard Grade and, members 6 inches and wider, Number 2 Grade.

Plywood: Sheathing and Subflooring: APA Rated Sheathing, Exterior Exposure. Furnish APA PS 1 veneered panels with span ratings for the required thicknesses as shown in the plans unless otherwise indicated.

Lumber size references, unless otherwise specified, are nominal sizes, and actual sizes shall be within manufacturing tolerances allowed by the standard under which product is produced.Lumber shall bear the grade mark, stamp, or other identifying marks indicating grades of material.

D263143 1359

May, 2015


Wood members shall be sized as shown on the plans and be milled smooth to the finished length. Each piece shall be of one continuous piece; no joints will be allowed. Lumber shall be parallel cut without heart center or sap-wood. All milled surfaces shall be sanded smooth on all four sides and both ends after being worked to the required dimensions.

Lumber shall be in sound condition, free from worm holes, longitudinal heart cracks, firm or soft sap wood, fungus, and deformation (twisting or cupping) which cannot be removed during installation using normal installation methods and tools.

Natural drying checks, to a maximum of one-sixteenth inch (1/16") in width, will be acceptable. Sound knots are acceptable. All wood terminology referenced in this specification shall be as defined in ASTM D 9. A sound knot is defined as solid across its face, at least as hard as the surrounding wood, and showing no indication of decay or loosening in the hole. Any slat with unsound knots or any other limiting characteristics as described above shall be rejected and replaced. Dimensional tolerance shall be plus or minus 0.08" in both width and thickness.

Moisture Content for Framing Members:1. At time of delivery and maintained at the site. 2. Boards and lumber 2 inches and less in thickness: 19% or less. 3. Lumber over 2 inches thick: 25% or less Should the wood provided to the job site not be acceptable, it shall be removed from the job site at no additional cost to the Owner.

Wood Preservative:All lumber shall be pressure treated in accordance with the requirements of '708-32 of the Standard Specifications, Wood Preservative – Oil Borne. Unless otherwise specified, the cutting and boring shall be completed prior to pressure treatment. If cutting and boring is permitted and performed after treatment, such cuts and holes shall be swabbed, sprayed, or brushed with two coats of the preservative initially used. All treated lumber shall be dried to a moisture content of 19% following treatment. Handling and care shall conform to AWPA Standard M4. Approval of timber and lumber for use under this specification will be by the Engineer. Application for such approval must contain the following information:

Species of wood proposed for use.

Type of preservative and minimum retention in pounds per cubic foot.

Pressure preservative treatment method.

Fasteners, Connectors and Metals:Nails, screw, bolts, plates, angles, hinges and anchors shall be as the type, size and material shown

D2631431360

May, 2015


on the Drawings. Furnish with standard plating, applied after punching, forming and assembly of parts; galvanized, cadmium plated, or zinc-coated by electric-galvanizing process. Galvanize where specified. Use galvanized coating on ferrous metal for exterior work unless non-ferrous metals or stainless is used.

Fasteners:Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture.

Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in-ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.

Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.

Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.

Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.

Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1 (ASME B18.2.3.8M).

Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, (ASTM A354-11, Grade BD); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.

Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency.

Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2 (ASTM F 738M and ASTM F 836M, Grade A1 or A4).

Hinges:Hinges shall be 304 Self Closing (Tension Adjustable) Stainless Steel hinges, 10" wide x 7-1/2" high, 8" long x 3.5" wide strap on with 1.5" Wrap Around at Edge of door intended for doors up to 48" wide. Hinges shall have black polyester powder coat finish.

Door Bolt:Door bolts shall be slide-type bolt latches intended for gates, doors and sheds with flat surface.Sliding bolt shall be padlockable and made for heavy gauge steel construction with a black powder coat finish. Complete bolt shall measure 6-1/4" total length by 2-5/8" total height.

D263143 1361

May, 2015


Wall Shingles:Cedar Wall Shingles: Cedar shingles shall match those on the main building and be smooth-sawn eastern white cedar shingles.

1. Grade: A (extra). 2. Size: 16 inches long; 0.40 inch thick at butt. 3. Undercourse Shingle Grade: D Undercoursing. 4. Undercourse Shingle Size: 16 inches long; 0.40 inch thick at butt.

Cedar Wall Shingle Finish: Semitransparent penetrating stain, oil based, field applied to match main building.

Underlayment Materials:Felt Underlayment: ASTM D 226, Type II, asphalt-saturated organic felt.

Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment, Polyethylene Faced: ASTM D 1970, a minimum of 40-mil- thick, slip-resisting, polyethylene-film-reinforced top surface laminated to SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release paper backing; cold applied.

Asphalt Shingles:Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Asphalt Shingles shall match those used on main building.

Laminated-Strip Asphalt Shingles: ASTM D 3462, laminated, multi-ply overlay construction, glass-fiber reinforced, mineral-granule surfaced, and self-sealing.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Atlas Roofing Corporation. b. CertainTeed Corporation. c. Elk Premium Building Products, Inc. d. Emco Building Products Corp. e. GAF Materials Corporation. f. IKO.g. Malarkey Roofing Products. h. Owens Corning. i. PABCO Roofing Products. j. TAMKO Roofing Products, Inc.

Butt Edge: Straight cut.

Strip Size: Manufacturer's standard.

D2631431362

May, 2015


Algae Resistance: Granules treated to resist algae discoloration.

Color and Blends: To match main building’s roof.

Flashing: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's" Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of the item. 1. Apron Flashings: Fabricate with lower flange a minimum of 4 inches over and 4 inches

beyond each side of downslope asphalt shingles and 6 inches up the vertical surface. 2. Drip Edges: Fabricate in lengths not exceeding 10 feet with 2-inch roof deck flange and 1-1/2-

inch fascia flange with 3/8-inch drip at lower edge.

Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type II, asbestos free.


Quality Assurance:Lumber:

A. Certificates of Grade Submit certificates attesting that products meet the grade requirements specified in lieu of grade markings where appearance is important and grade marks will deface material.

B. Engineered Wood Products. Source Limitations - Obtain each type of engineered wood product through one source from a single manufacturer.

Hardware:

A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by hardware manufacturer.

a. Installer's responsibilities include supplying and installing door hardware and providing a qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware. Installer shall have warehousing facilities in Project's vicinity.

b. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware from a single manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.

Wall Shingles: A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who is an approved affiliate member of Cedar

Shake and Shingle Bureau (CSSB). B. Grading Agency Qualifications: An independent testing and inspecting agency recognized

by authorities having jurisdiction as qualified to label wood shingles for compliance with referenced grading rules.

D263143 1363

May, 2015


C. Source Limitations: Obtain wood shingles from single source from single manufacturer. D. Forest Certification: Provide shingles produced from wood obtained from forests certified

by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship."

E. Fire-Resistance Characteristics: Provide wood shingles and related roofing materials identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per test method below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

a. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Class C; UL 790 or ASTM E 108 with ASTM D 2898, for application and roof slopes indicated.

Asphalt Shingles:A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and

approved for installation of units required for this Project. B. Source Limitations: Obtain shingles and self-adhering sheet underlayment from single

source from single manufacturer. Source to match main building. C. Fire-Resistance Characteristics: Provide asphalt shingles and related roofing materials

identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per test method below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

a. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Class A; ASTM E 108 or UL 790, for application and roof slopes indicated.

Execution:The Contractor shall perform such incidental clearing and grubbing as may be necessary to construct the foundation to the required grade and alignment. Foundation for the wood enclosure shall be constructed to the finished elevations shown in the Contract Documents. Construct Enclosures as shown on the plans and/or as directed. Maximum variation from flat surface across any section in any direction shall be 1/8". Any lumber that is damaged or excessively scratched will be rejected and replaced with new. Rough Carpentry and Framing: Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.

Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated.

Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim.

D2631431364

May, 2015


Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.

Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening so that fasteners will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; do not countersink nail heads, unless otherwise indicated.

For exposed work, arrange fasteners in straight rows parallel with edges of members, with fasteners evenly spaced, and with adjacent rows staggered. Fastener patterns help ensure a good appearance. Indicate locations of other fasteners, such as wood screws, bolts, and lag screws, on Drawings.

Wood, Blocking and Nailer Installation: Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work.Coordinate locations with other work involved. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.

Plywood Wall Sheathing: Apply horizontally or vertically. Extend sheathing over and nail to sill and top plate. Abut sheathing edges over centerlines of supports. Allow 1/8 inch spacing between panels and 1/8 inch at windows and doors. If sheathing is applied horizontally, stagger vertical end joints. Nail panels with 6-penny nails spaced 6 inches o.c. along edges of the panel and 12 inches o.c. over intermediate supports. Keep nails 3/8 inches away from panel ledges. Provide 2 by 4 blocking for horizontal edges not otherwise supported.

Underlayment (Walls): Comply with underlayment manufacturer's written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply.

Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install, wrinkle free, on roof deck. Comply with low-temperature installation restrictions of underlayment manufacturer if applicable. Install at locations indicated below, lapped in direction to shed water. Lap sides not less than 3-1/2 inches.Lap ends not less than 6 inches, staggered 24 inches between courses. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within seven days.

Wall-Shingle Installation, Single Coursed: Install wood wall shingles according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in CSSB's "Exterior and Interior Wall Manual."

Install drainage mat horizontally, in parallel courses, over surface to receive wood shingles, butting edges and ends to form a continuous layer; fasten to wall sheathing.

Install wood shingles, beginning at base of wall, with a double-layer starter course in a

D263143 1365

May, 2015


continuous straight line. Offset joints of double-layer starter course a minimum of 1-1/2 inches.

Install first course of wood shingles over starter course. Install second and succeeding courses of wood shingles. Offset joints between shingles in succeeding courses a minimum of 1-1/2 inches.

1. Install shingles in continuous straight-line courses. 2. Install shingle courses with butt lines staggered 1-1/2 inches from true butt line. 3. Fasten each shingle with two concealed nails spaced 3/4 to 1 inch from edge of shingle

and 1 inch above butt line of succeeding course. For shingles wider than 8 inches, add two concealed fasteners, spaced 1 inch apart, to the center of shingle. Drive fasteners flush with top surface of shingles without crushing wood.

4. Maintain weather exposure of 7-1/2 inches for 16-inch- long shingles. 5. Interior Corner Treatment: Laced with flashing behind. 6. Exterior Corner Treatment: Mitered

Asphalt Shingles: Install asphalt shingles according to manufacturer's written instructions, recommendations in ARMA's "Residential Asphalt Roofing Manual," and asphalt shingle recommendations in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual." Apply roofing materials as specified herein unless specified or recommended otherwise by shingle manufacturer's written instructions

Apply starter strip at eaves, use a row of shingles with tabs removed and trimmed to ensure that joints are not exposed at shingle cutouts. Apply starter strip along eaves, overlaying, extend asphalt shingles 1/2 inch over fasciae at eaves and rakes. Install starter strip along rake edge. Place nails so top of nail is not exposed in cutouts of first course of shingles. Fasten with 6 nails per strip of shingles. Seal tabs of first course of shingles with asphalt roof cement as specified below.

Leak Barrier Underlayment: Apply one layer of shingle underlayment to roof deck. Comply with low-temperature installation restrictions of underlayment manufacturer if applicable. Lay underlayment parallel to roof eaves, starting at eaves. Provide minimum 2 inch head laps, 4 inch end laps, 6 inch laps from both sides over hips and ridges. Nail sufficiently to hold until shingles are applied. Turn up vertical surfaces a minimum of 4 inches. Cover within seven days.

Shingle Courses: Start first course with full shingle, and apply succeeding courses with joints staggered at thirds or halves. Butt-end joints of shingles shall not align vertically more often than every fourth course. Apply shingle courses as follows:

a. Fastening: Do not drive fasteners into or above the factory-applied adhesive unless adhesive is located 5/8 inch or closer to top of cutouts. Place fasteners so they are concealed by shingle top lap and penetrate the head lap.

b. Shingles applied with nails: Nominal 5 inch exposure. Apply each shingle with minimum of four nails. Place one nail one inch from each end, and evenly space nails on a horizontal line a minimum of 5/8 inch above top of cutouts.

c. Nailing: Apply shingles with nominal 5 inch exposure. Apply each shingle with

D2631431366

May, 2015


minimum of six nails. Place one nail one inch from each end and one nail on each side of each cutout, on a horizontal line 5/8 inch above cutouts.

d. Sealing: Seal each tab with continuous, 9 inch long, ¼ inch diameter bead of asphalt roof cement, applied to the surface of course below. Place bead on horizontal line 5/8 inch above cutouts so bead will be one inch from bottom edge of tab to be sealed and so bead will not show through cutouts. After nailing each shingle, press tabs down to ensure spreading and bonding of asphalt roof cement.

e. When ambient temperature during installation is below 50º F (10º C), seal asphalt shingles with asphalt roofing cement spots

Erection Tolerances: Framing members which will be covered by finishes such as wallboard, plaster, or ceramic tile set in a mortar setting bed, shall be within the following limits: (1) Layout of walls and partitions: 1/4 inch from intended position; (2) Plates and runners: 1/4 inch in 8 feet from a straight line; (3) Studs: 1/4 inch in 8 feet out of plumb, not cumulative; and (4) Face of framing members: 1/4 inch in 8 feet from a true plane.

METHOD OF MEASUREMENT Wood enclosures will be measured by the number of enclosures properly furnished and installed in accordance with the contract documents.

BASIS OF PAYMENT

The unit price bid for each wood enclosure shall include the cost of furnishing all labor, materials, tools, and equipment necessary to satisfactorily complete the work. Any of the the labor, tools and equipment associated with Subbase Course, Type I, Concrete Footing, Class A, Concrete Sidewalks and Driveways, Colored Portland Cement Concrete Sidewalk and any Clearing and Grubbing shall be paid for under their respective items.

D263143 1367

ITEM 622.02000010 – REST AREA BUILDING SHELL AND FOUNDATION DESCRIPTION. This work shall consist of construction of the building shell and the foundation in accordance with the contract documents. MATERIALS. As specified in contract documents. CONSTRUCTION DETAILS. The contractor shall perform all construction work in accordance with the requirements in the contract documents. METHOD OF MEASUREMENT. Rest Area Building Shell and Foundation will be measured for payment on a lump sum basis. BASIS OF PAYMENT. The lump sum price bid for this item shall include the cost of furnishing all materials, labor, equipment, management, and supervision to satisfactorily complete the work. Progress payments will be made in accordance with the contract documents.

Aug. 2015

D2631431368

ITEM 623.12010001 – CRUSHED STONE STABILIZATION COURSE FOR POROUS ASPHALT ITEM 623.12020001 – CRUSHED STONE RESERVOIR COURSE FOR POROUS ASPHALT

2/10/2012

DESCRIPTION:

The work shall consist of providing and placing, in accordance with the contract documents, clean, washed, uniformly graded crushed stone.

MATERIALS:

Materials shall consist of Crushed Stone that meets the requirements of Section 703-02 COARSE AGGREGATE in the NYSDOT Standard Specifications. The source must be listed under “stone” on the current Approved List of Fine and Coarse Aggregates, which is published on the NYSDOT web site. Material shall consist of clean, washed, durable, sharp-angled fragments of rock of uniform quality and size.

GRADATION:

Material shall be graded in accordance with size designations shown in Table 703-4 from the NYSDOT Standard Specifications.

Stabilization Course – Size Designation No. 2

Reservoir Course - Size Designation No. 4A

D263143 1369

ITEM 623.12010001 – CRUSHED STONE STABILIZATION COURSE FOR POROUS ASPHALT ITEM 623.12020001 – CRUSHED STONE RESERVOIR COURSE FOR POROUS ASPHALT

2/10/2012


Material shall be placed in locations and thickness identified in the plans, uniformly leveled and moderately compacted in lifts not greater than 8” with a non-vibratory “dirt roller” only to properly orientate the stone. Only minor vibratory compaction using a plate tamper is allowed after a minimum of 8” of stone is placed and with prior approval from the engineer.

Material must be smooth and level prior to asphalt course or reservoir stone overlay. If the stone becomes displaced or rutted, a non-vibratory “dirt roller” may be used to level the stone layer prior to asphalt placement or to smooth ruts that may be made by asphalt delivery vehicles loading the paver or other construction vehicles.


The quantity shall be the number of cubic yards of material, placed and compacted in its final position, computed from payment lines shown on the plans, or where changes have been ordered, from payment lines established in writing by the Engineer.

BASIS OF PAYMENT:

The unit price bid for this work shall include the cost of furnishing all labor, material and equipment necessary to complete the work.

D2631431370

9/18/08E4/18/91

1/16/98 M5/9/01

Revised 4/17/08

ITEM 645.13070010 - REINSTALL SIGN POSTSITEM 645.13080010 - REINSTALL SIGN PANEL ASSEMBLIES

DESCRIPTIONThe Contractor shall reinstall ground mounted sign posts and/or sign panel assemblies at locations shownon the plans or where directed by the Engineer. For the purpose of this specification, all sign panelassemblies present at a given sign location shall be considered as one sign panel.

MATERIALSAll materials used in this work shall meet the requirements of Subsection 645-2 of the StandardSpecifications.

Paint for coating galvanized steel components shall be in accordance with Subsection 708-06 of theStandard Specifications. Paint for coating aluminum components shall be in accordance with Subsection708-07 of the Standard Specifications. Preparation and painting of bare steel components shall be inaccordance with the special note “Preparation and Painting of Bare Steel surfaces” found elsewhere in the contract documents. No painting is needed for rustic components.

Finish coat color shall be a satin or semi gloss non-metallic medium bronze or brown. The color shall besuch that a properly prepared color chip shall be a reasonable visual match to Federal Color Standard No.595B, Color 20040. Viewing of such color chips shall be done under normal daylight.

CONSTRUCTION DETAILSThe provisions of Subsection 645-3 shall apply. The Contractor shall replace missing or damaged nuts,bolts, washers and hinge plates. The Contractor shall make minor repairs, such as, straightening bent posts,straightening bent slip impact base assemblies and reattaching loose panel battens, as specified by theEngineer.

On parkway installations, the Contractor shall paint all new hardware and touch-up the paint on the existingposts, slip impact base assemblies and hardware in accordance with the appropriate subsection mentionedabove and as specified by the Engineer. Painting work shall be done only after all other work has beencompleted. Note: the contractor may be required to transport sign panels to various locations including, butnot limited to, maintenance residencies.

METHOD OF MEASUREMENTSign Posts –This work shall be measured as the number of sign locations for which the sign posts arereinstalled in accordance with this specification. A sign location will be counted as one, regardless of thenumber of sign posts reinstalled.

Sign Panel Assemblies–This work shall be measured as the number of square feet of sign panel reinstalledand shall be in accordance with subsection 645-4.02 of the Standard Specifications.

BASIS OF PAYMENTThe unit prices bid shall include the cost of all labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete thework including replacement of missing or damaged nuts, bolts, washers and hinge plates.

D263143 1371

ITEM 645.17010008 – BREAKAWAY WOODEN SIGN POST, 4” X 4” SECTION WITH STEEL SLEEVE ITEM 645.17020008 - BREAKAWAY WOODEN SIGN POST, 4” X 6” SECTION WITH STEEL SLEEVE ITEM 645.17030008 - BREAKAWAY WOODEN SIGN POST, 6” X 8” SECTION WITH STEEL SLEEVE

6/1/04US Customary 10/2009

DESCRIPTION

This work shall consist of erecting roadside traffic signs using breakaway wooden sign posts at the locations shown on the plans. The sign installation shall be in accordance with Section 645, Guide Signs, Traffic Signs and Special Devices, except as modified herein.

MATERIALS

Wood Posts - Wood posts used for roadside traffic signs shall comply with the requirements of '712-14, Stress Graded Timber and Lumber. The lumber shall be Southern Pine grade 2 (as designated by the National Design Specification for Wood Construction) or equivalent and, using the clear wood properties of ASTM D2555, the bending stress (Modulus of Rupture) shall not be less than 4000 PSI.

All timber and lumber shall be dried to a maximum moisture content of 15% before and after pressure treating. All timber and lumber shall be pressure treated in accordance with ' 708-31, Wood Preservative - Water Borne. The bottom 4 feet of the posts shall be sealed with a heavy coat (12-20 mil dry film thickness) of coal-tar bitumin conforming to the AASHTO Designation M 118-79 or an approved equal.

The nominal sizes of the posts shall be 4” X 4” or 4” X 6” or 6” X 8”, with the longer dimension installed perpendicular to the face of the sign. The 4” X 6” posts require two 1 ½” diameter holes drilled perpendicular to the flow of traffic, located at the center of the post 4” and 18” above ground level, and filled with expansive sealant material as approved by the Engineer. The 6” X 8” posts require two 3” diameter holes drilled perpendicular to the flow of traffic, located at the center of the post 4” and 18” above ground level, and filled with expansive sealant material.

Steel Sleeve - The steel sleeves shall be square or rectangular and shall be ASTM A36 metal. They shall be galvanized as per the requirements of ' 719-01. The wall thickness shall be ¼” minimum. The inside dimension of the sleeve shall be a minimum of 1” larger than the post dimension. The sleeve shall be open at the bottom.


Wood sign posts shall be installed at the locations shown on the plans in accordance with '645-3 and the table below. Each sign panel stringer to post attachment point shall be bolted completely through the post using two ½” diameter aluminum alloy bolts with nuts and washers.

Hardwood wedge shaped shims shall be used on at least two perpendicular sides between the post and sleeve to prevent movement and provide a tight fit.

Expansive sealant material shall be used to fill the gap between the post and the sleeve.

D2631431372

ITEM 645.17010008 – BREAKAWAY WOODEN SIGN POST, 4” X 4” SECTION WITH STEEL SLEEVE ITEM 645.17020008 - BREAKAWAY WOODEN SIGN POST, 4” X 6” SECTION WITH STEEL SLEEVE ITEM 645.17030008 - BREAKAWAY WOODEN SIGN POST, 6” X 8” SECTION WITH STEEL SLEEVE

6/1/04US Customary 10/2009

The sleeve shall extend a minimum of 2” but no more than 3” above the ground line at the post location.

The posts and the sleeves shall be embedded in the soil 5 feet for the 4”X4” post, 6 feet for the 4” X 6” post, and 7 feet for the 6” X 8” post; and backfilled with compacted material meeting the requirements of cushion sand or stone screenings and/or a mixture of Portland Cement Type 2 and water in the ratio of 5 ½ gallons per bag of cement.

The Geotechnical Engineering Bureau and the Structures Division should be consulted under the following circumstances: A. Post is placed in soft clay or organic deposit, or B. Groundwater elevation is within minimum embedment.


This item will be measured as the number of wooden sign posts, of the specified section, furnished and erected in accordance with these specifications.

BASIS OF PAYMENT

The unit price per sign post shall include the cost of all labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work as detailed in the specification. The sign panels shall be paid for separately.

ALLOWABLE SIGN AREAS* (SQUARE FEET) ON 2-POST SUPPORTS

WOOD POST SECTION (INCHES)

60 MPH WIND ZONE 70 MPH WIND ZONE

HEIGHT TO PANEL CENTROID HEIGHT TO PANEL CENTROID

6 FT. 8 FT. 10 FT. 12 FT. 6 FT. 8 FT. 10 FT. 12 FT.

3 1/2 X 3 1/2 23 17 14 12 16 12 10 8

3 1/2 X 5 1/2 56 42 34 28 40 30 24 20

5 1/2 X 7 1/2 156 117 94 78 110 83 66 55

* For 3-post supports, outer posts shall be separated more than 8 feet, and allowable sign areas may beincreased by 50%. For 1-post supports, allowable sign areas shall be decreased 60%.

D263143 1373

ITEM 645.94000010 - NOISE BARRIER WALL PANEL IDENTIFICATION PLATE

12/19/04E 8/10/9410/16/98 M

Page 1 of 2

DESCRIPTION:

Under this item, the Contractor shall furnish and install identification plates on the noise wall at thelocations shown in the contract documents or as directed by the Engineer.

MATERIALS:

The materials used in this work shall conform to the following requirements:

1. Aluminum Panel with Reflective Background: The aluminum panel and reflective backgroundshall conform to the material and fabrication requirements of Subsection 730-01, “Aluminum Sign Panels”. The background material shall be brown reflective sheeting conforming toSubsection 730-05, Materials Designation 730-05.01. The thickness of the plates shall be 3/32inch thick by 3 inches wide by 12 inches long.

2. Characters: The characters shall be reflective sheeting conforming to Subsection 730-12,“Reflectorized Sheeting Sign Characters”, except that the adhesive shall be pressure-sensitivesuch that the characters can be applied to the background in the field. The characters shall be 2inches high and silver-white in color conforming to FHWA series B dimensions.

3. Concrete Fasteners:

Expansion Anchors: ¼ inch diameter by 1½ inch long stainless steel nail drive expansion anchorsmeeting GSA Specifications FF-S-325, #3.2.5.2 shall be used to attach the identification plates tothe concrete panel.

4. Wood Fasteners:

One-Way Screws: Six mm diameter by 1 inch long stainless steel one-way tapping screw shall beused to attach the plates to the wood board. Length is measured from under head.


- The arrangement of the letters and numbers on the identification plate shall be as indicated in thecontract documents.

- All identification plates shall be located on the noise barrier wall panels as shown in the contractdocuments or as directed by the Engineer.

- All identification plates shall be fastened to the concrete or wood noise wall as shown in theproposal.

- The Contractor shall be responsible for repair of any damage to the wall panels caused byinstallation of identification plates.

D2631431374

ITEM 645.94000010 - NOISE BARRIER WALL PANEL IDENTIFICATION PLATE

12/19/08E 8/10/9410/16/98 M

Page 2 of 2


Noise wall panel identification plates will be measured as the number of identification plates attached asshown in the contract documents or as directed by the Engineer.

BASIS OF PAYMENT:

The unit price bid for each identification plate shall include the cost of furnishing all labor, equipment,and materials necessary to complete this work.

D263143 1375

ITEM 655.05020010 – FRAMES AND COVERS FOR SANITARY SEWER

MANHOLES

3/10/09ER 12/22/08E 5/28/99 M

Page 1 of 2

DESCRIPTION:

This work shall consist of furnishing and installing frames, covers and appurtenances for

sanitary sewer manholes in accordance with these specifications and details shown on the

contract plans.

MATERIALS:

Materials shall conform to the following:

Cast iron for manhole frames and covers, and all special cast iron fixture entering into the

construction of the work shall be made of tough, close-grained, gray iron without the

admixture of any cinder iron or metal of inferior quality. Iron shall conform to ASTM

Designation A48, Class 30B.

Manhole frames and covers shall be coated with coal tar epoxy of approved quality

applied by the hot-dip process.

The acceptance of the frames and covers for sanitary sewer manholes will be based on

the manufacturer’s certification of compliance.

All manhole frames, covers and appurtenances shall be similar in detail to those existing

in the adjacent area, and all elements shall be interchangeable.

The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, with such promptness as to cause no delay

in the work, or in the work of any other contractor, seven (7) copies of all shop drawings

and no work shall be fabricated until the Engineer’s approval has been given. All shop

drawings, cuts, catalogs or other data requiring approval must be submitted to the

Engineer by the Contractor and must bear his stamp of approval evidencing that the data

have been checked. Drawings, cuts, catalogs or other data submitted without this stamp

of approval will not be considered by the Engineer and will be returned to the Contractor.

Likewise, all questions concerning the plans and specifications which require

clarification or interpretation shall be submitted in writing to the Engineer through the

Contractors.

The Contractor shall make any corrections in the drawings required by the Engineer and

shall file with the Engineer (7) corrected copies. Approval by the Engineer of such

drawings shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors of any sort in shop

drawings or deviations from plans and specifications unless the Contractor, at the time of

submission of said drawings, has given notice to the Engineer of any such deviations.


Construction details shall conform with the details shown on the plan and shall conform

to the requirements of Subsection 655-3 in addition to the following:

D2631431376

ITEM 655.05020010 – FRAMES AND COVERS FOR SANITARY SEWER

MANHOLES

12/22/08E 5/28/99 M

Page 2 of 2 3/10/09ER

All manholes will be provided with a Type “F” Manhole Frame and Cover (Adjustable

Frame). The frame cover, without the use of any filler rings, shall be set to a top frame

elevation 1-9/16 inch below finished grade. At the time of final paving, the frame and

cover shall be raised to the correct grade by insertion of one 1 inch and one 19/32 inch

filler rings. In the event the Engineer, at any time during the Contract Period, directs the

removal of either or both filler rings, the Contractor shall remove them and deliver the

same to the Engineer.


The quantity to be measured under this work will be the number of frames, covers and

appurtenance materials furnished and placed in accordance with the plans and

specifications. The measurement shall be made for the frame containing the cover and

appurtenance.

BASIS OF PAYMENT:

The unit prices bid per frame and cover shall include the cost of furnishing all labor,

materials an equipment necessary to satisfactorily complete the work, including the cost

of any field repair work to render the frame and cover non-rocking.

D263143 1377

ITEM 655.07010010 - CAST FRAME F1, WITHOUT CURB BOX AND WITH RETICULINE GRATE G1 ITEM 655.07020010 - CAST FRAME F2, WITHOUT CURB BOX AND WITH RETICULINE GRATE G2 ITEM 655.07030010 - CAST FRAME F3, WITHOUT CURB BOX AND WITH RETICULINE GRATE G3

04/24/09E

All conditions and requirements of Items 655.0701, 655.0702, and 655.0703 of the Standard Specifications shall apply except for the following modifications: These shall be cast frame without curb box and with reticuline grate as detailed on the plans.

D2631431378

ITEM 659.XXXXXXXX – TELEPHONE / DATA SERVICE UTILITY COMPANY WORK

Page 1 of 2

DESCRIPTION Under this telecommunication item the Contractor shall reimburse the Utility Company - “Verizon”, for work the Utility is required to perform on their utility poles and ground mounted equipment, to provide telephone and data services as detailed and specified in the contract documents or as directed by the Engineer. All the work under this item shall be performed by utility personal on their facilities. MATERIALS The contractor will not be required to furnish any materials under this item. CONSTRUCTION DETAILS The Contractor is advised that they will not be permitted to install contract items until they have coordinated with the Utility Company, the project design and schedule of work described under this item. The work to be performed by the Utility for which the Contractor shall arrange to provide payment to the Utility shall be generally defined as follows:

a) Pre-construction inspection survey, coordinating the design and development of a construction schedule and to identify the items of work needed to be completed.

b) Location adjustments of existing cables and/or other attachments as necessary to maintain conformance to regulations and other utility company modifications.

c) Cable connections to poles, splicing to existing facilities and building connections as required, providing a full functional telephone and data service.

d) Inspection costs incurred by the Utility during and upon completion of construction to insure and verify conformance of the contract work to resolutions, Plans and Specifications.

In conjunction with the Utility, the Engineer shall ascertain, the extent of work to be performed by the Utility and Engineer shall also verify by inspection the actual performance of such work. Work under this item shall be performed in accordance with the agreement between the State and the Utility. Such work shall prepare the Utility’s facilities as necessary to provide telecommunication service to the site and enable the performance of the Contractor’s work for the contract items, as specified in the contract documents.

D263143 1379

ITEM 659.XXXXXXXX – TELEPHONE / DATA SERVICE UTILITY COMPANY WORK

Page 2 of 2

METHOD OF MEASUREMENT This work shall be measured for payment on a fixed price Dollar and Cents pay unit basis, for work satisfactorily completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and as directed by the Engineer. BASIS OF PAYMENT The amount set forth in the proposal is a fixed price for all bidders. Any bid other than the specified amount shown on the itemized proposal will be adjusted to reflect the fixed price and the Contractor shall be entitled to payment for this item strictly in accordance with this paragraph. The actual payment for the item will be based upon the billing submitted by the Utility for work performed, with such billing being subject to approval by the Department. At such time as the Engineer in charge indicates to the Contractor that the Department approves any billing submitted by the Utility, he shall direct the Contractor to pay the Utility the approved amount. After proof of payment to the Utility is received by the Engineer, the Contractor thereafter shall be entitled to the amount paid to the Utility plus 5% for the Contractor’s preparatory and processing costs associated with this item. The fixed price, as adjusted to reflect actual payments to the Utility, is intended to be reimbursement of the Utility for the necessary work on this project, with the additional 5% being paid to the Contractor for their costs. FIXED ITEM PRICE The unit price shown in the proposal for this pay item is not to be altered in any manner by the bidder. Should the amount be altered, the new figure will be disregarded and the original price will be used to determine the total amount bid for the Contract.

D2631431380

ITEM 661.700X0010 - ELECTRICAL CAR CHARGING STATION

Page 1 of 2 5/15/2015 Rev 12/08/2015

DESCRIPTION

This work shall consist of furnishing and installing ELECTRICAL CAR CHARGING STATION in accordance with the contract documents and as directed by the Engineer.

MATERIALS

The ELECTRICAL CAR CHARGING STATION shall be a DC standard fast charging station that adheres to the following electrical requirements:

Input Voltage 480 VAC 3 phase Cable/Connector CHAdeMO compliant Output Power 50 kW Charge Time 0 – 80% in approximately 30 minutes The enclosure for the ELECTRICAL CAR CHARGING STATION shall be suitable for outdoor use and subject to compliance with requirements specified above, manufacturers that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to:

AeroVironment EV Solutions 181 W. Huntington Dr., Suite 202 Monrovia, CA 91016 (888) 833-2148 www.evsolutions.com EFACEC Electric Mobility, S.A. 2755 Northwoods Parkway Norcross, Georgia 30071 (770) 446-8854 www.efacec.com ABB Inc. 16250 W Glendale Drive New Berlin, WI 53151 (262) 785-3200 www.abb.com/evcharging Concrete for footings, if applicable, shall be Class A, conforming to Section 501. The contractor shall provide detailed shop drawings to the Engineer for approval prior to installation.

D263143 1381

ITEM 661.700X0010 - ELECTRICAL CAR CHARGING STATION

Page 2 of 2 5/15/2015 Rev 12/08/2015


The contractor shall furnish and install the ELECTRICAL CAR CHARGING STATION at locations shown in the contract drawings. The manufacturer’s installation instructions shall be followed. The ELECTRICAL CAR CHARGING STATION shall be mounted on a concrete pedestal accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and specifications. Details on the make, model and product specifications shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval, prior to purchasing. Details on the pedestal foundation and wiring details shall be submitted to the Engineer for review prior to installation. All ELECTRICAL CAR CHARGING STATIONS shall be installed in accordance with the National Electrical Code and local ordinances. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating and obtaining all electrical inspections, inspection fees, permits and permit fees. Excavation shall be performed in accordance with Section 206 of the Standard Specifications. Concrete for foundation shall meet the requirements for Class A concrete for structures as specified in Section 510.

The ELECTRICAL CAR CHARGING STATION fabrication and installation shall be performed by a supplier/subcontractor having experience in similar work of 5 years and 10 projects minimum.

The ELECTRICAL CAR CHARGING STATION shall be warranted to be free from all manufacturing and installation defects for a period not less than two years from the date of acceptance. METHOD OF MEASUREMENT

This work will be measured as the number of ELECTRICAL CAR CHARGING STATIONS satisfactorily furnished and installed.

BASIS OF PAYMENT

The unit price bid shall include the cost of furnishing all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to satisfactorily complete the work.

D2631431382

ITEM 661.03010011 – INSULATED CONDUCTOR NO. 14 ITEM 661.03020011 – INSULATED CONDUCTOR NO. 12 ITEM 661.03030011 – INSULATED CONDUCTOR NO. 10 ITEM 661.03040011 – INSULATED CONDUCTOR NO. 8 ITEM 661.03050011 – INSULATED CONDUCTOR NO. 6 ITEM 661.03060011 – INSULATED CONDUCTOR NO. 2 ITEM 661.03070011 – INSULATED CONDUCTOR NO. 1/0 ITEM 661.03080011 – INSULATED CONDUCTOR NO. 2/0 ITEM 661.03090011 – INSULATED CONDUCTOR NO. 3/0 ITEM 661.03100011 – INSULATED CONDUCTOR NO. 4/0 ITEM 661.03110011 – INSULATED CONDUCTOR 250 MCM ITEM 661.03120011 – INSULATED CONDUCTOR 300 MCM ITEM 661.03130011 – INSULATED CONDUCTOR 350 MCM ITEM 661.03140011 – INSULATED CONDUCTOR 400 MCM ITEM 661.03150011 – INSULATED CONDUCTOR 450 MCM ITEM 661.03170011 – INSULATED CONDUCTOR 500 MCM

Page 1 of 1 12/31/98 USC 01/16/12

DESCRIPTION: Under this work the Contractor shall furnish and install insulated conductor of the sizes shown in the plans, on the applicable NYC Division of Street Lighting standard drawings, and in the itemized proposal or as ordered by the Engineer. MATERIALS: The wire shall be type USE-RHW, cross linked polyethylene insulated and conform to the requirements of the “General Specifications for Street Lighting Facilities” as published by the City of New York, Division of Street Lighting. CONSTRUCTION DETAILS: The Contractor shall furnish, install and test the conductors in conformance to the “General Specifications for Street Lighting Facilities” as published by the City of New York, Division of Street Lighting. Splicing, racking, placement of cable supports, etc., where required, shall conform to the same, except that the taping method of completing a splice will not be allowed and only the poured epoxy method shall be used. METHOD OF MEASUREMENT: This work will be measured as the number of linear feet of each size of conductor furnished and installed. BASIS OF PAYMENT: The unit price bid per linear foot shall include furnishing, installing, connecting, splicing and supporting the conductor, and all materials, labor, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work.

D263143 1383

ITEM 661.70030010 - ELECTRICAL SERVICE EQUIPMENT

Page 1 of 2 4/7/2015

DESCRIPTION

Under this item the Contractor shall furnish and install utility service transformer pad, ground

grid, cable, conduit, utility property box, utility pole riser and electrical service equipment in the

manner and location as shown in the contract drawings or as ordered by the Engineer and in

accordance with the specifications and standards of PSE&G LIPA. Additionally, the Contractor

shall install the utility service transformer in accordance with the specifications and standards of

PSE&G LIPA.

The Contractor may contact the utility company (PSE&G LIPA) for information at the following

office:

PSEG Long Island (LIPA)

117 Doctors Path

Riverhead, NY 11901

631-548-7234

MATERIALS

Materials shall meet the requirements specified in the contract documents and conform to the

requirements of the National Electrical Code and be Underwriters Laboratory Approved. When

materials substitutions are permitted, they shall be subject to review and approval by the Engineer and

representatives of the owning and/or maintaining agency or agencies.

Utility Property Boxes, Pole Risers, Primary Cables, Transformer Pads, Metering Equipment,

and emergency backup equipment including Transfer Switches and associated wiring in between

shall be in compliance with PSE&G LIPA requirements.

All surface mounted conduits shall be type and size as shown in the contract drawings, and shall

meet the standard requirements of applicable portions of Section 660 and 670 of the Standard

Specifications.

All buried conduits shall be of the type and size as shown in the contract drawings, and shall

meet the standard requirements of all applicable portions of Section 660 and 670 of the Standard

Specifications.

All electrical service equipment shall be of the type, size, and equipment manufacturer as shown

in the contract drawings or approved equal. Couplings, fittings, sweep elbows, bends and

mounting hardware not detailed in the contract drawings shall be per PSE&G LIPA requirements

or the manufacturer’s recommendations, as applicable.

The Contractor shall furnish all other materials as shown on the plans, or as ordered by the

Engineer, and as indicated in the specifications and standards of PSE&G LIPA. The contractor

shall supply the Engineer with catalog cuts for products which require his approval a minimum of two

weeks prior to the proposed installation date. All materials supplied shall bear the manufacturer’s

identifying markings in order to positively identify products approved for use.

D2631431384

ITEM 661.70030010 - ELECTRICAL SERVICE EQUIPMENT

Page 2 of 2 4/7/2015

Concrete for foundation shall meet the requirements for Class A concrete as specified in Section

501.


Construction details shall conform to the requirements specified in the contract documents, the

manufacturer’s recommendations, and as ordered by the Engineer.

Any Contractor performing work on the project will be required to coordinate his/her operations with

those of other Contractors to ensure orderly and timely progression of the work.

Sweep elbows and conduit risers shall be installed in accordance with the details included in the

plans and PSE&G LIPA requirements. All installed conduit systems shall conform to PSE&G

LIPA requirements.

All installed conduit systems shall be tested by the Contractor before the installation will be

accepted.

Repair and replacement work shall be done at the Contractor’s expense.

The contractor shall be responsible for obtaining electrical inspection of the electrical feeder and

service from utility company (PSE&G LIPA) and shall pay all fees for inspection and final

connection.


The Electrical Service Equipment bid item will be measured on a Lump Sum basis.

BASIS OF PAYMENT

Payment will be made as a Lump Sum for each Electrical Service Equipment, which shall

include all equipment, material, testing, fees, documentation and labor for this bid item.

D263143 1385

ITEM 662.XXXXXXXX – GAS UTILITY COMPANY WORK

Page 1 of 2 12/08/15

DESCRIPTION Under this item the Contractor shall reimburse the local gas Utility Company - National Grid, for work the Utility Company is required to perform to provide gas service from the existing 4” low pressure gas main in Carlls Straight Path to the Long Island Welcome Center building, as detailed and specified in the contract documents or as directed by the Engineer. All the work under this item shall be performed by utility company personnel as an extension of their existing facilities. MATERIALS The Contractor will not be required to furnish any materials under this item. CONSTRUCTION DETAILS The Contractor is advised that they will not be permitted to install contract items within and adjacent to the Long Island Welcome Center building under the Building Plumbing work contract until they have coordinated with the Gas Utility Company as to the details of the gas service design and work schedule for this item. The work to be performed by the Utility Company for which the Contractor shall arrange to provide payment to the Utility Company shall be generally defined as follows:

a) Preconstruction inspection survey coordinating the design and the development of a gas service construction schedule and identifying the specific work to be performed.

b) Verification of the existing gas main size and location in Carlls Straight Path by test pit or other means and coordinating the exact point of connection for the new gas service.

c) Construction of the new underground gas service (2” and 4” diameter polyethylene pipe or other size/material recommended by the Utility Company) from the connection in Carlls Straight Path to a point approx. 12” to 18” from the Long Island Welcome Center building, including the vertical pipe sweep and riser to the pressure regulator fixture provided and installed by the Utility Company. Work includes furnishing and installing the new service pipe, trench excavation, sheeting if necessary, maintenance of traffic on Carlls Straight Path and the South Service Road, service connection at the main, temporary shut-offs, bedding and backfill for the new service line, tracer wire installation for plastic gas services, temporary and permanent pavement restoration on Carlls Straight Path and the South Service Road, and other work as required and necessary to satisfy Utility Company installation requirements. Note: The cost of the gas service piping from the above-grade pressure regulator through the adjacent exterior gas meter and the connection through the building wall into the building, including the regulator/meter support structure/foundation (per Utility Company

D2631431386

ITEM 662.XXXXXXXX – GAS UTILITY COMPANY WORK

Page 2 of 2 12/08/15

requirements) in front of the new building will be deemed included in the Building Plumbing Contract Item(s).

d) Inspection costs and leakage testing, soil compaction testing or other testing costs incurred by the Utility Company during and upon completion of construction to insure and verify conformance of the work performed under this Item to the that shown on the Plans, Specifications and Utility Company requirements.

In conjunction with the Utility Company, the Engineer will ascertain and coordinate the extent of work to be performed by the Utility Company. The Engineer will also verify by inspection the progress of such work for approval of progress payments against this Item. Work under this Item shall be performed by the Utility Company in accordance with the agreement between the State and the Utility Company for providing gas service to the Long Island Welcome Center building, as specified in the contract documents. METHOD OF MEASUREMENT This work shall be measured for payment on a fixed price Dollar and Cents pay unit basis, for work satisfactorily completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and as directed by the Engineer. BASIS OF PAYMENT The amount set forth in the bid proposal is a fixed price for all bidders. Any bid other than the specified amount shown on the itemized proposal bid sheets will be adjusted to reflect the fixed price given and the Contractor shall be entitled to payment for this item strictly in accordance with this paragraph. The actual payment for the item will be based upon bills submitted by the Utility Company for work performed, with such billing being subject to approval by the Department. At such time as the Engineer in charge indicates to the Contractor that the Department approves any billing submitted by the Utility Company, he shall direct the Contractor to pay the Utility the approved amount. After proof of payment to the Utility Company is received by the Engineer in charge, the Contractor thereafter shall be entitled to the amount paid to the Utility plus 5% for the Contractor’s preparatory and processing costs associated with this item. The fixed price, as adjusted to reflect actual payments to the Utility, is intended to be reimbursement of the Utility Company for the necessary work on this project, with the additional 5% being paid to the Contractor for their costs. FIXED ITEM PRICE The fixed lump sum price shown in the bid sheets of the proposal for this pay item is not to be altered in any manner by the bidder. Should the amount be altered, the new figure will be disregarded and the original lump sum fixed price will be used to determine the total amount bid for the Contract.

D263143 1387

ITEM 663.60010010 - 1.5” RPZ AND STRUCTURE

ITEM 663.61010010 - 2” WATER METER, RPZ AND STRUCTURE

4/23/2015

DESCRIPTION

Under these Items, the Contractor shall provide all labor, materials and equipment necessary or

required to furnish and install the 2” Water Meter with Remote Read Device, the 2” RPZ and the

Structure for the combined meter pit/backflow preventer enclosure, and the stand-alone 1.5” RPZ in

separate precast enclosure on concrete foundation, including all piping, fittings, valves, test tee, and

test tee valve, if required and other incidentals necessary to complete plumbing work and connection

to water service and water feed lines in accordance with the plans, specifications, and directions of

the Engineer. RPZ (Reduced Pressure Zone) device is also known as a Backflow Preventer. The

Water Meter with Remote Reader shall include Water Meter, Water Meter Strainer and Automatic

Reading & Billing System (also known as Remote Reading Device). All factory plumbing work is

to be done by a Licensed Plumber. All on-site plumbing work is to be done by a Licensed Master

Plumber. The Contractor shall comply with all rules, regulations, and requirements of all regulatory

agencies having jurisdiction. In addition, the Contractor shall furnish extra material to NYSDOT for

maintenance of the system, as specified below under the heading “Extra Materials”.

MATERIALS

Unless otherwise provided for herein, all materials and methods of construction shall conform to the

requirements, standards, details and specifications of the Suffolk County Water Authority (SCWA).

Each entire unit shall be fabricated and installed in accordance with this specification and the

applicable water details sheet of the Contract plan set.

Precast Concrete Structures: Enclosure structures for the RPZ and water meter shall be as

manufactured by A.C. Miller Concrete Products Inc., Spring City, Pa., or approved equal.

Concrete: All precast concrete shall have a minimum compressive strength of 5,000 psi at 28 days.

All cast-in-place concrete shall have a minimum compressive strength of 4,000 psi at 28 days. All

precast concrete shall have a honed finish. The precast concrete shall be well cured, shall be dense

and shall have smooth edges. The cement and aggregate shall be thoroughly mixed in a proportion of

one (1) part Portland Cement to not over six (6) or less than four (4) parts of aggregate. The

aggregate fine and course shall conform to ASTM C-33. Aggregate shall be free of all deleterious

substances which cause reactivity with oxidized hydrogen sulfides. Aggregate shall be graded to

produce a homogeneous concrete mix.

Reinforcement: Steel reinforcement shall be of the sizes shown and shall conform to the provisions

of the NYSDOT standard 556 items for “Steel Bar Reinforcement” and “Steel Fabric

Reinforcement”. Reinforcement shall be placed as shown on the drawings.

Ladder Rungs: Ladder rungs for each water meter structure shall be constructed of copolymer

polypropylene plastic, as manufactured by M.A. Industries, Peachtree City, Ga., or approved equal.

RPZ Structure Access Doors: Doors shall be JustSet Doors as manufactured by Pennsylvania Insert

Corp., Spring City, Pa. 19475, or approved equal. The two (2) types of RPZ Structure doors as

follows:

D2631431388



4/23/2015

Two (2) vertical 30" x 23" (hinged) high security stainless steel access doors.

One (1) Horizontal 11.5" x 23.5" (no hinges) high security stainless steel access door.

Water Meter Structure Access Door: Access door shall be 36" x 30" size, heavy duty (H20 loading)

high security color (brown) anodized aluminum access doors such as JustSet Doors, as manufactured

by Pennsylvania Insert Corp., Spring City, PA 19475, or approved equal. Frame shall have integral

drain channel, anchor flanges, and neoprene gasket. A one-and-one half inch drain (1 1/2") coupling

shall be located on the corner of the frame. Operation shall be spring assisted for easy operation. A

hold open arm shall automatically lock the door in the 90 position. Hinge shall be heavy forged

brass with a stainless steel pin. Door shall be provided with two locks. Lock shall be “Ford” lifter

worm lock with waterworks bronze pentagonal bolt type “LL”. All hardware shall be zinc or

cadmium plated.

Construction Accessories: Frames shall be 3/16" x 2" x 2" angle welded with joints ground smooth,

after fabrication. Hinges shall be heavy duty and welded to door and frame.

Security Bolts for RPZ Structure: Security Bolts for RPZ Structure shall be pattern # 83 registration

# "116183", Part # H11777155, as manufactured by McGard, Orchard Park, N.Y. 14127, or

approved equal. Threads for security bolts shall be at least one-third (1/3) bolt dia. for proper "bite".

Vertical doors shall have two (2) security bolts; 7/16 - 20 x .750. Horizontal door for RPZ structure

shall have four (4) security bolts; 7/16 - 20 x .750

Security bolts for Water Meter Structure Horizontal Door: Security bolts for Water Meter Structure

Horizontal Door shall be two (2) pentahead security bolts.

Special Design Criteria For Security Bolts:

1. Bolt must be made from alloy steel, heat treated to 150,000 psi tensile strength.

2. Head of bolt must be selectively hardened to Rc 60 min. to prevent the use of files, hacksaws,

and chisels.

3. Bolt is to be made with either a flat or 120o cone seat as required.

4. Bolt will be torqued by means of a recessed curvilinear ("Daisy") groove in the top face of bolt

head. A special mating key is required to operate in groove for installation and removal of bolt.

5. Bolts are to be zinc nickel plated in order to meet an ASTM B-368 C.A.S.S. test for 22 hours.

6. Bolt lengths are to be held to +/- .01".

7. Bolt threads are to be class UNC-2A.

Water Piping: Shall be hard temper type 'K' copper tubing in the sizes indicated on the plans and

meeting the requirements of NYSDOT Items 950.60, 950.61 and 615.600009—11 and ASTM No.

B88. Fittings shall be approved wrought copper and bronze solder -joint pressure fittings (ANSI B

16.22).

RPZ: The RPZ (Reduced Pressure Principle Backflow Prevention device) shall be Febco Model

#LF825YA or approved equal. Size shall be as indicated on the Contract Drawings. The RPZ shall

meet the requirements of American Society of Sanitary Engineers (ASSE) Standard 1013 & the

D263143 1389



4/23/2015

American Water Works Association (AWWA) Standard Code 506-78 and shall be certified of low-

lead construction (0.25% max. average lead content).

The RPZ shall consist of two independently operating center guided, spring loaded, "Y" pattern

check valves and one hydraulically dependent differential relief valve. Mainline valve body and caps

including relief valve body and cover shall be bronze. Check valve and relief valve components shall

be constructed so they may be serviced without removing the valve body from the line. Shut-off

valves and test cocks shall be full ported resilient seated ball valves.

Meter Outlet Control Valve: The MOCV shall be a Class 125, all bronze gate valve, with non-rising

stem and solid disc, with screwed bonnet and threaded ends, such as Stockham Figure B-103, or

approved equal. The MOCV shall be capped for testing. For testing the water meter, the first test

port on the RPZ may be used.

Electrical Grounding: For continuity of Electrical Grounding (during RPZ Maintenance) the

Contractor is to furnish and install one (1) #2 tinned copper ground conductor and copper alloy

ground connectors as per O.Z. Gedney, Type ABG for 1" & 1-1/2" dia. and CG for 2" dia. pipe or

approved equal. Grounding work is to be done prior to any painting or insulation if needed.

Water Meter: Water Meter shall be Elster Model EVOQ4 or SENSUS Model Omni-C2 or approved

equal, in the meter size indicated on the plans and details. All water meters furnished shall conform

to the "Standard Specifications for Cold Water Meters", AWWA Standard C700 latest revision.

Water meters shall consist of a bronze maincase with the serial number stamped on the maincase.

Only displacement meters of the flat nutating disc type will be accepted for improved operation. The

size, capacity and meter lengths shall be as specified in AWWA Standard C700, latest revision. The

maximum number of disc nutations is not to exceed those specified in AWWA C700 latest revision

to minimize premature wear.

Meter Maincase: All one (1”) inch meter maincases shall be the removable bottom cap type with the

bottom cap secured by six (6) bolts. Bottom caps shall be interchangeable, size for size, between

frost-protected synthetic polymer or cast iron and non-frost protected (bronze) models. No meters

utilizing frost plugs will be accepted. Non-frost protected meters shall have bronze or synthetic

polymer bottom caps. The cross section of the bottom shall break clean when subjected to freezing

pressure of 600-850 psi. All maincase bolts shall be of 300 series stainless steel to prevent corrosion.

Bottom cap bolt lugs shall be enclosed in the maincase and shall not have externally exposed,

threaded through holes. All one and one-half (1-1/2”) inch and two (2”) inch meters shall have a

split design secured by bronze or stainless steel bolts.

Register: The register shall be of the straight reading sealed magnetic drive type and shall contain

six (6) numeral wheels. Registers must be sealed and dry. All direct reading register lenses shall be

flat, of high strength, and impact resistant glass to prevent breakage. The dial shall be of the center

sweep pointer type and shall contain 100 equally divided graduations at its periphery. The register

must contain a low flow indicator with a 1:1 disc nutating ratio to provide leak detection. Register

boxes shall be bronze.

D2631431390



4/23/2015

All meters must be adaptable to digital encoder register without interruption of the customer's

service for the purpose of pit, remote, or central meter reading. The registers shall be secured to the

maincase by means of a plastic tamperproof seal pin to allow for in-line service replacement. Seal

screws are not acceptable.

Register retainer rings shall have an impact resistant design which absorbs register glass lens impact.

All registers shall have the size, model, and date of manufacture stamped on the dial plate.

Measuring Chamber: The measuring chamber shall be a nutating disc type, the flat nutating disc

shall be molded of a non-hydrolyzing hard rubber or synthetic polymer and shall contain a type 316

stainless steel spindle. The nutating disc shall be equipped with a synthetic polymer thrust roller with

a stainless steel shaft located within the disc slot. The roller head shall roll on the buttressed track

provided by the diaphragm in the measuring chamber. The measuring chamber shall be of a 2-piece

snap-joint type. The measuring chamber shall be made of non-hydrolyzing synthetic polymer, shall

be smoothly and accurately machined and shall contain a removable molded diaphragm of the same

material as that of the chamber. No screws shall be used to secure the chamber together. The control

block shall be the same material as the measuring chamber and be mounted on the chamber top to

provide sand ring protection. The control block assembly shall be removable to facilitate repairing.

Control block assemblies shall be designed to allow no magnetic slippage which would result in a

loss of revenue. The measuring chamber outlet port shall be sealed to the maincase outlet port by

means of an "O" Ring gasket to eliminate chamber leak paths.

Guarantee: Registers must be guaranteed for at least ten years. All meters shall be guaranteed for

one year on material and workmanship. To ensure accuracy, each meter must be accompanied by a

factory test tag certifying the accuracy at the flows required by AWWA C700 (low, intermediate,

and full flow).

Strainer: All meters shall contain removable polypropylene plastic strainer screens. The strainer

shall be located near the inlet maincase port, before the measuring chamber and control block

assembly.

Remote Reader: The Remote Reader shall be as indicated on the Plans and shall be a self-contained

encoder register metering system designed to obtain remote simultaneous water meter registration

directly from the register odometer. The metering information shall be obtained through a remotely

located receptacle using a compatible data capture system. The system shall consist of the Encoder

Meter Register and Remotely Mounted Receptacle.

Encoder Meter Register: Shall be direct mounted with encoded odometer wheels and digital

data stream. Batteries or pulses are not allowed.

Registration: The register shall provide a six digit visual registration at the meter. The unit

shall, in a digital format, simultaneously encode the four or six most significant digits of the

meter reading for transmission through the remotely located receptacle. (The most significant

meter registration digits are defined as those digits on the register number wheels that denote

D263143 1391



4/23/2015

the highest recorded values of water consumption.) A quick indexing mechanism shall be

employed which shall prevent ambiguous reading. The register shall have a full test sweephand

or dial divided into gradients of down to 1/100th of the units of registration. Register test rings

shall be available for shop testing. The units of registration shall be in U.S. gallons. These units

shall be clearly designated on the face of the register. The month and year of manufacture and

other identification information shall appear on the face of the register. The register shall

employ a leak detection indicator on the dial face. Registers using pulse generation or

conversion of pulses to digital output is not permitted. Batteries shall not be required.

Mechanical Construction: Materials used in the construction of the register shall be compatible

with the normal water meter environment and with each other. The unit shall possess a copper

bottom and incorporate a rubber O-ring seal. Where indicated, pit set registers must be provided

with moisture protection for all internal components when operating under flooded pit

conditions. The register and mounting base shall be integral components and should not allow

for disassembly. The register shall be attached to the meter case by a bayonet attachment.

Fastening screws or nuts shall not be required. A tamperproof plastic seal pin shall be used to

secure the register to the main case. No special tools shall be required to remove the register.

The register head must swivel 360 degrees without removing the seal pin to facilitate visual

reading and ease of wiring. The register shall be removable from the meter without

disassembling the meter body and shall permit field installation and/or removal without taking

the meter out of service. Provision shall be made in the register for the use of seal wires to

further secure the register. Terminal screws must be accessible on the register for transmission

wire connection to the remote receptacle or future connections to a telephone system.

Electrical Construction: The materials employed for contacts and connectors shall inhibit

corrosion and shall suffer minimal effect from environmental conditions to which they are

exposed. The number wheels used in the register assembly shall be provided with spring-type

bifurcated metal contacts to insure a high probability of information transmission.

Connection shall be made to the register by three screw-type terminals, sonically inserted into

the register top. Access to the terminals shall be available to all models of register. A port

cover shall be provided to cover the terminals after they have been wired. Digitally formatted

data transmitted from the register shall incorporate a check sum character to verify correct

information transmission and integrity. Data errors shall be indicated by the reading equipment.

Meter Reading Information: The encoder register shall provide up to six digits of information

to the reading equipment. A ten digit identification number shall also be provided with each

reading. The utility shall have the option to reprogram the internal register identification

number an unlimited number of times. The encoder register must have the capability to provide

additional custom information to the reader. This information shall be programmed (and

reprogrammed at any time) by the SCWA. Information on programming the register, equipment

needed and encoder meter reading output shall be provided with each proposal.

Remote Mounted Receptacle: Remote receptacle shall provide a communication link for the

transmission of information from the register.

D2631431392



4/23/2015

Mechanical Construction: Where indicated, a remote receptacle must be provided for

attachment to a pit meter lid with another unit also designed for attachment by wall mounting.

The materials employed shall be corrosion resistant, resist ultraviolet degradation, unaffected

by rain or condensation, and compatible with rugged service and long life. The pit mounted

receptacle shall be mounted to the water meter access door of the meter concrete structure using

two screws to be provided by the utility. The hole size to be drilled in the access door shall not

exceed 3/8" each. The pit mounted receptacle shall be provided with a minimum length of ten

feet of wire connected and sealed at the receptacle without terminal exposure.

Electrical Construction: The receptacle construction shall incorporate the function of a cable

clamp or strain relief. Design of the unit shall be such that it provides for mechanical and

electrical connection between the receptacle and interrogation equipment.

Cable: The connecting cable shall be of the two-wire conductor type in a sheath which shall be

abrasion and moisture resistant. Each conductor shall be color coded.


Excavation: The Contractor shall excavate to the lines as shown in the drawings. Temporary

sheeting will be required in excavation for the precast concrete structure, for which separate

payment will be made under the applicable item for temporary timber sheeting.

Setting of Precast RPZ Structure for stand-alone RPZ Structure Installation: The precast concrete

RPZ structure shall be set and anchored to a ten (10) inch thick cast-in place concrete foundation pad

as shown on water details drawing of the Contract Plan set. The foundation pad shall be set on a six

(6) inch thickness of compacted broken stone.

Setting of Precast Concrete Water Meter Structure for Combined Meter/RPZ Structure Installation:

The precast concrete water meter structure shall be set on a six (6) inch thickness of broken stone

with additional stone added inside the twelve inch (12") x twelve inch (12") drain sleeve to the top

of the bottom slab. The precast concrete RPZ Structure shall be set on the Water Meter Structure as

shown on the water details drawing of the Contract plan set.

The Contractor shall install supports for the water meter at the height shown on the Contract

Drawings. The meter shall be set so that the dial faces upward and is horizontal. The dial shall not be

more than three (3) feet above the floor. The encoder register shall be installed on meter as per

manufacturer's instructions. The remote reader receptacle shall be installed in the pit cover as per the

manufacturer's directions and recommendations, allowing reading of the meter from above ground

level. The Contractor shall allow sufficient Water Meter Remote Reader cable slack for manhole

cover removal. The RPZ shall be installed as shown on the Contract Drawings and per

manufacturer's instructions.

D263143 1393



4/23/2015

Connections: The Contractor shall connect the water piping as shown on the Contract Drawings for

a complete and satisfactory operating unit to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Connections shall be

made to The Water Meter by coupling union or flange union on both inlet and outlet ends of the

meter and bored for sealing with holes not less that one-eight (1/8) of an inch in diameter - solder

connections are not permitted. Connections to the RPZ shall be as shown on the Contract Drawings

and per manufacturer’s instructions. Upon completion of the RPZ/Water Meter/Chamber unit, the

Contractor shall test the system to ensure the unit functions properly and operates to the satisfaction

of the Engineer. The stand-alone RPZ/enclosure unit shall likewise be tested to ensure it operates to

the satisfaction of the Engineer.

Extra Materials: The Contractor shall furnish RPZ Repair Kits (furnish only, not install) and deliver

to the NYSDOT representative:

One (1) Each for each size RPZ - RPZ Major Repair Kit, as manufactured by Febco or

approved equal to match the make and size installed, for each RPZ installed, consisting of

new materials obtained from the manufacturer of the RPZ installed. Repair kit shall include

all consumable or replacement items including, but not limited to, relief valve seat disc and

check seat disc, bushings, washers, o-rings, bolts, etc. All furnished material shall be

properly identified with the RPZ model, size and installation location.

Submittals and Certifications:

The Contractor shall submit for the approval of the Engineer five (5) copies of shop drawings and

catalog cuts for all materials in this specification.

Shop Drawings: A shop drawing is required showing installation of the complete RPZ assembly,

water meter, piping, pipe supports, and the precast concrete structures.

Catalog Cuts: The Contractor shall submit Catalog Cuts of the RPZ, water meter, meter reading

system, control valve, double check valve, and all connected piping for approval prior to installation.

Samples: The Contractor shall submit for approval of the Engineer finished samples of the precast

concrete proposed for use in the above-grade, exposed portions of the RPZ/Water Meter chamber

and the stand-alone RPZ enclosure, for review of color, finish, texture and quality. Samples shall be

marked with the color, finish and name of the supplier.

Certifications: The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all certifications necessary to

comply with the Suffolk County Water Authority and the NYS Dept. of Health regulations for

R.P.Z.'s (after installation), including Certification by Backflow Prevention Device Tester;

Certification of Master Plumber responsible for the R.P.Z. installation, and a Professional Engineer's

or Registered Architect's Certification that the installation is in accordance with the approved Plans.

The Contractor shall prepare and submit copies of N.Y.S.D.O.H. Form Gen. 215B to the Suffolk

County Water Authority and to the NYS Dept. of Health. The Engineer shall receive copies in

triplicate of all such submittals. The NYSDOT shall be copied on all such submittals. The

D2631431394



4/23/2015

Contractor shall be held completely responsible to ensure that all Work is in compliance with N.Y.S.

D.O.H., Form Gen. 215B.


For the furnishing and installation of each 2” Water Meter with Remote, RPZ and Structure and each

1.5” stand-alone RPZ and Structure, including installation of all plumbing work, certifications, etc.,

complete in place, in accordance with the plans, specifications, and directions of the Engineer, the

Contractor will receive the appropriate unit price bid.

BASIS OF PAYMENT

The price bid for each 2” Water Meter w/ Remote, RPZ and Structure and for each 1.5” stand-alone

RPZ and Structure shall include the cost of all labor, materials, equipment, and any incidental

expenses necessary, including certifications, all plumbing work, fittings, valves and appurtenances

within the structure, connection to the water service at the structure limits, the precast concrete

structure and cast-in-place concrete foundation, including reinforcing steel, brick masonry, rungs,

and access doors, all in accordance with the plans and specifications, to the satisfaction of the

Engineer.

In addition, the Contractor shall deliver Extra Materials as outlined above to the NYSDOT

representative. One repair kit is required for each size/model RPZ installed. No additional payment

will be made for furnishing the Extra Materials.

“Excavation”, “Temporary Timber Sheeting”, and “Broken Stone” for base will be paid for under

separate contract Items. Copper tubing and all water service work beyond the exterior face of the

concrete structure will be paid for separately under the appropriate items.

D263143 1395

ITEM 664.01040004 - DUCTILE IRON SEWER PIPE & FITTINGS, 4“ ITEM 664.01060004 - DUCTILE IRON SEWER PIPE & FITTINGS, 6“ ITEM 664.01080004 - DUCTILE IRON SEWER PIPE & FITTINGS, 8“ ITEM 664.01100004 - DUCTILE IRON SEWER PIPE & FITTINGS, 10“ ITEM 664.01120004 - DUCTILE IRON SEWER PIPE & FITTINGS, 12“ ITEM 664.01140004 - DUCTILE IRON SEWER PIPE & FITTINGS, 14“ ITEM 664.01160004 - DUCTILE IRON SEWER PIPE & FITTINGS, 16“ ITEM 664.01180004 - DUCTILE IRON SEWER PIPE & FITTINGS, 18“ ITEM 664.01200004 - DUCTILE IRON SEWER PIPE & FITTINGS, 20“ ITEM 664.01240004 - DUCTILE IRON SEWER PIPE & FITTINGS, 24“ ITEM 664.01300004 - DUCTILE IRON SEWER PIPE & FITTINGS, 30“ ITEM 664.01360004 - DUCTILE IRON SEWER PIPE & FITTINGS, 36“ ITEM 664.01420004 - DUCTILE IRON SEWER PIPE & FITTINGS, 42“

11-20-97Rev. 3/12/2002

Conversion to USC 12/16/11

DESCRIPTION: Under this item, the Contractor shall furnish and install cement lined, ductile iron sewer pipe and fittings and make all necessary connections to new and existing mains in accordance with the specification, as shown on the plans or as directed by the Engineer.

MATERIALS: As specified in the contract documents.

CONSTRUCTION DETAILS: As specified in the contract documents.

METHOD OF MEASUREMENT: The quantity will be measured as the number of feet of new sewer pipe (including all necessary connections and fittings) furnished and installed in accordance with the plans, specifications and as directed by the Engineer.

BASIS OF PAYMENT: The unit price bid shall include the cost of furnishing all labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work including, but not limited to fittings, plugs, connections, and leakage tests.

Excavation, backfill, sheeting and specials will be paid for under their respective items.

Progress payments will be made at the unit price bid for 80 percent of the quantity of pipe installed. The remaining 20 percent will be paid for when the testing of the system has been completed.

D2631431396

ITEM 664.40XX0006 - PRECAST SANITARY SEWER MANHOLE

10 January 07 Revised 02/03/2015

DESCRIPTION

This specification covers the requirements for furnishing and installing precast sanitary sewer manholes

as shown on the plans and in accordance with these specifications. The work shall conform to the

requirements of NYSDOT Section 604 – Drainage Structures with the following modifications:

MATERIALS

Under Section 604-2.01 Drainage Structure and Manholes, ADD the following:

“Exterior coating for manhole shall be either Mobil Mo-Tar 4, Rust-Oleum 9300 Epoxy System or

approved equal.

Precast reinforced concrete top slab and/or precast landing if required shall be manufactured in

accordance with the detail shown on the contract plans. The concrete used in the manufacturing of these

slabs shall be minimum 4000 psi concrete as specified under Section 706-04, "Precast Concrete Drainage

Units" of the NYSDOT Standard Specifications.”

Pipe Connections into the Sanitary Sewer Manholes shall be as follows

a. The precast reinforced concrete manhole base shall be provided with circular

openings at the locations and elevations for the proper connection of pipes. The pipe

connections shall be sealed with flexible manhole seal assemblies.

b. The flexible manhole seal assemblies shall be installed in accordance with the

recommendations of the seal assembly manufacturer and shall conform to ASTM

C923.

c. Flexible manhole seal assemblies shall permit at least an eight (8) degree deflection

from the centerline of the opening in any direction while maintaining a watertight

connection.

d. The flexible manhole seal assemblies shall be as manufactured by Interpace Corp.

(Lock Joint Flexible Manhole sleeve), National Pollution Control Systems, Inc.

(Kor-N-Seal) or Press-Seal Gasket Corp. or approved equal.

A cast-in-place concrete invert shall be formed within the precast concrete manhole base as shown on the

contract drawings with Class A concrete.


At the end of Section 604-3.02 Concrete Drainage Structure and Manholes, ADD the following:

Manhole Bases

For precast manhole bases, the area underneath the manhole base shall be excavated to the required

elevation. The soil below the base shall not be disturbed. The manhole base shall then be lowered into

the trench and checked for proper bearing on the subgrade, proper elevation and orientation to receive the

incoming and outgoing sewers at the designated invert elevation. If the invert elevation varies by more

than plus or minus ½ inch from the designated invert elevation, the base shall be removed and reset.

D263143 1397



Cast In Place Inverts

The concrete invert fill shall be installed following the connection of all sewer pipes to the manhole. The

invert fill shall be true to the sewer pipe invert elevations, with smooth channels of uniform cross section

and slope, either straight or with a continuous curve between inlet and outlet of pipes. The concrete

invert fill shall be placed in accordance with dimensions and details shown on the Contract Plans.

To eliminate free fall conditions in a manhole resulting from invert elevation differentials between

incoming and outgoing pipes, the Contractor shall form and construct suitable channels in the bottom of

the manhole connecting the inverts.

The complete exterior, flow channel, and bench shall receive a prime and finish coat of the specified

coating. Application shall be in strict conformance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

Masonry Collar

The precast concrete pavers or precast concrete collar be constructed on the Precast Concrete Top Slab to

bring the manhole frame and cover to the proper grade in accordance with the detail on the Contract

Plans. The minimum height shall be 4 inches and the maximum height shall not exceed 16 inches.

Following the placement of the pavers, a ½ inch layer of Masonry mortar shall be applied to the exterior

surface of the brick and trowelled to a smooth finish.

Leakage Tests

For leakage test purposes, a section of sewer line shall be construed as being that portion of a sewer

line between two (2) consecutive manholes inclusive of upstream manhole and appurtenances unless

otherwise specified.

The Contractor shall be required to notify the Engineer not less than forty-eight (48) hours prior to the

time he intends to begin testing at any particular location.

Prior to undertaking any repairs, the Engineer's written approval of method and material to be used in

the repair shall be secured. Items which in the opinion of the Engineer cannot be repaired shall be

replaced.

a. All gravity and pressure sewer lines, including but not limited to pipe, fittings,

manholes, risers, stubs, specials an appurtenances shall be tested for water tightness

as hereinafter specified.

b. The Contractor shall furnish all necessary material, equipment, labor and other

facilities required to satisfactorily perform the tests and shall make all necessary

repairs or replacements and retests as required at his own expense.

c. The Contractor is warned that the Engineer may refuse to allow exfiltration testing,

or void those already underway if, in his judgment, heavy rain or rainwater inflow

will distort test results. Retests of the affected lines shall be done at no cost to the

County, State or other agency having jurisdiction. No claims for delays will be

considered by the County, State or other agency having jurisdiction, in the event

testing is suspended by the Engineer, as specified above.

d. All sewer pipes and manholes must be clean prior to any work described in this

section. They shall be free from dirt, debris, sand, stones, etc. and accumulated water

must be removed.

D2631431398



e. The testing of new manholes will be performed using the water exfiltration test or air

test. Air pressure testing on manholes shall be done in accordance with ASTM

C1244. This specification describes the testing process for an exfiltration test.

f. Prior to the exfiltration test, all pipes in the new manhole to be tested shall be

plugged. All plugs shall be installed in the presence of the Engineer or his

representative. Each new manhole shall be filled with water to a level not less than 4

feet above the exterior crown of the upstream pipe or above the normal groundwater

level whichever is higher.

g. A twenty four (24) hour stabilization period will be required prior to taking

measurements. Should the water level during the stabilization period drop below the

test level as specified above, the Contractor, in the presence of the Engineer or his

representative shall add make-up water for water lost during the stabilization period

to increase the water level to the required height for the test.

h. The actual test period shall begin following the stabilization period. Addition of

make-up water will not be allowed once the test has begun. Any deviation from the

aforementioned will void the test.

i. The test shall be conducted for a period of at least two (2) hours. The Engineer or his

representative will take three (3) readings of the water level at the beginning of the

test period, and another three (3) readings of the water level at the end of the test

period. The average of the readings will be used by the Engineer to calculate the

leakage quantity.

j. The maximum allowable quantity of exfiltration from any manhole under test shall

not exceed 0.25 gallons per foot diameter of manhole per foot of water depth

measured from the invert of the downstream pipe per twenty-four (24) hours.

Prior to making any repairs, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, in writing, the

proposed method of repair and secure his written approval of methods and material to be

incorporated in the repair. The Engineer shall be the sole judge as to whether the pipes or

manholes shall be repaired or replaced.

All repairs and retesting must be made in the presence of a representative of the Engineer and

to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

Should a section or sections of pipe, or manholes fail to meet the leakage criteria, the

Contractor shall at no cost to the County, State, or other agency having jurisdiction, locate the

leaks and repair pipe and manholes, as necessary, until the leakage is within the permitted

allowance.

Regardless of the results of the infiltration test, it is required that all visible leaks be repaired.

The injection of gel, sealant, or any other product to seal cracks, porous section, or any other

structural defect of the pipe or manhole will not be permitted.

All tests and repairs shall be repeated as many times as necessary, at no cost to the County,

D263143 1399



State or other agency having jurisdiction, until the requirements hereinbefore specified have

been met.


The quantity to be measured under this item will be the number of linear feet of height, measured to the

nearest ¼ foot, from the bottom of the manhole base to the top of the masonry collar.

BASIS OF PAYMENT

The unit price bid per linear foot shall include the cost of all labor, equipment, and materials necessary to

complete the work including flexible gaskets between manhole sections, concrete invert fill, precast top

slab and landings, and all necessary testing and any repairs to the manhole required in connection with the

sewerage tests on the manhole.

Manhole frames and covers will be paid for under separate items.

Excavation (dewatering included in Excavation), backfill, select fill, geotextile and any necessary

sheeting will be paid for under separate items.


Item No. Description Pay Unit

664.40480006 Precast Sanitary Sewer Manhole (48 inch DIA.) Linear Foot





D2631431400

ITEM 670.95010010 - SOLAR POWERED 25W LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (LED) DECORATIVE LUMINAIRE, POLE AND FOUNDATION



USC 11/2/2009Rev 12/08/2015




ITEM 670.9501X010 - SOLAR POWERED 25W LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (LED) DECORATIVE LUMINAIRE, TWIN ARM, POLE AND FOUNDATION


ITEM 670.9503X010 - SOLAR POWERED 75W LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (LED) DECORATIVE LUMINAIRE, TWIN ARM POLE AND FOUNDATION

Page 1 of 10

DESCRIPTION

Under this item the Contractor shall furnish and install Solar Powered Light Emitting Diode (LED) Decorative Luminaire, Pole with arm(s) and Foundation at the designated wattage in accordance with the Plans, specifications and as directed by the Engineer.

The luminaire Item shall be equipped with a LED type decorative luminaire at the designated wattage, controller, batteries, solar panel, cabinet, pole, arm(s), foundation, grounding and wiring harness for the wattage and operating time up to 15 hours of peak light level per day. This item shall be provided with mechanical mounts to the pole for the luminaire, solar panel, cabinet, for a complete installed working assembly and engineering shop drawings signed by a registered New York State engineer of the components and mounts.

DEFINITIONS OR TERMS

Within this specification the following definition or terms apply: 1. Luminaire shall be defined as the entire light assembly including but not limited to the slipfitter,

painted metal housing, reflector, refractor, LEDs, LED module, lens, terminal block, driver circuitry, a twist-lock three prong receptacle for a photo-electric control for a complete outdoor weatherproof unit ready for mounting.

2. LED module or LED array is the modular replaceable cluster of LEDs assembled together on a circuit board or assembly and inserted in the luminaire. One or more LED modules shall provide the illumination of the luminaire.

3. LEDs are the individual diodes that produce the illumination.

MATERIALS

1. Luminaire

The components comprising the luminaire shall include but not be limited to the slipfitter, painted metal housing, reflector, refractor, LEDs, LED modules, lens, terminal block, driver circuitry, a twist-lock three prong receptacle for a photo-electric control for a complete outdoor weatherproof unit ready for mounting.

The luminaires shall be of the Light Emitting Diode (LED) type designed for outdoor use, modular in design with high-intensity white LEDs, and fully weatherproof.

The luminaires shall be modular and constructed so they provide a complete self contained insect resistant, shock resistant and vandal resistant unit.

D263143 1401




USC 11/2/2009Rev 12/08/2015







Page 2 of 10

The entire luminaire assembly shall be completely pre-wired, at the factory, requiring only the connection of the primary circuit wires to the electric power source for its operation.

All metallic component parts of the luminaire shall be made of a rust-resistant alloy or coated with an approved rust resistant finish. Weep holes shall be provided for drainage. Easy access to the LEDs and major electrical components shall be provided requiring no special tools to gain entrance for maintenance purposes.

The luminaire shall be provided with a means to prevent accidental exposure of the inner electrical components and accidental separation of the component parts.

The luminaire’s LED passive cooling system shall consist of a heat sink with no fans, pumps or liquids and shall resist debris buildup.

The luminaire casing shall be precision die-cast aluminum for the specified wattage and painted inside and out with a coat of baked on epoxy enamel, or polyester powder, virtually pinhole free, leaving no exposed metal. The luminaire color shall be as specified on the contract plans and details; a color chip shall be provided to the engineer for color approval.

The underside of the luminaire shall be marked with the standard NEMA decal, visible from the ground, indicating the type LED and wattage of the luminaire.

The luminaire shall contain a complete power assembly to which are mounted the necessary electrical components for DC operation, solid state starting, adjustable twistlock three prong receptacle for photoelectric control when specified, and a dead back terminal board with pressure type terminals.

The power assembly shall be capable of starting and operating the lamp at a temperature of minus twenty nine degrees Celsius to sixty degrees Celsius. The modular power assembly shall be readily removable as a single unit and utilize quick disconnect plugs.

The luminaire shall be designed for roadway lighting. The luminaire shall operate on 12 volt DC or 24 volt DC power. The luminaire and batteries shall operate at similar voltages.

The luminaire shall provide Ingress Protection rating of IP-66 as detailed in IEC60529.

The slipfitter shall be suitable for mounting on a 2in. standard pipe bracket and capable of securely fastening flush to the mounting brackets without the need of separate mounting parts or rearrangement of mounting components. Leveling and clamping of the luminaire to the bracket shall be accomplished by the tightening of bolts and be capable of adjusting the luminaire at least three degrees above and below horizontal. Bird shields shall be supplied and installed on all slipfitter installations.

D2631431402




USC 11/2/2009Rev 12/08/2015







Page 3 of 10

The luminaire shall have an IESNA light distribution as specified on the plans. The luminaire shall be available in a Type II, III or IV light distribution measured per the requirements of IESNA LM-79-08.

The luminaire shall be “Dark-Sky Friendly” compliant, directing no illumination above horizontal.

LED module(s)/array(s) and the luminaireshall deliver at least 70% of initial lumens, when in use for a minimum of 50,000 hours as measured per the requirements of IESNA LM-80-08.

Luminaires shall have a minimum Color Rendering Index (CRI) of 65 - 70 as measured per the requirements of IESNA LM-79-0.

The Off-state Power Consumption power draw of the luminaire (including PE or remote control devices) shall be minimal, under 2 watts, when in the off state.

The light source will be of white LED type. Multiple LEDs can be used. The color temperature of white LEDs used in the system should be in the Correlated Color Temperature (CCT) range of 4000 - 5000 degrees K as measured per the requirements of IESNA LM-79-08. Use of LEDs which emit ultraviolet light is not permitted.

The light output from the white LED light source should be constant throughout the duty cycle.

The LEDs should be mounted in a LED module or array that is suitable for outdoor use. The LED modules shall be mounted in the luminaire housing suitable for outdoor use.

Access to the LEDs shall be by a cast aluminum door. The door assembly shall be hinged to the unit and protected by a safety chain. The door shall be equipped with stainless steel pressure latches and weatherproof, bug resistant gaskets. The latches shall secure the lamp access door and hold it firmly against the gaskets. The latches and door assembly shall be designed so that tools are not required to gain entrance to the luminaire for re-lamping purposes.

The luminaire wattage as indicated in the Item Description is a nominal, minimal value. The luminaire description of the proper size and type as shown on the plans shall be submitted for approval by the engineer prior to being furnished.

The luminous performance of luminaire used should not be less than 50 lumen/watt delivered, where the total light output is divided by the total power input.

It should be possible to mount the luminaire on a metallic mast arm attached to the pole. The metallic arm for holding the light assembly should be extended from the pole as shown on the plans and set at a suitable angle to maximize uniform illumination of desired level over the specified area

D263143 1403




USC 11/2/2009Rev 12/08/2015







Page 4 of 10

2. Controller

The controller shall monitor the luminaire light output, battery usage, charging and power consumption and provide a timer for time of day on-off operation. The controller clock shall provide time of day operation for powering the luminaire on at dusk and off at a specified time after continuous operation for a number of hours, adjusted for seasonal and daylight savings time operation. It shall also be controlled by the optional Photo-Electric Cell if called for on the plans.

The controller timer shall be a multi-purpose digital single channel timer design specifically for lighting applications. It shall be programmable in AM/PM and 365 day format with a separate schedule for each day for the week. It shall have daylight saving or standard time, automatic leap year correction and astronomic 1-99 minute, plus or minus offset from sunrise to sunset. It shall have a manual ON/ OFF override and a 30-day back up using a replaceable 9V lithium Battery.

The total electronic efficiency should be at least 80 %.

Electronics should operate at 12 VDC or 24 VDC and should have temperature compensation for proper charging of the battery throughout the year. The operating voltage shall match the luminaire voltage.

The controller shall manage light output that should remain constant with variations in the battery voltages.

Necessary lengths of wires / cables, switches suitable for DC use and fuses should be provided.

The controller should have protection against battery overcharge and deep discharge conditions. The numerical values of the cut off limits must be specified, while submitting the samples for the testing purposes.

Fuses should be provided to protect against short circuit conditions.

A blocking diode should be provided as part of the electronics, to prevent reverse flow of current through the Photovoltaic (PV) module(s), in case such a diode is not provided with the PV module.

Full protection against open circuit, accidental short circuit and reverse polarity should be provided.

3. Battery

The batteries shall be sized to power the luminaire for a minimum of six (6) days of fifteen (15) continuous hours of use. The batteries shall have an additional 30% excess storage capacity beyond the six (6) day requirement. Reduced battery capacity due to environmental temperature effects shall not

D2631431404




USC 11/2/2009Rev 12/08/2015







Page 5 of 10

exceed 20%.

The batteries shall be self-contained gel type or AGM deep cycle, maintenance free and provide power at 12 volts DC.

The batteries shall be wired to provide 12 VDC or 24 VDC power as needed. The solar panel and batteries shall be provided with similar operating voltages maximizing the panel capacity to charge the batteries. The luminaire and batteries shall be provided with similar operating voltages.

Each battery shall not exceed 77 lbs.

The batteries shall be housed with the controller in the cabinet.

4. Cabinet

The pole cabinet shall be sized to house the controller, batteries and miscellaneous power equipment. It shall be constructed of aluminum alloy type 5052-H32 to provide a strong rigid construction and weatherproof with a NEMA 3R rating. All welds shall be neatly formed and free of cracks, blowholes and other irregularities, and all inside and outside edges of the cabinet shall be free of burrs.

The cabinet shall be constructed to accommodate the weight of the components enclosed, reinforced and heliarc welded for rigidity and mounting.

Doors and Door Hardware. The cabinet door openings shall be double flanged on all four edges to increase strength around the openings and keep dirt and liquids from entering the enclosure when the doors are open. The front and rear doors shall be constructed of type 5052-H32 aluminum alloy to provide a strong rigid construction. All welds shall be neatly formed and free of cracks, blowholes and other irregularities, and all inside and outside edges of the cabinet shall be free of burrs.

The door hinges shall have a stainless steel hinge pin, and no hinge leaves shall be exposed externally when the door is closed. The hinge pin shall be capped top and bottom by weld to render it tamper proof.

A door restraint shall be provided to prevent door movement in windy conditions. The doors shall be furnished with a gasket that satisfies the physical properties as found in UL508 table 21. 1 and shall be a weather tight seal between the cabinet and door.

Door Latching Mechanism. The door shall have a latch.

Door Handles. Each door shall include one (1) stainless steel handle, a Corbin #1548-1 keyed deadbolt type lock or equivalent, and shall have provisions for a padlock when the handle is in the closed position. Two (2) keys shall be furnished with each lock.

D263143 1405




USC 11/2/2009Rev 12/08/2015







Page 6 of 10

Sun Shields. A sun shield shall be provided on the top, the two sides and the doors of the Cabinet to reduce the cabinet internal ambient temperature, if required. The shield shall be in the form of aluminum sheets, mounted with tamper-proof hardware to the cabinets. The areas described above shall be covered, except for the handle and the padlock locations, and the top sun shield shall be crowned in a similar manner to the cabinet top.

Ventilation. The cabinet shall be provided with a passive ventilation system. Louvers shall satisfy the NEMA rod entry test for 3R ventilated enclosures. Exhaust air will be vented out between the top of the cabinet and door. The exhaust area shall be screened with a material having a minimum hole diameter of 1/8 in

Cabinet Finish. The cabinet exterior including sun shields shall be finished as indicated in the plans. The Contractor shall submit a sample and description of the finish application process for approval by the Engineer. The cabinet shall be painted powder coated to a color as specified on the contract plans and details, a color chip shall be provided to the engineer for color approval.

Cabinet Grounding. A solid copper ground bus bar shall be permanently affixed to the inside surface of a cabinet wall. When installed, the cabinets shall be grounded in accordance with Sub-section 680-3.12 of the New York State Standard Specifications. The grounding shall consist of a conduit through the foundation, # 6 AWG ground wire from the pole ground lug to the ground rod and 5/8 in by 10 ft minimum, copper clad ground rod.

Deviations to the cabinet design shall be forwarded to the engineer in charge for review and approval.

5. Pole and Arm(s)

The pole and arm(s) shall be manufactured of the height, diameter and wall thickness as necessary to support the lighting, battery cabinet and solar equipment. Each complete pole, arm(s), foundation, solar panel, cabinet, luminaire unit shall meet the latest requirements of AASHTO’s Standard Specifications for Structural Supports for Highway Signs, Luminaires and Traffic Signals.

The pole shall accommodate a decorative luminaire with a single or twin arm, up to two solar panels atop the pole and a battery cabinet mounted 2 ft from the pole base. Each luminaire shall be furnished with an arm of the length specified on the plans.

The solar panel shall be mounted atop the pole, facing south at a 45 degree angle with the horizon and not interfere with the luminaire or arm(s). The pole shall be provided with a solar panel mount that is adjustable horizontally and vertically to adjust toward the sun.

The pole and arm(s) shall have an ornamental style and have the architectural treatments that correspond with the decorative features as shown on the plans. The pole shall be supplied with a handhold, a

D2631431406




USC 11/2/2009Rev 12/08/2015







Page 7 of 10

wire inlet with bushing and ground lug at the cabinet elevation shown on the plan or directed by the Engineer. Each pole shall be grounded through the foundation to a ground rod.

The pole shall be supplied with a breakaway transformer base that has a hinged panel to access the pole base wiring.

The pole and arm(s) shall be powder coated as specified on the contract plans and details, a color chip shall be provided to the engineer for color approval.

6. Foundation

All cast-in-place concrete base and foundations shall conform to the requirements of Section 501, Portland Cement Concrete - General.

The concrete shall be Class A concrete unless otherwise specified. The batching, mixing and curing methods, and the inspection facilities shall meet the approval of the Department or its representative. The Contractor may submit for approval by Director, Materials Bureau, a mix at least equivalent to the specified Class A Concrete.

All precast concrete bases and foundations shall meet the requirements of §723-45 Precast Reinforced Concrete Foundations and Pullboxes. Anchor bolts encased in concrete foundations shall meet the requirements of §723-60, and shall be set by template.

All concrete bases and foundations shall conform to the dimensions and details shown on the plans, standard sheets and specifications.

Each foundation shall be provided with grounding. The grounding shall consist of a conduit through the foundation, # 6 AWG ground wire from the pole ground lug to the ground rod and 5/8 in by 10 ft minimum, copper clad ground rod.

7. Solar Panels

One or two solar panels shall supply the power to the batteries. This solar panel array shall be properly sized for the total luminaire wattage for the daily operating time, geographic location, area sunlight intensity (insolation) associated losses and with 30% excess capacity. The solar panel and batteries shall be provided with similar operating voltages maximizing the panel capacity to charge the batteries. The associated power calculations for the solar array and battery size and quantity shall be submitted for approval by the engineer prior to being furnished.

The solar panel array shall be mounted atop the pole, facing south at a 45 degree angle with the horizon and not interfere with the luminaires or mast arms. The solar panel mount shall be adjustable horizontally

D263143 1407




USC 11/2/2009Rev 12/08/2015







Page 8 of 10

and vertically to adjust toward the sun.

Metallic frame structure (with corrosion resistance paint) to be fixed on the pole to hold the Solar panel module. The frame structure should have provision to adjust its angle of inclination to the horizontal between 0 and 45, so that it can be installed at the specified tilt angle. The frame structure shall also have provisions to adjust for a 360 degree horizontal orientation, so that it can be installed at the specified orientation toward the sun.

The solar panel array mount and frame shall meet the latest requirements of AASHTO’s Standard Specifications for Structural Supports for Highway Signs, Luminaires and Traffic Signals.

The panel shall be made of monocrystalline or polycrystalline solar cells.

Ingress Protection rating of IP-65 as detailed in IEC60529.

BASIS OF ACCEPTANCE

Acceptance of the luminaire will be based on manufacturer's certification of compliance and independent laboratory test results with these specification requirements and on inspection by the Engineer that no damage or defects are evident.

Measurement/Performance/Safety Standards:

1. ANSI C78.377.2008 Specifications for the Chromaticity of Solid State Lighting Products. 2. IESNA LM-79-08 IESNA Approved Method for the Electrical and Photometric Measurements of

Solid-State Lighting Products. 3. IESNA LM-80-08 IESNA Approved Method for Measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED

Lighting Sources. 4. AASHTO’s Standard Specifications for Structural Supports for Highway Signs, Luminaires and

Traffic Signals, latest edition. 5. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code, latest edition. 6. IEC 60529 Ingress Protection rating.

Acceptance testing of the Solar Powered LED Decorative Luminaire system occurs after installation and final inspection and acceptance of the unit and shall last for a period of two (2) weeks. Any failure of the unit shall be repaired and defective components replaced by the contractor during this period at no expense to the State and the acceptance test shall restart for another two (2) week period.


The Solar Powered LED Decorative Luminaire of the type and wattage specified, complete with

D2631431408




USC 11/2/2009Rev 12/08/2015







Page 9 of 10

luminaire, controller, cabinet, batteries, pole, foundation, mast arm and solar panel arrays shall be installed and made operational as shown on the Plans.

Each solar panel, cabinet, pole, foundation, mast arm and luminaire unit shall meet the latest requirements of AASHTO’s Standard Specifications for Structural Supports for Highway Signs, Luminaires and Traffic Signals and NFPA 70 NEC requirements.

The mechanical mounts to the pole for the luminaire, solar panel, cabinet shall not affect the structural integrity of the pole and shall meet AASHTO requirements.

QUALITY AND WARRANTY

The original manufacturer of the white LED based solar lighting system are required to provide to the engineer a detailed report on the tests performance by independent laboratory and the actually measured values of Solar Panel (photovoltaic) module, electronics, LEDs, luminaire and battery and other related parameters, as per Measurement/Performance/Safety Standards.

TRAINING

The contractor shall conduct an (8) eight-hour maintenance training class demonstrating operation, inspection, general maintenance, diagnostics, and repair of all system components. The Training shall occur at a location within NYSDOT Region 10 at the engineer’s direction after the installation and prior to final inspection and acceptance. The contractor shall provide 2 week notice prior to the start of the training.

DOCUMENTATION

Complete cut-sheets and shop drawing of all components, mounting procedures and calculations signed by a registered New York State engineer shall be submitted to the engineer for approval prior to installation.

Shop drawings showing structural compliance with these specifications of the pole, mast arm, luminaire, solar panel array, cabinet and foundations and signed by a registered New York State engineer shall be furnished to the Engineer for approval.

Shop drawings showing compliance with these specifications of the power system and load calculations shall be furnished to the Engineer for approval.

D263143 1409




USC 11/2/2009Rev 12/08/2015







Page 10 of 10

Shop drawings shall have luminaire documentation in the form of independent laboratory testing showing compliance ANSI C78.377.2008, IESNA LM-80-08, IESNA LM-79-08 and IEC 60529.

An Operation, Instruction and Maintenance Manual, in English should be provided with the solar street lighting system. The following minimum details must be provided in the Manual:

1. White LED solar street lighting system - its components and expected performance 2. Photovoltaics (PV). The manufacturer, make, model number, country of origin and technical

characteristics. 3. PV module 4. Clear instructions about mounting of PV module. 5. White LED Lights. The manufacturer, make, model number, country of origin, full binning

number and technical characteristics of LEDs should be stated in the product data sheet and furnished with IESNA test results

6. Battery and electronics used 7. Charging and significance of indicators. 8. Clear instructions on controller operation, settings and trouble shooting. 9. Clear instructions on operation, regular maintenance and trouble shooting of solar street lighting

system. 10. Name and address of the person or service center to be contacted in case of failure or complaint.


The Solar Powered LED Decorative Luminaire of the designated wattage shall be measured by the number of each unit of the type specified, complete in place, in accordance with the Plans, specifications, or as directed by the Engineer.

BASIS OF PAYMENT

The unit price bid for each Solar Powered LED Decorative Luminaire shall include the cost of the luminaire of the type at the designated wattage, luminaire, controller, batteries, solar panels, cabinet, pole, mast arm, foundation, grounding, wiring harness and any and all hardware, mountings, fittings, expansion fittings, straps, clamps, labor and other material necessary to complete the work.

Payment schedule shall be as follows:

1. 75% of the bid price after installation and successful inspection by the Engineer 2. 15% of the bid price after receipt of all documentation (manuals) and completion of the

training. 3. 10% of the bid price after successful completion of acceptance testing.

D2631431410

ITEM 670.WWWW0039 - L.E.D. ROADWAY LUMINAIRE

Page 1 of 1 1/4/2013

DESCRIPTION This work shall consist of furnishing and installing LED Roadway luminaire in accordance with the contract documents and as directed by the Engineer.

MATERIALSMaterials shall conform to the current requirements of the “Specifications No. 466 for LED Roadway Luminaire” contained in the publication of “City of New York Department of Transportation Bureau of Traffic Division of Street Lighting”. The luminaire shall be of Lighting Emitting Diode (LED) type multi bars designed for pole mounting. The luminaire housing shall be cast aluminum. The luminaire shall be equipped with a built-in power driver with Low Voltage Indicator Lamp if required by Street Lighting. The power driver shall be 120-277 Volt, 50/60 Hz, Class 1or Class 2 LED driver. The luminaire shall be UL listed and IP 66 classified enclosure and pass 3G vibration test.

CONSTRUCTION DETAILSThe provisions of §670-3 shall apply.

METHOD OF MEASUREMENT This work will be measured by the number of LED roadway luminaires satisfactorily furnished and installed.

BASIS OF PAYMENT The unit price bid shall include the cost of furnishing all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to satisfactorily complete the work. WWWW – denotes wattage of luminaire.

D263143 1411

ITEM 670.WWWW0039 - L.E.D. ROADWAY LUMINAIRE

1/4/2013

DESCRIPTION This work shall consist of furnishing and installing LED Roadway luminaire in accordance with the contract documents and as directed by the Engineer.

MATERIALS Materials shall conform to the current requirements of the “Specifications No. 466 for LED Roadway Luminaire” contained in the publication of “City of New York Department of Transportation Bureau of Traffic Division of Street Lighting”. The luminaire shall be of Lighting Emitting Diode (LED) type multi bars designed for pole mounting. The luminaire housing shall be cast aluminum. The luminaire shall be equipped with a built-in power driver with Low Voltage Indicator Lamp if required by Street Lighting. The power driver shall be 120-277 Volt, 50/60 Hz, Class 1or Class 2 LED driver. The luminaire shall be UL listed and IP 66 classified enclosure and pass 3G vibration test.

CONSTRUCTION DETAILS The provisions of §670-3 shall apply.

METHOD OF MEASUREMENT This work will be measured by the number of LED roadway luminaires satisfactorily furnished and installed.

BASIS OF PAYMENT The unit price bid shall include the cost of furnishing all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to satisfactorily complete the work. WWWW – denotes wattage of luminaire.

D2631431412

ITEM 670.50610010 - SIGN LUMINAIRE ITEM 670.50620010 - FLAG LUMINAIRE

DESCRIPTION This work shall consist of furnishing and installing sign and flag lighting in accordance with the contract documents and as directed by the Engineer.

MATERIALS

Sign luminaire: Manufacturer, catalog number, and accessories as specified per the Contract Drawings. Subject to compliance with requirements specified per the Contract Drawings, other manufacturers that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to:

Catalog Number PFLM-WFL-LED-HO-NW-UE

LSI Industries 10000 Alliance Road Cincinnati, OH 45242 (513) 793-3200 www.lsi-industries.com

Catalog Number FL1-HWF-40-80

Amerlux 5220 Shank Rd. Pearland, texas 77581 (281) 991-5441 www.amerluxexterior.com

Catalog Number DFB.111.AXEU

Acclaim Lighting 6122 S Eastern Ave Los Angeles, CA 90040 (323) 213-4626 www.acclaimlighting.com

The contractor shall provide detailed shop drawings to the Engineer for approval prior to installation.

Flag luminaire:

Manufacturer, catalog number, and accessories as specified per the Contract Drawings. Subject to compliance with requirements specified per the Contract Drawings, other manufacturers that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to:

Catalog Number PFLM-WFL-LED-HO-NW-UE

LSI Industries 10000 Alliance Road Cincinnati, OH 45242

June 2015

D263143 1413

ITEM 670.50610010 - SIGN LUMINAIRE ITEM 670.50620010 - FLAG LUMINAIRE

(513) 793-3200 www.lsi-industries.com

Catalog Number FL1-NSP-40-80

Amerlux 5220 Shank Rd. Pearland, TX 77581 (281) 991-5441 www.amerluxexterior.com

Catalog Number DFB.111.AXEU

Acclaim Lighting 6122 S Eastern Ave Los Angeles, CA 90040 (323) 213-4626 www.acclaimlighting.com

The contractor shall provide detailed shop drawings to the Engineer for approval prior to installation.


The contractor shall furnish and install the sign and flag lighting in the location and in accordance with methods shown in the contract drawings. Where no additional detail is provided, the manufacturer’s installation instructions shall be followed. A mounting and connection detail shall be provided to the Engineer for approval prior to installation. All sign and flag lighting shall be installed in accordance with the National Electrical Code and local ordinances. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating and obtaining all electrical inspections, inspection fees, permits and permit fees. All sign and flag lighting shall be warranted to be free from all manufacturing and installation defects for a period not less than two years from the date of acceptance. METHOD OF MEASUREMENT This work will be measured as the number of Sign Luminaires and Flag Luminaires satisfactorily furnished and installed in accordance with the contract documents. BASIS OF PAYMENT The unit price bid shall include the cost of furnishing all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to satisfactorily complete the work.

June 2015

D2631431414

ITEM 670.75XX0011 - GROUND WIRE AWG

12/07/00

Rev 5/01/03 Rev 04/24/13

DESCRIPTION:

This work shall consist of furnishing and installing ground wires of the sizes shown and at the locations indicated on the plans or where directed by the Engineer.

MATERIALS:

The bare conductor and any other materials required, shall conform to the requirements of Section 723-75 of the Standard Specifications with the additional requirements that the conductors shall be of the size indicated in the plans and shall consist of 7 strands for cable size less than 1/0 and 19 strands for size 1/0 or greater of soft-drawn bare copper wire complying with ASTM B-3 and ASTM B-8. The ground wire shall be Underwriter=s Laboratory approved.


The Contractor shall furnish, install and test the conductors in conformance to Section 670 of the Standard Specifications, except that only Method No. 2 for splicing shall be used.


Ground wire will be measured for payment by the number of linear feet of ground wire of each size actually installed in accordance with the plans and specifications or as directed by the Engineer.

BASIS OF PAYMENT:

The unit price bid per linear foot shall include the cost of furnishing all labor, materials and equipment to satisfactorily complete the work.

XX = Ground wire AWG gage as per the following table:

XX = 02 04 05 06 07 08 10 20 30 40

GAGE 2 4 6 8 10 12 1/0 2/0 3/0 4/0

D263143 1415

ITEM 680.83200010 - LOCATE AND MARKOUT INFORM AND STATE LIGHTING FACILITIES

12/26/08E 10/20/89 3/15/96 M

DESCRIPTION: Under this item, the Contractor shall locate, identify and markout all underground Information for Motorists (INFORM) System facilities and State lighting facilities at each work location within the contract limits, in accordance with the contract documents and as directed by the Engineer. MATERIALS: All instruments, equipment, stakes, paint and any other material necessary to perform the work satisfactorily shall be provided by the Contractor. Equipment utilized to locate underground or buried cables and conduit shall be specifically designed for that purpose. This equipment shall be capable of locating energized, non-energized, loaded and unloaded cables. It shall also be designed to generate a discriminating signal on conduits or cables at any accessible point so that they can be individually selected and traced. CONSTRUCTION DETAILS: It is the Contractor's responsibility to determine the exact locations of all INFORM underground facilities and State lighting facilities, and to avoid any interference and conflict of any type. The Contractor is cautioned that abandoned cables may exist within the contract limits which may tend to complicate or mislead tone out operations. The Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer if any interferences are encountered. The Contractor shall be responsible for the cost of all damage to INFORM and State lighting underground and above ground facilities caused by his operations. All repairs required for INFORM facilities will be made by others under the direction of the State. All damaged State lighting facilities shall be replaced in kind or repaired A.O.B.E. The Contractor shall be responsible for all costs to make such repairs. Surface Markout of the underground facilities shall be intelligible painted markings or stakes. The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining the markings until they are no longer needed. If the markout becomes worn or obliterated in any fashion before completing excavation operations, then the appropriate facilities shall be re-identified and marked out. Ground rods, power supplies, batteries, connecting cables and any other incidentals, as required and recommended by the specific cable locating equipment manufacturer chosen, shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor. Approval for access to INFORM equipment cabinets and pullboxes shall be obtained from the Engineer prior to attempting entry to such locations.

D2631431416

ITEM 680.83200010 - LOCATE AND MARKOUT INFORM AND STATE LIGHTING FACILITIES

12/26/08E 10/20/89 3/15/96 M

METHOD OF MEASUREMENT: The work for this item will be measured for payment on a lump sum basis for the work completed, in accordance with the contract documents, and as directed by the Engineer. BASIS OF PAYMENT: The lump sum price bid shall include the cost of furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete and maintain the work of this item. Monthly progress payment will be made under this item in proportion to the amount of work done, as determined by the Engineer.

D263143 1417

ITEM 690.010XX010 – WELCOME CENTER BUILDING INTERIOR CONSTRUCTION AND FINISH WORK

Page 1 of 1 Aug. 2015

DESCRIPTION. This work shall consist of construction of the building interior fit-out and finish work in accordance with the contract documents. MATERIALS. As specified in contract documents. CONSTRUCTION DETAILS. The contractor shall perform all construction work in accordance with the requirements in the contract documents. METHOD OF MEASUREMENT. Welcome Center Building Interior Construction and Finish Work –will be measured for payment on a lump sum basis. BASIS OF PAYMENT. The lump sum price bid for this item shall include the cost of furnishing all materials, labor, equipment, management, and supervision to satisfactorily complete the work. Progress payments will be made in accordance with the contract documents

D2631431418

ITEM 690.010XX010 – WELCOME CENTER BUILDING MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL, PLUMBING AND HVAC

Page 1 of 1 Aug. 2015

DESCRIPTION. This work shall consist of construction of the building mechanical, electrical, plumbing and the HVAC in accordance with the contract documents. MATERIALS. As specified in contract documents. CONSTRUCTION DETAILS. The contractor shall perform all construction work in accordance with the requirements in the contract documents. METHOD OF MEASUREMENT. Welcome Center Building Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing and HVAC will be measured for payment on a lump sum basis. BASIS OF PAYMENT. The lump sum price bid for this item shall include the cost of furnishing all materials, labor, equipment, management, and supervision to satisfactorily complete the work. Progress payments will be made in accordance with the contract documents.

D263143 1419

ITEM 691.03000020 – TRAINING REQUIREMENTS

EI 06-018 USC 03/9/2009

DESCRIPTION This item of work shall consist of the meaningful and effective training of one or more apprentices/trainees leading to their qualification as journeyworkers in trades for the highway construction industry. The statutory authority for training requirements is described in §102-11 Equal Employment Opportunity Requirements. This specification establishes the specific requirements for a Contractor to provide training pursuant to 23 CFR 230.111 as part of Equal Employment Opportunity responsibilities. This specification, with referenced Standard Specifications, constitutes “Training Special Provisions” (TSP) pursuant to 23 CFR 230.111. The TSP supercedes any conflicting portions of Form FHWA 1273 Required Contract Provisions, Federal Aid Construction Contracts found in contract proposals.

MATERIALS None Specified.


GENERAL. The objective of these training requirements is to provide training opportunities to minorities, women and disadvantaged persons for the following reasons:

1. To address the current under-representation of minorities and women in skilled trades, and; 2. To maintain a pool of qualified minorities, women and disadvantaged persons to compete for

those journeyworker positions which are created as others leave the workforce. Disadvantaged means a person who is either a) a member of a family that receives public assistance, or b) a member of a family whose income during the previous six (6) months, on an annualized basis, was such that the family qualified for public assistance, or whose income was at or below either the poverty level or 70% of the lower living standard income (LLSI) level for the person’s county of residence.

The Contractor shall make every effort to recruit and hire minority, women and disadvantaged apprentices/trainees to the extent that such persons are available within a reasonable area of recruitment. Such training commitment is not intended to, and shall not be used to, discriminate against any applicant for training, whether a member of a minority group or not. Apprentices/trainees shall be employed and offered meaningful and effective training opportunities. Meaningful and effective training is defined as occurring when contract work provides a realistic and practical opportunity of reasonable duration for the apprentice/trainee to complete elements of the apprenticeship/OJT program in order to achieve journeyworker status.

TRAINING PROGRAMS. In accordance with §102-10D Training, an apprentice is defined as an individual who is enrolled in an apprenticeship training program that is registered with the NYS Department of Labor, and a trainee is defined as an individual who is enrolled in an On-the-Job Training (OJT) program that is approved by the Federal Highway Administration (FHWA). NYSDOT administers the trainee training programs.

Although the terms apprentices and trainees are generally used interchangeably in this specification, in Regions 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 8, 10 and 11, the Department will only approve the use of apprentices and apprenticeship training programs, where available, in fulfillment of these requirements. In Regions 6, 7 and 9, the Department will approve the use of either apprenticeship or FHWA approved OJT trainee programs.

Prospective bidders can obtain additional information about apprentice programs from the Director of Apprenticeship Training Programs, NYS Department of Labor, State Office Building Campus, Building 12, Rm 436, Albany, NY 12240 ; (518) 457-6820; fax (518) 457-7154; [email protected].

D2631431420


EI 06-018 USC 03/9/2009

Approval to use a training program shall be obtained from the Department prior to commencing work involving the trade(s) covered by the program.

APPRENTICES/TRAINEES. Recruitment. The Contractor shall decide who is hired as an apprentice/trainee. Such apprentice/trainee shall be enrolled in a registered apprenticeship or OJT program approved by the Department and satisfy the requirements under Work History.

Prior to engaging in the recruitment of new apprentice/trainees, the Contractor shall employ apprentices/trainees who are partially trained, if available, in order to facilitate completion of their apprenticeship/OJT program. Training and upgrading of minorities and women toward journeyworker status is a primary objective of the TSP requirements.

The Contractor shall make every effort to enroll minority and women apprentice/trainees (e.g., by conducting systematic and direct recruitment through public and private sources likely to yield minority and women apprentice/trainees, such as the Department’s OJT supportive services program) to the extent that such persons are available within a reasonable area of recruitment. The Contractor will be responsible for demonstrating the steps that have been taken in pursuance thereof, prior to a determination as to whether the Contractor is in compliance with the TSP requirements.

Work History. The Contractor shall not propose or use any person under this item if such person has successfully completed a training program providing journeyworker status in the same trade or work classification as will be used for training under this contract. The Contractor shall not use or propose a person who has been gainfully employed as a journeyworker in that trade by virtue of informal on-the-job training or otherwise. The Contractor shall ascertain, before training a person and before requesting payment therefore, whether the person qualifies. The Contractor shall include appropriate questions on employee application forms and shall check the personal references of an applicant for a position in order to ensure that the person is qualified for training. The Contractor shall maintain records of these findings and provide them to the Department upon request.

Termination. An apprentice/trainee may be terminated at any time during training for: excessive absenteeism; lack of punctuality; accident-proneness; lack of interest; poor attitude; and continued failure to behave in a business-like manner. However, termination will not occur without: 1. Documented counseling by the Contractor's Trainer about the reason(s) for termination; and 2. Documented efforts by the Contractor's Trainer to resolve the problem; and 3. Documented notification to the Engineer and Regional Compliance Specialist about the problem; and 4. Written notification of intent to terminate to the Engineer and the Regional Compliance Specialist

stating the reason(s) therefore; and 5. An opportunity for Department representatives to discuss the impending termination with the

Contractor in order to ensure compliance with Steps 1 through 4 above. REQUIRED TRAINING EFFORT.

CHART A NUMBER OF APPRENTICE/TRAINEE FTEs REQUIRED

Contract Bid Amount AA Component RGN Component Total (AA + RGN) < $15M 1 1 2

$15M to < $30M 2 2 4 ≥ $30M 3 3 6

D263143 1421


EI 06-018 USC 03/9/2009

Full-Time Equivalents (FTEs). The number of apprentice/trainee full-time equivalents (FTEs) the Contractor is required to train is identified in Chart A. For the purposes of this specification, FTEs are used to designate the desired and expected level of training effort, in terms of full-time workers employed for the duration of the contract. Although the value of one FTE is not fixed, a general estimation of expected effort is approximately 1,000+ hours of work per construction season for upstate Regions and 2,000+ hours of work per construction season for downstate Regions. One FTE could be achieved with one individual working for the contract duration or with multiple individuals working full-time on a daily basis for portions of the contract duration so long as they are collectively employed for the equivalent amount of time as one full-time employee working for the entire duration of the contract. Accordingly, the Contractor may propose a different number of trainees/apprentices and a different duration of their training activities to achieve the required number of FTEs, but the proposal is subject to the approval of the Department. Affirmative Action (AA) Component. The affirmative action (AA) component identifies locations and trades with programmatic under-representation of minorities and/or females as journeyworkers. The Contractor shall provide the appropriate number of apprentices/trainees FTEs to fulfill the affirmative action (AA) requirements of this specification in the specified trade(s) and classification(s) (minority or female). The number of AA apprentice/trainee FTEs required are identified in Chart A and the required trade/classification targets for each NYSDOT Region are identified in Chart B.

CHART B AFFIRMATIVE ACTION TARGETS

TRADE NYSDOT REGION 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Laborer (Female) Laborer (Minority)

Equip. Operator (Female) Equip. Operator (Minority)

Iron Worker (Female) Iron Worker (Minority) Carpenter (Female) Carpenter (Minority)

Mason (Female) Mason (Minority) Painter (Female) Painter (Minority)

Electrician (Female) Electrician (Minority)

Race/Gender Neutral (RGN) Component. The Contractor shall also provide the appropriate number of apprentices/trainees FTEs to fulfill the race/gender neutral (RGN) requirements in accordance with Chart A. The RGN component allows the Contractor to hire apprentices without imposed race, gender or specific trade requirements. Training shall be provided to anyone (minorities/non-minorities, males/females, and disadvantaged/non-disadvantaged persons) at the Contractor’s discretion.

D2631431422


EI 06-018 USC 03/9/2009

Although trades are not designated for the RGN apprentices/trainees, training should be provided in the construction trades rather than in clerical/administrative positions. Training is permissible, by Department authorized exception only, in lower level management positions such as office engineers, estimators, timekeepers, etc., where the training is oriented toward construction applications. On a voluntary basis, the Contractor has the option to help address areas with programmatic under-representations, by hiring the RGN apprentices/trainees to the designated areas outlined in Chart B – Affirmative Action Targets. Implementation and Distribution. The number of apprentices/trainees FTEs shall be distributed among the trades based upon the AA component requirements, maximum opportunity for work, required journeyworker/apprentice ratios outlined in the prevailing wage rate schedule, distribution of multiple persons among multiple trades, the Contractor’s needs and the availability of apprentices/trainees within a reasonable area of recruitment. When multiple apprentices/trainees are required, effort shall be made to hire apprentices/trainees whom are at a variety of different stages in their training programs (first year, third year, etc.) Where feasible, 25 percent of apprentices/trainees shall be in their first year of apprenticeship or training. The Contractor may allow apprentices/trainees to be trained by a subcontractor. However, the Contractor retains the primary responsibility to meet the TSP requirements and compensation is the same.

Compliance. A Contractor will have fulfilled the primary responsibilities under this Training Special Provision if acceptable training is provided to the number of apprentice/trainee FTEs specified or good faith efforts to attempt to provide the required training is demonstrated consistently throughout the duration of the contract. Training Coordinator. The Contractor shall designate one individual who will function as the training coordinator and act as the contact person for training related concerns. The training coordinator should be someone that has regular dealings and familiarity with the actual training direction and guidance being provided. As conditions and apprentices/trainees may change throughout the duration of the contract, notify the Department if at any point a new training coordinator is designated. TSP PROCESS. Prior to Letting. Bidders are advised that there are a number of procedural steps in the approval of a training (apprenticeship or OJT) program, including preparation of an application, review, and resolution of questions and comments. Approval of a training program is not guaranteed, and may take 30 to 60 days. It is highly recommended to have an approved apprenticeship or OJT trainee program prior to bidding. Within 7 Days After Letting. As a requirement of the contract award process, the apparent low bidder shall submit a TSP Letter to the Department within 7 work days after letting, signed and dated by an authorized company officer. A recommended form, which includes the mailing address, for the TSP Letter is available from the Department’s website at: https://www.nysdot.gov/main/business-center/contractors/construction-division/forms-manuals-computer-applications-general-information/civil-rights The minimum content requirements for the TSP Letter include:

• A statement acknowledging the TSP requirements and a pledge to make every effort to meet them • Recognition of the number of apprentices required under the AA component, under the RGN

component, and the total • Recognition of the Region–specific affirmative action apprentice/trainee targets by trade and

D263143 1423


EI 06-018 USC 03/9/2009

candidate classification (ex., female equipment operators, minority electricians, etc.) • Identification of how the TSP requirements will be met (ex., union-sponsored apprentice

program, contractor-sponsored apprentice program or OJT program) • Status of program/application (if pending, attach a copy of the letter from NYSDOL verifying

receipt of the application, for Department verification and consultation with NYSDOL.) • Contact information: contact person, telephone number, E-mail address and mailing address.

At the Pre-Construction Meeting. The Contractor shall submit a conceptual plan for how they will fulfill the training requirements on the contract. They shall identify anticipated contract work suitable for apprentices/trainees, any timeline/scheduling issues, anticipated sources for apprentices/trainees, steps taken to date to comply with the training requirements, and how they will address the development of a training plan for each apprentice/trainee. Within 90 Days of Award. The Contractor shall submit a formalized training plan for each of the apprentices/trainees. All coordination with the Engineer and the Regional Compliance Specialist (RCS) regarding the training plan should be completed at this point. The training plan may be adjusted throughout the duration of the contract as necessary. Written requests to submit the plan, or portions of the plan, at a specified latter date will be considered depending on the reason for the request. The cost estimate shall be submitted within 90 calendar days of the contract award date regardless of whether or not the training plan is allowed to be submitted at a latter date. The minimum content requirements for the training plan(s) include:

• Name of the apprentice/trainee, trade, starting level (i.e., year of apprenticeship) and which TSP requirement (AA or RGN) the candidate is fulfilling.

• Apprentice/trainee projected start date, projected end date and the reason for ending the training (e.g., training program completed, no remaining training opportunities, contract completion, etc.).

• An outline of the training program requirements the candidate has already completed and the requirements which the candidate still has left to complete. Provide the associated number of hours for each requirement. List classroom and on-site training requirements separately.

• Total number of on-site (non-classroom) hours left to complete the training program. • Projection of the hours and components of the remaining training program requirements which

the candidate will be able to accomplish on the contract. • A cost estimate for compensation which shows how the amount was calculated. • Any known outside factors that might affect the training plan, such as if the apprentice/trainee

will be working on other contracts or there may be time constraints of the apprentice (ex., planned future reassignment, leave to attending school, moving/relocating, etc.).

• Copies of the NYSDOL Form AT 14 (blue book), or acceptable equivalent, for each apprentice shall be made available.

• A copy of NYSDOL form AT 401 – Apprenticeship Agreement/Documentation Form. Monthly Training Progress Report. The Contractor shall submit Form AAP 26 - Monthly Training Progress Report whenever an apprentice/trainee employed pursuant to this item begins work on a contract and monthly thereafter. In addition to each Monthly Training Progress Report, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer a summary of hours required to complete the various work elements of the training program, hours completed this period, and hours completed to date. This summary shall be provided in sufficient detail to allow the Engineer to determine whether the hours in the previous period are qualified hours under this pay item.

D2631431424


EI 06-018 USC 03/9/2009

Periodic Auditing / End of Service. Periodically copies of the training program and the NYSDOL Form AT 14 (blue book) may be required for auditing purposes and verification of the training. Whenever an apprentice/trainee ceases to be employed on a contract, a copy of their NYSDOL Form AT 14 (blue book) shall be provided. WAIVER REQUEST. A request for a waiver of all or a portion of the TSP requirements may be submitted based on unusual circumstances which make the TSP requirements impractical or unduly burdensome to complete. The TSP requirements may be reduced or completely waived if the Contractor can clearly present a case for the TSP waiver (ex., no reasonable training opportunities will exist, lack of available apprentices/trainees, lack of available work for apprentices/trainees based on apprentice-to-journeyworker ratio restrictions). A TSP waiver request may be submitted at any point in the process after the contract letting date. TSP waiver requests made within 7 work days after contract letting may be submitted in lieu of the TSP Letter. The TSP waiver request should provide a detailed explanation for the request, steps taken to try to comply, and contact person information (name, telephone number, E-mail address). If the TSP waiver request is for elimination of all apprentice/trainee requirements and the TSP waiver is approved, no further TSP submissions are required. If the TSP waiver request is for a reduction or an alteration to the requirements and it is approved the Contractor shall submit a TSP Letter with the authorized revisions within 3 work days of notification of the TSP waiver request being approved. In the event that a TSP waiver request is not approved, the Contractor shall submit a TSP Letter within 3 work days of notification of the TSP waiver request being declined. The pre-award review of the TSP waiver request will focus on the apparent low bidder’s good faith efforts to comply with these requirements, and will not eliminate the detailed review process of the contractor’s workforce planning efforts and TSP compliance efforts after contract award. TSP waivers are not necessarily permanent, particularly if based on available workforce reasons. Throughout the contract duration, the Contractor shall continue to try to meet the original requirements under this pay item. Whenever there are changes in the construction schedule, scope of work, availability of apprentices/trainees, or any other factor that might affect the ability to hire apprentices/trainees to reasonable training opportunities, any TSP waivers shall be reevaluated. The Contractor is required to bring any such factors to the attention of the Department in a timely manner. TRAINING DURATION. Start-Up. An apprentice/trainee shall begin training as soon as feasible in trade related work and remain on the contract as long as training opportunities exist in the trade, until completion of the training program or until completion of the contract. After approval of an apprentice/trainee, the individual shall be employed in the designated trade in accordance with the currently approved Form AAP 35 Workforce Participation Plan to the extent that training opportunities exist in the contract work. At the time an apprentice/trainee reports to the Contractor for training under this item, the Training Coordinator shall notify the Engineer to ensure that appropriate records are kept.

D263143 1425


EI 06-018 USC 03/9/2009

Throughout Contract Duration. The Contractor is expected to provide maximum opportunity to the apprentice/trainee for completion of their apprenticeship/OJT program. The Contractor shall monitor the apprentice/trainee's progress, paying particular attention to completion of work elements within the training program. When a work element of the training program is completed, the Contractor shall rotate the apprentice/trainee to other work processes to the extent that training opportunities exist. Should no such training opportunities exist, the apprentice/trainee may continue to work as long as there is work. However any work not in the training program or beyond the number of hours indicated in the training program for each work element will not qualify for payment under this pay item. This continued work will not make the apprentice/trainee ineligible for continued future training in the trade. Retention. The Contractor is expected to retain, as a journeyworker, an apprentice/trainee that completes their training program and attains journeyworker status prior to contract completion, provided there is contract work remaining. Continued work by a journeyworker will not qualify for payment under this item. Maintaining Compliance with the FTE Requirement. The Contactor is responsible for maintaining compliance with the required number of apprentice/trainee FTEs for the duration of the contract. If the number of employed TSP apprentice/trainee FTEs falls below the required number (e.g., apprentice/trainee attains journeyworker status, leave the contract, etc.) and there are substantial training opportunities remaining, the Contractor is required to make every effort to recruit and hire additional apprentices/trainees. Although, consideration to waive the remaining training requirements will be given when there is limited contract work remaining or when, due to the retention of TSP apprentices/trainees who have reached journeyworker status, available employment opportunities are limited. If at any point during the contract the amount of training being accomplished is significantly below the projected amount stated in the training plan(s), the Contractor is required to adjust their training efforts such that the approved number of hours of training in the training plan(s) is achieved by contract completion. COMPENSATION. This specification provides for partial compensation to the contractor towards the cost of managing and operating the training program(s). Compensation is not intended as reimbursement towards the apprentices’ wages, but rather as general compensation for administrating the training program along with the loss of productivity on the behalf of the journeyworker(s) providing the training, guidance and supervision. A combined negotiated amount for partial compensation of all the TSP apprenticeship/OJT programs will be added to the contract by order-on-contract. During the contract duration, revisions to the training plan(s) can be submitted. If a revised training plan, including the cost estimate, is approved then the previously negotiated amount can be adjusted by order-on-contract. The Contractor shall attach to each Form AAP 26 Monthly Training Progress Report, a monthly summary of hours of qualifying training for each apprentice/trainee that shows the number of hours trained each day of the progress period by training program work element. Only training hours verified and approved of by the Engineer or his designee will be considered as qualifying training. Any hours of work performed which are not in the training program or are beyond the number of hours indicated for each work element in the training program will not qualify for payment under this pay item. Off-site training or training performed at other work sites does not qualify for compensation. Classroom training hours do not qualify for compensation.

D2631431426


EI 06-018 USC 03/9/2009

The total verified hours of training provided during the month will be used to determine the monthly payment due. Regardless of the amount approved for the pay item, payments will be made only for the number qualifying hours of training accomplished. Payment for training under the affirmative action component of this specification is contingent upon the Contractor fulfilling or demonstrating satisfactory good faith efforts to fulfill the corresponding equal employment opportunity (EEO) goals in accordance with §102-11 Equal Employment Opportunity Requirements. [Example Situation #1 - For contracts with a minority EEO goal and a female EEO goal: If achieve the minority EEO goal but not the female EEO goal, then compensation may still be allowed for a minority TSP AA apprentice/trainee but not for a female TSP AA apprentice/trainee. Example Situation #2 - For contracts with trade specific minority/female EEO goals (i.e., applicable in New York City): If achieve the minority equipment operator EEO goal but not the minority iron worker EEO goal, then compensation may still be allowed for a minority equipment operator TSP AA apprentice/trainee but not for a minority iron worker TSP AA apprentice/trainee.] Any apprentices/trainees hired towards attempting to attain fulfillment of the EEO goals do not qualify for payment under this specification nor are they considered as TSP apprentices/trainees (i.e., still required to hire additional apprentices/trainees under this specification’s requirements). Payment for training under the race/gender neutral component of this specification is contingent upon the Contractor fulfilling or demonstrating satisfactory good faith efforts to fulfill all of the equal employment opportunity (EEO) goals in accordance with §102-11 Equal Employment Opportunity Requirements and fulfilling or demonstrating satisfactory good faith efforts to fulfill the affirmative action component. METHOD OF MEASUREMENT This work will be measured on a Dollars-Cents basis. The amount shown in the proposal is not to be altered in any manner by the bidder. Should the bidder alter the amount shown, the altered figure will be disregarded, and the original price will be used to determine the total amount bid.

BASIS OF PAYMENT Compensation towards the training program for each apprentice/trainee will be made as such:

= (0.35) x (Base Journeyworker Prevailing Wage Rate) x (Hours of Qualifying Training Accomplished)

No adjustments to the base rate shall be allowed, such as for: fringes/supplemental benefits, premium rates (overtime, holiday, etc.), worker’s compensation insurance, FICA, state or federal unemployment insurance, commercial general liability (CGL) insurance, etc. When determining compensation, use the prevailing wage rate that was current at the time the training was provided. Qualified training time will include only verified training properly completed and accounted for, including only those hours the apprentice/trainee is actually receiving on-site training in the work elements included in his/her approved apprenticeship/OJT program. Off-site or related classroom training will not be considered as qualifying training time under this item.

D263143 1427

04000 Page 1 of 1 Per DQAB L05/07/09

PREVAILING WAGE RATES NOTE: This form was developed for repetitive use throughout all contract proposals and may identify items not applicable to this specific project.

D2631431428

PROJECT LABOR AGREEMENT

Evaluated and negotiated by GENERAL CONTRACTOR

On behalf of NEW YORK STATE DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION

And the

BUILDING AND CONSTRUCTION TRADES COUNCIL OF NASSAU AND SUFFOLK COUNTIES

For

LONG ISLAND REST AREA UPGRADE AT EB LIE BETWEEN EXITS 51 AND 52

D263143 1429

i

TABLE OF CONTENTS Section Page I. RECITALS ........................................................................................................................................... 1

II. AGREEMENT .................................................................................................................................... 2

ARTICLE l. PARTIES TO THE AGREEMENT ................................................................................... 2

ARTICLE II. GENERAL CONDITIONS ............................................................................................... 2

SECTION 1. DEFINITIONS .................................................................................................................. 2 SECTION 2. CONDITIONS FOR AGREEMENT TO BECOME EFFECTIVE ...................................... 2 SECTION 3. ENTITIES BOUND & ADMINISTRATION OF AGREEMENT ......................................... 3 SECTION 4. SUPREMACY CLAUSE .................................................................................................. 3 SECTION 5. LIABILITY ........................................................................................................................ 4 SECTION 6. BID SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................................................... 4 SECTION 7. AVAILABILITY AND APPLICABILITY TO ALL SUCCESSFUL BIDDERS ..................... 4

ARTICLE III. SCOPE OF THE AGREEMENT .................................................................................... 5

SECTION 1. THE COVERED WORK .................................................................................................. 5 SECTION 2. TIME LIMITATIONS ........................................................................................................ 5 SECTION 3. EXCLUDED EMPLOYEES .............................................................................................. 6 SECTION 4. LIMITATIONS .................................................................................................................. 7

ARTICLE IV. UNION RECOGNITION AND EMPLOYMENT .......................................................... 7

SECTION 1. PRE-HIRE RECOGNITION ............................................................................................. 7 SECTION 2. UNION REFERRAL ......................................................................................................... 8 SECTION 3. NAMED REFERRALS ..................................................................................................... 9 SECTION 4. NON-DISCRIMINATION ................................................................................................. 9 SECTION 5. MINORITY AND FEMALE REFERRALS ...................................................................... 10 SECTION 6. UNION DUES ................................................................................................................ 10 SECTION 7. CRAFT FOREPERSONS AND GENERAL FOREPERSONS ...................................... 10

ARTICLE V. UNION REPRESENTATION ........................................................................................ 11

SECTION 1. LOCAL UNION REPRESENTATIVE ............................................................................ 11 SECTION 2. STEWARDS .................................................................................................................. 11

ARTICLE VI. MANAGEMENT'S RIGHTS ........................................................................................ 12

SECTION 1. RESERVATION OF RIGHTS ........................................................................................ 12 SECTION 2. NO LIMITATION ON CONSTRUCTION METHODOLOGIES ...................................... 13 SECTION 3. TEMPORARY HEAT, LIGHT, POWER ......................................................................... 13

ARTICLE VII. WORK STOPPAGES AND LOCKOUTS ................................................................... 14

D2631431430

ii

SECTION 1. NO STRIKES -- NO LOCK OUT ................................................................................... 14 SECTION 2. DISCHARGE FOR VIOLATIONS .................................................................................. 14 SECTION 3. EXPEDITED ARBITRATION ......................................................................................... 14 SECTION 4. ARBITRATION OR DISCHARGES FOR VIOLATION .................................................. 16

ARTICLE VIII. LABOR MANAGEMENT COMMITTEE ................................................................. 17

SECTION 1. SUBJECTS .................................................................................................................... 17 SECTION 2. COMPOSITION ............................................................................................................. 17

ARTICLE IX. GRIEVANCE AND ARBITRATION PROCEDURE .................................................. 17

SECTION 1. PROCEDURE FOR RESOLUTION OR GRIEVANCES ............................................... 17 SECTION 2. LIMITED RETROACTIVE EFFECT OF AWARDS ........................................................ 20 SECTION 3. PARTICIPATION BY THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR ................................................ 20

ARTICLE X. JURISDICTIONAL DISPUTES ..................................................................................... 20

SECTION 1. NO DISRUPTIONS ....................................................................................................... 20 SECTION 2. ASSIGNMENT ............................................................................................................... 20 SECTION 3. PRE-JOB CONFERENCES .......................................................................................... 20 SECTION 4. PROCEDURE FOR SETTLEMENT OF JURISDICTIONAL DISPUTES ...................... 21 SECTION 5. AWARD ......................................................................................................................... 23 SECTION 6. NO INTERFERENCE WITH WORK ............................................................................. 23 SECTION 7. LIMITATIONS ................................................................................................................ 23

ARTICLE XI. WAGES AND BENEFITS ............................................................................................ 24

SECTION 1. CLASSIFICATION AND WAGES .................................................................................. 24 SECTION 2. EMPLOYEE FRINGE BENEFITS/SUPPLEMENTS ..................................................... 24 SECTION 3. EMPLOYEE BENEFITS/ TRUST FUNDS .................................................................... 24

ARTICLE XII. HOURS OF WORK, PREMIUM PAYMENTS, SHIFTS AND HOLIDAYS ............ 26

SECTION 1. WORK WEEK AND WORK DAY .................................................................................. 26 SECTION 3. SHIFTS .......................................................................................................................... 27 SECTION 4. HOLIDAYS .................................................................................................................... 28 SECTION 5. PAYMENT OF WAGES ................................................................................................. 28 SECTION 6. EMERGENCY WORK SUSPENSION .......................................................................... 29 SECTION 7. INJURY/DISABILITY ..................................................................................................... 29 SECTION 8. TIME KEEPING ............................................................................................................. 29

ARTICLE XIII. APPRENTICES .......................................................................................................... 29

SECTION 1. PROGRAMS FOR APPRENTICES .............................................................................. 29

ARTICLE XIV. SAFETY PROTECTION OF PERSON AND PROPERTY ...................................... 30

SECTION 1. SAFETY REQUIREMENTS .......................................................................................... 30 SECTION 2. CONTRACTOR RULES ................................................................................................ 30 SECTION 3. INSPECTIONS .............................................................................................................. 30

ARTICLE XV. NO DISCRIMINATION .............................................................................................. 30

D263143 1431

iii

SECTION 1. COOPERATIVE EFFORT ............................................................................................. 30 SECTION 2. LANGUAGE OF AGREEMENT..................................................................................... 30

ARTICLE XVI. GENERAL TERMS .................................................................................................... 31

SECTION 1. PROJECT RULES ......................................................................................................... 31 SECTION 2. SUPERVISION .............................................................................................................. 31 SECTION 3. TRAVEL ALLOWANCES .............................................................................................. 31 SECTION 4. FULL WORKDAY .......................................................................................................... 31

ARTICLE XVII - SUBCONTRACTING .............................................................................................. 31

ARTICLE XVIII. SAVINGS AND SEPARABILITY .......................................................................... 32

SECTION 1. THIS AGREEMENT ...................................................................................................... 32 SECTION 2. THE OWNER'S CONTRACT DOCUMENTS ................................................................ 32 SECTION 3. NON-LIABILITY ............................................................................................................. 33 SECTION 4. NO WAIVER OF NO STRIKE -- NO LOCK OUT PROVISION ..................................... 33

ARTICLE XIX. FUTURE CHANGES IN SCHEDULE A AREA CONTRACTS .............................. 33

SECTION 1. CHANGES TO AREA CONTRACTS ............................................................................ 33 SECTION 2. LABOR DISPUTES DURING AREA CONTRACT NEGOTIATIONS............................ 34 SECTION 3. MODIFICATIONS TO THE AGREEMENT .................................................................... 34

ARTICLE XX - HELMETS TO HARDHATS ..................................................................................... 34

D2631431432

1

I. RECITALS

WHEREAS, the New York State Department of Transportation (hereinafter

“Owner” has determined to construct The Long Island Rest Area Upgrade At EB LIE

Between Exits 51 and 52 (“Project”); and

WHEREAS, the Owner has engaged Hill International (hereinafter “Hill”) to

undertake an analysis of whether to use a Project Labor Agreement that will best serve the

Owners interest in obtaining the best work at the lowest possible price, preventing favoritism,

fraud and corruption and other considerations such as impact of delay, the possibility of cost

saving advantages, and any local history of labor unrest: and;

WHEREAS, Hill’s Economic Benefit Study & Report on Feasibility and Impact of a

Project Labor Agreement (PLA) Due Diligence (hereinafter “Report”), dated August 18,

2015, concluded that use of a Project Labor Agreement would provide the Owner with

measurable economic benefits and would promote Owner’s interest in obtaining the best

work at the lowest prices as well as preventing favoritism, fraud and corruption; and

WHEREAS, the Owner has determined that it is in its best interest to proceed with

the Project pursuant to a PLA;

WHEREAS, Hill has determined that the Building and Construction Trades Council of

Nassau and Suffolk Counties (the "Council") is the appropriate representative of labor in

Nassau/Suffolk Counties for purposes of facilitating the negotiation of the terms of a PLA for the

project; and

WHEREAS, Hill has reached agreement with the Council and its affiliated unions on the

terms of the PLA set forth below; and

WHEREAS, the Owner has reviewed and approved the PLA set forth below and has directed

that it be included in the Contract Documents for the Project, with the requirement that the successful

D263143 1433

2

bidder, and all levels of subcontractors, together with their respective sureties (if any), shall agree to

and abide by the PLA with respect to performance of the Project work and that any failure to comply

with the PLA shall be considered a material breach of the Contract Documents, justifying the Owner

among other remedies, to immediately terminate the contractor and make demand upon its surety, in

conformance with the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents;

NOW, THEREFORE, it is hereby agreed as follows:

II. AGREEMENT

ARTICLE l. PARTIES TO THE AGREEMENT

This Project Labor Agreement (“Agreement”) is by and among the General Contractor and

the Council, acting for itself and for its participating constituent local unions, the signatory local

unions, acting for themselves and their members, and all contractors, and their subcontractors of

every tier, performing work covered by this Agreement.

ARTICLE II. GENERAL CONDITIONS

SECTION 1. DEFINITIONS

The Owner in this Agreement is New York State Department of Transportation. A local union

signing this Agreement is referred to in this Agreement as a "Signatory Union" or “Participating

Local Union.” Similarly, a contractor signing this Agreement, including all of its subcontractors

of every tier, engaged in Project construction work, as defined in Article III of this Agreement, is

referred to in this Agreement as “General Contractor” or "Contractor." Work covered by this

Agreement is defined in Article III and is referred to in this Agreement as "Covered Work."

SECTION 2. CONDITIONS FOR AGREEMENT TO BECOME EFFECTIVE

This Agreement shall not become effective unless each of the following conditions are

met: (i) the Agreement is signed by the Council, having received authorization from its parent

organization, the Building and Construction Trades Department of the AFL-CIO; (ii) the

D2631431434

3

Agreement is signed by the General Contractor; (iii) the Agreement is signed by each

participating local union representing craft employees needed for the Project; (iv) The

contractors and subcontractors execute and file with the General Contractor the Letter of Assent

referenced in Section 3 below prior to their commencement of work on the Project. Each

signatory to this Agreement represents that it possesses the legal capacity to enter into this

Agreement and to perform fully the obligations imposed upon it by this Agreement. (v) The

agreement is approved by the Owner.

SECTION 3. ENTITIES BOUND & ADMINISTRATION OF AGREEMENT

This Agreement shall bind the General Contractor, the Council, all Signatory Unions and

the contractors and all subcontractors performing construction work at the Project, including site

preparation work, which comprises Covered Work as defined in Article III. Further, the General

Contractor shall require, in all subcontracts pertaining to Covered Work, that the

subcontractor of all tiers also become a signatory to and be bound by this Agreement by signing

a "Letter of Assent" in the form annexed hereto as Exhibit "A." This Agreement shall be

administered by the General Contractor, for the benefit of the Owner.

SECTION 4. SUPREMACY CLAUSE

This Agreement, parts of the Contract Documents, and the local collective bargaining

agreements referenced in Schedule A to this Agreement (collectively, the Schedule A

Agreements), express the complete understanding of all signatories with respect to this Project.

In the event of any conflict between provisions of this Agreement and an applicable Schedule A

Agreement and/or other provisions of the Contract Documents, the provisions of this Agreement

shall prevail; provided, however, where any work that may be performed within the scope of the

NTL Articles of Agreement, the National Stack/Chimney Agreement, the National Cooling Tower

Agreement, the UA/IBEW Joint National Agreement for Instrument and Control Systems

Technicians, and the National Agreement of the International Union of Elevator Constructors, that

D263143 1435

4

work shall be performed under those national agreements, except that the jurisdictional disputes

and no strike/no lockout provisions of this PLA shall govern.

SECTION 5. LIABILITY

The Owner shall not be liable for any violations of this Agreement by a Contractor or a

Signatory Union. The Council shall not be liable for any violations of this Agreement by any

Signatory Union. Signatory Unions or Contractors shall only be liable for their own violations of

this Agreement and shall not be vicariously liable for the violations of others.

SECTION 6. BID SPECIFICATIONS

The Contract Documents shall require that all successful bidders, and their subcontractors

of all tiers, performing Covered Work for the Project, shall be bound by, this Agreement, and

shall require the execution of the Letter of Assent (a copy of which shall be filed with

both the General Contractor and the appropriate trade) as a condition precedent to award

of the contract or the Owner's approval of the contractor/subcontractor in question. Nothing in

this Agreement shall be construed as limiting the Owner's otherwise lawful exercise of

its right in determining which Contractors shall be awarded contracts for the Project.

Similarly, nothing in this Agreement shall be construed as limiting the Owner's otherwise

lawful exercise of its right, at any time, to terminate, delay or suspend the work, in whole or

part, on the Project; provided; however, if the work is resumed it shall be resumed under the

terms of this PLA.

SECTION 7. AVAILABILITY AND APPLICABILITY TO ALL SUCCESSFUL BIDDERS

This Agreement will be provided to all bidders and will fully apply to all successful

bidders on the Project and their subcontractors of every tier that becomes signatory thereto without

regard to whether the successful bidder is a union or non-union contractor on other sites. This

Agreement shall not apply to (i) the work of any Contractor performed at any location other than

the Project site, as defined in Article III, Section 1, (ii) to any work performed by employees

D2631431436

5

of the Owner at the Project site, (iii) the work of other employees performing work and/or

services for the Owner, other than Covered Work. Other employees may be excluded as set

forth in Article III, Section 3.

ARTICLE III. SCOPE OF THE AGREEMENT

Covered Work under this Agreement shall be as defined and limited as follows:

DESCRIPTION OF PROJECT: All worked covered by the construction contract No-------------

between Owner and the General Contractor for construction of the Long Island Rest Area

Upgrade At EB LIE Between Exits 51 and 52 in Suffolk County, NY (Covered Work).

SECTION 1. THE COVERED WORK

This Agreement shall apply, during its effective period, only to the (i) on-site construction

work at the Project, and “on site” construction work shall be defined to include Project work

performed at preparation and staging areas; and deliveries to and from the Project site, and

(ii) off-site work on components or elements of the Project, (including delivery of those

products) dedicated and fabricated specifically for the Project, but only to the extent

presently provided for by prevailing practices under the applicable Schedule A Agreement,

required to complete the physical work shown on the Drawings (Plans) and Specifications for the

Project and consistent with the law. In addition, with regard to furniture, fixtures and equipment

purchased by the Owner, any such items assembled and/or permanently attached on site are

covered under this Section.

SECTION 2. TIME LIMITATIONS

This Agreement shall terminate upon the completion and acceptance by the Owner of the

Covered Work in its entirety, unless the Owner elects, in a writing to terminate all or part of the

Covered Work before completion, provided, however that in the event of any such partial or

D263143 1437

6

complete termination of the of Covered Work, the resumption of any such Covered Work as

part of this Project shall only be permitted under the terms of this Agreement. This

Agreement shall terminate immediately upon issuance, by the Owner of the written statement

confirming the cessation of all Covered Work.

SECTION 3. EXCLUDED EMPLOYEES

Notwithstanding any other provision of this Agreement, the following persons and items

are specifically excluded from coverage by this Agreement:

(i) employees of the Owner and their consultants and the Owner's

architects/engineers for the Project, superintendents, supervisors (excluding craft

and general forepersons and field craft surveyors specifically covered by a Schedule A

Agreement), staff engineers, inspectors and testers unless covered by a Schedule A agreement,

quality assurance personnel, mail carriers, clerks, office workers, messengers, security personnel,

non-manual employees, emergency medical and first aid technicians, and other professional,

engineering, administrative and management personnel;

(ii) equipment and machinery owned or operated by the Owner at the Project which

is not being used to perform Covered Work;

(iii) independent engineers or technicians retained for laboratory or specialty testing

or inspections not ordinarily done by a Signatory Union;

(iv) non-construction technical support services contracted by the Owner for the

Project, not related to the construction or wiring of such technical components;

(v) employees engaged in on-site equipment or material warranty work unless a

current employee of a contractor is on site and certified by the relevant manufacturer to

make warranty repairs on the equipment and the relevant manufacturer certifies in writing

that use of said employee will not adversely impact the warranty for said equipment or

material.

D2631431438

7

(vi) employees and entities engaged in off-site manufacture, modification, repair,

maintenance alteration or deliveries to and from the job site of building equipment,

materials or components, except to the extent such employees or entities are

performing off-site work lawfully recognized as part of the Covered Work under Section 1 of

this Article.

This Agreement shall not apply to the parents, affiliates, subsidiaries, joint

enterprises or other joint or sole ventures of any Contractor or subcontractor which do not

perform work at the Project, provided such other entities are not used as a device or

intermediary by such Contractor or subcontractor to avoid its obligations under this

Agreement. This Agreement shall not be construed to create any joint employment

status between or among the Owner, and any Contractor. This Agreement also shall also

not be construed to prohibit or restrict the Owner, or its employees, or an integral part of the

Owner, from performing on or off site work not forming a part of the Covered Work.

SECTION 4. LIMITATIONS

This Agreement shall have no further force or effect on items or areas of Covered Work after

the Contractor responsible for performing such items or areas is declared by the Owner to have

achieved final completion of its scope of work under its contract, except to the extent that the

Contractor is directed by the Owner to engage in check-out and/or warranty functions related to

such items or areas pursuant to its contract with the Owner.

ARTICLE IV. UNION RECOGNITION AND EMPLOYMENT

SECTION 1. PRE-HIRE RECOGNITION

The Council and the Signatory Unions are recognized by the Owner, the contractors and

all subcontractors on the on the Project as the sole and exclusive bargaining representatives of

all craft employees with respect to Covered Work for the Project.

D263143 1439

8

SECTION 2. UNION REFERRAL

(i) All Contractors shall employ, hire and utilize for the duration of the Project, qualified

craft employees possessing any required certifications that are indicated who are referred through

the job referral systems, hiring halls or related job placement practices established by the

applicable Schedule A Agreement. Notwithstanding this requirement, every Contractor shall

have the sole right to determine (a) the means and methods of performing the Covered

Work; (b) the number of employees required; (c) the competency of all referred employees; (d)

which employees are to be laid-off, subject to the requirements of this Agreement; and (e)

whether to reject any referred employees for cause, which shall include but not be limited to

reasons related to competency, qualifications and productivity, subject to the applicable

Schedule A Agreement and the non-discrimination provisions of this Agreement.

(ii) If a Signatory Union is unable to fill any request for qualified employees

within two (2) working days after the request is made by the Contractor, the Contractor may

employ qualified applicants from any other available source. If a Signatory Union does not

have a job referral system, the Contractor shall give the Signatory Union preference to refer

applicants, subject to the non discrimination and other provisions of this Article. The Contractor

shall notify the appropriate Signatory Union of craft employees hired within its jurisdiction

from any source other than referral by that Signatory Union.

(iii) The Signatory Unions shall exert their utmost efforts to recruit sufficient

numbers of skilled craft workers to fulfill the manpower requirements of each Contractor. The

signatories to this Agreement support the development of increased numbers of

skilled construction workers to meet the need of the Project and of the industry generally.

Toward that end, the Parties agree to identify and promote through cooperative efforts,

programs, procedures, and ways to assist interested local residents, including economically

disadvantaged residents, in pursuing careers in the construction industry though approved

D2631431440

9

apprenticeship programs; and the Parties further agree that any recognized job referral

system shall give priority to qualified residents from Suffolk and Nassau Counties and their

immediate vicinity, to the extent consistent with applicable law and rule or regulation of the union's

respective referral systems. The Signatory Unions shall not knowingly refer to a Contractor an

employee then employed by another Contractor under this Agreement.

SECTION 3. NAMED REFERRALS

A Contractor may request, by name, and the Local will honor, referral of the persons

who have applied to the Local for Project work and who meet the following qualifications as

determined by the applicable Local Union, the General Contractor and a mutually selected

third party, or in the absence of agreement, the permanent arbitrator (or designee) designated

in Article XI:

(1) possess any license required by NYS Law for the Project work to be

performed;

(2) have worked a total of at least 1,000 hours in the Construction craft

during the prior 2 years;

(3) were on the Contractor’s active payroll for at least 60 out of the 180

calendar days prior to the contract award;

(4) have demonstrated ability to safely perform the basic functions of the applicable

trade.

No more than 12 per centum of the employees covered by this Agreement, per Contractor by

craft, shall be hired though the special provisions above (any fraction shall be rounded to the next

highest whole number.

SECTION 4. NON-DISCRIMINATION

The Signatory Unions represent that their hiring halls, referral systems and related job-

placement practices will be operated in a non-discriminatory manner and in full compliance with

D263143 1441

10

all applicable federal, state and local laws and regulations which require equal employment

opportunities. Referrals shall not be affected in any way by the rules, regulations, by-laws,

constitutional provisions or any other aspects or obligations of union membership, policies or

requirements. Referrals shall be subject to such other conditions as are established in this Article.

No employment applicant shall be discriminated against by any referral system, hiring hall or

related job-placement practice, because of the applicant's union membership, or lack

thereof.

SECTION 5. MINORITY AND FEMALE REFERRALS

If a Signatory Union either fails, or is unable, to refer qualified minority or female

applicants within 48 hours of a contractor’s request in percentages equaling lawful Project-

aspirational affirmative action goals set in the Contract Documents, the Contractor may

employ qualified minority or female applicants from any other available source.

SECTION 6. UNION DUES

All employees covered by this Agreement shall be subject to the union security

provisions contained in the applicable Schedule A Agreement, as amended from time to time,

but only for the period of time during which they are performing Covered Work and

only to the extent of rendering payment of the applicable monthly union dues

uniformly required for union membership in the Signatory Union which represents the craft

in which the employee is performing Covered Work. No employee shall be

discriminated against at the Project because of the employee's union membership or lack

thereof. In the case of unaffiliated employees, the dues payment will be received by the

Signatory Union as an agency shop fee.

SECTION 7. CRAFT FOREPERSONS AND GENERAL FOREPERSONS

The selection of craft forepersons and general forepersons, and the number of

forepersons required, shall be at the discretion of the Contractors, except where such selection

D2631431442

11

is otherwise provided by specific provisions of an applicable Schedule A Agreement. All

forepersons shall take orders exclusively from the designated Contractor representatives. Craft

forepersons shall be designated as working forepersons, and may include other Schedule A.

Agreement duties when the craft persons being led exceeds a specified number.

ARTICLE V. UNION REPRESENTATION

SECTION 1. LOCAL UNION REPRESENTATIVE

Each Signatory Union representing employees performing Covered Work

shall be entitled to designate at least one (1) representative, and one (1) alternate, who

shall be afforded access to the Project. Such designation shall be in writing which

shall be provided to the General Contractor and the Contractor involved.

SECTION 2. STEWARDS

(i) Each Signatory Union shall have the right to designate a working

journeyperson as a Steward, lead engineer or other designee as the case may be, and

an alternate (collectively, Stewards), in accordance with the practices as set forth in

the applicable Schedule A Agreement. Each Signatory Union also shall notify the

involved Contractor of the identity of the Stewards and alternate prior to their

assumption of such duties. Stewards and any alternate while performing as a Steward

shall not exercise any supervisory functions and shall receive the regular rate of pay for

their craft classifications.

(ii) In addition to their obligation to perform the ordinary work of their craft or

trade, Stewards shall know and understand the conditions and requirements of the

PLA Agreement and shall be available to receive complaints or grievances and to

discuss and assist in their adjustment with the Contractor's appropriate supervisor.

Each Steward shall be entitled to act only with respect to his trade employees and not

D263143 1443

12

with respect to employees of other trades. Contractors shall not discriminate against

Stewards by reason of their proper performance of their duties under this Article.

(iii) Stewards shall have no right to determine when, and by whom, overtime

shall be worked, except that Stewards may oversee the equitable distribution of

overtime opportunities to all employees.

(iv) If a Steward is protected against layoff or discharge by any provisions in

a Schedule A Agreement, such provisions shall be recognized to the extent the

Steward possesses the necessary qualifications to perform the work required. In any

case where a Steward is discharged or disciplined for just cause, the Signatory Union

shall be notified immediately by the Contractor.

ARTICLE VI. MANAGEMENT'S RIGHTS

SECTION 1. RESERVATION OF RIGHTS

Except to the extent expressly limited by a specific provision of this

Agreement, a Schedule "A" agreement, and subject to anything otherwise expressly

provided in the Contract Documents that is not inconsistent or in conflict with this

Agreement, Contractors shall retain full and exclusive authority for the management of

their Project operations including, but not limited to: the right to direct the work force,

including determining the number of employees to be hired and their requisite

qualifications; the promotion, transfer, and layoff of its employees; the discipline or

discharge for cause of its employees; the assignment and schedule of work; the

promulgation of reasonable Project work rules; and the requirement, timing, and number

of employees to be utilized for overtime work. No rules, customs or practices which

limit or restrict productivity or efficiency of individual workers, as determined by the

D2631431444

13

General Contractor and/or joint working efforts with other employees, shall be permitted or

observed.

SECTION 2. NO LIMITATION ON CONSTRUCTION METHODOLOGIES

To the extent consistent with this Agreement and provided there is compliance

with the Contract Documents, including the Project Plans and Specifications, the

Schedule A agreements, and applicable law, there shall be no limitation or restriction

upon the Contractors' choice of means or methods for performing their work,

including, regardless of source or location, upon the use and installation of equipment,

machinery, package units, pre-cast, pre-fabricated, pre-finished, or pre-assembled

materials, components of the work, tools, or other labor-saving devices, provided

such means and methods are not inconsistent with industry practice and custom in Nassau and

Suffolk Counties and, to the extent applicable, the provisions of the applicable Schedule A

Agreement. The on-site installation or application of such items shall be performed by the

craft having jurisdiction over such work.

SECTION 3. TEMPORARY HEAT, LIGHT, POWER

Temporary services, i.e., all temporary heat, water, power and lights, shall only be

required upon the specific request of the General Contractor and shall be provided when

required in accordance with the Schedule "A" Agreements. There shall be no stacking of trades

with regard to the providing of temporary services, which means that only one trade, as

designated and assigned by the General Contractor, will perform temporary services, unless

the General Contractor determines that more than one trade is needed for the provision of such

temporary services. In the event of a jurisdictional dispute concerning the provision of

temporary services, the dispute will be resolved pursuant to Article X of this Agreement.

Pending resolution of the dispute, the temporary services shall continue uninterrupted and as

determined and assigned by the General Contractor.

D263143 1445

14

ARTICLE VII. WORK STOPPAGES AND LOCKOUTS

SECTION 1. NO STRIKES -- NO LOCK OUT

There shall be no strikes, work stoppages, picketing, slowdowns or other disruptive

activity at the Project for any reason by any Signatory Union or employee against any

Contractor or employer while performing covered work at the Project. There shall be

no other union, concerted or employee activity, which disrupts or interferes with operations at

the Project. There shall be no lockout with respect to covered work by any Contractor. The

Council, Contractors and Signatory Unions shall take all steps necessary to ensure compliance

with this Article.

SECTION 2. DISCHARGE FOR VIOLATIONS

A Contractor may discharge any employee violating this Article for cause; however,

such employee shall be eligible for subsequent referral under this Agreement.

SECTION 3. EXPEDITED ARBITRATION

Any Contractor or Signatory Union alleging a violation of Section 1 of this Article may utilize

the expedited procedure set forth below.

(i) A party invoking this procedure shall give notice in writing to the Owner and the

General Contractor. The Owner, acting by its designee, shall serve as a member of an

Arbitration Panel, together with a Council representative, and with a third-party neutral arbitrator

to be selected by agreement of the Council and Owner. The Owner and Council representatives

may, alternatively, designate a sole arbitrator from the American Arbitration Association to hear

the case. In either event, the Owner, Council representative, or their respective designees, shall

provide copies of such notification to the alleged violator, the Council and the General

Contractor

(ii) In all cases where it is contended that a violation of Section 1 of this Article is

ongoing, the Arbitrator or Arbitration Panel, as the case may be, shall promptly schedule and

D2631431446

15

hold a hearing within forty-eight (48) hours of receipt of the written notice of the alleged violation

exclusive of weekends and holidays, or as soon thereafter as is reasonably practical.

(iii) All notices pursuant to this Article shall be in writing and shall be served by

hand or fax transmission, confirmed by overnight delivery, addressed to the Arbitrator or

Arbitration Panel, Contractors and/or Signatory Unions involved. The hearing shall be

completed in one (1) session, which shall not exceed eight (8) hours duration (no more than

four (4) hours being allowed to either side of present their case and to conduct their cross-

examination), unless otherwise agree. A failure of any Union or Contractor to attend the

hearing shall not delay the hearing of evidence by those present or the issuance of an award

by the Arbitrator or Arbitration Panel.

(iv) The sole issue at the hearing shall be whether a violation of this Article has

occurred. If a violation is found to have occurred, the Arbitrator or Arbitration Panel shall

issue a Cease and Desist Award, restraining such violation (the Award), granting such other

relief as deemed appropriate and serve copies of the Award on the Contractors and

Signatory Unions involved and the General Contractor. The Arbitrator or the Arbitration

Panel shall not have any authority to consider any matter in justification, explanation or

mitigation of such violation, or to award any relief other than a cease and desist order, with

all other remedies being reserved by the respective parties.

At any time before the issuance of the Award, the Arbitrator or the Arbitration Panel

may attempt to mediate a settlement of the matter by informal discussions among the

affected parties, without delaying, however, any of the time constraints established under

this Article. The Award shall be issued in writing within three (3) hours after the close of

the hearing, and may be issued without a written supporting opinion. If any involved party

desires such an opinion, one shall be issued within fifteen (15) calendar days after receipt of

D263143 1447

16

a written demand, but its issuance shall not delay compliance with, or enforcement of, the

Award.

(v) An Award issued under this procedure shall be final and binding and may be

enforced by any court of competent jurisdiction upon the filing of this Agreement together

with the Award. Notice of the filing of such enforcement proceedings shall be given to the

Signatory Union or Contractor involved and the General Contractor. Except as otherwise

expressly modified or waived by the terms of this Agreement, any arbitration conducted

pursuant to the terms of this Agreement shall be governed by the statutes and laws governing

the arbitration of disputes in the State of New York, including, without limitation, Article 75 of the

New York Civil Practice Law and Rules and, where applicable, the federal Arbitration Act. (vi)

The fees and expenses, if any, of each Arbitrator shall be equally divided between the

Contractor and Signatory Union involved, regardless of outcome, provided further, however, that

any compensation and reimbursement paid to employees of the Owner who serve as arbitrators

shall be paid solely by the Owner, and any compensation and reimbursement paid to employees of

the Council who serve as arbitrators shall be paid solely by the Council.

SECTION 4. ARBITRATION OR DISCHARGES FOR VIOLATION

The grievance and arbitration procedures contained in Article IX shall not be applicable to

any alleged violation of this Article, with the sole exception that an employee

discharged for an alleged violation of Section 1 of this Article may invoke the procedures of

Article IX to determine only if the employee did, in fact, violate the provisions of Section 1 of this

Article, but not for the purpose of modifying the discipline imposed where a violation is found to

have occurred.

D2631431448

17

ARTICLE VIII. LABOR MANAGEMENT COMMITTEE

SECTION 1. SUBJECTS

A Project Labor Management Committee shall be established consisting of one

(1) representative, and a designated alternate, from the General Contractor, the Council

and the Owner. The Committee will meet on a regular basis to: promote harmonious

relations among the Contractors and Signatory Unions; enhance safety awareness, cost

effectiveness and productivity of construction operations; protect the public interest;

discuss matters relating to staffing and scheduling with safety and productivity as

considerations; review lawful affirmative action and equal employment opportunity

matters pertaining to the Project; monitor and ensure timely completion; assist in ensuring

that a high degree of skill and quality of workmanship is attained at the Project; and to

address, in advance, any potential work assignment issues.

SECTION 2. COMPOSITION

The Committee may be jointly chaired by the representatives of the General

Contractor, the Council and the Owner. The Signatory Unions and Contractors may be

requested by the Committee to designate representatives to assist in discussing any issues

being addressed at any meeting. The Committee may elect to establish subcommittees

to assist in the performance of its duties. The General Contractor shall designate a project

contact person and provide the phone number and address for that contact person prior to

commencement of work on a form identical to the form annexed hereto as Exhibit “B.”

ARTICLE IX. GRIEVANCE AND ARBITRATION PROCEDURE

SECTION 1. PROCEDURE FOR RESOLUTION OR GRIEVANCES

Any question, dispute or claim arising out of, or involving, the interpretation or application

of this Agreement (other than jurisdictional disputes or alleged violations of Article VII,

D263143 1449

18

Section 1) shall be considered a grievance and shall be resolved pursuant to the exclusive

procedure described below; provided, in all cases, that the question, dispute, or claim

must have arisen during the term of this Agreement.

Step 1: (i) When an employee covered by this Agreement feels aggrieved by a

claimed violation of this Agreement, the employee shall, through the Signatory Union business

representative or Steward, give notice of the claimed violation to the work site representative of the

involved Contractor. To be timely, such notice of the grievance must be given within ten (10)

calendar days after the act, occurrence, or event giving rise to the grievance. The business

representative of the Signatory Union or Steward and the work site representative of the

Contractor involved shall meet and endeavor to adjust the matter within three (3) calendar days

after timely notice has been given. If they fail to resolve the matter within the prescribed period,

the grieving party, may, within seven calendar days thereafter, pursue Step 2 of the

grievance procedure, by serving the Contractor and the General Contractor with written copies

of the grievance, setting forth a description of the claimed violation, the date on which the

grievance occurred, and the provisions of the Agreement alleged to have been violated. Grievances

and disputes settled at Step 1 are non-precedential, except as to the specific Signatory Union,

the employee and Contractor involved, unless the settlement is accepted in writing by the

General Contractor as creating a precedent.

(ii) Should any signatory to this Agreement have a dispute (excepting jurisdictional

disputes or alleged violations of Article VII, Section 1) with any other signatory to this

Agreement, and if, after conferring, a settlement is not promptly reached, the dispute shall be

reduced to writing and, shall proceed to Step 2 in the same manner as outlined in Subparagraph

(a) for the adjustment of employee grievances.

Step 2: The Business Manager or designee of the involved Signatory Union, together with

representatives of the Council, and the involved Contractor and the General Contractor, shall

D2631431450

19

meet in Step 2 within two (2) calendar days of service of the written grievance, to arrive at a

satisfactory settlement.

Step 3: (i) If the grievance has been submitted but not resolved in Step 2, any of the

participating Step 2 entities may, within three (3) calendar days after the initial Step 2 meeting,

submit the grievance in writing (copies to other participants) to the Owner. The

Owner, acting by its designee, shall serve as a member of a three-member Arbitration

Panel, together with a Council representative together with a third-party neutral Arbitrator to

be selected upon agreement of the Council and the Owner. The Owner and Council

representatives may, alternatively, designate a sole arbitrator to hear the case. The Expedited

Labor Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration Association shall govern the conduct of the

arbitration hearing, at which all Step 2 participants shall be parties. The decision of the

Arbitrator or Arbitration Panel shall be final and binding on the Contractor, Signatory Union

and employee involved. The fees and expenses, if any, of each Arbitrator shall be equally

divided between the Contractor and Signatory Union involved, regardless of outcome, provided

further, however, that any compensation and reimbursement paid to employees of the Owner who

serve as arbitrators shall be paid solely by the Owner, and any compensation and reimbursement

paid to employees of the Council who serve as arbitrators shall be paid solely by the Council.

(ii) The failure of the grieving party to adhere to the time limits set forth in this

Article shall render the grievance null and void. The time limits may be extended only with the

written consent of the General Contractor, the Contractor involved and the Signatory Union

affected by the extension. In the event a step involves the Arbitrator or Arbitration Panel, then

the written consent of the Arbitrator also shall be required. The Arbitrator shall have authority to

make decisions only on the issues presented to him, and shall not have the authority to

change, add to, delete or modify any provisions of this Agreement or the Contract Documents.

D263143 1451

20

SECTION 2. LIMITED RETROACTIVE EFFECT OF AWARDS

No arbitration decision or award under this Article may have retroactive effect for a

period exceeding sixty (60) days prior to completion of submission of the initial written grievance

on the General Contractor and the Contractor and Signatory Union involved.

SECTION 3. PARTICIPATION BY THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR

The General Contractor shall be notified by the involved Contractor of all actions at

Steps 2 and 3 and, at its election, may participate in full in all proceedings at these Steps,

including Step 3 arbitration, when directed to do so by the Owner.

ARTICLE X. JURISDICTIONAL DISPUTES

SECTION 1. NO DISRUPTIONS

There will be no strikes, sympathy strikes, work stoppages, slowdowns, picketing

or other disruptive activity of any kind arising out of any jurisdictional dispute.

Pending the resolution of the dispute, the work shall continue uninterrupted and as

assigned by the Contractor. No jurisdictional dispute shall excuse a violation of Article

VII.

SECTION 2. ASSIGNMENT

All Project work assignments shall be made by each Contractor pursuant to law

and in consideration of industry custom and practice in Nassau and Suffolk Counties,

including relevant provisions of applicable Schedule A Agreements concerning such

custom and practice. All work assignments shall be in accordance with Article IV of this

Agreement.

SECTION 3. PRE-JOB CONFERENCES

The Labor Management Committee established under Article VIII herein shall be

formulated upon execution of this Agreement and shall convene a pre-job conference as

D2631431452

21

soon as practicable following contract award, and in any event prior to the Contractor's

mobilization on the job, which shall include all affected sub-contractors and trades of any

tier, to resolve any issues with respect to scheduling and work assignments that have

been made. No later than 10 days prior to beginning its work on the project site, each

Contractor shall inform the General Contractor of the identity of the Building Trades

Union to which it intends to assign the work within the scope of its contract. The General

Contractor shall immediately forward that tentative assignment in writing to the Labor

Management Committee, which may, prior to the Contractor beginning its work,

schedule a conference with the Contractor, and interested Affiliated Unions or Building

Trades Unions to discuss the tentative assignment. The Owner shall make good faith

efforts to ensure that all contracts let on the Project are let to contractors that shall result

in the assignment of the work involved to the Union(s) entitled to perform the work

under prior National Plan decisions. If, however, no Green Book decisions address the

assignment of the particular work involved or the respective trades are not in agreement,

the General Contractor or Contractor involved shall assign it in conformance with Section 1 above.

If the Labor Management Committee is unable to resolve any jurisdictional issue referred to

it, the affected affiliated Local Union must submit the matter to the procedure set forth

below in Section 4, for immediate resolution. The following section applies regardless of

affiliation with the building and Construction Trades Department for any and all unions and

contractors performing work on the project.

SECTION 4. PROCEDURE FOR SETTLEMENT OF JURISDICTIONAL DISPUTES

(i) Any Signatory Union having a jurisdictional dispute with respect to an aspect

of the Covered Work assigned to another Signatory Union will submit the dispute, in

writing, to the Administrator, Plan for the Settlement of Jurisdictional Disputes in the

Construction Industry (the Plan), within seventy-two (72) hours and send a copy of the

D263143 1453

22

letter to the other Signatory Union involved, the Council, the Contractor involved, the

General Contractor and the Owner. Upon receipt of a dispute letter from a Signatory

Union, the Administrator shall invoke the procedures set forth in the Procedural Rules

and Regulations to the Plan to resolve the jurisdictional dispute. The jurisdictional

dispute letter shall contain the information described in Article IV of the Procedural

Rules and Regulations for the Plan. A copy of the Plan and its Procedural Rules and

Regulations are attached to this Agreement as Exhibit A.

(ii) Within two (2) calendar days of the receipt of the dispute letter, there shall be a

meeting of the Signatory Unions involved, the Council, the General Contractor and the

Owner for the purpose of resolving the jurisdictional dispute.

(iii) If the dispute remains unresolved after this meeting, the parties will proceed to

final and binding arbitration in accordance with the principles and procedures set forth in

the rules of the Plan and its Procedural Rules and Regulations.

(iv) The Arbitrator shall render a short-form written decision within three (3) days

of the hearing based upon the evidence submitted at the hearing. The Arbitrator shall

not be permitted, under any circumstance, to direct an assignment of an aspect of the Covered

Work in violation of applicable local, state or federal law, rule or regulation.

(v) This Jurisdictional Dispute Resolution Procedure will apply only to work

performed by the Signatory Unions at the Project. Further, no party, by reason of its

execution of this Agreement, shall have any obligation under the Plan, or its Rules or

Regulations, with respect to any other project or with respect to the Project beyond the effective

period of this Agreement.

(vi) Any Signatory Union involved in a jurisdictional dispute on the Project shall

continue working in accordance with Section 2 of this Article and without disruption of any kind.

D2631431454

23

SECTION 5. AWARD

Any jurisdictional award pursuant to Section 3 of this Article shall be final and binding on

the disputing Signatory Unions and the Contractor on this Project only, and may be enforced in

any court of competent jurisdiction. Such award or resolution shall not establish a precedent on any

other construction work not covered by this Agreement. In all disputes under this Article, the

General Contractor and the affected Contractor shall be considered parties in interest and shall

be sent contemporaneous copies of all notifications required under these Articles

and, at their option, may participate fully as a party in any proceeding initiated under these Articles.

SECTION 6. NO INTERFERENCE WITH WORK

There shall be no interference or interruption of any kind with the work of the Project

while any jurisdictional dispute is being resolved. The work shall proceed as assigned by the

Contractor until finally resolved under the applicable procedure of this Article. The award shall be

confirmed in writing to the involved parties. There shall be no strike, work stoppage or

interruption in protest of any such award. The award, which shall be adhered to by the

Contractor, shall not provide for any award of damages or other expenses against the Owner, or

the Contractor based on its prior jurisdictional designation; provided, however, that this

provision shall not be interpreted to preclude otherwise existing rights for an award of monetary

damages against the Contractor based on its jurisdictional designation.

SECTION 7. LIMITATIONS

Any arbitration panel convened for the purpose of resolving jurisdictional disputes shall

have no authority to assign work to a crew of more employees than the minimum required by the

Contractor; or to assign the work to employees who are not qualified to perform the work involved.

This does not prohibit the establishment, with the agreement of the involved Contractor, of

composite crews where more than one (1) employee is needed for the job. The aforesaid

determinations shall decide only to whom the disputed work belongs.

D263143 1455

24

ARTICLE XI. WAGES AND BENEFITS

SECTION 1. CLASSIFICATION AND WAGES

All employees covered by this Agreement shall be classified in accordance with their

work performed and paid wages for those classifications set forth in the Schedule A Agreements,

as amended during this Agreement.

SECTION 2. EMPLOYEE FRINGE BENEFITS/SUPPLEMENTS

Employees shall be paid fringe benefits/supplements in accordance with the Schedule A

Agreement and the time requirements therein. Delinquency of payments shall be subject to

resolution in accordance with the Schedule A collective bargaining agreements. Nothing in this

Agreement shall preclude the right of any fund or entity from lawfully collecting fringe

benefits/supplements for employees performing covered work to utilize the applicable rights and

remedies afforded under the New York Lien Law; E.R.I.S.A., or any other applicable law.

Any signatory Union alleging a failure to pay appropriate wages and fringe benefits shall

give written notice in writing to the Council, the Owner and the General Contractor within 30

days of the alleged failure in order to initiate the expedited arbitration process.

SECTION 3. EMPLOYEE BENEFITS/ TRUST FUNDS

A. The Contractors agrees to promptly pay contributions to the established Trust Funds

in the amounts designated in the appropriate Schedule "A". Jointly-trusted fringe benefit plans

established or negotiated through collective bargaining during the life of this Agreement may be

added and the Contractors agree to promptly pay contributions to such funds.

B. The Contractors are to be bound by the written terms of the legally established Trust

Agreements specifying the detailed basis on which payments are to be paid into, and benefits

paid out of, such Trust Funds with regard to work done on this project for those employees to

whom this Agreement requires such benefits payments.

D2631431456

25

C. The General Contractor, in order to ensure the full and timely remittance of all

union dues and fringe benefits/supplements due the affiliated Signatory Unions as provided for

in the Schedule “A” Agreements, agrees that it will, upon notification of not more than fifteen

(15) days from the date of a default from any affiliated signatory Union that a Contractor has

become delinquent in the payment of union dues and/or fringe benefits/supplements due in

connection with the work on this Project, to immediately stop payment on all monies due or

which may become due to the delinquent Contractor up to the amount alleged to be owed from

this Project and all such funds be paid directly to the complaining Signatory Union to be

applied against the amounts owed by the defaulting Contractor. Before such payment is made,

the General Contractor shall first advise the Contractor in writing of the complaint made by the

Signatory Union and the amounts claimed and shall allow the Contractor a period of ten (10)

days from the date of notification to produce a written letter signed by the Business Manager

of the complaining Signatory Union that the amount in default has been paid in full and the

Contractor is current in remittance of Funds or a bona-fide explanation acceptable to the

complaining Signatory Union of why in the Contractor’s opinion the amounts are not due as

alleged. In the event of such a bona-fide dispute, the General Contractor will use its best effort

to act as an initial arbiter and take action it then deems appropriate.

D. No monies shall be paid to the delinquent Contractor who may request

arbitration of the dispute in accordance with Article IX herein. In the event such a letter is not

delivered to the General Contractor within ten (10) days from the date of notification to the

defaulting Contractor, the General Contractor shall immediately pay over to the Fund

Administrator of the complaining Signatory Union all monies due the defaulting Contractor to

the extent necessary to satisfy the amounts payable to the defaulting Contractor by the General

Contractor for the Project. None of the foregoing is to be construed as having created a debt

on the part of the General Contractor to the Signatory Union for unpaid Funds by defaulting

D263143 1457

26

Contractors except to the extent that funds are payable to the Contractors and overdue to the

Signatory Unions for this Project and with proper notice as herein provided. There will be no

strike, work stoppage or disruption pending resolution of the dispute.

E. Notwithstanding the foregoing provisions of this Article, including any

provisions to arbitrate disputes, in the event the General Contractor fails to perform its

obligations under this Article for forty-five (45) days, the members of a Signatory Union, on

five (5) days written notice with right to cure from the complaining Signatory Union to the

delinquent Contractor, with copies to the President of the Building Trades Council and the

General Contractor, can elect to refuse to perform services for a delinquent Contractor. Upon

the curing of such delinquency, all work shall immediately recommence and the parties shall

return to the status quo ante. The provisions of Article VII shall remain in full force and effect

with respect to all other Signatory Union members working on the Project. If a Contractor

fails to contribute to a Signatory Union’s benefit/supplement funds because of the Contractor’s

inability to collect payment from the Owner for work performed on the Project, the General

Contractor agrees that the Contractor will not be removed from the job for non-performance

which results from a Signatory Union’s members refusing to perform services as set forth in

this Section.

ARTICLE XII. HOURS OF WORK, PREMIUM PAYMENTS, SHIFTS AND HOLIDAYS

SECTION 1. WORK WEEK AND WORK DAY

The regular work week shall consist of forty (40) hours at straight-time rates for pay

and fringe benefits/supplements, Monday through Friday. The standard work day shall

consist of eight (8) hours, with a Project start time uniformly set by the General

Contractor and the Contractors at 7:00 a.m. or 8:00 a.m., with one half (1/2) hour

unpaid lunch period, to commence no earlier than 11:30 a.m. and no later than 12:00

D2631431458

27

p.m., which shall not be counted as part of the eight (8) hour workday. If operational

considerations warrant, with one (1) week advance notice, the work day may be further

changed by agreement among the Contractor, the Signatory Union and the General

Contractor, and such agreement shall not be unreasonably withheld.

SECTION 2. OVERTIME

The rate of pay for overtime hours worked during the period Monday through Saturday

(excluding recognized holidays) outside the eight (8) hour workday established in Section 1 of

this Article shall be at time and one-half the regular hourly rate. The rate or amount of fringe

benefits/supplements for overtime hours worked during the period Monday through Friday

(except recognized holidays) outside the eight (8) hour workday established in Section 1 of

this Article shall be at the rate or amount provided under the applicable Schedule "A"

Agreements. The rate of pay and rate (or amount) for all other overtime hours shall be in

accordance with the applicable Schedule "A" Agreements. There will be no restriction upon

the Contractor's scheduling of overtime or the non-discriminatory designation of employees

who shall perform such overtime work. Trades employees shall not be penalized for refusing

to work overtime. Overtime may only be worked where unavoidable in the sole judgment of

the Contractor or General Contractor.

SECTION 3. SHIFTS

(i) Flexible Schedules - Scheduling of shift work shall remain flexible in order to meet

Project schedules and existing Project conditions. Shifts may be scheduled and paid in

accordance with the appropriate Appendix A Agreement.

(ii) Flexible Starting Times - Shift starting times shall be adjusted by the Contractor as

necessary to fulfill Project requirements, and, in case of emergency, shall be subject to the

notice requirements of the Appendix A Agreements.

D263143 1459

28

(iii) A Contractor shall schedule an unpaid period of not more than one-half (1/2) hour

duration at the work location between the third (3rd) and fourth (4th) hour of the scheduled

shift, which shall not be counted as part of the standard eight (8) hour work day. A contractor

may, for efficiency of operation, establish a schedule, which coordinates the meal periods of

two (2) or more crafts. If an employee is required to work through the meal period, the

employee shall be compensated in a manner established in the applicable Appendix A

Agreement.

SECTION 4. HOLIDAYS

(i) There shall be nine (9) recognized holidays on this Project as follows:

New Years Day Thanksgiving

Presidents Day Day after Thanksgiving

Memorial Day Veteran' Day

Christmas

Fourth of July Labor Day

(ii) Payment - Regular holiday pay, if any, and/or premium pay for work performed on

such a recognized holiday shall be in accordance with the applicable Schedule A Agreement.

(iii) Holidays shall be observed on the days designated by New York State law. In the

absence of such designation, holidays falling on a Saturday shall be observed on the previous

Friday; and holidays falling on a Sunday shall be observed on the following Monday.

SECTION 5. PAYMENT OF WAGES

(i) Payday - Payment shall be made by check, drawn on a New York bank with branches

located within commuting distance of the Project site. Paychecks shall be issued by the

Contractor at the job site in accordance with prevailing practices for the applicable trade.

D2631431460

29

(ii) Termination - Employees who are laid off or discharged for cause shall be paid in

full for that which is due them at the time of termination. The Contractor shall also provide

the employee with a written statement setting forth the date of lay off or discharge.

SECTION 6. EMERGENCY WORK SUSPENSION

A Contractor may, if considered necessary for the protection of life and/or safety of

employees or others, suspend all or a portion of Project work with pay, subject to the applicable

Schedule A Agreement.

SECTION 7. INJURY/DISABILITY

An employee, who, after commencing work, suffers a work-related injury or disability

while performing work duties, shall receive no less than eight (8) hours wages for that day.

SECTION 8. TIME KEEPING

A Contractor may utilize conventional systems to check employees in and out, so long

as it occurs on Company time. Each employee must check in and out. The Contractor will

provide adequate facilities for checking in and out in an expeditious manner.

ARTICLE XIII. APPRENTICES

SECTION 1. PROGRAMS FOR APPRENTICES

Recognizing the need to maintain continuing supportive programs designed to develop

adequate numbers of competent workers in the construction industry in the Nassau/Suffolk area

and to provide craft-entry opportunities for minorities, women and economically disadvantaged

non-minority males, Contractors will employ and trade locals will provide apprentices in their

respective crafts to perform such work as is within their capabilities and which is customarily

performed by the craft in which they are indentured in accordance with ratios established by the

NYSDOL.

D263143 1461

30

ARTICLE XIV. SAFETY PROTECTION OF PERSON AND PROPERTY

SECTION 1. SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

Each Contractor shall ensure that applicable OSHA requirements are at all

times maintained on the Project. The Contractors and Signatory Unions agree to cooperate

fully with these efforts. Employees must perform their work at all times in a safe

manner and protect themselves and the property of the Contractor and the Owner from

injury or harm to the extent consistent with their rights and obligation under the law.

SECTION 2. CONTRACTOR RULES

Employees covered by this Agreement shall at all times be bound by the safety, security,

and visitor rules as established jointly by the Contractors, the Council and the

Signatory Unions. Such rules shall be published and posted in conspicuous places.

SECTION 3. INSPECTIONS

The Contractors and the Owner retain the right to inspect incoming shipments of

equipment, apparatus, machinery and construction materials, and the work, of every kind,

using employees excluded from coverage under this agreement under the provisions of

Article 3, Section 3.

ARTICLE XV. NO DISCRIMINATION

SECTION 1. COOPERATIVE EFFORT

The Contractors and Signatory Unions agree that they will not discriminate against

any employee or applicant for employment because of race, color, religion, sex, national

origin, disability or age in any manner prohibited by law or regulation.

SECTION 2. LANGUAGE OF AGREEMENT

The use of the masculine or feminine gender in this Agreement shall be construed

as including both genders.

D2631431462

31

ARTICLE XVI. GENERAL TERMS

SECTION 1. PROJECT RULES

The Contractors, the Council and the Signatory Unions shall jointly establish such

reasonable Project rules as are appropriate for the good order of the Project through the Project

Labor Management Committee. These rules shall be explained at the preconstruction

conference and posted at the Project site and may be amended thereafter as

necessary. Failure of an employee to observe these rules and regulations shall be

grounds for discipline, including discharge. The fact that no order was posted prohibiting a certain

type of conduct shall not be a defense to an employee disciplined or discharged for such

conduct when the action taken is for cause.

SECTION 2. SUPERVISION

Employees shall work under the supervision of the craft foreperson or general foreperson.

SECTION 3. TRAVEL ALLOWANCES

There shall be no requirement for payments for travel expenses, travel time,

subsistence allowance or other such reimbursements.

SECTION 4. FULL WORKDAY

Employees shall be at their designated staging area at the starting time established

by the Contractor and shall be returned to their designated staging area by quitting time

after performing their assigned functions under the supervision of the Contractor. The

signatories reaffirm their policy of a fair day's work for a fair day's wage.

ARTICLE XVII - SUBCONTRACTING

The Project General Contractor agrees that neither it nor any of its contractors or

subcontractors will subcontract any work to be done on the Project except to a person, firm or

corporation who is or agrees to become party to this Agreement. Any contractor or

subcontractor working on the Project shall, as a condition to working on said Project, become

D263143 1463

32

signatory to and perform all work under the terms of this Agreement. Any contractor

subcontracting or subletting any of its work coming within the scope of this Agreement as

defined in Article III shall obtain a signed Letter of Assent from its subcontractor and shall

assume all obligations for prompt payment of employee wages and benefits for its

subcontractor(s).

ARTICLE XVIII. SAVINGS AND SEPARABILITY

SECTION 1. THIS AGREEMENT

In the event that the application of any provisions of this Agreement is

enjoined, on either an interlocutory or permanent basis, or otherwise found in

violation of law, the provision involved shall be rendered, temporarily or

permanently, null and void, but the remainder of the Agreement shall remain in full

force and effect at the discretion of the Owner. In such event, the Agreement shall

remain in effect for contracts already bid and awarded or in construction where the

Contractor voluntarily accepts the Agreement. The parties to this Agreement will

enter into negotiations for a substitute provision in conformity with the law and the

intent of the parties.

SECTION 2. THE OWNER'S CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

In the event that the provisions of the Contract Documents, or other action,

requiring that a successful bidder become a signatory to this Agreement, are found to

be in violation of law, such requirement shall be rendered, temporarily or

permanently, null and void, but the Agreement shall otherwise remain in full force and

effect to the extent allowed by law, and shall remain in effect for contracts already

bid and awarded or in construction where the contractor voluntarily accepts the

D2631431464

33

Agreement. The parties may enter into negotiations as to modifications to the

Agreement to reflect the court action taken and the intent of the parties.

SECTION 3. NON-LIABILITY

In the event of an occurrence referenced in Section 1 or Section 2 of this

Article, neither the Owner, the General Contractor, any Contractor, nor any Signatory

Union shall be liable, directly or indirectly, for any action taken, or not taken, to

comply with any court order, injunction or determination. The Contract Documents

shall be issued, or revised, in conformance with court orders then in effect and no

retroactive payments or other action will be required if the original court

determination is ultimately reversed.

SECTION 4. NO WAIVER OF NO STRIKE -- NO LOCK OUT PROVISION

Nothing in this Article shall be construed to waive the prohibitions of Article VII.

ARTICLE XIX. FUTURE CHANGES IN SCHEDULE A AREA CONTRACTS

SECTION 1. CHANGES TO AREA CONTRACTS

(i) Schedule A Agreements shall continue in full force and effect, until a Contractor

and/or Signatory Union subject to the Area Collective Bargaining Agreements, which is

the basis for the particular Schedule A Agreement in question, notifies the General

Contractor in writing of the existence of changes in provisions of such agreements which

are applicable to the Project and their effective dates.

(ii) Any disagreement between signatories to this Agreement over the incorporation

into a Schedule A Agreement of provisions agreed upon in the renegotiation of Area

Collective Bargaining Agreements shall be resolved in accordance with the procedure set

forth in Article IX of this Agreement.

D263143 1465

34

SECTION 2. LABOR DISPUTES DURING AREA CONTRACT NEGOTIATIONS

The Signatory Unions agree that there will be no strikes, work stoppages,

slowdowns or other disruptive activity or other violations of Article VII affecting the

Project by any Signatory Union involved in the renegotiation of Area Local Collective

Bargaining Agreements, nor shall there be any lock-out on this Project affecting a

Signatory Union during the course of such renegotiations.

SECTION 3. MODIFICATIONS TO THE AGREEMENT

This Agreement may be modified by mutual consent of the General Contractor,

The Nassau Suffolk Building and Construction Trades Council and the Owner.

ARTICLE XX - HELMETS TO HARDHATS

Section 1.

The Employers and the Unions recognize a desire to facilitate the entry into the

building and construction trades of veterans who are interested in careers in the building and

construction industry. The Employers and Unions agree to utilize the services of the Center

for Military Recruitment, Assessment and Veterans Employment (hereinafter “Center”) and

the Center’s “Helmets to Hardhats” program to serve as a resource for preliminary orientation,

assessment of construction aptitude, referral to apprenticeship programs or hiring halls,

counseling and mentoring, support network, employment opportunities and other needs as

identified by the parties.

D2631431466

35

Section 2.

The Unions and Employers agree to coordinate with the Center to create and maintain

an integrated database of veterans interested in working on this Project and of apprenticeship

and employment opportunities for this Project. To the extent permitted by law, the Unions

will give credit to such veterans for bona fide, provable past experience.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF the parties have caused this Agreement to be executed and effective as of the ___ day of _____________, 201__. Owner By: ____________________________ General Contractor By: ___________________________

(Name and Title)

Building and Construction Trades Council of Nassau and Suffolk Counties AFL-CIO

By: __________________________ Richard O’Kane, President SEE ATTACHED FOR SIGNATORY AFFILIATED LOCAL UNIONS

D263143 1467

36

AFFILIATES: Boilermakers Local 5 By: _____________________________ Date:____________________________

Engineers Local 15-D By: _____________________________ Date:____________________________

Bricklayers Local 1 By: _____________________________ Date:____________________________

Engineers Local 30 By:______________________________ Date:_____________________________

Cement Masons Local 780 By: _____________________________ Date:____________________________

Engineers Local 138 By:_______________________________ Date:_____________________________

Dock & Pier Carpenters Local 1456 By: _____________________________ Date:____________________________

Glaziers Local 1281 By:______________________________ Date:____________________________

I.B.E.W. Local 25 By: _____________________________ Date:____________________________

Heat & Frost Insulators Local 12 By:_______________________________ Date:______________________________

Elevator Constructors Local 1 By: _____________________________ Date:____________________________

Heat & Frost Insulators Local 12A By:_______________________________ Date:______________________________

Empire State Regional Council of Carpenters By: ______________________________ Date:_____________________________

Iron Workers Local 361 By: _____________________________ Date:____________________________

D2631431468

37

Iron Workers Local 580 By: _____________________________ Date:____________________________

Plasterers Local 262 By: _____________________________ Date:____________________________

Laborers Local 66 By: _____________________________ Date:____________________________

Plumbers Local 200 By: ______________________________ Date:_____________________________

Laborers Local 78, MTDC, LIUNA By:_____________________________ Date____________________________

Resilient Floor Coverers Local 2287 By: ______________________________ Date:_____________________________

Laborers Local 1298 By: _____________________________ Date:____________________________

Roofers Local 154 By: ______________________________ Date:_____________________________

Lathers Local 46 By: _____________________________ Date:____________________________

Sheet Metal Workers Local 28 By: ______________________________ Date:_____________________________

Millwrights Local 740 By: _____________________________ Date:____________________________

Sheet Metal Workers Local 137 By:______________________________ Date:_____________________________

Painters D.C.9, Tapers, Paperhangers By: _____________________________ Date:____________________________

Steamfitters Local 638 By:______________________________ Date:____________________________

Stone Derrickmen Local 197 By:_____________________________ Date:___________________________

Teamsters Local814 By:_____________________________ Date:___________________________

D263143 1469

38

Teamsters Local 282 By:_____________________________ Date:___________________________

Tile, Marble & Terrazzo B.A.C. Local 7 By:______________________________ Date:____________________________

Teamsters Local 813 By:_____________________________ Date:___________________________

D2631431470

39

EXHIBIT “A"

D263143 1471

40

Public PLA Project Labor Agreement – Letter of Assent

Dear _______________________________ General Contractor The undersigned party confirms that it agrees to be a party to and be bound by the ______________________ Project Labor Agreement as such Agreement may, from time to time, be amended by the parties or interpreted pursuant to its terms. The terms of the Project Labor Agreement, its Schedules, Addenda and Exhibits are hereby incorporated by reference herein. The undersigned, as a Contractor or Subcontractor (hereinafter Contractor) on the Project known as ______________________________________________________________________ and located at ________________ (hereinafter PROJECT), for and in consideration of the award to it of a contract to perform work on said PROJECT, and in further consideration of the mutual promises made in the Project Labor Agreement, a copy of which was received and is acknowledged, hereby: (1) Accepts and agrees to be bound by the terms and conditions of the Agreement,

together with any and all schedules; amendments and supplements now existing or which are later made thereto:

(2) Agrees to be bound by, and incorporates and adopts the legally established collective bargaining agreements (Schedule “A”) and local trust agreements as referenced in the PLA and this letter of Assent, for this Project;

(3) Authorizes the parties to such local trust agreements to appoint trustees and successor trustees to administer the trust funds and hereby ratifies and accepts the trustees so appointed as if made by the Contractor;

(4) Certifies that it has no commitments or agreements that would preclude its full and complete compliance with the terms and conditions of said Agreement. The Contractor agrees to employ labor that can work in harmony with all other labor on the Project and shall require labor harmony from every lower tier subcontractor it engaged to work on the Project, Labor harmony disputes/issues shall be subject to the Labor Management Committee's Pre-Job conference provisions;

(5) Agrees to secure from any Contractor(s) (as defined in said Agreement) which is or becomes a Subcontractor (of any tier), to it, a duly executed Agreement to be Bound in from identical to this document;

(6) Agrees that it will not invoke the Most Favored Nations Clause that may be contained in any of its Collective Bargaining Agreements with affiliated unions as a result of the application of this PLA to this project.

Dated: _________________________ _________________________________ _______________________________ (Name of Contractor or Subcontractor) (Name of CM; GC; Contractor or Higher Level Subcontractor) _________________________________ (Authorized Officer & Title)

D2631431472

41

_________________________________ Sworn to before me this (Address) _______ day of ___________________, 201 ________________________________ ____________________________________ (Phone) (Fax) Notary Public Contractor’s State License #_____________________

D263143 1473

42

EXHIBIT “B"

D2631431474

43

_____________________, 20__ _____________________, President Building Trades Council of Nassau and Suffolk Counties 300 Motor Parkway, Suite 200 Happague, New York 11788 Dear Mr. ___________: Regarding the _______________________ (identify project) PLA, should any

jurisdictional, grieance or benefit problem arise, the General Contractor has designated

___________________________(name), to actively take part in the resolution of the issue or

any other matter that may arise concerning this PLA.

_________________________ may be contacted at ( ) _____ - _______ (Office) or (

) _____ - _______ (Cell) and by e-mail at _______________________. Any signatory

affiliate may request our designee’s assistance to rectify the condition. No additional 3rd Party

will be required when and if a problem occurs while this designee is involved in seeking

resolution. This letter is no intended to alter or limit any contractual remedies.

Sincerely, ________________________ (Signature) ________________________ (Print) Project Executive ________________________

Company Name

D263143 1475

SPECIAL NOTE

The PLA has been executed and the signed version will be provided to the Best Value designee (winning proposer).

D2631431476

SPECIAL NOTE STATE PREVAILING WAGE RATES

04025 Page 1 of 1 EB 06-035 L 01/06/11 9/15/11

The New York State Department of Labor (NYSDOL) has issued a project-specific prevailing wage rate schedule for this Contract. The New York State Labor Law requires the Contractor and all subcontractors to ensure that all workers employed in the performance of a public work contract are paid not less than the prevailing wage rate and supplemental (fringe) benefits in the locality where the work is performed. The project-specific prevailing wage rate schedule, together with all updates and amendments, is incorporated by reference in this Contract, and made a part hereof, as though fully set forth herein. The schedule may be accessed by visiting the NYSDOL website, navigating to the appropriate web page for prevailing wages, and entering the Prevailing Rate Case Number (PRC#). The PRC# is found on NYSDOL Form PW-200, the following page in this Contract Proposal. The project-specific prevailing wage rate schedule and all wage rate amendments are annexed electronically through the following link:

www.labor.ny.gov It is the obligation of the Contractor and all subcontractors to obtain all updated prevailing wage rate schedules and to pay all workers in accordance with the periodic wage rate schedule updates issued by the NYSDOL. Any changes or clarifications of labor classifications, and information on the applicability of particular prevailing wage rates, must be obtained from the Office of the Director of the Bureau of Public Work at the New York State Department of Labor.

D263143 1477

PREVAILING WAGE SCHEDULE FOR ARTICLE 8 PUBLIC WORK PROJECT Attached is the current schedule(s) of the prevailing wage rates and prevailing hourlysupplements for the project referenced above. A unique Prevailing Wage Case Number(PRC#) has been assigned to the schedule(s) for your project. The schedule is effective from July 2015 through June 2016. All updates, corrections, postedon the 1st business day of each month, and future copies of the annual determination areavailable on the Department's website www.labor.state.ny.us. Updated PDF copies ofyour schedule can be accessed by entering your assigned PRC# at the proper location onthe website. It is the responsibility of the contracting agency or its agent to annex and make part, theattached schedule, to the specifications for this project, when it is advertised for bids and /orto forward said schedules to the successful bidder(s), immediately upon receipt, in order toinsure the proper payment of wages. Please refer to the "General Provisions of Laws Covering Workers on Public WorkContracts" provided with this schedule, for the specific details relating to otherresponsibilities of the Department of Jurisdiction. Upon completion or cancellation of this project, enter the required information and mail ORfax this form to the office shown at the bottom of this notice, OR fill out the electronicversion via the NYSDOL website.

NOTICE OF COMPLETION / CANCELLATION OF PROJECT

Date Completed: Date Cancelled:

Name & Title of Representative:

Phone: (518) 457-5589 Fax: (518) 485-1870 W. Averell Harriman State Office Campus, Bldg. 12, Room 130, Albany, NY 12240

www.labor.state.ny.us. PW 200 [email protected]

Andrew M. Cuomo, Governor Mario J. Musolino, Commissioner

NYSDOT FRANK Salvaggio, DQAB PS&E UNITNYSDOT/POD 2350 WOLF ROADALBANY NY 12232

Schedule Year 2015 through 2016Date Requested 12/23/2015PRC# 2015012756

Location SUFFOLK COUNTYProject ID# D263143Project Type CONSTRUCTION OF A WELCOME CENTER AND REST AREA ON THE LONG ISLAND EXPRESSWAY

I495 AT EXITS 51/52. PIN 0229.14

D2631431478

http://www.labor.state.ny.us/




General Provisions of Laws Covering Workers on Article 8 Public Work Contracts Introduction The Labor Law requires public work contractors and subcontractors to pay laborers, workers, or mechanics employed inthe performance of a public work contract not less than the prevailing rate of wage and supplements (fringe benefits) in thelocality where the work is performed. Responsibilities of the Department of Jurisdiction A Department of Jurisdiction (Contracting Agency) includes a state department, agency, board or commission: a county,city, town or village; a school district, board of education or board of cooperative educational services; a sewer, water, fire,improvement and other district corporation; a public benefit corporation; and a public authority awarding a public workcontract. The Department of Jurisdiction (Contracting Agency) awarding a public work contract MUST obtain a Prevailing RateSchedule listing the hourly rates of wages and supplements due the workers to be employed on a public work project.This schedule may be obtained by completing and forwarding a "Request for wage and Supplement Information" form (PW39) to the Bureau of Public Work. The Prevailing Rate Schedule MUST be included in the specifications for the contract tobe awarded and is deemed part of the public work contract. Upon the awarding of the contract, the law requires that the Department of Jurisdiction (Contracting Agency) furnish thefollowing information to the Bureau: the name and address of the contractor, the date the contract was let and theapproximate dollar value of the contract. To facilitate compliance with this provision of the Labor Law, a copy of theDepartment's "Notice of Contract Award" form (PW 16) is provided with the original Prevailing Rate Schedule. The Department of Jurisdiction (Contracting Agency) is required to notify the Bureau of the completion or cancellation ofany public work project. The Department's PW 200 form is provided for that purpose. Both the PW 16 and PW 200 forms are available for completion online. Hours No laborer, worker, or mechanic in the employ of a contractor or subcontractor engaged in the performance of any publicwork project shall be permitted to work more than eight hours in any day or more than five days in any week, except incases of extraordinary emergency. The contractor and the Department of Jurisdiction (Contracting Agency) may apply tothe Bureau of Public Work for a dispensation permitting workers to work additional hours or days per week on a particularpublic work project. There are very few exceptions to this rule. Complete information regarding these exceptions is available on the "4 Day /10 Hour Work Schedule" form (PW 30R). Wages and Supplements The wages and supplements to be paid and/or provided to laborers, workers, and mechanics employed on a public workproject shall be not less than those listed in the current Prevailing Rate Schedule for the locality where the work isperformed. If a prime contractor on a public work project has not been provided with a Prevailing Rate Schedule, thecontractor must notify the Department of Jurisdiction (Contracting Agency) who in turn must request an original PrevailingRate Schedule form the Bureau of Public Work. Requests may be submitted by: mail to NYSDOL, Bureau of Public Work,State Office Bldg. Campus, Bldg. 12, Rm. 130, Albany, NY 12240; Fax to Bureau of Public Work (518) 485-1870; orelectronically at the NYSDOL website www.labor.state.ny.us. Upon receiving the original schedule, the Department of Jurisdiction (Contracting Agency) is REQUIRED to providecomplete copies to all prime contractors who in turn MUST, by law, provide copies of all applicable county schedules toeach subcontractor and obtain from each subcontractor, an affidavit certifying such schedules were received. If the originalschedule expired, the contractor may obtain a copy of the new annual determination from the NYSDOL websitewww.labor.state.ny.us. The Commissioner of Labor makes an annual determination of the prevailing rates. This determination is in effect fromJuly 1st through June 30th of the following year. The annual determination is available on the NYSDOL websitewww.labor.state.ny.us. Payrolls and Payroll Records Every contractor and subcontractor MUST keep original payrolls or transcripts subscribed and affirmed as true underpenalty of perjury. Payrolls must be maintained for at least three (3) years from the project's date of completion. At aminimum, payrolls must show the following information for each person employed on a public work project: Name,Address, Last 4 Digits of Social Security Number, Classification(s) in which the worker was employed, Hourly wage rate(s)paid, Supplements paid or provided, and Daily and weekly number of hours worked in each classification.

D263143 1479

http://wpp.labor.state.ny.us/wpp/showFindProject.do?method=showIt

http://wpp.labor.state.ny.us/wpp/showFindProject.do?method=showIt

http://www.labor.ny.gov/workerprotection/publicwork/PW410s.shtm










Every contractor and subcontractor shall submit to the Department of Jurisdiction (Contracting Agency), within thirty (30)days after issuance of its first payroll and every thirty (30) days thereafter, a transcript of the original payrolls, subscribedand affirmed as true under penalty of perjury. The Department of Jurisdiction (Contracting Agency) shall collect, reviewfor facial validity, and maintain such payrolls. In addition, the Commissioner of Labor may require contractors to furnish, with ten (10) days of a request, payroll recordssworn to as their validity and accuracy for public work and private work. Payroll records include, by are not limited to timecards, work description sheets, proof that supplements were provided, cancelled payroll checks and payrolls. Failure toprovide the requested information within the allotted ten (10) days will result in the withholding of up to 25% of thecontract, not to exceed $100,000.00. If the contractor or subcontractor does not maintain a place of business in New YorkState and the amount of the contract exceeds $25,000.00, payroll records and certifications must be kept on the projectworksite. The prime contractor is responsible for any underpayments of prevailing wages or supplements by any subcontractor. All contractors or their subcontractors shall provide to their subcontractors a copy of the Prevailing Rate Schedulespecified in the public work contract as well as any subsequently issued schedules. A failure to provide these schedulesby a contractor or subcontractor is a violation of Article 8, Section 220-a of the Labor Law. All subcontractors engaged by a public work project contractor or its subcontractor, upon receipt of the original scheduleand any subsequently issued schedules, shall provide to such contractor a verified statement attesting that thesubcontractor has received the Prevailing Rate Schedule and will pay or provide the applicable rates of wages andsupplements specified therein. (See NYS Labor Laws, Article 8 . Section 220-a). Determination of Prevailing Wage and Supplement Rate Updates Applicable to All Counties The wages and supplements contained in the annual determination become effective July 1st whether or not the newdetermination has been received by a given contractor. Care should be taken to review the rates for obvious errors. Anycorrections should be brought to the Department's attention immediately. It is the responsibility of the public workcontractor to use the proper rates. If there is a question on the proper classification to be used, please call the districtoffice located nearest the project. Any errors in the annual determination will be corrected and posted to the NYSDOLwebsite on the first business day of each month. Contractors are responsible for paying these updated rates as well,retroactive to July 1st. When you review the schedule for a particular occupation, your attention should be directed to the dates above thecolumn of rates. These are the dates for which a given set of rates is effective. To the extent possible, the Departmentposts rates in its possession that cover periods of time beyond the July 1st to June 30th time frame covered by aparticular annual determination. Rates that extend beyond that instant time period are informational ONLY and may beupdated in future annual determinations that actually cover the then appropriate July 1st to June 30th time period. Withholding of Payments When a complaint is filed with the Commissioner of Labor alleging the failure of a contractor or subcontractor to pay orprovide the prevailing wages or supplements, or when the Commissioner of Labor believes that unpaid wages orsupplements may be due, payments on the public work contract shall be withheld from the prime contractor in a sufficientamount to satisfy the alleged unpaid wages and supplements, including interest and civil penalty, pending a finaldetermination. When the Bureau of Public Work finds that a contractor or subcontractor on a public work project failed to pay or providethe requisite prevailing wages or supplements, the Bureau is authorized by Sections 220-b and 235.2 of the Labor Law toso notify the financial officer of the Department of Jurisdiction (Contracting Agency) that awarded the public work contract.Such officer MUST then withhold or cause to be withheld from any payment due the prime contractor on account of suchcontract the amount indicated by the Bureau as sufficient to satisfy the unpaid wages and supplements, including interestand any civil penalty that may be assessed by the Commissioner of Labor. The withholding continues until there is a finaldetermination of the underpayment by the Commissioner of Labor or by the court in the event a legal proceeding isinstituted for review of the determination of the Commissioner of Labor. The Department of Jurisdiction (Contracting Agency) shall comply with this order of the Commissioner of Labor or of thecourt with respect to the release of the funds so withheld. Summary of Notice Posting Requirements The current Prevailing Rate Schedule must be posted in a prominent and accessible place on the site of the public workproject. The prevailing wage schedule must be encased in, or constructed of, materials capable of withstanding adverseweather conditions and be titled "PREVAILING RATE OF WAGES" in letters no smaller than two (2) inches by two (2)inches. The "Public Work Project" notice must be posted at the beginning of the performance of every public work contract, oneach job site.

D2631431480

http://www.labor.ny.gov/workerprotection/publicwork/PDFs/Public%20Work%20Poster.pdf

http://www.labor.ny.gov/workerprotection/publicwork/PDFs/Public%20Work%20Poster.pdf

Every employer providing workers. compensation insurance and disability benefits must post notices of such coverage inthe format prescribed by the Workers. Compensation Board in a conspicuous place on the jobsite. Every employer subject to the NYS Human Rights Law must conspicuously post at its offices, places of employment, oremployment training centers, notices furnished by the State Division of Human Rights. Employers liable for contributions under the Unemployment Insurance Law must conspicuously post on the jobsite noticesfurnished by the NYS Department of Labor. Apprentices Employees cannot be paid apprentice rates unless they are individually registered in a program registered with the NYSCommissioner of Labor. The allowable ratio of apprentices to journeyworkers in any craft classification can be no greaterthan the statewide building trade ratios promulgated by the Department of Labor and included with the Prevailing RateSchedule. An employee listed on a payroll as an apprentice who is not registered as above or is performing work outsidethe classification of work for which the apprentice is indentured, must be paid the prevailing journeyworker's wage rate forthe classification of work the employee is actually performing. NYSDOL Labor Law, Article 8, Section 220-3, require that only apprentices individually registered with the NYSDepartment of Labor may be paid apprenticeship rates on a public work project. No other Federal or State Agency ofoffice registers apprentices in New York State. Persons wishing to verify the apprentice registration of any person must do so in writing by mail, to the NYSDOL Office ofEmployability Development / Apprenticeship Training, State Office Bldg. Campus, Bldg. 12, Albany, NY 12240 or by Faxto NYSDOL Apprenticeship Training (518) 457-7154. All requests for verification must include the name and socialsecurity number of the person for whom the information is requested. The only conclusive proof of individual apprentice registration is written verification from the NYSDOL ApprenticeshipTraining Albany Central office. Neither Federal nor State Apprenticeship Training offices outside of Albany can provideconclusive registration information. It should be noted that the existence of a registered apprenticeship program is not conclusive proof that any person isregistered in that program. Furthermore, the existence or possession of wallet cards, identification cards, or copies ofstate forms is not conclusive proof of the registration of any person as an apprentice. Interest and Penalties In the event that an underpayment of wages and/or supplements is found:

- Interest shall be assessed at the rate then in effect as prescribed by the Superintendent of Banks pursuant tosection 14-a of the Banking Law, per annum from the date of underpayment to the date restitution is made.

- A Civil Penalty may also be assessed, not to exceed 25% of the total of wages, supplements, and interest due.

Debarment Any contractor or subcontractor and/or its successor shall be ineligible to submit a bid on or be awarded any public workcontract or subcontract with any state, municipal corporation or public body for a period of five (5) years when:

- Two (2) willful determinations have been rendered against that contractor or subcontractor and/or its successorwithin any consecutive six (6) year period.

- There is any willful determination that involves the falsification of payroll records or the kickback of wages orsupplements.

Criminal Sanctions Willful violations of the Prevailing Wage Law (Article 8 of the Labor Law) may be a felony punishable by fine orimprisonment of up to 15 years, or both. Discrimination No employee or applicant for employment may be discriminated against on account of age, race, creed, color, nationalorigin, sex, disability or marital status. No contractor, subcontractor nor any person acting on its behalf, shall by reason of race, creed, color, disability, sex ornational origin discriminate against any citizen of the State of New York who is qualified and available to perform the workto which the employment relates (NYS Labor Law, Article 8, Section 220-e(a)). No contractor, subcontractor, nor any person acting on its behalf, shall in any manner, discriminate against or intimidateany employee on account of race, creed, color, disability, sex, or national origin (NYS Labor Law, Article 8, Section 220-e(b) ).

D263143 1481

The Human Rights Law also prohibits discrimination in employment because of age, marital status, or religion. There may be deducted from the amount payable to the contractor under the contract a penalty of $50.00 for eachcalendar day during which such person was discriminated against or intimidated in violation of the provision of the contract (NYS Labor Law, Article 8, Section 220-e(c) ). The contract may be cancelled or terminated by the State or municipality. All monies due or to become due thereundermay be forfeited for a second or any subsequent violation of the terms or conditions of the anti-discrimination sections ofthe contract (NYS Labor Law, Article 8, Section 220-e(d) ). Every employer subject to the New York State Human Rights Law must conspicuously post at its offices, places ofemployment, or employment training centers notices furnished by the State Division of Human Rights. Workers' Compensation In accordance with Section 142 of the State Finance Law, the contractor shall maintain coverage during the life of thecontract for the benefit of such employees as required by the provisions of the New York State Workers' CompensationLaw. A contractor who is awarded a public work contract must provide proof of workers' compensation coverage prior to beingallowed to begin work. The insurance policy must be issued by a company authorized to provide workers' compensation coverage in New YorkState. Proof of coverage must be on form C-105.2 (Certificate of Workers' Compensation Insurance) and must name thisagency as a certificate holder. If New York State coverage is added to an existing out-of-state policy, it can only be added to a policy from a companyauthorized to write workers' compensation coverage in this state. The coverage must be listed under item 3A of theinformation page. The contractor must maintain proof that subcontractors doing work covered under this contract secured and maintained aworkers' compensation policy for all employees working in New York State. Every employer providing worker's compensation insurance and disability benefits must post notices of such coverage inthe format prescribed by the Workers' Compensation Board in a conspicuous place on the jobsite. Unemployment Insurance Employers liable for contributions under the Unemployment Insurance Law must conspicuously post on the jobsite noticesfurnished by the New York State Department of Labor.

D2631431482

Job Classification Checklist (Place a checkmark by all classifications that will be using the 4/10 schedule)

*** Do not write in any additional Classifications or Counties***

Job Classification Tag # Entire Counties Partial Counties Check Box

Painter 38.O 38

Painter 38.W 23, 45 25

Painter 4-Buf,Nia,Olean 2, 15, 19, 32, 37, 615, 7, 26, 51

Painter 4-Jamestown5, 7

Painter 38.O 38

Painter 38.W 23, 45 25

Painter 4-Buf,Nia,Olean 2, 15, 19, 32, 37, 615, 7, 26, 51

Painter 4-Jamestown5, 7

Sheetmetal Worker 46 26, 28, 35, 50, 59, 62

Sheetmetal Worker 46r 26, 28, 35, 50, 59, 62

Teamsters-Heavy&Highway 294h/h 1, 11, 18, 20, 29, 42, 46, 47, 48, 58 57

Teamsters-Heavy&Highway 317bhh 6, 12, 50, 51, 55, 62 2

Teamsters-Building/Heavy&Highway 456 40, 60

PW-30R (07.14) NYSDOL Bureau of Public Work 7 of 7

D263143 1483

Introduction to the Prevailing Rate Schedule

Information About Prevailing Rate Schedule This information is provided to assist you in the interpretation of particular requirements for each classification of worker contained in theattached Schedule of Prevailing Rates.

Classification It is the duty of the Commissioner of Labor to make the proper classification of workers taking into account whether the work is heavy andhighway, building, sewer and water, tunnel work, or residential, and to make a determination of wages and supplements to be paid orprovided. It is the responsibility of the public work contractor to use the proper rate. If there is a question on the proper classification to beused, please call the district office located nearest the project. District office locations and phone numbers are listed below. Prevailing Wage Schedules are issued separately for "General Construction Projects" and "Residential Construction Projects" on a county-by-county basis. General Construction Rates apply to projects such as: Buildings, Heavy & Highway, and Tunnel and Water & Sewer rates. Residential Construction Rates generally apply to construction, reconstruction, repair, alteration, or demolition of one family, two family, rowhousing, or rental type units intended for residential use. Some rates listed in the Residential Construction Rate Schedule have a very limited applicability listed along with the rate. Rates foroccupations or locations not shown on the residential schedule must be obtained from the General Construction Rate Schedule. Pleasecontact the local Bureau of Public Work office before using Residential Rate Schedules, to ensure that the project meets the required criteria.

Paid Holidays Paid Holidays are days for which an eligible employee receives a regular day's pay, but is not required to perform work. If an employeeworks on a day listed as a paid holiday, this remuneration is in addition to payment of the required prevailing rate for the work actuallyperformed.

Overtime At a minimum, all work performed on a public work project in excess of eight hours in any one day or more than five days in any workweek isovertime. However, the specific overtime requirements for each trade or occupation on a public work project may differ. Specific overtimerequirements for each trade or occupation are contained in the prevailing rate schedules. Overtime holiday pay is the premium pay that is required for work performed on specified holidays. It is only required where the employeeactually performs work on such holidays. The applicable holidays are listed under HOLIDAYS: OVERTIME. The required rate of pay for these covered holidays can be found in theOVERTIME PAY section listings for each classification.

Supplemental Benefits Particular attention should be given to the supplemental benefit requirements. In most cases the payment or provision of supplements is foreach hour worked (noted in the schedule as 'Per hour worked'). Some classifications require the payment or provision of supplements foreach hour paid (noted in the schedule as 'Per hour paid'), which require supplements to be paid or provided at a premium rate for premiumhours worked. Some classifications may also require the payment or provision of supplements for paid holidays on which no work isperformed.

Effective Dates When you review the schedule for a particular occupation, your attention should be directed to the dates above the column of rates. Theseare the dates for which a given set of rates is effective. The rate listed is valid until the next effective rate change or until the new annualdetermination which takes effect on July 1 of each year. All contractors and subcontractors are required to pay the current prevailing ratesof wages and supplements. If you have any questions please contact the Bureau of Public Work or visit the New York State Department ofLabor website (www.labor.state.ny.us) for current wage rate information.

Apprentice Training Ratios The following are the allowable ratios of registered Apprentices to Journey-workers. For example, the ratio 1:1,1:3 indicates the allowable initial ratio is one Apprentice to one Journeyworker. The Journeyworker must be inplace on the project before an Apprentice is allowed. Then three additional Journeyworkers are needed before a second Apprentice isallowed. The last ratio repeats indefinitely. Therefore, three more Journeyworkers must be present before a third Apprentice can be hired,and so on. Please call Apprentice Training Central Office at (518) 457-6820 if you have any questions.

Title (Trade) Ratio

Boilermaker (Construction) 1:1,1:4

Boilermaker (Shop) 1:1,1:3

Carpenter (Bldg.,H&H, Pile Driver/Dockbuilder) 1:1,1:4

Carpenter (Residential) 1:1,1:3

Page 30

Prevailing Wage Rates for 07/01/2015 - 06/30/2016 Published by the New York State Department of LaborLast Published on Dec 01 2015 PRC Number 2015012756

D2631431484

04200 Per DQAB L05/07/09 Page 1 of 1

ESTIMATE OF QUANTITIES NOTE: This form was developed for repetitive use throughout all contract proposals and may identify items not applicable to this specific project.

D263143 1485

PAGE: 1 DATE: 03/23/2016 QUANTITY SHEET SUMMARY FOR PROPOSAL

CONTRACT ID: D263143 PROJECT(S): 022914

CONTRACTOR :________________________________________________________________ ============================================================================================ SEC ITEM NUM NUMBER DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY ============================================================================================ 0001 201.06 CLEARING AND GRUBBING LS 1.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 202.32010008 TEST PITS CY 10.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 202.99010010 PAVEMENT EXCAVATION SY 2465.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 203.02 UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION AND DISPOSAL CY 21273.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 203.03 EMBANKMENT IN PLACE CY 29124.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 203.07 SELECT GRANULAR FILL CY 3200.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 203.21 SELECT STRUCTURE FILL CY 1400.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 206.0201 TRENCH AND CULVERT EXCAVATION CY 1100.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 206.03 CONDUIT EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL INCLUDING SURFACE RES LF 4103.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 207.21 GEOTEXTILE SEPARATION SY 4430.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 207.26 PREFABRICATED COMPOSITE STRUCTURAL DRAIN SY 155.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 209.11000011 INLET FILTER SEDIMENT CONTROL FOR NEW CATCH BASINS EACH 8.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 209.12000011 INLET FILTER SEDIMENT CONTROL FOR EXISTING CATCH BASI EACH 17.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 209.13 SILT FENCE-TEMPORARY LF 2010.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 209.13000007 MAINTAIN, REPAIR AND REMOVE PREVIOUSLY INSTALLED TEMP LS 1.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 209.190201 ROLLED EROSION CONTROL PRODUCT, CLASS II TYPE B,INTER SY 3125.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 209.200101 TURF REINFORCEMENT MATS, CLASS III TYPE A, PERMANENT SY 3125.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 209.22 CONSTRUCTION ENTRANCE SY 80.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 304.11 SUBBASE COURSE, TYPE 1 CY 980.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 402.126102 12.5 F1 TOP COURSE HMA, 60 SERIES COMPACTION TON 1035.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 402.126112 PLANT PRODUCTION QUALITY ADJUSTMENT TO 402.126102 QU 52.000 ============================================================================================

D2631431486



CONTRACTOR :________________________________________________________________ ============================================================================================ SEC ITEM NUM NUMBER DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY ============================================================================================ 0001 402.126122 PAVEMENT DENSITY QUALITY ADJUSTMENT TO 402.126102 QU 1.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 402.126152 TEST SECTION ADJUSTMENT TO 402.126102 QU 200.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 402.256902 25 F9 BINDER COURSE HMA, 60 SERIES COMPACTION TON 535.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 402.256912 PLANT PRODUCTION QUALITY ADJUSTMENT TO 402.256902 QU 27.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 402.256922 PAVEMENT DENSITY QUALITY ADJUSTMENT TO 402.256902 QU 1.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 402.256952 TEST SECTION ADJUSTMENT TO 402.256902 QU 200.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 402.376902 37.5 F9 BASE COURSE HMA, 60 SERIES COMPACTION TON 710.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 402.376912 PLANT PRODUCTION QUALITY ADJUSTMENT TO 402.376902 QU 36.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 402.376922 PAVEMENT DENSITY QUALITY ADJUSTMENT TO 402.376902 QU 1.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 402.376952 TEST SECTION ADJUSTMENT TO 402.376902 QU 200.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 407.0102 DILUTED TACK COAT GAL 1035.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 420.50030110 TOP COURSE POROUS ASPHALT PAVEMENT WITH FIBER F3 TON 750.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 420.70090110 BINDER COURSE POROUS ASPHALT PAVEMENT F9 TON 1495.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 490.30 MISCELLANEOUS COLD MILLING OF BITUMINOUS CONCRETE SY 4020.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 520.09000010 SAW CUTTING ASPHALT CONCRETE LF 2865.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 552.12 TEMPORARY TIMBER SHEETING SF 22870.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 555.0104 FOOTING CONCRETE CLASS A (NO CONCRETE CLASS SUBSTITUT CY 15.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 555.72950010 ARCHITECTURAL TREATMENT VERTICAL STAINED CONCRETE SUR SF 1125.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 559.90010011 ANTI-GRAFFITI PROTECTION COATING SY 1125.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 560.12010010 SEAT WALL LF 190.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 560.12020010 TASTE NY ENTRANCE WALL SIGN EACH 1.000 ============================================================================================

D263143 1487



CONTRACTOR :________________________________________________________________ ============================================================================================ SEC ITEM NUM NUMBER DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY ============================================================================================ 0001 564.510001 STRUCTURAL STEEL LB 2765.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 594.03 TREATED TIMBER AND LUMBER CF 244.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 601.04020011 METHYL METHACRYLATE COLOR SURFACE TREATMENT FOR PAVEM SF 1300.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 603.6002 REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE CLASS III, 15 INCH DIAMETER LF 280.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 603.6003 REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE CLASS III, 18 INCH DIAMETER LF 365.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 603.7303 REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE END SECTIONS 18 INCHDIAMETER EACH 1.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 603.98060007 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) SEWER PIPE AND FITTINGS, 6" LF 250.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 603.98100804 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) SEWER PIPE & FITTINGS 8" DIA LF 15.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 604.07210010 RESETTING EXISTING DRAINAGE FRAMES ON EXISTING DRAINA EACH 2.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 604.07240010 REBUILDING TOP OF EXISTING DRAINAGE STRUCTURE EACH 2.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 604.13000011 ABANDONING DRAINAGE STRUCTURES EACH 1.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 604.501012 SPECIAL DRAINAGE STRUCTURE LF 45.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 604.501022 SPECIAL DRAINAGE STRUCTURE LF 10.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 604.501023 SPECIAL DRAINAGE STRUCTURE LF 25.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 605.1603 PERFORATED POLYVINYL CHLORIDE UNDERDRAIN PIPE, 8 INCH LF 270.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 606.2701 HPBO (MOD.) CORRUGATED BEAM GUIDE RAILING LF 180.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 606.2703 ANCHORAGE UNITS FOR HPBO (MOD.) CORRUGATED BEAM GUIDE EACH 1.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 606.31120010 SINGLE SLOPE FULL SECTION CONCRETE BARRIER CAST WITHS LF 295.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 606.71 REMOVING AND DISPOSING CORRUGATED BEAM GUIDE RAILING LF 235.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 606.7910 REMOVING AND DISPOSING ANCHORAGE UNITS FOR CORRUGATED EACH 1.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 607.08000010 WOOD BOARD FENCE LF 1045.000 ============================================================================================

D2631431488



CONTRACTOR :________________________________________________________________ ============================================================================================ SEC ITEM NUM NUMBER DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY ============================================================================================ 0001 607.21000011 REMOVE AND DISPOSE OF CHAIN LINK FENCE LF 1890.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 607.31020010 STEEL CHAIN-LINK FENCE WITH TOP TENSION WIRE, 6 FEET LF 1370.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 607.4061 OPTIONAL FENCE GATE (DOUBLE LEAF 16 FEET OPENING6 FEE EACH 1.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 607.4071 OPTIONAL FENCE GATE (DOUBLE LEAF 24 FEET OPENING6 FEE EACH 1.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 607.96000008 REMOVE AND DISPOSE OF EXISTING FENCE LF 710.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 607.99620010 NOISE BARRIER SYSTEM (HIGHWAYS) SF 19800.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 608.01030005 COLORED PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE SIDEWALK CY 230.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 608.020102 HOT MIX ASPHALT (HMA) SIDEWALKS, DRIVEWAYS AND BICYCL TON 120.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 608.020112 PLANT PRODUCTION QUALITY ADJUSTMENT TO 608.020102 QU 1.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 608.13000008 FURNISH AND INSTALL GRASS PAVERS SY 620.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 608.21 EMBEDDED DETECTABLE WARNING UNITS SY 30.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 609.0401 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE CURB TYPE VF150 LF 3270.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 609.0403 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE CURB TYPE M150 LF 60.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 609.06000008 CURB REMOVAL LF 1090.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 610.0701 MYCORRHIZAL FUNGI LB 2126.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 610.08 MOISTURE RETENTION ADDITIVE LB 390.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 610.1401 TOPSOIL - REUSE ON-SITE MATERIALS CY 1245.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 610.1402 TOPSOIL - ROADSIDE CY 1305.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 610.1601 TURF ESTABLISHMENT - ROADSIDE SY 7565.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 610.19 WATERING VEGETATION MGAL 1428.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 610.19010010 IRRIGATION SYSTEM EACH 1.000 ============================================================================================

D263143 1489



CONTRACTOR :________________________________________________________________ ============================================================================================ SEC ITEM NUM NUMBER DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY ============================================================================================ 0001 611.0181 PLANTING - MAJOR DECIDUOUS TREES - 3 1/2 INCH CALIPER EACH 56.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 611.0201 PLANTING - MINOR DECIDUOUS TREES - 2 INCH CALIPER BAL EACH 22.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 611.0381 PLANTING - CONIFEROUS TREES - 8 FOOT HEIGHT BALL & BU EACH 77.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 611.0442 PLANTING - DECIDUOUS SHRUBS - 2 FOOT HEIGHT/SPREADCO EACH 435.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 611.0451 PLANTING DECIDUOUS SHRUBS - 3 FOOT HEIGHT/SPREAD BALL EACH 297.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 611.0461 PLANTING DECIDUOUS SHRUBS - 4 FOOT HEIGHT/SPREAD BALL EACH 289.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 611.0551 PLANTING EVERGREEN SHRUBS - 2 1/2 FOOT HEIGHT/SPREAD EACH 27.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 611.0561 PLANTING EVERGREEN SHRUBS - 3 FOOT HEIGHT/SPREAD BALL EACH 50.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 611.0661 PLANTING - VINES, GROUNDCOVERS - NUMBER 2 CONTAINER - EACH 1814.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 611.0741 PLANTING - HERBACEOUS PLANTS - NUMBER 1 CONTAINER - C EACH 3996.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 611.19010024 POST PLANTING CARE WITH REPLACEMENT - MAJOR DECIDUOUS EACH 56.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 611.19020024 POST PLANTING CARE WITH REPLACEMENT - MINOR DECIDUOUS EACH 22.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 611.19030024 POST PLANTING CARE WITH REPLACEMENT - CONIFEROUS TRE EACH 77.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 611.19040024 POST PLANTING CARE WITH REPLACEMENT - DECIDUOUS SHRUB EACH 1021.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 611.19050024 POST PLANTING CARE WITH REPLACEMENT - EVERGREEN SHRU EACH 77.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 611.19060024 POST PLANTING CARE WITH REPLACEMENT - VINES, GROUNDCO EACH 1814.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 611.19070024 POST PLANTING CARE WITH REPLACEMENT - HERBACEOUS PLAN EACH 3996.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 613.05010004 KESTREL NEST BOX EACH 3.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 613.05010010 BAT HOUSE EACH 2.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 615.01010110 LITTER (TRASH) RECEPTACLE TYPE 1 EACH 10.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 615.08010005 BENCH, TYPE 01 EACH 10.000 ============================================================================================

D2631431490



CONTRACTOR :________________________________________________________________ ============================================================================================ SEC ITEM NUM NUMBER DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY ============================================================================================ 0001 615.52110101 PICNIC TABLE - WOOD, NON- ACCESSIBLE, FREESTANDING EACH 8.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 615.90000010 GRAPE TRELLIS LF 120.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 615.91000010 ALUMINUM FLAGPOLE EACH 3.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 615.99060104 LANDSCAPE BOULDERS, TYPE 1 EACH 27.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 619.01 BASIC WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL LS 1.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 619.110201 PORTABLE, VARIABLE MESSAGE SIGN (PVMS) (LED) (NONE) EACH 2.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 619.1701 TEMPORARY CONCRETE BARRIER, (UNPINNED) LF 2385.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 621.03 CLEANING CLOSED DRAINAGE SYSTEMS LF 3095.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 621.04 CLEANING DRAINAGE STRUCTURES EACH 36.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 621.25000110 TRIMMING EXISTING RECHARGE BASINS LS 1.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 622.01000010 WOOD ENCLOSURE EACH 2.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 622.02000010 REST AREA BUILDING SHELL AND FOUNDATION LS 1.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 623.12 CRUSHED STONE (IN-PLACE MEASURE) CY 25.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 623.12010001 CRUSHED STONE STABILIZATION COURSE FOR POROUS ASPHALT CY 495.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 623.12020001 CRUSHED STONE RESERVOIR COURSE FOR POROUS ASPHALT CY 985.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 625.01 SURVEY OPERATIONS LS 1.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 625.06 PERMANENT SURVEY MARKERS EACH 3.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 637.01 LABORATORY BUILDING EACH 1.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 637.03 CONCRETE CYLINDER CURING BOX EACH 1.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 637.13 ENGINEER'S FIELD OFFICE - TYPE 3 MNTH 14.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 637.26 RAIN GAUGE EACH 1.000 ============================================================================================

D263143 1491



CONTRACTOR :________________________________________________________________ ============================================================================================ SEC ITEM NUM NUMBER DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY ============================================================================================ 0001 637.34 OFFICE TECHNOLOGY AND SUPPLIES DC 3600.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 637.36 CONSTRUCTION TESTING SUPPLIES - CONSUMABLES DC 120.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 645.13080010 REINSTALL GUIDE SIGN PANEL ASSEMBLIES SF 21.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 645.17010008 BREAKAWAY WOODEN SIGN POST, 4"X4" SECTION WITH STEEL EACH 2.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 645.5202 GROUND-MOUNTED SIGN PANELS LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO30 SF SF 45.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 645.81 TYPE A SIGN POSTS EACH 22.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 645.94000010 NOISE BARRIER PANEL IDENTIFICATION PLATE EACH 10.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 655.05020010 FRAMES AND COVERS FOR SANITARY SEWER MANHOLES EACH 3.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 655.07030010 CAST FRAME F3, WITHOUT CURB BOX AND WITH RETICULINEGR EACH 8.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 655.1201 MANHOLE FRAME AND GRATE EACH 2.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 655.1202 MANHOLE FRAME AND COVER EACH 3.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 659.10020010 TELEPHONE / DATA SERVICE UTILITY COMPANY WORK DC 10000.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 661.03170011 INSULATED CONDUCTOR 500 MCM LF 3600.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 661.70010010 ELECTRICAL UTILITY COMPANY WORK DC 10000.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 661.70020010 ELECTRICAL CAR CHARGING STATION EACH 2.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 661.70030010 ELECTRICAL SERVICE EQUIPMENT LS 1.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 662.10010010 GAS UTILITY COMPANY WORK DC 35000.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 663.0104 DUCTILE IRON CEMENT LINED WATER PIPE, 4" LF 125.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 663.0106 DUCTILE IRON CEMENT LINED WATER PIPE, 6" LF 180.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 663.0108 DUCTILE IRON CEMENT LINED WATER PIPE, 8" LF 1940.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 663.0607 COPPER WATER SERVICE PIPE 2" LF 185.000 ============================================================================================

D2631431492



CONTRACTOR :________________________________________________________________ ============================================================================================ SEC ITEM NUM NUMBER DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY ============================================================================================ 0001 663.1006 RESILIENT WEDGE VALVE & VALVE BOX, 6" EACH 3.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 663.1204 DOUBLE DISK GATE VALVE & VALVE BOX, 4 " EACH 1.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 663.1208 DOUBLE DISK GATE VALVE & VALVE BOX, 8 " EACH 3.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 663.1301 HYDRANT EACH 3.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 663.14 HYDRANT FENDER EACH 6.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 663.2001 IRON WATER MAIN FITTINGS (3 " - 8 ") LB 800.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 663.2002 IRON WATER MAIN FITTINGS (10" - 16") LB 420.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 663.2607 CURB STOP & CURB BOX, 2" EACH 1.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 663.60010010 1.5 INCH RPZ AND STRUCTURE EACH 1.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 663.61010010 2 INCH WATER METER, RPZ AND STRUCTURE EACH 1.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 664.01060004 DUCTILE IRON SEWER PIPE & FITTINGS, 6" LF 185.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 664.40480006 PRECAST SANITARY SEWER MANHOLE (48 INCH DIA.) LF 30.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 670.01100039 LED ROADWAY LUMINAIRE EACH 4.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 670.1206 ALUMINUM SINGLE MEMBER BRACKET ARM, 6 FEET LONG EACH 4.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 670.2001 GALVANIZED STEEL CONDUIT, 3/4" LF 121.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 670.2004 GALVANIZED STEEL CONDUIT, 3" LF 661.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 670.2601 RIGID PLASTIC CONDUIT, 1" LF 138.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 670.2602 RIGID PLASTIC CONDUIT, 2" LF 8067.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 670.2603 RIGID PLASTIC CONDUIT, 3" LF 1277.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 670.2604 RIGID PLASTIC CONDUIT, 4" LF 1524.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 670.3006 PULLBOXES 5 CUBIC FEET TO 7.5 CUBIC FEET, INSIDE VOL EACH 10.000 ============================================================================================

D263143 1493



CONTRACTOR :________________________________________________________________ ============================================================================================ SEC ITEM NUM NUMBER DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY ============================================================================================ 0001 670.3030 PULLBOXES OVER 15 CUBIC FEET, INSIDE VOLUME (LIGHTING EACH 13.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 670.50610010 SIGN LUMINAIRE EACH 1.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 670.50620010 FLAG LUMINAIRE EACH 3.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 670.7002 SINGLE CONDUCTOR CABLE, NUMBER 2 GAGE LF 2375.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 670.7006 SINGLE CONDUCTOR CABLE, NUMBER 10 GAGE LF 2238.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 670.7007 SINGLE CONDUCTOR CABLE, NUMBER 12 GAGE LF 263.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 670.7010 SINGLE CONDUCTOR CABLE, NUMBER 1/0 GAGE LF 3700.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 670.75020011 GROUND WIRE NUMBER 2 AWG LF 1369.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 670.75050011 GROUND WIRE NUMBER 6 AWG LF 163.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 670.75070011 GROUND WIRE NUMBER 10 AWG LF 794.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 670.75080011 GROUND WIRE NUMBER 12 AWG LF 131.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 670.75100011 GROUND WIRE NUMBER 1/0 AWG LF 900.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 670.81 REMOVE AND DISPOSE OF LAMPPOST ASSEMBLY EACH 6.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 670.82 REMOVE LAMPPOST FOUNDATION EACH 6.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 670.95010010 SOLAR POWERED 25W LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (LED) DECORATI EACH 8.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 670.95020010 SOLAR POWERED 50W LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (LED) DECORATI EACH 23.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 680.83200010 LOCATE AND MARKOUT INFORM AND STATE LIGHTING FACILITI LS 1.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 685.11 WHITE EPOXY REFLECTORIZED PAVEMENT STRIPES - 20 MILS LF 8970.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 685.12 YELLOW EPOXY REFLECTORIZED PAVEMENT STRIPES - 20 MILS LF 50.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 685.14 WHITE EPOXY REFLECTORIZED PAVEMENT SYMBOLS - 20 MILS EACH 6.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 690.01010010 WELCOME CENTER BUILDING INTERIOR CONSTRUCTION AND FIN LS 1.000 ============================================================================================

D2631431494



CONTRACTOR :________________________________________________________________ ============================================================================================ SEC ITEM NUM NUMBER DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY ============================================================================================ 0001 690.01020010 WELCOME CENTER BUILDING MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL, PLUMB LS 1.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 691.03000020 TRAINING REQUIREMENTS DC 504000.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 697.03 FIELD CHANGE PAYMENT DC 740000.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 698.04 ASPHALT PRICE ADJUSTMENT DC 3000.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 698.05 FUEL PRICE ADJUSTMENT DC 1019.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 698.06 STEEL/IRON PRICE ADJUSTMENT DC 100.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 699.040001 MOBILIZATION LS 1.000 ============================================================================================

D263143 1495